HP Color LaserJet 4700, CP4005 Series Service Manual. Www.s Manuals.com. Manual
User Manual: Laser Printer HP Color LaserJet 4700 - Service manuals and Schematics, Disassembly / Assembly. Free.
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 674
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
HP Color LaserJet 4700/CP4005 Series Service Manual HP Color LaserJet 4700/CP4005 Series printers Service Manual Copyright FCC Class A Statement Trademark Credits © 2006 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. The end user of this product should be aware that any changes or modifications made to this equipment without the approval of Hewlett-Packard could result in the product not meeting the Class A limits, in which case the FCC could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Adobe®, Adobe Photoshop® and PostScript® are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated. Reproduction, adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under the copyright laws. The information contained herein is subject to change without notice. The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein. CB503-90929 Edition 1, 10/2006 Bluetooth is a trademark owned by its proprietor and used by Hewlett-Packard Company under license. CorelDRAW™ is a trademark or registered trademark of Corel Corporation or Corel Corporation Limited. Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus Trovalds. Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows XP® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. PANTONE®* *Pantone, Inc's checkstandard trademark for color. UNIX® is a registered trademark of the Open Group. ENERGY STAR® and the ENERGY STAR logo® are U.S. registered marks of the United States Environmental Protection Agency. Safety Information WARNING! Potential Shock Hazard Always follow basic safety precautions when using this product to reduce the risk of injury from fire or electric shock. Table of contents 1 Product information Printer configurations ............................................................................................................................. 2 HP Color LaserJet 4700 (Q7491A) ....................................................................................... 2 HP Color LaserJet 4700n (Q7492A) ..................................................................................... 3 HP Color LaserJet 4700dn (Q7493A) ................................................................................... 3 HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn (Q7494A) .................................................................................. 3 HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ (Q7495A) ................................................................................. 4 HP Color LaserJet CP4005n (CB503A) ............................................................................... 4 HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn (CB504A) ............................................................................. 5 Printer features ...................................................................................................................................... 6 Printer walkaround ............................................................................................................................... 11 HP Color LaserJet 4700 models ......................................................................................... 11 HP Color LaserJet CP4005 models .................................................................................... 12 Identification, site requirements, and specifications ............................................................................ 15 Model and serial numbers .................................................................................................. 15 Power and regulatory label ................................................................................................ 15 Site requirements ................................................................................................................ 16 Space requirements ........................................................................................... 17 Physical specifications ....................................................................................... 18 Electrical specifications ....................................................................................................... 18 Environmental specifications .............................................................................................. 19 Acoustic emissions ............................................................................................................. 19 Supply storage requirements ............................................................................................. 20 Skew specifications ............................................................................................................. 20 Media specifications ............................................................................................................................ 21 Printing and paper storage environment ............................................................................ 21 Envelopes ........................................................................................................................... 22 Envelopes that have double side seams ........................................................... 23 Envelopes that have adhesive strips or flaps .................................................... 23 Envelope margins .............................................................................................. 23 Envelope storage ............................................................................................... 23 Labels .................................................................................................................................. 24 Label construction .............................................................................................. 24 Transparencies ................................................................................................................... 24 Supported types and sizes of print media .......................................................................... 25 Media to avoid ..................................................................................................................... 29 Media that can damage the printer ..................................................................................... 29 Printing on special media .................................................................................................................... 31 Transparencies ................................................................................................................... 31 Glossy paper .......................................................................................................................31 ENWW iii Colored paper ..................................................................................................................... 32 Envelopes ........................................................................................................................... 32 Labels .................................................................................................................................. 32 Heavy paper ........................................................................................................................ 33 HP LaserJet Tough paper ................................................................................................... 33 Preprinted forms and letterhead ......................................................................................... 33 Recycled paper ................................................................................................................... 34 Weight equivalence table .................................................................................................... 34 Environmental product stewardship program ...................................................................................... 36 Protecting the environment ................................................................................................. 36 Ozone production ................................................................................................................ 36 Power consumption ............................................................................................................ 36 Toner consumption ............................................................................................................. 36 Paper use ............................................................................................................................ 36 Plastics ................................................................................................................................ 36 HP LaserJet print supplies .................................................................................................. 36 Return and recycling instructions ........................................................................................ 37 United States and Puerto Rico ........................................................................... 37 Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges) ........................................... 37 Single returns .................................................................................... 37 Shipping ............................................................................................. 37 Non-US returns .................................................................................................. 37 Paper ................................................................................................................................... 37 Material restrictions ............................................................................................................. 38 Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union ...... 38 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) ................................................................................... 39 For more information ........................................................................................................... 39 Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement .................................................................................... 40 Limited warranty for print cartridges and image drums ....................................................................... 42 Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement ....................... 43 Country/region-specific safety statements .......................................................................................... 44 Laser safety ........................................................................................................................ 44 Canadian DOC regulations ................................................................................................. 44 VCCI statement (Japan) ..................................................................................................... 44 Power cord statement (Japan) ............................................................................................ 44 EMI statement (Korea) ........................................................................................................ 44 EMI statement (Taiwan) ...................................................................................................... 45 Finnish laser statement ....................................................................................................... 46 Australia .............................................................................................................................. 46 2 Service approach Service approach ................................................................................................................................. 50 Parts and supplies ............................................................................................................................... 51 Ordering parts, supplies, and accessories over the Internet .............................................. 51 Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers with network connections) ........................................................................................................................ 51 Exchange program .............................................................................................................. 51 Supplies .............................................................................................................................. 51 World Wide Web ................................................................................................................. 51 HP Service Parts Information ............................................................................................. 52 iv ENWW HP available services .......................................................................................................................... 53 Ordering related documentation and software .................................................................................... 55 3 Installation and configuration What ships in the box .......................................................................................................................... 58 Unpacking the printer .......................................................................................................................... 59 Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays ........................................... 64 Connecting power ................................................................................................................................ 66 Installing a new control panel label ..................................................................................................... 67 Testing the printer operation ................................................................................................................ 68 Sleep delay ..........................................................................................................................................69 Setting sleep delay .............................................................................................................. 69 Disabling/enabling sleep mode ........................................................................................... 69 Connecting to a computer ................................................................................................................... 70 Parallel configuration .......................................................................................................... 70 USB configuration ............................................................................................................... 70 Auxiliary connection configuration ...................................................................................... 71 HP Jetdirect print servers ................................................................................................... 72 Available software solutions ............................................................................... 73 Wireless printing ................................................................................................................. 73 IEEE 802.11 standard ........................................................................................ 73 Bluetooth ............................................................................................................ 73 Printer software .................................................................................................................................... 74 Software ..............................................................................................................................74 Software features ............................................................................................... 74 Driver Autoconfiguration ..................................................................................... 74 Update Now ........................................................................................................ 74 HP Driver Preconfiguration ................................................................................ 75 Installing the printing system software ................................................................................ 75 Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections .................. 75 Installing Windows printing system software for networks ................................ 76 Setting up a Windows computer to use the network printer with Windowssharing ................................................................................................................ 77 Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected ..... 77 Uninstalling the software ..................................................................................................... 78 Removing software from Windows operating systems ...................................... 78 Software for networks ......................................................................................................... 78 HP Web Jetadmin .............................................................................................. 78 UNIX ...................................................................................................................79 Utilities ................................................................................................................................. 79 Embedded Web server ...................................................................................... 79 Features ............................................................................................ 79 Other components and utilities .......................................................................... 80 Printer drivers ...................................................................................................................................... 81 Supported printer drivers .................................................................................................... 81 Additional drivers ................................................................................................................ 81 Select the correct printer driver ........................................................................................... 82 Printer-driver Help (Windows) ............................................................................................. 82 Gaining access to the printer drivers .................................................................................. 82 Printer drivers for Macintosh computers .............................................................................................. 84 ENWW v Supported printer drivers .................................................................................................... 84 Gaining access to the printer drivers .................................................................................. 84 Software for Macintosh computers ...................................................................................................... 86 Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks ............................................... 86 Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB) ...................... 87 To remove software from Macintosh operating systems .................................................... 88 Network configuration .......................................................................................................................... 89 Configuring TCP/IP parameters .......................................................................................... 89 Manually configuring TCP/IP parameters from the printer control panel ........... 89 Setting an IP address ......................................................................................... 89 Setting the subnet mask ..................................................................................... 90 Setting the default gateway ................................................................................ 91 Disabling network protocols (optional) (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) .................................................................................................................... 91 Disabling IPX/SPX ............................................................................................. 92 Disabling DLC/LLC ............................................................................................. 92 Disabling AppleTalk ........................................................................................... 93 Setting network security on the printer ................................................................................................ 94 Locking the control panel .................................................................................................... 94 Levels of security ............................................................................................... 94 Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security ........................ 94 4 Maintenance Cleaning the printer and accessories .................................................................................................. 98 Cleaning spilled toner ......................................................................................................... 98 Vacuum specifications ....................................................................................... 98 Performing preventive maintenance .................................................................................................... 99 Managing the print cartridge .............................................................................................................. 100 HP print cartridges ............................................................................................................ 100 Non-HP print cartridges .................................................................................................... 100 Print cartridge authentication ............................................................................................ 100 Print cartridge storage ...................................................................................................... 100 Print cartridge life expectancy ........................................................................................... 100 Checking the supply level ................................................................................................. 101 Using the control panel .................................................................................... 101 Using the embedded Web server .................................................................... 101 Using HP Web Jetadmin .................................................................................. 101 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies ............................................................................... 102 ETB life .............................................................................................................................................. 103 Changing print cartridges .................................................................................................................. 104 Replacing a print cartridge ................................................................................................ 104 To replace the print cartridge ............................................................................................ 104 Replacing supplies ............................................................................................................................ 107 Locating supplies .............................................................................................................. 107 Supply replacement guidelines ......................................................................................... 107 Making room around the printer for replacing supplies .................................................... 108 Replacing the stapler cartridge (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series) ................................... 108 Replacing the ETB ............................................................................................................ 111 Replacing the fuser ........................................................................................................... 111 Printer memory and fonts .................................................................................................................. 113 vi ENWW Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts ........................................................................................ 114 Installing a hard drive (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series) .................................................. 114 Installing DDR memory DIMMs ........................................................................................ 117 Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) ............................. 121 Enabling memory .............................................................................................................. 125 To enable memory for Windows 98 and Me .................................................... 125 To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP ................................................ 125 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) .......................... 126 To install an HP Jetdirect print server card ....................................................................... 126 Setting the real-time clock ................................................................................................................. 130 Setting the date and time .................................................................................................. 130 To set the date format ...................................................................................... 130 To set the date ................................................................................................. 130 To set the time format ...................................................................................... 131 To set the time ................................................................................................. 131 Setting the wake time ....................................................................................................... 132 To set the wake time ........................................................................................ 132 Setting the sleep delay ..................................................................................................... 133 To set the sleep delay ...................................................................................... 133 5 Theory of operation Basic operation ..................................................................................................................................136 Operation sequence ......................................................................................................... 136 Power on sequence .......................................................................................................... 137 Internal components .......................................................................................................................... 139 Formatter system ............................................................................................................................... 141 Sleep mode .......................................................................................................................141 Image Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) .......................................................... 142 Input/Output ...................................................................................................................... 142 Parallel interface (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) ................................. 142 USB 2.0 connector ........................................................................................... 142 ACC accessory port (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) ............................ 142 Flash (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) ................................................... 143 Hard drive accessory (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) .......................... 143 CPU ..................................................................................................................143 Printer memory ................................................................................................................. 143 Read-only memory ........................................................................................... 143 Random-access memory ................................................................................. 143 DIMM slots ........................................................................................................................ 143 Flash memory .................................................................................................. 143 Nonvolatile memory ......................................................................................... 143 PJL overview ..................................................................................................................... 144 PML ................................................................................................................................... 144 Control panel ..................................................................................................................... 144 Engine control system ....................................................................................................................... 145 DC controller PCB ............................................................................................................. 145 Block operation ................................................................................................ 147 Motors, fans, and environment sensor ............................................................................. 147 Failure detection ............................................................................................................... 149 Drum motor failure detection ............................................................................ 149 ENWW vii Fuser motor failure detection ........................................................................... 150 ETB motor failure detection ............................................................................. 150 Upper exhaust fan failure detection ................................................................. 150 Cartridge fan failure detection .......................................................................... 150 Delivery fan failure detection ............................................................................ 150 Power supply fan failure detection ................................................................... 150 Duplexer fan failure detection .......................................................................... 151 Low-voltage power supply ................................................................................................ 151 Fuser control circuit .......................................................................................... 151 Low-voltage power supply circuit ..................................................................... 153 Protective functions ......................................................................... 154 Safety .............................................................................................. 155 Sleep mode ..................................................................................... 155 Power supply recognition ................................................................ 155 Heater temperature control ............................................................................................... 155 Initial rotation temperature control ................................................................... 156 Start-up temperature control ............................................................................ 156 Print temperature control ................................................................................. 157 Between-sheets temperature control ............................................................... 157 Temperature protective function ....................................................................................... 157 Protective function by the CPU ........................................................................ 157 Protective function by the fuser heater safety circuit ....................................... 157 Protective function by the thermoswitch .......................................................... 158 Temperature failure detection ........................................................................................... 158 Start-up failure (warmup failure) ...................................................................... 158 Abnormal low temperature of main thermistor (no conduction) ....................... 158 Abnormal high temperature of main thermistor ............................................... 158 Abnormal low temperature of sub thermistor (no conduction) ......................... 159 Abnormal high temperature of sub thermistor ................................................. 159 Drive circuit abnormality ................................................................................... 159 High-voltage power supply ............................................................................................... 159 Generation of biases ........................................................................................ 160 Video interface control ...................................................................................................... 162 Laser/scanner system ....................................................................................................................... 163 Laser control ..................................................................................................................... 164 Scanner control ................................................................................................................. 165 Image formation system .................................................................................................................... 167 Image formation process .................................................................................................. 169 Electrostatic latent image formation block ........................................................................ 171 Step 1: Pre-exposure ....................................................................................... 171 Step 2: Primary charging ................................................................................. 172 Step 3: Laser beam exposure .......................................................................... 172 Development block ........................................................................................................... 172 Step 4: Development ........................................................................................ 172 Transfer block ................................................................................................................... 173 Step 5: Attraction .............................................................................................. 173 Step 6: Transfer ............................................................................................... 173 Step 7: Separation ........................................................................................... 174 Fusing block ......................................................................................................................174 Step 8: Fusing .................................................................................................. 174 viii ENWW Cleaning block .................................................................................................................. 175 Step 9: Drum cleaning ...................................................................................... 175 Print cartridges .................................................................................................................. 175 Memory tag ...................................................................................................... 177 Cartridge presence detection ............................................................................................ 177 Memory tag detection ....................................................................................... 177 Photosensitive drum detection ......................................................................... 177 Developing cylinder disengaging control ......................................................... 178 ETB (electrostatic transfer/transport belt) ......................................................................... 178 Transfer roller (Y, C, M) engagement/disengagement detection ..................................... 180 Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control ......................................................... 180 Calibration and cleaning ................................................................................................... 181 ETB cleaning .................................................................................................... 182 Color misregistration corrective control ........................................................... 183 Color misregistration detection ......................................................................................... 184 Image stabilization control ................................................................................................ 185 Environmental change control ......................................................................... 186 Conditions leading up to DHALF ...................................................................... 187 Image halftone calibration control (DHALF) ..................................................... 187 Image density detection ................................................................................... 187 Pickup/feed system ........................................................................................................................... 189 Pickup/feed unit ................................................................................................................ 194 Paper tray detection and paper tray media size detection .............................. 194 Paper tray pickup operation ............................................................................. 195 Media lift-up operation ...................................................................................... 196 Initial lift-up ...................................................................................... 196 Lift-up during printing ....................................................................... 196 Multiple-feed prevention ................................................................................... 197 Skew correction ................................................................................................ 199 Media detection ................................................................................................ 200 Feed speed control .......................................................................................... 201 Fusing and delivery block ................................................................................................. 202 Loop control ..................................................................................................... 202 Fusing pressure release mechanism ............................................................... 203 Jam detection ................................................................................................... 204 Pickup delay jam ............................................................................. 205 Pickup stationary jam ...................................................................... 205 Delivery delay jam ........................................................................... 205 Door open jam ................................................................................. 205 Residual paper jam ......................................................................... 205 Reversing unit jam 1 ........................................................................ 205 Reversing unit jam 2 ........................................................................ 206 Duplexing pickup unit jam 1 ............................................................ 206 Automatic delivery function ............................................................. 206 Duplex feed unit ................................................................................................................ 206 Reversing/duplexing feed operation ................................................................ 207 Jam detection ................................................................................................... 209 Reversing unit jam 1 ........................................................................ 210 Reversing unit jam 2 ........................................................................ 210 Duplexing pickup unit jam 1 (Duplexing unit stationary jam) .......... 210 ENWW ix 500-sheet paper feeder ..................................................................................................................... 211 Pickup and feed operations .............................................................................................. 212 Stapler/stacker (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) ..................................................................... 214 Staple mode ......................................................................................................................214 Stacker mode ....................................................................................................................214 Offset mode ...................................................................................................................... 214 Messages .......................................................................................................................... 215 6 Removal and replacement Removal and replacement strategy ................................................................................................... 218 Repair notices ................................................................................................................... 218 Caution regarding electrostatic discharge (ESD) ............................................................. 218 Required tools ................................................................................................................... 218 Types of screws ................................................................................................................ 219 Parts-removal tree ............................................................................................................ 220 User-replaceable parts ...................................................................................................................... 221 Print cartridges and ETB ................................................................................................... 222 Fuser .................................................................................................................................222 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad ........................................................................... 222 Tray 2-x separation roller .................................................................................................. 225 Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers ....................................................................................... 226 Formatter .......................................................................................................................... 227 Compact flash ................................................................................................................... 228 HP Jetdirect print server card (4700 models) ................................................................... 228 DDR memory DIMMs ........................................................................................................ 228 Hard drive (4700 models) ................................................................................................. 228 Installing a new control panel label ................................................................................... 228 Covers and external components ...................................................................................................... 230 Paper tray (Tray 2) ............................................................................................................ 231 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) ................................................................................................. 231 Front cover ........................................................................................................................235 Duplex cover ..................................................................................................................... 239 Face down tray assembly ................................................................................................. 239 Top cover .......................................................................................................................... 240 Right cover ........................................................................................................................245 Left cover .......................................................................................................................... 247 Rear cover ........................................................................................................................ 249 Control panel ..................................................................................................................... 250 Main assemblies ................................................................................................................................253 Disengaging drive assembly ............................................................................................. 254 Remove main drive assembly ........................................................................................... 256 Reinstall main drive assembly .......................................................................................... 263 Pickup motor assembly ..................................................................................................... 273 Lifter drive assembly ......................................................................................................... 275 Delivery assembly ............................................................................................................. 278 Paper feed assembly ........................................................................................................ 283 Fuser drive assembly ........................................................................................................ 286 Laser/scanner assembly ................................................................................................... 287 Motors and fans .................................................................................................................................297 Disengaging drive motor ................................................................................................... 298 x ENWW Drum drive motors (Y/C/M/K) ........................................................................................... 298 Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) ..................................................................................... 299 Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) .............................................................................................. 300 Cartridge fan/shroud (Fan 2) ............................................................................................ 302 Upper exhaust fan (Fan 1) ................................................................................................ 305 Sensors and switches ........................................................................................................................ 308 Environment sensor .......................................................................................................... 308 Power switch assembly .................................................................................................... 309 PCBs .................................................................................................................................................. 312 DC controller PCB ............................................................................................................. 312 Low-voltage power supply PCB ........................................................................................ 319 Memory controller PCB ..................................................................................................... 321 E label memory contacts and cable .................................................................................. 322 High-voltage power supply PCB ....................................................................................... 324 Toner level detection PCB ................................................................................................ 326 High-voltage contacts ....................................................................................................... 326 500-sheet paper feeder ..................................................................................................................... 328 500-sheet paper feeder right cover .................................................................................. 329 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover ................................................................................... 329 500-sheet paper feeder left cover ..................................................................................... 330 500-sheet paper feeder front cover .................................................................................. 331 500-sheet paper pickup drive assembly ........................................................................... 333 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly ................................................................... 337 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers .............................................................................. 339 Stapler/stacker (4700 models) .......................................................................................................... 340 Remove the stapler/stacker from the printer .................................................................... 340 Staple cartridge left cover ................................................................................................. 341 Output tray ........................................................................................................................ 341 Left cover .......................................................................................................................... 342 Top cover .......................................................................................................................... 342 Right cover ........................................................................................................................344 Staple cartridge ................................................................................................................. 346 Stapler/stacker PCB .......................................................................................................... 347 Stapler/stacker unit assembly 24v 2.5 amp ...................................................................... 348 Duplexer ............................................................................................................................................ 349 Top duplexing assembly ................................................................................................... 349 Duplex tray ........................................................................................................................349 7 Troubleshooting Introduction ........................................................................................................................................352 Troubleshooting process ................................................................................................................... 354 Pre-troubleshooting checklist ............................................................................................ 354 Troubleshooting checklist ................................................................................................. 355 Troubleshooting flowchart ................................................................................................. 356 Power-on checks .............................................................................................................. 357 Power-on troubleshooting overview ................................................................. 357 Control panel messages .................................................................................................................... 359 Warning messages ........................................................................................................... 359 Error messages ................................................................................................................. 359 Critical error messages ..................................................................................................... 359 ENWW xi Message listing ................................................................................................................. 359 Formatter lights .................................................................................................................................. 395 Embedded HP Jetdirect LEDs .......................................................................................... 395 Heartbeat LED .................................................................................................................. 396 Accessory lights (4700 models) ........................................................................................................ 397 Interpreting stapler/stacker indicator light codes .............................................................. 397 Replacement parts configuration ....................................................................................................... 400 Formatter and DC controller ............................................................................................. 400 Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer) ................................................ 400 DC controller (new or previously installed in another printer) .......................................... 401 Formatter and firmware compact flash ............................................................................. 401 Paper path troubleshooting ............................................................................................................... 402 Jams .................................................................................................................................. 402 Jam locations .................................................................................................................... 402 Jam locations by error message ....................................................................................... 405 Jam recovery .................................................................................................................... 406 To disable paper jam recovery ......................................................................... 407 Avoiding jams .................................................................................................................... 407 Solving repeated jams ...................................................................................................... 408 Persistent jams ................................................................................................................. 408 Basic troubleshooting for jams ......................................................................... 408 Data collection .................................................................................................. 409 General paper path troubleshooting ................................................................ 409 Paper path checklist ......................................................................................... 410 Jams in Tray 1 .................................................................................................. 410 Jams in Tray 2 .................................................................................................. 411 Jams in the paper path ..................................................................................... 412 Jams in the top cover ....................................................................................... 412 Jams in the duplex path ................................................................................... 413 Common causes of paper jams ........................................................................................ 414 Paper jams ....................................................................................................... 414 Clearing jams .................................................................................................................... 415 Jam in Tray 1 ................................................................................................... 415 Jam in Tray 2 or optional trays ......................................................................... 416 Jams in top cover area ..................................................................................... 417 Clearing a jam in the top cover area ............................................... 418 Clearing other jams .......................................................................................... 420 Jams in the stapler/stacker (4700 models) ...................................................... 423 Staple jams ....................................................................................................... 429 Paper transport troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 432 Multiple pages are fed ...................................................................................................... 432 Media is wrinkled or folded ............................................................................................... 432 Paper is skewed ................................................................................................................ 433 Image formation troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 434 Print quality troubleshooting tools ..................................................................................... 434 Print quality problems associated with media .................................................................. 434 Overhead transparency defects ........................................................................................ 435 Print quality problems that are associated with the environment ..................................... 436 Print quality problems that are associated with jams ....................................................... 436 Print quality troubleshooting pages .................................................................................. 436 xii ENWW Understanding color variations ......................................................................................... 436 Common causes of color variation ................................................................... 437 Color selection process .................................................................................................... 437 Matching colors ................................................................................................................. 437 PANTONE* color matching .............................................................................. 437 Swatch book color matching ............................................................................ 437 Using color ........................................................................................................................ 438 HP ImageREt 3600 .......................................................................................... 438 Paper selection ................................................................................................ 438 sRGB ................................................................................................................438 Adobe® RGB ................................................................................................... 439 CMYK+ ............................................................................................................. 439 Color options .....................................................................................................................439 Print in grayscale .............................................................................................. 439 Automatic or manual color adjustment ............................................................ 440 Manual color options ........................................................................................ 440 Halftone options ............................................................................................... 440 Neutral Grays ................................................................................................... 440 Edge Control .................................................................................................... 440 RGB Color ........................................................................................................ 441 Adjusting color balance ..................................................................................................... 441 To adjust color density ..................................................................................... 441 Web-downloadable color tables ....................................................................... 442 Image defects .................................................................................................................................... 443 Light image ....................................................................................................................... 444 Light color ......................................................................................................................... 445 Dark image ........................................................................................................................ 445 Dark color .......................................................................................................................... 446 Completely blank image ................................................................................................... 446 All black or solid color ....................................................................................................... 447 Dots in vertical lines .......................................................................................................... 447 Dirt on the front or back of the paper ................................................................................ 448 Vertical lines ...................................................................................................................... 448 White vertical lines ............................................................................................................ 449 Horizontal lines ................................................................................................................. 449 White horizontal lines ........................................................................................................ 450 Missing color ..................................................................................................................... 450 Blank spots ....................................................................................................................... 451 Poor fusing ........................................................................................................................451 Distortion or blurring .......................................................................................................... 452 Smearing ........................................................................................................................... 453 Misplaced image ............................................................................................................... 454 Repetitive defects troubleshooting ................................................................................... 454 Repetitive defect ruler ...................................................................................... 455 Interface troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 457 Communications checks ................................................................................................... 457 AUTOEXEC.BAT standard configurations ....................................................................... 457 Parallel MS-DOS commands ........................................................................... 457 Printer Job Language (PJL) commands ........................................................................... 457 @PJL [Enter] .................................................................................................... 457 ENWW xiii UEL .................................................................................................................. 458 @PJL COMMENT ............................................................................................ 458 @PJL INFO CONFIG ....................................................................................... 458 @PJL INFO ID ................................................................................................. 458 @PJL INFO USTATUS .................................................................................... 458 @PJL INFO PAGECOUNT .............................................................................. 458 @PJL JOB ....................................................................................................... 458 @PJL EOJ ....................................................................................................... 459 @PJL ECHO .................................................................................................... 459 @PJL USTATUS JOB=ON/OFF ...................................................................... 459 @PJL USTATUSOFF ...................................................................................... 459 Changing printer control panel configuration settings ....................................................................... 460 Job storage limit (4700 models) ........................................................................................ 460 Setting the job storage limit .............................................................................. 460 Job held timeout (4700 models) ....................................................................................... 460 Setting the job held timeout ............................................................................. 460 Show IP address ............................................................................................................... 461 Showing the IP address ................................................................................... 461 Color/black mix ................................................................................................................. 461 Setting the color/black mix ............................................................................... 461 Tray behavior options ....................................................................................................... 462 Setting the printer to use the requested tray .................................................... 462 Setting manually feed prompt .......................................................................... 463 Setting the printer default for PS defer media .................................................. 463 Setting the printer to use size/type prompt ...................................................... 464 Setting the printer to use another tray ............................................................. 464 Setting the printer to duplex blank pages ........................................................ 465 Setting the printer to rotate images .................................................................. 465 Sleep delay ....................................................................................................................... 465 Setting sleep delay ........................................................................................... 466 Disabling/enabling sleep mode ........................................................................ 466 Wake time ......................................................................................................................... 466 Setting the wake time ....................................................................................... 467 Display brightness ............................................................................................................. 467 Setting the display brightness .......................................................................... 467 Personality ........................................................................................................................ 468 Setting the personality ...................................................................................... 468 Clearable warnings ........................................................................................................... 468 Setting the clearable warnings ......................................................................... 469 Auto continue .................................................................................................................... 469 Setting auto continue ....................................................................................... 469 Replace supplies ............................................................................................................... 470 Setting replace supplies response ................................................................... 470 Order at .............................................................................................................................470 Setting order at response ................................................................................. 470 Color supply out ................................................................................................................ 471 Setting color supply out response .................................................................... 471 Jam recovery .................................................................................................................... 471 Setting jam recovery response ........................................................................ 472 RAM disk ........................................................................................................................... 472 xiv ENWW Changing RAM disk behavior .......................................................................... 472 Language .......................................................................................................................... 472 Selecting the language ..................................................................................... 473 Selecting the language if the display is in a language you do not understand ....................................................................................................... 473 Using the printer control panel in shared environments ................................................... 473 Control panel troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 474 Printing a menu map ......................................................................................................... 474 Information menu .............................................................................................................. 474 Paper handling menu ........................................................................................................ 476 Configure device menu ..................................................................................................... 478 Printing submenu ............................................................................................. 478 PCL submenu .................................................................................................. 482 Print quality submenu ....................................................................................... 483 System setup submenu .................................................................................... 488 Stapler/stacker submenu (4700 models) ......................................................... 493 I/O submenu ..................................................................................................... 494 Embedded Jetdirect submenu ......................................................................... 495 Resets submenu .............................................................................................. 499 Diagnostics menu ............................................................................................................. 500 Service menu .................................................................................................................... 503 Tools for troubleshooting ................................................................................................................... 505 Using the embedded Web server ..................................................................................... 505 Accessing the embedded Web server ............................................................. 505 Information tab ................................................................................................. 506 Settings tab ...................................................................................................... 506 Setting the real-time clock ................................................................................ 507 Networking tab ................................................................................................. 507 Other links ........................................................................................................ 507 Configuration pages .......................................................................................................... 507 Configuration page ........................................................................................... 507 HP embedded Jetdirect page .......................................................................... 509 Paper handling configuration page (4700 models) .......................................... 510 Finding important information on the configuration pages ............................... 511 Print the supplies status page ........................................................................................... 512 Print the usage page ......................................................................................................... 513 Print the demo page ......................................................................................................... 514 Print the file directory page ............................................................................................... 515 Print the PCL font list page ............................................................................................... 515 Print the PS font list page ................................................................................................. 516 Print the RGB samples page ............................................................................................ 517 Print the CMYK samples page .......................................................................................... 518 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................ 520 LED diagnostics ................................................................................................................ 520 Engine diagnostics ............................................................................................................ 521 Diagnostics mode ............................................................................................. 521 Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode ................. 521 Diagnostic tests ................................................................................................ 521 Individual diagnostic tests ................................................................................................. 522 Print the event log page ................................................................................... 522 ENWW xv View the event log on the control panel display ............................................... 523 Print the PQ troubleshooting pages ................................................................. 524 Diagnostics page .............................................................................................. 525 Disable cartridge check (special mode test) .................................................... 526 Paper path sensors (special mode test) .......................................................... 527 Paper path test ................................................................................................. 527 Finishing paper path test .................................................................................. 528 Manual sensor test (special mode test) ........................................................... 528 Manual sensor test 2 (special mode test) ........................................................ 531 Component test (special mode test) ................................................................ 532 Print/Stop test ................................................................................................... 535 Colorband test .................................................................................................. 535 Information menu ............................................................................................. 535 Configure device menu/printing menu ............................................................. 536 Configure device menu/print quality menu ...................................................... 536 Configure device menu/resets menu ............................................................... 536 Test pages .........................................................................................................................................537 Engine test page ............................................................................................................... 537 Formatter test page ........................................................................................................... 537 Engine resets ..................................................................................................................................... 538 Cold reset .......................................................................................................................... 538 To perform a cold reset .................................................................................... 538 NVRAM initialization ......................................................................................................... 538 To initialize NVRAM ......................................................................................... 538 Hard disk initialization (4700 models) ............................................................................... 539 To initialize the hard disk ................................................................................. 539 Calibration bypass ............................................................................................................ 539 To bypass calibration ....................................................................................... 539 Quick Calibrate Now ......................................................................................................... 539 Full Calibrate Now ............................................................................................................. 539 Service menu ..................................................................................................................................... 541 Using the Service menu .................................................................................................... 541 Clear event log ................................................................................................. 541 Mono cycle count/Color cycle count ................................................................ 541 Serial number ................................................................................................... 541 Service ID ......................................................................................................... 541 Restoring the Service ID .................................................................................. 541 Converting the Service ID to an actual date .................................................... 542 Cold reset paper ............................................................................................... 542 Diagrams ........................................................................................................................................... 543 Main parts ......................................................................................................................... 543 Switches ............................................................................................................................ 545 Sensors .............................................................................................................................546 Solenoids .......................................................................................................................... 547 Motors and fans ................................................................................................................ 548 PCBs .................................................................................................................................549 DC controller PCB ............................................................................................................. 550 Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 551 General timing chart ......................................................................................................... 557 General circuit diagrams ................................................................................................... 558 xvi ENWW 8 Parts and diagrams Introduction ........................................................................................................................................562 Ordering parts and supplies .............................................................................................................. 563 Parts that wear .................................................................................................................. 563 Parts .................................................................................................................................. 563 Customer support ............................................................................................................. 563 Supplies and accessories ................................................................................................. 563 Common fasteners ............................................................................................................ 566 User-replaceable parts ...................................................................................................................... 567 Assembly locations ............................................................................................................................570 Major components ............................................................................................................ 570 External covers and panels ............................................................................................................... 572 Internal components .......................................................................................................................... 576 Accessories ....................................................................................................................................... 610 Alphabetical parts list ......................................................................................................................... 628 Numerical parts list ............................................................................................................................ 634 Index ..................................................................................................................................................................641 ENWW xvii xviii ENWW 1 Product information This chapter contains information about the following topics: ● Printer configurations ● Printer features ● Printer walkaround ● Identification, site requirements, and specifications ● Media specifications ● Printing on special media ● Environmental product stewardship program ● Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement ● Limited warranty for print cartridges and image drums ● Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement ● Country/region-specific safety statements ● ENWW 1 Printer configurations This manual describes the HP Color LaserJet 4700s and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 series printers. These printers are available in the following configurations. HP Color LaserJet 4700 (Q7491A) The HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 31 pages per minute (ppm) for letter-sized paper and up to 30 ppm for A4-size paper. ● Trays. The printer comes with a multipurpose tray (Tray 1) that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20 envelopes. A standard 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 x 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, and A5, and custom media. The printer can support up to four optional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 3, 4, 5, and 6). ● Connectivity. The printer provides parallel and auxiliary ports for connectivity. Two enhanced input/output (EIO) slots, wireless connectivity capability with optional print server, auxiliary port, universal serial bus (USB) and accessory connections, and bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE-1284-C compliant) are standard. ● Memory. 160 megabytes (MB) of memory: 128 MB of dual data-rate (DDR) synchronous dynamic random access memory (SDRAM), 32 MB of memory on the formatter board, and one open dual inline memory module (DIMM) slot. NOTE To allow memory expansion, the printer has an available 200-pin small outline dual inline memory module (SODIMM) slot that accepts 128 or 256 MB RAM. The printer can support up to 544 MB of memory: 512 MB of memory in SODIMMs, plus 32 MB additional memory on the formatter board. An optional hard drive is also available. 2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW HP Color LaserJet 4700n (Q7492A) The HP Color LaserJet 4700n printer includes the features of the 4700, plus the HP Jetdirect embedded print server (RJ-45 port) for network connectivity. HP Color LaserJet 4700dn (Q7493A) The HP Color LaserJet 4700dn printer includes the features of the 4700n, plus a duplexer for automatic two-sided printing, and an additional 128 MB of memory for a total of 288 MB of memory (256 MB of DDR SDRAM and 32 MB of memory on the formatter board). HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn (Q7494A) ENWW Printer configurations 3 The HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn includes all the features of the 4700dn, two additional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 3 and 4), and a printer stand. HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ (Q7495A) The HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ includes the features of the 4700dtn, two additional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 5 and 6), a high-capacity stapler/stacker, a printer stand, a hard drive, and an additional 256 MB of memory for a total of 544 MB of memory. NOTE 544 MB of SDRAM: 512 MB of DDR, plus 32 MB of additional memory on the formatter board and an additional DIMM slot. This printer has two 200-pin small outline dual inline memory module (SODIMM) slots that accept 128 or 256 MB of RAM each. HP Color LaserJet CP4005n (CB503A) 4 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printer is a four-color laser printer that prints up to 30 pages per minute (ppm) for black and 25 pages per minute (ppm) for color. ● Trays. The printer comes with a multipurpose tray (Tray 1) that holds up to 100 sheets of various print media or 20 envelopes. A standard 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, and A5, and custom media. The printer also supports one optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3). ● Connectivity. The printer provides a network port (RJ-45 connector) and universal serial bus (USB). ● Memory. 128 MB of DDR SDRAM in a single DIMM slot that can be upgraded to a maximum of 512 MB. NOTE To accommodate memory expansion, the available 200-pin small outline dual inline memory module (SODIMM) slot accepts 128, 256, or 512 MB RAM. The printer can support up to 512 MB of memory. HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn (CB504A) The HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn Series printer includes the features of the CP4005n, plus a duplexer for automatic two-sided printing, and an additional 128 MB of memory for a total of 258 MB of memory. ENWW Printer configurations 5 Printer features These printers combine the quality and reliability of Hewlett-Packard printing with the following new features and standard capabilities. For more information, see the Hewlett-Packard Web site at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005. Table 1-1 Features Performance HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Prints up to 31 pages per minute (ppm) for letter-size paper and up to 30 ppm for A4-size paper. ● First page prints in 10 seconds or less. The printer can be set to wake from Sleep mode at a specific time each day. HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Memory ● Prints up to 30 ppm in black & white and 25 ppm in color for letter-size (8.5"x11") and A4-size paper. ● First page prints in 10 seconds or less for black and 12 seconds or less for color from the Ready prompt. This wait time is similar for first page out times from Powersave or Sleep mode. HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● 160 MB of memory for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and 4700n, 288 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and 544 MB for the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+. NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers use 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM. ● Two open EIO slots. ● Can be expanded to 544 MB: 512 MB of DDR memory plus 32 MB of memory on the formatter board. ● Optional hard drive can be added via an EIO slot (an internal hard drive is included with the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printer). HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: ● 128 MB of memory for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, 256 MB for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn. NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers use 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules that accepts 128, 256, or 512 MB RAM. The printer can support up to 512 MB of memory. User interface 6 Chapter 1 Product information HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Four-line graphic display on control panel. ● Enhanced Help with animated graphics. ● Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies (network-connected printers). ENWW Table 1-1 Features (continued) HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Supported printer personalities ● Four-line graphic display on control panel. ● Enhanced Help with animated graphics. ● Embedded Web server to access support and order supplies (for networkconnected printers). ● HP Easy Printer Care Software (a Web-based status and troubleshooting tool). HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● HP PCL 6. ● HP PCL 5c. ● PostScript 3 emulation. ● Portable document format (PDF). HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Job storage features ● HP PCL 6. ● HP PCL 5c. ● PostScript 3 emulation. ● Portable document format (PDF). HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● ● Full job storage features. ● Proof and hold. ● Private jobs. ● Quick copy. ● Mopier mode. ● Job storage. Fonts and forms. HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: ENWW ● Full job storage features. ● Personal identification number (PIN) printing. A user can send a print file to the printer with a PIN embedded in the job print it by typing in the PIN at the control panel. ● Mopier mode. A print file is processed on the computer and sent one time only to the printer. It is then spooled at the printer, and the requested numbers of copies are printed. ● Proof and hold. A multi-copy print file is sent to the printer, the first copy is printed for proofing, and the remainder of the job is held at the printer for printing or cancellation. ● Fonts and forms. Printer features 7 Table 1-1 Features (continued) Environmental features HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Sleep mode setting. ● High content of recyclable components and materials. ● Energy Star® compliant. HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Fonts ● Sleep mode setting. ● High content of recyclable components and materials. ● Energy Star® compliant. HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation. ● Supports forms and fonts on the disk using HP Web Jetadmin. HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Paper handling 8 Chapter 1 Product information ● 80 internal fonts available for both PCL and PostScript emulation. ● 80 printer-matching screen fonts in TrueType format available with the software solution. HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Prints on media from 77 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) up to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) (legal size). ● Tray 1 can process heavy media from 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 60 lb), as well as standard 80 lb cover stock. ● Tray 2 and optional trays can process media up to 120 g/m2 (32 lb). ● Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP laser photo media, glossy papers, and transparencies, as well as heavy stock, labels, and envelopes. ● Standard 100-sheet multi-purpose paper tray (Tray 1) supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media. ● Standard 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) that supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media. ● Up to four additional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 3, 4, 5, and 6) support letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media. ● Standard 500-sheet face-down output bin. ● Duplexer for automatic two-sided printing (duplexing) standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn, HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+printers. ● Automatic duplexing of 120 g/m2 (32 lb) paper at full speed - 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute. ● Stapler/stacker prints up to 750 sheets with job offset and staples up to 30 sheets; standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+. ENWW Table 1-1 Features (continued) HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Accessories ● Prints on media from 77 mm x 127 mm (3 inches x 5 inches) up to 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5 inches x 14 inches) (legal size). For ordering information, see Part numbers. ● Tray 1 can process heavy media from 60 g/m2 to 220 g/m2 (16 lb to 60 lb), as well as standard 80 lb cover stock. For ordering information, see Part numbers. ● Tray 2 and optional Tray 3 can process media from 60 g/m2 to 120 g/m2 (16 lb to 32 lb). ● Prints on a wide range of media types, including HP laser photo media, glossy papers, and transparencies, as well as heavy stock, labels, and envelopes. ● Prints multiple gloss levels. ● Standard 100-sheet multi-purpose paper tray (Tray 1) supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media. ● Standard 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 2) that supports letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media. ● One optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3) support letter, legal, executive, 8.5 X 13, JIS B5, executive (JIS), 16K, A4, A5, and custom media. ● Standard 500-sheet face-down output bin. ● Duplexer for automatic two-sided printing (duplexing) standard on the HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn Series printer. ● Automatic duplexing of 120 g/m2 (32 lb) paper at full speed - 30 sides (15 sheets) per minute. HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Printer hard drive, which provides storage for fonts and macros as well as additional features for Job Storage; standard on HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printer. ● Small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs). ● Flash memory slots for additional fonts and firmware upgrades. ● Printer stand. ● Stapler/stacker; standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+. NOTE The stapler/stacker is optional as an accessory for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn. The stapler/stacker can be installed only on printers that are equipped with the automatic duplexer. ● Up to four additional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 3, 4, 5, and 6). HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: ENWW ● Small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMMs). ● Flash memory slot for firmware upgrades. ● Printer stand. ● One optional 500-sheet paper feeder (Tray 3). Printer features 9 Table 1-1 Features (continued) Connectivity HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Enhanced input/output (EIO) card slots for optional connectivity. (Network connection using an HP Jetdirect embedded print server is standard on HP Color LaserJet 4700n, HP Color LaserJet 4700dn, HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printers.) ● USB 2.0 connection. ● HP Jetdirect embedded print server to enable network connectivity without requiring use of an EIO slot. ● Standard bidirectional parallel cable interface (IEEE 1284-C compliant). ● Auxiliary connector. ● Both USB and parallel connections are supported, but cannot be used at the same time. HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: Supplies ● USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Device port (Type B connector). ● HP Jetdirect embedded print server to enable network connectivity. ● Optional HP Jetdirect external print servers to enable alternative network connectivity through the USB port. HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series: ● Supplies status page contains information on toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining. ● High-capacity no-shake cartridge with automatic toner seal removal feature. ● Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation. ● High-capacity (5,000) staple cartridge with staples-low and staples-out messaging capability. ● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the embedded Web server. HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series: 10 Chapter 1 Product information ● Supplies status page contains information on toner level, page count, and estimated pages remaining. ● High-capacity no-shake cartridge pre-installed in the printer automatic-toner seal removal feature. ● Printer checks for authentic HP print cartridges at cartridge installation. ● Internet-enabled supply-ordering capabilities through the embedded Web server, Web Jetadmin network printer software, and HP Easy Printer Care Software. For more information, see http://www.hp.com/go/easyprintercare. ENWW Printer walkaround HP Color LaserJet 4700 models The following illustrations identify the locations and names of key components of the printers. HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series Front view (HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ shown) ENWW 1 Duplexer 2 Stapler/stacker 3 Top cover (access to fuser) 4 Control panel 5 Front cover (access to print cartridges and ETB) 6 Tray 1 7 On/off switch 8 Tray 2 9 Optional paper tray (four optional paper trays are shown) 10 Printer stand Printer walkaround 11 Back/side view (HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ shown) 1 Stapler/stacker output tray 2 Formatter assembly 3 Upper formatter assembly tab 4 USB connection 5 ACC connection 6 EIO connection 7 Parallel port 8 EIO connection 9 Network port (RJ-45 connector) 10 Lower formatter assembly tab 11 Auxiliary port 12 Kensington lock 13 Power cord connection HP Color LaserJet CP4005 models The following illustrations identify the locations and names of key components of this printer. 12 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Figure 1-1 Front view (HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn with optional 500-sheet feeder shown) 1 Duplexer 2 Top cover 3 Control panel 4 Front cover (access to print cartridges, transfer unit, and fuser) 5 Tray 1 6 On/off switch 7 Tray 2 8 Optional Tray 3 Figure 1-2 Back/side view (HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn with optional 500-sheet feeder shown) ENWW 1 Formatter board 2 Upper formatter board tab Printer walkaround 13 14 3 USB 2.0 Hi-Speed Device port (Type B connector) 4 Ethernet Base 10/100T Networking port (RJ-45 connector) 5 Lower formatter board tab 6 Power cord connection Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications The following sections describe printer identification, site requirements, and specifications. Model and serial numbers The model number and serial numbers are listed on identification labels located on the rear of the printer. The model number is alphanumeric, such as Q7491A for an HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer or CB503A for an HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer. The serial number contains information about the country/region of origin, the printer version, production code, and the production number of the printer. Figure 1-3 Model and serial number label Model name Model number HP Color LaserJet 4700 Q7491A HP Color LaserJet 4700n Q7492A HP Color LaserJet 4700dn Q7493A HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn Q7494A HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ Q7495A HP Color LaserJet CP4005n CB503A HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn CB504A Power and regulatory label The identification labels on the rear of the printer also contain power-rating and regulatory information. CAUTION Converting the voltage on the printer can damage the printer. Do not use any voltage other than the operating voltage. Any attempt to convert operating voltages will void the product warranty (for example, attempting to change a 110 V printer to a 220 V printer). ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications 15 Figure 1-4 Power and regulatory label Site requirements The printer must be kept in an appropriate location to maintain the performance level that has been set at the factory. In particular, be sure that the environment adheres to the specifications listed in this chapter. The following are recommendations for the printer installation, location, and placement. 16 ● A well-ventilated, dust-free area ● A hard, level surface (with not more than a 2° angle) ● For the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and 4700n, the surface must support at least 47.7 kg (105.1 lb) ● For the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn, the surface must support at least 48.9 kg (107.8 lb) ● For the HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, the surface must support at least 104.3 kg (230 lb) ● For the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+, the surface must support at least 130.5 kg (287.7 lb) ● For the HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, the surface must support at least 47.7 kg (105.1 lb) ● For the HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn, the surface must support at least 48.9 kg (107.8 lb) Chapter 1 Product information ENWW CAUTION The HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ must not be installed on an elevated surface. Always install the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printer on a hard, level floor. Make sure to keep the printer away from the following: ● Direct sunlight, dust, open flames, or water ● The direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation systems ● Magnets and devices that emit a magnetic field ● Areas that experience vibration ● Walls or other objects Space requirements The printer must have sufficient space above and around it to allow proper access and ventilation. 3 1 2 Figure 1-5 HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer space requirements with doors open (except for the HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn and HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ printer) 1 530 mm (20.9 inches) in width 2 940 mm (37 inches) in depth 3 804 mm (31.7 inches) in height Other models have different space requirements. See the following table for additional space requirements for the given model. ENWW Identification, site requirements, and specifications 17 Product Height requirement Width requirement HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn 737 mm (29 inches) 904 mm (35.6 inches) HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ 1102 mm (43.4 inches) 904 mm (35.6 inches) Physical specifications Table 1-2 Physical dimensions with doors closed Product Height Depth Width Weight HP Color LaserJet 4700, HP Color LaserJet 4700n, and HP Color LaserJet CP4005n 582 mm (22.9 inches) 598 mm (23.5 inches) 521 mm (20.5 inches) 47.7 kg (105.1 lb.) HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn with duplexer 628.6 mm (24.7 inches) 598 mm (23.5 inches) 521 mm (20.5 inches) 48.9 kg (107.8 lb.) HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn with Trays 3 and 4, duplexer, and stand 1010.6 mm (39.8 inches) 715 mm (28.2 inches) 630 mm (24.8 inches) 104.3 kg (230 lb.) HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ with Trays 3, 4, 5, and 6, duplexer, stapler/stacker, and stand 1375.5 mm (54.2 inches) 715 mm (28.2 inches) 630 mm (24.8 inches) 130.5 kg (287.7 lb.) HP Color LaserJet 4700 models: 750 sheet stapler/stacker 305 mm (12 inches) 476 mm (18.7 inches) 500 mm (19.7 inches) 8.4 kg (18.5 lb.) Optional paper tray 117 mm (4.6 inches) 578 mm (22.8 inches) 514 mm (20.25 inches) 8.9 kg (19.6 lb.) Printer stand 148 mm (5.8 inches) 715 mm (28.2 inches) 630 mm (24.8 inches) 37.6 kg (83 lb.) Electrical specifications Power requirements Rated current 110-Volt models 220-Volt models 100-127V (+/- 10%) 220-240V (+/- 10%) 50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz) 50/60 Hz (+/- 2 Hz) 8 Amps 4 Amps Table 1-3 Power consumption (average, in watts)1 Power consumption (average, in watts) Product model 18 Printing (up to 31 ppm letter)2 Chapter 1 Product information Ready3, 4 Sleep5 Off ENWW Table 1-3 Power consumption (average, in watts)1 (continued) HP Color LaserJet 4700 567 55 17 0.3 HP Color LaserJet 4700n, CP4005n 567 55 17 0.3 HP Color LaserJet 4700dn, CP4005dn 567 55 17 0.3 HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn 591 63 18 0.3 HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ 623 66 18 0.3 NOTE 1Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005 for current information. 2 Power reported is the highest value measured using all standard voltages. 3 Maximum heat dissipation for all models in Ready mode is 225 BTU/hour. 4 Default time from Ready mode to Sleep mode is 30 minutes. 5 Recovery time from Sleep mode to start of printing is less than 15 seconds. Environmental specifications Specification Recommended Allowed Temperature 17 to 25°C (62.6 to 77°F) 15 to 30°C (59 to 86°F) Humidity 30 to 70% relative humidity (RH) 10 to 80% RH Altitude N/A 0 to 2600 m (0 to 8530 ft) Acoustic emissions ENWW Sound Power Level Declared Per ISO 9296 Printing (31 ppm letter)1, 2, 3 LWAd=6.7 Bels (A) [67 dB (A)] Ready LWAd=4.7 Bels (A) [47 dB (A)] Sound Pressure Level - Bystander Position Declared Per ISO 9296 Printing (31 ppm letter)1, 2, 3 LpAm=50 dB (A) Ready LpAm=31 dB (A) Identification, site requirements, and specifications 19 NOTE 1Values are subject to change. See http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005 for current information. 2 Configuration tested: Base printer, simplex printing on A4 paper. 3 HP Color LaserJet 4700 speed: up to 31 ppm letter and up to 30 ppm A4 paper; HP Color LaserJet CP4005 speed: 30 ppm black and 25 ppm color Supply storage requirements The life of supplies is greatly affected by their storage environment. Use storage requirements to determine the shelf life of stored supplies. Table 1-4 Supply storage requirements Item Storage time Storage condition Temperature Normal (maximum of 2.5 years) 0° to 35°C (32° to 95°F) Severe (maximum of 18 days) High 35° to 40°C (95° to 104°F) Low 0° to -20°C (32° to -4°F) Maximum temperature change rate 40° to 15°C (104° to 59°F) within 3 minutes -20° to 25°C (-4° to 77°F) within 3 minutes Humidity Normal (maximum of 2.5 years) 35% to 85% RH Severe (maximum of 18 days) High 85% to 95% RH Low 10% to 35% RH 1 Atmospheric pressure 460 to 760 mm Hg (18.1 to 29.9 inches Hg) Storage time1 2.5 years The average storage time includes use time. Use cartridges within 2.5 years of the date code on the cartridge. Skew specifications The printer has the following skew specifications: 20 ● Print engine (cut-sheet paper): less than 1.5 mm (0.06 inches) over a 260 mm (10.24 inch) length ● Print engine (envelopes): less than 3.3 mm (0.13 inches) over a 220 mm (8.66 inch) length Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Media specifications This section provides comprehensive information on supported media types. Category Specifications Acid content 5.5 pH to 8.0 pH Caliper 0.094 mm (3.0 to 7.0 mils) Curl in ream Flat within 5 mm (0.02 inches) Cut edge conditions Cut with sharp blades that create no visible fray Fusing compatibility Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous emissions when heated to 200°C (392°F) for 0.1 second Grain Long grain Moisture content 3% to 9% by weight Smoothness 100 to 250 Sheffield Printing and paper storage environment Ideally, the printing and paper storage environment should be at or near room temperature, and not too dry or too humid. Remember that paper is hygroscopic; it absorbs and loses moisture rapidly. Heat works with humidity to damage paper. Heat causes the moisture in paper to evaporate, while cold causes it to condense on the sheets. Heating systems and air conditioners remove most of the humidity from a room. As paper is opened and used, it loses moisture, causing streaks and smudging. Humid weather or water coolers can cause the humidity to increase in a room. As paper is opened and used it absorbs any excess moisture, causing light print and dropouts. Also, as paper loses and gains moisture it can distort. This can cause jams. As a result, paper storage and handling are as important as the paper-making process itself. Paper storage environmental conditions directly affect the feed operation. Care should be taken not to purchase more paper than can be easily used in a short time (about 3 months). Paper stored for long periods might experience heat and moisture extremes, which can cause damage. Planning is important to prevent damage to a large supply of paper. Unopened paper in sealed reams can remain stable for several months before use. Opened packages of paper have more potential for environmental damage, especially if they are not wrapped with a moisture-proof barrier. The paper storage environment should be properly maintained to ensure optimum printer performance. The required condition is 20° to 24°C (68° to 75°F), with a relative humidity of 45% to 55%. The following guidelines should be helpful when evaluating the paper storage environment: ENWW ● Paper should be stored at or near room temperature. ● The air should not be too dry or too humid (due to the hygroscopic properties of paper). ● The best way to store an opened ream of paper is to rewrap it tightly in its moisture-proof wrapping. If the printer environment is subject to extremes, unwrap only the amount of paper to be used during the day's operation to prevent unwanted moisture changes. Media specifications 21 Envelopes Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes, consider the following components: ● Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb) or jamming might occur. ● Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less than 6 mm (0.25 inch) curl, and should not contain air. ● Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged. ● Temperature: Use envelopes that are compatible with the heat and pressure of the printer. ● Size: Use only envelopes that are within the following size ranges: ● Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) ● Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) NOTE Use only Tray 1 to print on envelopes. Some jams might occur when using any media with a length less than 178 mm (7 inches). This might be caused by paper that has been affected by environmental conditions. For optimum performance, make sure to store and handle the paper correctly. Select envelopes in the printer driver. 22 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Envelopes that have double side seams Double side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of the envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style might be more likely to wrinkle. Be sure that the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope, as illustrated. Envelopes that have adhesive strips or flaps Envelopes that have a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap that folds over to seal must use adhesives that are compatible with the heat and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams, and might even damage the fuser. Envelope margins The following table shows typical address margins for a commercial #10 or DL envelope. Type of address Top margin Left margin Return address 15 mm (0.6 inch) 15 mm (0.6 inch) Delivery address 51 mm (2 inches) 89 mm (3.5 inches) NOTE For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 15 mm (0.6 inches) from the edges of the envelope. Avoid printing over the area where the envelope seams meet. Envelope storage Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to print quality. Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope, creating an air bubble, then the envelope might wrinkle during printing. ENWW Media specifications 23 Labels CAUTION To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels that are recommended for use in HP Color LaserJet printers. Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once or print on a partial sheet of labels. Label construction When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component: ● Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 200°C (392°F), the printer's fusing temperature. ● Arrangement: Only use labels that have no exposed backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets that have spaces between the labels, causing serious jams. ● Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 13 mm (0.5 inches) of curl in any direction. ● Condition: Do not use sheets of labels that have wrinkles, bubbles, or other indications of separation. NOTE Select labels in the printer driver. Transparencies Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 200°C (392°F), the printer's fusing temperature. CAUTION To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies recommended for use in HP Color LaserJet printers, such as HP-brand transparencies. NOTE Select transparencies in the printer driver. 24 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Supported types and sizes of print media The following table lists the types of media that the printer supports. Table 1-5 Supported types of media Type of media Tray 1 Trays 2–6 Duplexer Stapler/stacker Plain X X X X Preprinted X X X X Letterhead X X X X Transparency X X Prepunched X X X X Labels X X Bond X X X X Recycled X X X X Color X X X X Cardstock X Rough X X X X Envelope X Table 1-6 Tray 1 media sizes Tray 1 Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Paper and cardstock, standard sizes (letter/A4, legal, executive, JIS B5, A5); custom sizes Range: Range: Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond Glossy paper (letter/A4, legal, executive, JIS B5, A5) Range: Range: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) Minimum 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) 220 g/m2 (60 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) NOTE Do not use inkjet papers in this printer. Transparencies (letter/A4), suitable for use in color laserjet printers Equivalent to 100 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) HP Tough paper (letter/A4) Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) HP Color Laser Glossy Photo Paper (letter/A4) ENWW Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) Media specifications 25 Table 1-6 Tray 1 media sizes (continued) Tray 1 Dimensions NOTE Do not use inkjet papers in this printer. Weight or thickness Capacity Range: 20 envelopes A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) Envelopes (Com 10, Monarch, C5, DL, B5) 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 90 g/?m?2 (24 lb) bond Labels (letter/A4, legal, executive, JIS B5, A5), suitable for use in color laserjet printers 26 Chapter 1 Product information Range: Maximum 0.23 mm (0.009 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 10 mm (0.6 inch) 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) ENWW Table 1-7 Trays 2–6 media sizes1 for HP Color LaserJet 4700. Trays 2–3 media sizes for HP Color LaserJet CP4005. Trays 2–6 Dimensions Weight or thickness Capacity Paper, standard sizes (letter/ A4, legal, executive, JIS B5, A5); custom sizes Range: Range: Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 inches) 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond Range: Range: 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 inches) Minimum: Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 inches) Glossy paper (letter/A4, legal, executive, JIS B5, A5) NOTE Do not use inkjet papers in this printer. HP Color Laser Glossy Photo & Imaging Paper (letter/A4) NOTE Do not use inkjet papers in this printer. Transparencies (letter/A4), suitable for use in color laserjet printers Equivalent to 530 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 inches) A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) HP Tough Paper (letter/A4) Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) Maximum: Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 inches) 0.13 mm (0.005 inches) thick A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) Labels (letter/A4 and custom sizes), suitable for use in color laserjet printers 1 Range: Maximum: 148 x 210 mm (5.83 x 8.27 inches) to 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 0.13 mm (0.005 inch) thick Maximum stack height: 56 mm (2.2 inches) Trays 2–6 use custom sizes specifically for B5 ISO. These trays do not support the range of custom sizes that can be used in Tray 1. Table 1-8 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing) Automatic duplex printing Dimensions Weight or thickness Paper Standard sizes: Range: Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) 60 g/m2 (16 lb) bond to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) ENWW Media specifications 27 Table 1-8 Automatic duplex printing (two-sided printing) (continued) Automatic duplex printing Dimensions Weight or thickness 8.5 x 13: 216 x 330.2 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) Legal: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) Executive: 184.2 x 266.7 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) JIS B5: 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) Glossy paper (A4/letter, 13 x 8.5 in, legal, executive, JIS B5) See above for standard sizes supported Range: 75 g/m2 (20 lb) bond to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond NOTE Do not use inkjet papers in this printer. HP Color Laser Glossy Photo & Imaging Paper (A4/ letter) NOTE Do not use inkjet papers in this printer. Standard sizes: 120 g/m2 (32 lb) bond Letter: 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) A4: 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) Table 1-9 Optional stapler/stacker supported sizes (for HP Color LaserJet 4700 only) Size Dimensions1 Weight Capacity2 Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) For plain media: 60 g/m2 (16 lb) to 120 g/m2 (32 lb) 500 sheets of 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper. For thick media: 160 g/m2 (42 lb) to 220 g/m2 (58 lb) 28 A4 210 x 297 mm (8.27 x 11.7 inches) Executive 184.2 x 266.7 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches) Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) B5 (JIS) 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) A5 148 x 210 mm (5.8 x 8.3 inches) 8.5 x 13 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) Executive (JIS) 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches) Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Table 1-9 Optional stapler/stacker supported sizes (for HP Color LaserJet 4700 only) (continued) Size Dimensions1 JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.17 x 10.12 inches) Envelope Monarch #7-3/4 98 x 191 mm (3.9 x 7.5 inches) Envelope C5 ISO 162 x 229 mm (6.4 x 9.0 inches) Envelope DL ISO 110 x 220 mm (4.3 x 8.7 inches) Envelope B5 ISO 176 x 250 mm (6.7 x 9.8 inches) Custom Minimum: 76 x 127 mm (3 x 5 inches) Weight Capacity2 Maximum: 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches) 1 2 The printer supports a wide range of sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. Capacity can vary depending on paper weight and thickness, as well as environmental conditions. Media to avoid This printer can handle many types of media. Use of media outside the printer’s specifications will cause a loss of print quality and increase the chance of paper jams. ● Do not use media that is too rough. ● Do not use media with cutouts or perforations other than standard 3-hole punched paper. ● Do not use multipart forms. ● Do not use media that has already been printed on or that has been fed through a photocopier. ● Do not use media with a watermark if you are printing solid patterns. Media that can damage the printer In rare circumstances, media can damage the printer. Avoid the following media to prevent possible damage to the printer: ENWW ● Do not use media with staples attached. ● Do not use transparencies designed for inkjet printers or other low-temperature printers, or transparencies designed for monochrome printing. Use only transparencies that are specified for use with HP Color LaserJet printers. ● Do not use glossy or photo media intended for inkjet printers. ● Do not use media that is embossed or coated and is not designed for the temperatures of the fuser. Select media that can tolerate temperatures of 195°C (383°F) for 0.1 second. Media specifications 29 ● Do not use letterhead media with low-temperature dyes or thermography. Preprinted forms or letterhead must use inks that can tolerate temperatures of 195°C (383°F) for 0.1 second. ● Do not use any media that produces undesirable emissions, or that melts, offsets, or discolors when exposed to 195°C (383°F) for 0.1 second. To order HP Color LaserJet printing supplies, go to http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies in the United States or to http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html worldwide. 30 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Printing on special media Use these guidelines when printing on special types of media. NOTE Special media such as envelopes, transparencies, custom-size media, or heavy media greater than 120 g/m2 should only be used in Tray 1. To print on any special media, use the following procedure: 1. Load the media in Tray 1. 2. When the printer prompts you for the paper type, select the correct media type for the media loaded in the tray. For example, select GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2 when loading HP Color LaserJet Glossy Photo Paper. 3. In the software application or the printer driver, set the media type to match the media type that is loaded in the media tray. NOTE For the best print quality, always verify that the media type selected on the printer control panel and the media type selected in the application or printer driver match the type of media loaded in the tray. Transparencies When printing on transparencies, use the following guidelines: ● Handle transparencies using the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on the transparency can cause print quality problems. ● Use only overhead transparencies recommended for use in this printer. Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Transparencies. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results. ● In either the software application or the driver, select TRANSPARENCY as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for transparencies. CAUTION Transparencies not designed for HP Color LaserJet printing might melt in the printer or wrap around the fuser, causing damage to the printer. Glossy paper ENWW ● In either the software application or the driver, select GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2, HEAVY GLOSSY, or INTERMEDIATE90-104 as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for glossy paper. ● Use the control panel to set the media type to GLOSSY 75-105 G/M2 for the input tray being used. ● Because this affects all print jobs, it is important to return the printer to its original settings once the job has printed. Printing on special media 31 NOTE Hewlett-Packard recommends using HP Color LaserJet Glossy Photo Paper and soft glossy papers designed for use in HP Color LaserJet printers. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results. If other types of glossy media are used, print quality could be compromised. Colored paper ● Colored paper should be of the same high quality as white xerographic paper. ● Pigments used in colored media must be able to withstand the printer’s fusing temperature of 195°C (383°F) for 0.1 second without deterioration. ● The printer creates colors by printing patterns of dots, overlaying and varying their spacing to produce various colors. Varying the shade or color of the paper will affect the shades of the printed colors. Envelopes NOTE Envelopes can be printed only from Tray 1. Set the tray’s media size to the specific envelope size. Adhering to the following guidelines will help ensure proper printing on envelopes and help prevent printer jams: ● Do not load more than 20 envelopes into Tray 1. ● The weight rating of envelopes should not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 lb bond). ● Envelopes should be flat. ● Do not use envelopes with windows or clasps. ● Envelopes must not be wrinkled, nicked, or otherwise damaged. ● Envelopes with peel-off adhesive strips must use adhesives that can withstand the heat and pressures of the printer’s fusing process. ● Envelopes should be loaded face-down and with the postage end feeding into the printer first. Labels NOTE For printing labels, set the tray’s media type to LABELS in the printer control panel. When printing labels, use the following guidelines: 32 ● Verify that the labels’ adhesive material can tolerate temperatures of 195°C (383°F) for 0.1 second. ● Verify that there is no exposed adhesive material between the labels. Exposed areas can cause labels to peel off during printing, which can cause printer jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause damage to printer components. ● Do not re-feed a sheet of labels. ● Verify that the labels lie flat. ● Do not use labels that are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise damaged. Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Heavy paper The following heavy paper types can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer. Table 1-10 Supported heavy paper types Paper type Paper weight Heavy and extra-heavy stock 105-163 g/m2 (28-43 lb) Cardstock 164-220 g/m2 (43-58 lb) Intermediate 90-105 g/m2 (24-28 lb) HP Tough paper 5 mil When printing on heavy paper types, use the following guidelines: ● Use Tray 1 for paper that is heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb). ● For optimum results when printing on heavy paper, use the printer control panel to set the media type for the tray to the appropriate paper type listed in Table 1-10 Supported heavy paper types on page 33. ● In either the software application or the driver, select the appropriate paper type as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for heavy paper. ● Because this setting affects all print jobs, it is important to return the printer back to its original settings once the job has printed. CAUTION In general, do not use paper that is heavier than the media specification recommended for this printer. Doing so can cause misfeeds, paper jams, reduced print quality, and excessive mechanical wear. HP LaserJet Tough paper When printing on HP LaserJet Tough paper, use the following guidelines: ● Handle HP LaserJet Tough paper only by the edges. Oils from your fingers deposited on HP LaserJet Tough paper can cause print quality problems. ● Use only HP LaserJet Tough paper with this printer. HP products are designed to work together for optimum printing results. ● In either the software application or the driver, select TOUGH PAPER as the media type, or print from a tray that is configured for HP LaserJet Tough paper. Preprinted forms and letterhead Observe the following guidelines for best results with preprinted forms and letterhead: ENWW ● Forms and letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant inks that will not melt, vaporize, or release undesirable emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing temperature of approximately 195°C (383°F) for 0.1 second. ● Inks must be non-flammable and should not adversely affect any printer rollers. Printing on special media 33 ● Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during storage. ● Before loading preprinted paper such as forms and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off of preprinted paper. ● To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 1, load them face down with the top edge of the page facing toward you. ● To load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional tray, load them face up with the top edge of the page facing away from you. ● When duplex printing, load pre-printed forms and letterhead into Tray 2 or an optional 500-sheet tray face down with the top edge of the page towards you. Recycled paper This printer supports the use of recycled paper. Recycled paper must meet the same specifications as standard paper. Hewlett-Packard recommends that recycled paper contain no more than 5% ground wood. Weight equivalence table The weight equivalence table shows equivalent weights for different grades of paper. A boldface type value indicates a commonly available standard weight for that grade. NOTE Text and book grades marked with an asterisk (*) actually calculate to 51, 61, 71, and 81 but are rounded to standard book or text weights of 50, 60, 70, and 80. Table 1-11 Weight equivalence table 34 Bond weight Text/Book weight Cover weight Bristol weight Index weight Tag weight Metric weight 16 41 22 27 33 37 60 g/m2 17 43 24 29 35 39 64 g/m2 20 50* 28 34 42 46 75 g/m2 21 54 30 36 44 49 80 g/m2 24 60* 33 41 50 55 90 g/m2 27 68 37 45 55 61 100 g/m2 28 70* 39 49 58 65 105 g/m2 29 74 41 50 61 68 110 g/m2 32 80* 44 55 67 74 120 g/m2 36 90 50 62 75 83 135 g/m2 39 100 55 67 82 91 148 g/m2 40 101 55 68 83 92 150 g/m2 43 110 60 74 90 100 163 g/m2 45 115 63 77 94 104 170 g/m2 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Table 1-11 Weight equivalence table (continued) ENWW Bond weight Text/Book weight Cover weight Bristol weight Index weight Tag weight Metric weight 47 119 65 80 97 108 176 g/m2 51 128 70 86 105 117 190 g/m2 53 134 74 90 110 122 199 g/m2 54 137 75 93 113 125 203 g/m2 58 146 80 98 120 133 216 g/m2 65 165 90 111 135 150 244 g/m2 66 169 92 114 138 154 250 g/m2 67 171 94 115 140 155 253 g/m2 70 178 98 120 146 162 264 g/m2 72 183 100 123 150 166 271 g/m2 Printing on special media 35 Environmental product stewardship program Protecting the environment Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products in an environmentally sound manner. This product has been designed with several attributes to minimize impacts on our environment. Ozone production This product generates no appreciable ozone gas (O3). Power consumption Power usage drops significantly while in Ready/Sleep mode, which saves natural resources and saves money without affecting the high performance of this product. To determine the ENERGY STAR® qualification status for this product see the Product Data Sheet or Specifications Sheet. Qualified products are also listed at: http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/globalcitizenship/environment/productdesign/ecolabels.html Toner consumption Economode uses significantly less toner, which might extend the life of the print cartridge. Paper use This product’s manual/optional automatic duplex feature (two-sided printing) and N-up printing (multiple pages printed on one page) capability can reduce paper usage and the resulting demands on natural resources. Plastics Plastic parts over 25 grams are marked according to international standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for recycling purposes at the end of the product’s life. HP LaserJet print supplies It’s easy to return and recycle your empty HP LaserJet print cartridges—free of charge—with HP Planet Partners. Multilingual program information and instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet print cartridge and supplies package. You help reduce the toll on the environment further when you return multiple cartridges together rather than separately. HP is committed to providing inventive, high-quality products and services that are environmentally sound, from product design and manufacturing to distribution, customer use and recycling. When you participate in the HP Planet Partners program, we ensure your HP LaserJet print cartridges are recycled properly, processing them to recover plastics and metals for new products and diverting millions of tons of waste from landfills. Since this cartridge is being recycled and used in new materials, it will not be returned to you. Thank you for being environmentally responsible! 36 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW NOTE Use the return label to return original HP LaserJet print cartridges only. Please do not use this label for HP inkjet cartridges, non-HP cartridges, refilled or remanufactured cartridges or warranty returns. For information about recycling your HP inkjet cartridges please go to http://www.hp.com/recycle. Return and recycling instructions United States and Puerto Rico The enclosed label in the HP LaserJet toner cartridge box is for the return and recycling of one or more HP LaserJet print cartridges after use. Please follow the applicable instructions below. Multiple returns (two to eight cartridges) 1. Package each HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original box and bag. 2. Tape up to eight single boxes together using strapping or packaging tape (up to 70 lbs). 3. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. OR 1. Use your own suitable box, or request a free bulk collection box from the http://www.hp.com/ recycle or 1-800-340-2445 (holds up to eight HP LaserJet print cartridges). 2. Use a single pre-paid shipping label. Single returns 1. Package the HP LaserJet print cartridge in its original bag and box. 2. Place the shipping label on the front of the box. Shipping For all HP LaserJet print cartridge recycling returns, give the package to UPS during your next delivery or pickup, or take it to an authorized UPS drop-off center. For the location of your local UPS drop-off center, call 1-800-PICKUPS or visit http://www.ups.com. If you are returning via USPS label, give the package to a U.S. Postal Service carrier or drop off at a U.S.Postal Service Office. For more information, or to order additional labels or boxes for bulk returns, visit http://www.hp.com/recycle or call 1-800-340-2445. Requested UPS pickup will be charged normal pickup rates. Information subject to change without notice. Non-US returns To participate in HP Planet Partners return and recycling program, just follow the simple directions in the recycling guide (found inside the packaging of your new printer supply item) or visit http://www.hp.com/recycle. Select your country/region for information on how to return your HP LaserJet printing supplies. Paper This product is capable of using recycled papers when the paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. This product is suitable for the use of recycled paper according to EN12281:2002. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 37 Material restrictions This HP product does not contain added mercury. This HP product contains a battery that might require special handling at end-of-life. The batteries contained in or supplied by Hewlett-Packard for this product include the following: HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series Type Carbon monofluoride lithium battery Weight 0.8 grams Location Formatter board User-removable No For recycling information, you can go to www.hp.com/recycle, or contact your local authorities or the Electronics Industries Alliance: www.eiae.org. Disposal of waste equipment by users in private households in the European Union This symbol on the product or on its packaging indicates that this product must not be disposed of with your other household waste. Instead, it is your responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment. The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment. For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product. 38 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for supplies containing chemical substances (for example, toner) can be obtained by contacting the HP Web site at www.hp.com/go/msds or www.hp.com/ hpinfo/community/environment/productinfo/safety. For more information To obtain information about these environmental topics: ● Product environmental profile sheet for this and many related HP products ● HP’s commitment to the environment ● HP’s environmental management system ● HP’s end-of-life product return and recycling program ● Material Safety Data Sheets Visit http://www.hp.com/go/environment or http://www.hp.com/hpinfo/community/environment/ productinfo/safety. ENWW Environmental product stewardship program 39 Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement HP product Duration of Limited Warranty HP Color LaserJet 4700 1 year, on-site HP Color LaserJet 4700n HP Color LaserJet 4700dn HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ HP Color LaserJet CP4005n HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn HP warrants HP hardware, accessories, and supplies against defects in materials and workmanship for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or like-new. HP warrants that HP software will not fail to execute its programming instructions, for the period specified above, due to defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace software media which does not execute its programming instructions due to such defects. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any product to a condition as warranted, customer will be entitled to a refund of the purchase price upon prompt return of the product. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance or may have been subject to incidental use. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site preparation or maintenance. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE THE CUSTOMER’S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. FOR CONSUMER TRANSACTIONS IN AUSTRALIA AND NEW ZEALAND; THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 40 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW The warranty period begins on the date of the delivery or on the date of installation if installed by HP. If customer schedules or delays HP installation more than 30 days after delivery, warranty begins on the 31st day from delivery. ENWW Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement 41 Limited warranty for print cartridges and image drums This HP Print Cartridge is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship. This warranty does not apply to print cartridges that (a) have been refilled, refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem and print samples) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. 42 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement This HP product is warranted to be free from defects in materials and workmanship until the printer provides a low-life indicator on the control panel. This warranty does not apply to products that (a) have been refurbished, remanufactured or tampered with in any way, (b) experience problems resulting from misuse, improper storage, or operation outside of the published environmental specifications for the printer product or (c) exhibit wear from ordinary use. To obtain warranty service, please return the product to place of purchase (with a written description of the problem) or contact HP customer support. At HP’s option, HP will either replace products that prove to be defective or refund your purchase price. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU. ENWW Color LaserJet Image Fuser Kit and Image Transfer Kit Limited Warranty Statement 43 Country/region-specific safety statements Laser safety The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The device is certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the device is completely confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation. WARNING! Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other than those specified in this user guide may result in exposure to hazardous radiation. Canadian DOC regulations Complies with Canadian EMC Class A requirements. « Conforme à la classe A des normes canadiennes de compatibilité électromagnétiques. « CEM ». » VCCI statement (Japan) Power cord statement (Japan) EMI statement (Korea) 44 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW EMI statement (Taiwan) ENWW Country/region-specific safety statements 45 Finnish laser statement LASERTURVALLISUUS LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT HP LaserJet 4700, HP LaserJet 4700n, HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, HP LaserJet 4700dn, HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn, HP LaserJet 4700dtn, HP LaserJet 4700ph+laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti. VAROITUS! Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. VARNING! Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. HUOLTO HP LaserJet 4700, HP LaserJet 4700n, HP Color LaserJet CP4005n, HP LaserJet 4700dn, HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn, HP LaserJet 4700dtn, HP LaserJet 4700ph+-kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja. VARO! Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen. VARNING! Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion, utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen. Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista: Aallonpituus 770-800 nm Teho 5 mW Luokan 3B laser Australia This equipment complies with Australian EMC requirements. 46 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW Declaration of conformity according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN 45014 Manufacturer's Name: Manufacturer's Address: Hewlett-Packard Company 11311 Chinden Boulevard, Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA declares that the product Product Name: Accessories: HP Color LaserJet 4700/CP4005 Series 500 sheet paper feeder (Q7499A) Stapler/stacker (Q7003A) Regulatory Model Number:2) Product Options: BOISB-0404-00 All Toner Cartridge: Q5950A, Q5951A, Q5952A, Q5953A, CB400A, CB401A, CB402A, CB403A conforms to the following Product Specifications: Safety: IEC 60950-1:2001 / EN60950-1:2001 +A11 IEC 60825-1:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 60825-1:1994 +A1 +A2 (Class 1 Laser/LED Product) GB4943-2001 EMC: CISPR 22:1993 +A1 +A2 / EN 55022:1994 +A1, +A2 - Class B1) EN 61000-3-2:2000 EN 61000-3-3:1995 +A1 EN 55024:1998 +A1 +A2 FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B / ICES-003, Issue 4 Supplementary Information: The product herewith complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC, the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC, and carries the CE-Marking accordingly. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. 1) The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems. 2) For regulatory purposes, this product is assigned a Regulatory model number. This number should not be confused with the product name or the product number(s). Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA 31 August, 2006 For regulatory topics only: European Contact: Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards Europe, Herrenberger Strasse 140, D-71034 Böblingen, Germany, (FAX: +49-7031-14-3143) USA Contact: ENWW Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO Box 15, Mail Stop 160, Boise, Idaho 83707-0015, USA, (Phone: 208-396-6000) Country/region-specific safety statements 47 48 Chapter 1 Product information ENWW 2 Service approach This chapter provides information about the following topics: ENWW ● Service approach ● Parts and supplies ● HP available services ● Ordering related documentation and software 49 Service approach Printer repair normally begins by using the printer's internal diagnostics and the following three-step process. 1. Isolate the problem to the major system (for example, the host computer, the network or server, or the printer system). 2. Determine if the problem is located in the accessories or in the printer engine. 3. Troubleshoot the problem by using the procedures in chapter 7. After you locate a faulty part, the printer can usually be repaired at the assembly level by replacing field replaceable units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies might need to be repaired at the subassembly level. Hewlett-Packard does not support replacement of components on the printer circuit assembles. 50 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW Parts and supplies Field-replaceable part and accessory part numbers are found in chapter 8 of this manual. Order replacement parts from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E). CAUTION Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support provider. Ordering parts, supplies, and accessories over the Internet To order supplies in the US, contact http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. To order supplies worldwide, see http://www.hp.com/ghp/buyonline.html. To order accessories, see http://www.hp.com. Ordering directly through the embedded Web server (for printers with network connections) Use the following steps to order printing supplies directly through the embedded Web server. 1. In the Web browser on the computer, type the IP address for the printer. The printer status window displays. Or, go to the URL provided in the alert email. 2. Click Other Links. 3. Click Order Supplies. The browser opens to a page in which you can choose to send information about the printer to HP. You also have the option to order supplies without sending the printer information to HP. 4. Select the part numbers you want to order and follow the instructions on the screen. Exchange program HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are identified in chapter 8 and can be ordered from Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Americas (HPCS-A) or Hewlett-Packard Customer Support-Europe (HPCS-E). Supplies Paper and print cartridges can be ordered directly from Hewlett-Packard. See chapter 8 for ordering information. World Wide Web Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support information can be obtained from the following URL: In the U.S.: http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 and http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005 Printer drivers can be obtained from the following sites: In China: ftp://www.hp.com.cn/support/clj4700 In Japan: ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/support/clj4700 In Korea: http://www.hp.co.kr/support/clj4700 ENWW Parts and supplies 51 In Taiwan: http://www.hp.com.tw/support/clj4700 or the local driver Web site: http://www.dds.com.tw HP Service Parts Information Parts identification and pricing information can also be found on the World Wide Web at http://www.hp.com/go/HPparts. 52 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW HP available services Online services For 24-hour access to information using a modem or Internet connection: World Wide Web URL: for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and CP4500 Series printers, updated HP printer software, product and support information, and printer drivers in several languages can be obtained from http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. (Sites are in English.) Visit: http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing for information about network printing using HP Jetdirect print servers. HP Instant Support Professional Edition (ISPE) is a suite of Web-based troubleshooting tools for desktop computing and printing products. ISPE helps you quickly identify, diagnose, and resolve computing and printing problems. The ISPE tools may be accessed from http://instantsupport.hp.com. Telephone support HP provides free telephone support during the warranty period. When you call, you will be connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. For the telephone number for your country/region, see the flyer that shipped in the box with the product, or visit http://www.hp.com. Before calling HP have the following information ready: product name and serial number, date of purchase, and description of the problem. You can also find support on the Internet at http://www.hp.com. Click the support & drivers block located on the HP Web site. Software utilities, drivers, and electronic information Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/clj4700_software or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005_software for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and CP4500 Series printers. The Web page for the drivers might be in English, but you can download the drivers themselves in several languages. Call: See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer. HP direct ordering for accessories or supplies In the United States, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/sbso/product/supplies. In Canada, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.ca/catalog/supplies. In Europe, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/go/ljsupplies. In Asia-Pacific, supplies can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/paper/. Accessories can be ordered from http://www.hp.com/go/accessories. Call: 1-800-538-8787 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3154 (Canada). HP service information To locate HP - Authorized Dealers, call 1-800-243-9816 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-3867 (Canada). For service for your product, call the customer support number for your country/region. See the flyer that shipped in the box with the printer. HP service agreements Call: 1-800-835-4747 (U.S.) or 1-800-268-1221 (Canada). ENWW HP available services 53 Extended Service: 1-800-446-0522 HP support and information for Macintosh computers Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/macosx for Macintosh OS X support information and HP subscription service for driver updates. Visit: http://www.hp.com/go/mac-connect for products designed specifically for the Macintosh user. 54 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW Ordering related documentation and software The following table lists part numbers for related documentation and software. Description Part Number HP LaserJet Family Print Media Guide 5963-7863 HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator's Guide 5971-3257 PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package 5021-0330 HP Color LaserJet 4700/HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series Getting Started Guide Q7491-90901 HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series Getting Started Guide CB503-90931 HP Color LaserJet 4700/HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series Service Manual CB503–90929 HP Color LaserJet 4700/ HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series Printer Service and Support CD-ROM CB503-60106 HP Color LaserJet 4700 User Guide Q7491-90953 HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series User Guide CB503-90901 For downloadable versions, go to http://www.hp.com/support/ clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. When connected, select manuals. ENWW Ordering related documentation and software 55 56 Chapter 2 Service approach ENWW 3 Installation and configuration This chapter contains information about the following topics: ENWW ● What ships in the box ● Unpacking the printer ● Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays ● Connecting power ● Installing a new control panel label ● Testing the printer operation ● Sleep delay ● Connecting to a computer ● Printer software ● Printer drivers ● Printer drivers for Macintosh computers ● Software for Macintosh computers ● Network configuration ● Setting network security on the printer 57 What ships in the box The following table describes the items that ship with the various printer models. Item HP Color LaserJet 4700 HP Color LaserJet 4700n HP Color LaserJet 4700dn HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series Getting Started Guide X X X X X Driver CD X X X X X Power cable X X X X X Parallel cable X X X X X Tray installation guide X X Printer stand installation guide X X Network installation guide Stapler/stacker installation guide 58 X Item HP Color LaserJet CP4005n HP Color LaserJet CP4005dn HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series Getting Started Guide X X Driver CD X X Power cable X X Network installation guide X X Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Unpacking the printer NOTE Save all the packing materials in case you need to repack and transport the printer at a later date. WARNING! The HP Color LaserJet 4700/CP4005 Series printer weighs approximately 45 kg (80 lb). HP recommends having two or more people lift or move the printer. The following steps describe how to properly unpack the printer from the packing materials. The HP Color LaserJet 4700dn printer model is shown. ENWW 1. Open the brackets on the packing box. Detach the brackets from the packing box. 2. Discard the brackets. Unpacking the printer 59 3. Remove the power supply cord, CD-ROM, and user documentation from the packing box. HP Color LaserJet *XXXXX-XXXXX* xxxxx-xxxxx © 2004 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. 60 4. If the printer has an optional 500-sheet paper feeder, it is packaged on top of the printer. Lift the 500-sheet paper feeder from the package, and place it in the prepared location. 5. Remove the shipping blocks, accessory packs, and inner cardboard frame that surrounds the printer. 6. Lift the box frame up and off of the printer. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 7. Lift the printer from the packaging pallet and place it in the prepared location. CAUTION Do not attempt to lift the printer by yourself. At least two people must lift the printer and place it in the prepared location. While two people can lift the printer, using three or four people to lift the printer is a much easier and safer way to move the printer. 8. If you are using an optional 500-sheet paper feeder, align the printer with the guide pins on top of the paper feeder. NOTE While two people can lift the printer, at least one other person should be available to help position the printer on an optional paper feeder if one is installed. 9. ENWW Remove the packing tape from the front of the printer. Unpacking the printer 61 10. Remove the packing tape from the rear of the printer. 11. Lift the duplexer tray off of the printer. 12. Install the duplexer tray. 62 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 13. Open the top cover. 14. Remove the packing tape from the fuser area. Close the top cover. CAUTION Make sure that you remove all of the packing materials to avoid damage to the printer when the power is turned on. ENWW Unpacking the printer 63 Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode, the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays by pressing any of the buttons on the control panel. The following detectable standard-sized media is supported in Tray 2 and the optional trays: letter, legal, executive, A4, A5, and (JIS) B5. CAUTION Do not print cardstock, envelopes, heavy or extra heavy paper, or unsupported sizes of media from the 500-sheet trays. Print on these types of media only from Tray 1. Do not overfill the input tray or open it while it is in use. Doing so can cause jams in the printer. 1. Remove the tray from the printer. NOTE After sliding the tray out, lift the tray up slightly to remove it. 2. 64 Adjust the rear media-length guide by squeezing the guide adjustment latch and sliding the back of the tray to the length of the media being used. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 3. Slide the media-width guides open to the size for the media you are using. 4. Load media into the tray face up. NOTE For best performance, load the tray completely full without splitting or fanning the ream of paper. Splitting or fanning the ream might cause a multi-feed problem, which could result in a paper jam. The capacity of the paper tray can vary. For example, if you are using 75 g/m2 (20 lb) paper, the tray holds a full ream of 500 sheets. If the media is heavier than 75 g/m2 (20 lb), the tray will not hold a full ream, and you must reduce the number of sheets accordingly. Do not overfill the tray because the printer might not pick up the paper. NOTE If the tray is not properly adjusted, the printer might display an error message or the media might jam. ENWW 5. Insert the tray into the printer. The printer will display the tray’s media type and size. If the configuration is not correct, make sure the guides are set correctly. 6. If the configuration is correct, press to clear the message. Loading detectable standard-sized media into Tray 2 and optional trays 65 Connecting power 1. Plug the AC power cord into the printer and into the power outlet. 2. Turn the printer on. NOTE For proper operation, it is recommended to plug the printer directly into the power outlet. 66 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Installing a new control panel label Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed. Labels are available for several languages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure. 1. Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label. 2. Position the new label over the top of the control panel. 3. Press the label firmly down onto the control panel. NOTE When applying the label, start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel. 4. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 5. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 6. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 7. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 8. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 9. Press to select LANGUAGE. 10. Press or 11. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate language. 12. Press Menu. ENWW Installing a new control panel label 67 Testing the printer operation Print a configuration page to ensure that the printer is working correctly. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION. 5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION. The message Printing... CONFIGURATION displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page. NOTE If the printer is configured with an HP Jetdirect print server or a stapler/stacker, additional configuration pages will print that provide information about those devices. 68 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Sleep delay The adjustable sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period. You can set the length of time before the printer enters sleep mode to 1 MINUTE, 15 MINUTES, 30 MINUTES, 45 MINUTES, 60 MINUTES, 90 MINUTES, 2 HOURS, or 4 HOURS. The default setting is 30 MINUTES. NOTE The printer display dims when the printer is in sleep mode. This mode does not affect printer warmup time. Setting sleep delay 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Sleep Delay. 7. Press to select Sleep Delay. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the time period. to select the appropriate time period. 10. Press Menu. CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode, the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays. Disabling/enabling sleep mode 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight RESETS. 5. Press to select RESETS. 6. Press to highlight SLEEP MODE. 7. Press to select SLEEP MODE. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select ON or OFF. 10. Press Menu. ENWW Sleep delay 69 Connecting to a computer The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer supports network and parallel connections at the same time. The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printer supports network and USB connections. Parallel configuration For the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer, a parallel connection is made by connecting the printer to the computer using a bidirectional parallel cable (IEEE-1284-C compliant) with a Cconnector plugged into the printer parallel port. The cable can be a maximum of 10 meters (30 feet) long. When used to describe a parallel interface, the term bidirectional indicates that the printer is able to both receive data from the computer and send data to the computer through the parallel port. Figure 3-1 Parallel port configuration 1 C-connector 2 Parallel port NOTE To use the enhanced capabilities of the bidirectional parallel interface such as bidirectional communication between the computer and printer, faster transfer of data, and automatic configuration of printer drivers, ensure that the most recent printer driver is installed. For more information, see Printer drivers on page 81 or Printer drivers for Macintosh computers on page 84. NOTE Factory settings support automatic switching between the parallel port and one or more network connections on the printer. If you are experiencing problems, see Network configuration on page 89. USB configuration The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers supports a USB 2.0 connection. The USB port is located on the back of the printer, as shown in the figure below. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable. 70 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Figure 3-2 USB configuration 1 USB connector 2 USB port The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer also includes a third-party accessory (ACC) port that uses USB host protocol, shown in the following figure. Figure 3-3 ACC accessory port 1 ACC accessory port Auxiliary connection configuration The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer supports an auxiliary connection for paper handling devices. The port is located on the back of the printer, as shown in the following figure. ENWW Connecting to a computer 71 Figure 3-4 Auxiliary connection configuration 1 Auxiliary connector HP Jetdirect print servers The HP Jetdirect print servers facilitate network management by allowing you to connect a printer directly to your network at any location. They support multiple network protocols and operating systems. HP Jetdirect print servers also support the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), which provides network managers with remote printer management and troubleshooting through HP Web Jetadmin software. The HP Color LaserJet 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn, 4700ph+, CP4005n, and CP4005dn printers are equipped with embedded HP Jetdirect print servers. These servers support Ethernet 10/100T networking for peripherals. An HP Jetdirect EIO print server can also be installed in one of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer’s EIO slots to allow network connection. Figure 3-5 Jetdirect EIO slot (HP Color LaserJet 4700 shown) NOTE Installation of an EIO print server and network configuration should be performed by a network administrator. Configure the card either through the control panel or with HP Web Jetadmin software. 72 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Available software solutions For a summary of available software solutions, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide, or visit http://www.hp.com/support/net_printing. Wireless printing Wireless networks offer a safe, secure, and cost-effective alternative to traditional wired network connections. IEEE 802.11 standard Optional HP Jetdirect wireless print servers support connection to an 802.11 network. This wireless technology provides a high-quality printing solution without the physical constraints of wiring. Peripherals can be conveniently placed anywhere in an office or home and can be easily moved without changing network cables. Installation is easy with the HP Install Network Printer Wizard. NOTE HP Jetdirect 802.11 print servers are available for USB connections. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology is a low-power, short-range radio technology that can be used to wirelessly connect computers, printers, personal digital assistants (PDAs), cell phones, and other devices. Unlike infrared technology, Bluetooth’s reliance on radio signals means that devices do not have to be in the same room, office, or cubicle with an unobstructed line of sight in order to communicate. This wireless technology increases portability and efficiency within business network applications. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers use a Bluetooth adapter (HP bt1300) to incorporate Bluetooth wireless technology. The adapter is available for either USB or parallel connections. The adapter has a 10-meter line-of-sight operation range in the 2.5 GHz ISM band and can achieve data transfer rates up to 723 Kbps. The device supports the following Bluetooth profiles: ENWW ● Hardcopy Cable Replacement Profile (HCRP) ● Serial Port Profile (SPP) ● Object Push Profile (OPP) ● Basic Imaging Profile (BIP) ● Basic Printing Profile (BPP) with XHTML-Print Connecting to a computer 73 Printer software Included with the printer is a CD-ROM containing the printing system software. The software components and printer drivers on this CD-ROM help you use the printer to its fullest potential. See the Getting Started Guide for installation instructions. NOTE For the latest information about the printing system software components, see the readme file at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. For information about installing the printer software, view the Install Notes on the CD-ROM included with the printer. This section summarizes the software included on the CD-ROM. The printing system includes software for end users and network administrators operating in the following operating environments: ● Microsoft® Windows® 98 and Windows Me ● Microsoft Windows 2000, XP (32-bit), and Server 2003 (32-bit) ● Apple Mac OS 9.1 and later and Mac OS 10.2 and later NOTE For a list of the network environments supported by the network administrator software components, see Network configuration on page 89. NOTE For a list of printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product support information, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. Software Software features Automatic Configuration, Update Now, and Preconfiguration features are available with the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer. Driver Autoconfiguration The HP LaserJet PCL 6 and PCL 5c drivers for Windows and the PS drivers for Windows 2000 and Windows XP feature automatic discovery and driver configuration for printer accessories at the time of installation. Some accessories that Driver Autoconfiguration supports are the duplexing unit, optional paper trays, and dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). If the environment supports bidirectional communication, the installer presents Driver Autoconfiguration as an installable component by default for a Typical Installation and for a Custom Installation. Update Now If you have modified the configuration of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 or HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer since installation, the driver can be automatically updated with the new configuration in environments that support bidirectional communication. Click the Update Now button to automatically reflect the new configuration in the driver. NOTE The Update Now feature is not supported in environments where shared Windows 2000 or Windows XP clients are connected to Windows 2000 or Windows XP hosts. 74 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW HP Driver Preconfiguration HP Driver Preconfiguration is a software architecture and set of tools that allows HP software to be customized and distributed in managed corporate printing environments. Using HP Driver Preconfiguration, information technology (IT) administrators can preconfigure the printing and device defaults for HP printer drivers before installing the drivers in the network environment. For more information, see the HP Driver Preconfiguration Support Guide, which is available at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. Installing the printing system software The following sections contain instructions for installing the printing system software. The printer comes with printing system software and printer drivers on a CD-ROM. The printing system software on the CD-ROM must be installed to take full advantage of the printer features. If you do not have access to a CD-ROM drive, you can download the printing system software from the Internet at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. NOTE You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX® and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support see http://www.hp.com/go/linux. For UNIX support see http://www.hp.com/go/ jetdirectunix_software. You can download the latest software free of charge at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. Installing Windows printing system software for direct connections This section explains how to install the printing system software for Microsoft Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP. When installing the printing software in a direct-connect environment, always install the software before connecting the parallel or USB cable. If the parallel or USB cable was connected before the software installation, see Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected on page 77. Either a parallel or USB cable can be used for the direct connection. However, you cannot connect parallel and USB cables at the same time. Use an IEEE 1284-compatible cable or a standard 2meter USB cable. Installing the printing system software 1. Close all software programs that are open or running. 2. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure: 3. ENWW ● On the Start menu, click Run. ● Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive). ● Click OK. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen. Printer software 75 4. Click Finish when the installation has completed. 5. You might need to restart the computer. 6. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed. If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/ clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005 for help or more information. Installing Windows printing system software for networks The software on the printer CD-ROM supports network installation with a Microsoft network. For network installation on other operating systems, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. The HP Jetdirect embedded print server in the HP Color LaserJet 4700n, HP Color LaserJet 4700dn printer, HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn printer, HP Color LaserJet 4005n, or HP Color LaserJet 4005dn includes a 10/100 Base-TX network port. For other available HP Jetdirect print servers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563 or go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/ljCP4005. The installer does not support printer installation or printer object creation on Novell servers. It supports only direct-mode network installations between Windows computers and a printer. To install your printer and create objects on a Novell server, use an HP utility (such as HP Web Jetadmin) or a Novell utility (such as NWAdmin). Installing the printing system software 1. If you are installing the software on Windows 2000 or Windows XP, make sure that you have administrator privileges. 2. Make sure that the HP Jetdirect print server and printer are properly connected to the network. Print a configuration page (see Testing the printer operation on page 68). On the second page of the configuration page, locate the IP address that is currently configured. You might need this address to initially identify the printer on your network and complete the installation. 3. Close all software programs that are open or running. 4. Insert the printer CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive. If the welcome screen does not open, start it by using the following procedure: 76 ● On the Start menu, click Run. ● Type the following: X:\setup (where X is the letter of the CD-ROM drive). ● Click OK. 5. When prompted, click Install Printer and follow the instructions on the computer screen. 6. Click Finish when installation has completed. 7. You might need to restart the computer. 8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005 for help or more information. Setting up a Windows computer to use the network printer with Windows-sharing If the computer will print directly to the printer, you can share the printer on the network so that other network users can print to it. See your Windows documentation to enable Windows-sharing. After the printer is shared, install the printer software on all computers that share the printer. Installing the software after the parallel or USB cable has been connected If you have already connected a parallel or USB cable to a Windows computer, the New Hardware Found dialog box displays when you turn on the computer. Installing the software for Windows 98 or Windows Me 1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search CD-ROM drive. 2. Click Next. 3. Follow the instructions on the computer screen. 4. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed. If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005 for help or more information. Installing the software for Windows 2000 or Windows XP 1. In the New Hardware Found dialog box, click Search. 2. On the Locate Driver Files screen, select the Specify a Location check box, clear all other check boxes, and then click Next. 3. Type the letter for the root directory. For example, X:\ (where "X:\" is the letter of the root directory on the CD-ROM drive). 4. Click Next. 5. Follow the instructions on the computer screen. 6. Click Finish when installation has completed. 7. Select a language and follow the instructions on the computer screen. 8. Print a Test Page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed. If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, check the installation notes and readme files on the printer CD-ROM or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005 for help or more information. ENWW Printer software 77 Uninstalling the software This section explains how to uninstall the printing system software. Removing software from Windows operating systems Use the Uninstaller in the HP Color LaserJet 4700/Tools or HP Color LaserJet CP4005/Tools program group to select and remove any or all of the Windows HP printing system components. 1. Click Start and then click Programs. 2. Point to HP Color LaserJet 4700 and then click Tools. 3. Click Uninstaller. 4. Click Next. 5. Select the HP printing system components you want to uninstall. 6. Click OK. 7. Follow the instructions on the computer screen to complete the uninstallation. Software for networks For a summary of available HP network installation and configuration software solutions, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the printer. HP Web Jetadmin HP Web Jetadmin allows you to manage HP Jetdirect-connected printers within your intranet using a Web browser. HP Web Jetadmin is a browser-based management tool, and should be installed only on a single network administration server. It can be installed and run on these systems: ● Fedora Core and SuSe Linux ● Windows 2000 Professional, Server, and Advanced Server ● Windows XP Professional Service Pack 1 ● Windows Server 2003 When installed on a host server, HP Web Jetadmin can be accessed by any client through a supported web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.5 and 6.0 or Netscape Navigator 7.0. HP Web Jetadmin has the following features: 78 ● Task-oriented user interface provides configurable views, saving network managers significant time. ● Customizable user profiles let network administrators include only the function viewed or used. ● Instant e-mail notification of hardware failure, low supplies, and other printer problems can be routed to different people. ● Remote installation and management from anywhere using only a standard Web browser. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW ● Advanced autodiscovery locates peripherals on the network, without manually entering each printer into a database. ● Simple integration into enterprise management packages. ● Ability to quickly find peripherals based on parameters such as IP address, color capability, and model name. ● Ability to easily organize peripherals into logical groups, with virtual office maps for easy navigation. ● Ability to manage and configure multiple printers at once. To download a current version of HP Web Jetadmin and to see the latest list of supported host systems, visit HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin. UNIX The HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX is a simple printer installation utility for HP-UX and Solaris networks. It is available for download from HP Customer Care Online at http://www.hp.com/go/ jetdirectunix_software. Utilities The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer is equipped with several utilities, which make it easy to monitor and manage the printer on a network. Embedded Web server This printer is equipped with an embedded Web server, which allows access to information about printer and network activities. A Web server provides an environment in which web programs may run, much in the same way that an operating system, such as Windows, provides an environment for programs to run on your computer. The output from these programs can then be displayed by a Web browser, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. When a Web server is "embedded", that means it resides on a hardware device (such as a printer) or in firmware, rather than as software that is loaded on a network server. The advantage of an embedded Web server is that it provides an interface to the printer that anyone can access with a network-connected computer or a standard Web browser. There is no special software to install or configure. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the printer. Features The HP embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network card status and manage printing functions from your computer. With the HP embedded Web server, you can do the following: ENWW ● View printer status information. ● Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones. ● View and change tray configurations. ● View and change the printer control panel menu configuration. ● View and print internal pages. Printer software 79 ● Receive notification of printer and supplies events. ● Add or customize links to other Web sites. ● Select the language in which to display the embedded Web server pages. ● View and change network configuration. For a complete explanation of the features and functionality of the embedded Web server, see Using the embedded Web server on page 505. Other components and utilities Several software applications are available for Windows and Mac OS users, as well as for network administrators. 80 Windows Mac OS Network administrator ● Software installer — automates the printing system installation ● ● ● Online Web registration PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs) — for use with the Apple PostScript drivers that come with the Mac OS ● HP Web Jetadmin — a browserbased system management tool. See http://www.hp.com/go/ webjetadmin for the latest HP Web Jetadmin software HP LaserJet Utility (available from the Internet) — a printer management utility for Mac OS users ● HP Jetdirect Printer Installer for UNIX — available for download from http://www.hp.com/support/ net_printing Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Printer drivers The product comes with software that allows the computer to communicate with the product (by using a printer language). This software is called a printer driver. Printer drivers provide access to product features, such as printing on custom-sized paper, resizing documents, and inserting watermarks. Supported printer drivers The following printer drivers are provided for the product. If the printer driver that you want is not on the product CD-ROM or is not available on http://www.hp.com, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the program that you are using, and request a driver for the product. NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com. Depending on the configuration of Windows-based computers, the installation program for the product software automatically checks the computer for Internet access in order to obtain the latest drivers. Operating system1 PCL 6 printer driver PCL 5 printer driver PS printer driver Microsoft Windows 98 (HP LaserJet 4700 Series only) X X X X X X Windows 2000 X X X Windows XP X X X Windows Server 2003 X X X PPD2 printer driver Windows Millennium (Me) (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) Mac OS 9.1 or later (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) X X X X Mac OS 10.2 or later 1 2 Not all product features are available from all drivers or operating systems. See the contextsensitive help in the printer driver for available features. PostScript (PS) Printer Description files (PPDs) Additional drivers The following drivers are not included on the CD-ROM, but are available from the Internet. ENWW ● OS/2 PCL printer driver ● OS/2 PS printer driver ● UNIX model scripts ● Linux drivers ● HP OpenVMS drivers Printer drivers 81 NOTE The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM. You can obtain Model Scripts for UNIX® and Linux by downloading them from the Internet or by requesting them from an HP-authorized service or support provider. For Linux support see http://www.hp.com/go/linux. For UNIX support see http://www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software. Select the correct printer driver Select a printer driver based on the operating system that you are using and the way that you use the product. See the printer-driver Help for the features that are available. For information about gaining access to the printer driver-Help, see Printer-driver Help. ● The PCL 6 printer driver can provide the best overall performance and access to your printer features. ● The PCL 5 printer driver is recommended for general office monochrome and color printing. ● Use the PostScript (PS) driver if you are printing primarily from PostScript-based programs such as Adobe Photoshop® and CorelDRAW®, for compatibility with PostScript Level 3 needs, or for PS flash font support. NOTE The product automatically switches between PS and PCL printer languages. Printer-driver Help (Windows) Printer-driver Help is separate from program Help. The printer-driver help provides explanations for the buttons, checkboxes, and drop-down lists that are in the printer driver. It also includes instructions for performing common printing tasks, such as printing on both sides, printing multiple pages on one sheet, and printing the first page or covers on different paper. Activate the printer-driver Help screens in one of the following ways: ● Click the Help button. ● Press the F1 key on the computer keyboard. ● Click the question-mark symbol in the upper-right corner of the printer driver. ● Right-click on any item in the driver, and then click What's This?. Gaining access to the printer drivers Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer: 82 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Operating System To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed To change the print job default settings (for example, turn on Print on Both Sides by default) To change the configuration settings (for example, add a tray or enable/disable Manual Duplexing) Windows 98 and Windows Millennium (Me) 1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print. 1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. 1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers. 2. Select the HP Color LaserJet 4700, and then click Properties. Right-click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon, and then select Properties (Windows 98 and Me). 2. 2. Right-click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon, and then select Properties. 3. Click the Configure tab. The steps can vary; this procedure is most common. Windows 2000, XP, and Server 2003 1. On the File menu in the software program, click Print. 1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. 1. Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. 2. Select the HP Color LaserJet 4700, and then click Properties or Preferences. 2. Right-click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon, and then select Printing Preferences. 2. Right-click the HP Color LaserJet 4700 icon, and then select Properties. 3. Click the Device Settings tab. The steps can vary; this procedure is most common. ENWW Printer drivers 83 Printer drivers for Macintosh computers The printer comes with printer driver software that uses a printer language to communicate with the printer. Printer drivers provide access to printer features, such as printing on custom-sized paper, resizing documents, and inserting watermarks. Supported printer drivers A Macintosh printer driver and the necessary PPD files are included with the printer. If the printer driver that you want is not on the printer CD, check the installation notes and the late-breaking readme files to see if the printer driver is supported. If it is not supported, contact the manufacturer or distributor of the software program that you are using, and request a driver for the printer. NOTE The most recent drivers are available at http://www.hp.com. Gaining access to the printer drivers Use one of the following methods to open the printer drivers from your computer. 84 Operating System To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed To change the print job default settings (for example, turn on Print on Both Sides by default) To change the configuration settings (for example, add a physical option such as a tray, or turn on or off a driver feature such as Allow Manual Duplexing) Mac OS v9.1 or later 1. On the File menu, click Print. 1. On the File menu, click Print. 1. Click the desktop printer icon. 2. Change any settings that you want to on the various pop-up menus. 2. As you change settings on the pop-up menu, click Save Settings. 2. From the Printing menu, click Change Setup. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Operating System To change the settings for all print jobs until the software program is closed To change the print job default settings (for example, turn on Print on Both Sides by default) To change the configuration settings (for example, add a physical option such as a tray, or turn on or off a driver feature such as Allow Manual Duplexing) Mac OS X v10.2 1. On the File menu, click Print. 1. On the File menu, click Print. 1. In the Finder, on the Go menu, click Applications. 2. Change any settings that you want to on the various pop-up menus. 2. Change the settings that you want on the various pop-up menus, and then, on the Presets pop-up menu, click Save as and type a name for the preset. 2. Open Utilities, and then open Print Center. 3. Click on the print queue. 4. On the Printers menu, click Show Info. 5. Click the Installable Options menu. These settings are saved in the Presets menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print. Mac OS X v10.3 1. On the File menu, click Print. 1. On the File menu, click Print. 2. Change any settings that you want to on the various pop-up menus. 2. Change the settings that you want on the various pop-up menus, and then, on the Presets pop-up menu, click Save as and type a name for the preset. These settings are saved in the Presets menu. To use the new settings, you must select the saved preset option every time you open a program and print. ENWW NOTE Configuration settings might not be available in Classic mode. 1. Open Printer Setup Utility by selecting the hard drive, clicking Applications, clicking Utilities, and then doubleclicking Printer Setup Utility. 2. Click on the print queue. 3. On the Printers menu, click Show Info. 4. Click the Installable Options menu. Printer drivers for Macintosh computers 85 Software for Macintosh computers The HP installer provides PostScript® Printer Description (PPD) files, Printer Dialog Extensions (PDEs), and the HP Printer Utility for use with Macintosh computers. If both the printer and the Macintosh computer are connected to a network, use the printer embedded Web server (EWS) to configure the printer. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server on page 505. Installing Macintosh printing system software for networks This section describes how to install Macintosh printing system software. The printing system software supports Mac OS v9.1 and later and Mac OS X v10.2 and later. The printing system software includes the following components: ● PostScript Printer Description (PPD) files The PPDs, in combination with the Apple PostScript printer drivers, provide access to printer features. An installation program for the PPDs and other software is provided on the compact disc (CD) that came with the printer. Use the Apple PostScript printer driver that comes with the computer. ● HP Printer Utility The HP Printer Utility provides access to features that are not available in the printer driver. Use the illustrated screens to select printer features and complete the following tasks with the printer: ● Name the printer. ● Assign the printer to a zone on the network. ● Assign an internet protocol (IP) address to the printer. ● Download files and fonts. ● Configure and set the printer for IP or AppleTalk printing. You can use the HP Printer Utility when your printer uses a universal serial bus (USB) or is connected to a TCP/IP-based network. NOTE The HP Printer Utility is supported for Mac OS X v10.2 or later. To install printer drivers for Mac OS v9.1 and later 86 1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port. 2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop. 3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder. 4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen. 5. On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Desktop Printer Utility. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 6. Double-click Printer (AppleTalk). 7. Next to AppleTalk Printer Selection, click Change. 8. Select the printer, click Auto Setup, and then click Create. NOTE The icon on the desktop looks generic. All of the print panels display in the print dialog box with each software program. To install printer drivers for Mac OS X v10.2 and later 1. Connect the network cable between the HP Jetdirect print server and a network port. 2. Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop. 3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder. 4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen. 5. On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center or Printer Setup Utility. NOTE If you are using Mac OS X v10.3, then the Printer Setup Utility has replaced the Print Center. 6. Click Add Printer. 7. Select Rendezvous as the connection type. 8. Select your printer from the list. 9. Click Add Printer. 10. Close the Print Center or the Printer Setup Utility by clicking the close button in the upper-left corner. Installing Macintosh printing system software for direct connections (USB) NOTE Macintosh computers do not support parallel port connections. This section explains how to install the printing system software for Mac OS v9.1 and later and Mac OS X v10.2 and later. The Apple PostScript driver must be installed in order to use the PPD files. Use the Apple PostScript driver that came with your Macintosh computer. ENWW Software for Macintosh computers 87 To install the printing system software 1. Connect a USB cable between the USB port on the printer and the USB port on the computer. Use a standard 2-meter (6.56-foot) USB cable. 2. Insert the printer CD into the CD-ROM drive and run the installer. The CD menu runs automatically. If the CD menu does not run automatically, double-click the CD icon on the desktop. 3. Double-click the Installer icon in the HP LaserJet Installer folder. 4. Follow the instructions on the computer screen. 5. For Mac OS v9.1 and later: a. On the computer hard drive, open Applications, open Utilities, and then open Print Center. b. Double-click Printer (USB), and then click OK. c. Next to USB Printer Selection, click Change. d. Select the printer, and then click OK. e. Next to Postscript Printer Description (PPD) File, click Auto Setup, and then click Create. f. On the Printing menu, click Set Default Printer. For Mac OS X v10.2 and later: USB queues are created automatically when the printer is attached to the computer. However, the queue will use a generic PPD if the installer has not been run before the USB cable is connected. To change the queue PPD, open the Print Center or Printer Setup Utility, select the correct printer queue, and then click Show Info to open the Printer Info dialog box. In the pop-up menu, select Printer Model, and then, in the pop-up menu in which Generic is selected, select the correct PPD for the printer. 6. Print a test page or a page from any software program to make sure that the software is correctly installed. If installation fails, reinstall the software. If this fails, see the installation notes or late-breaking readme files on the printer CD or the flyer that came in the printer box, or go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 for help or more information. NOTE The icon on the Mac OS v9.x desktop looks generic. All of the print panels display in the Print dialog box with each software program. To remove software from Macintosh operating systems To remove the software from a Macintosh computer, drag the PPD files to the trash can. 88 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Network configuration You might need to configure certain network parameters on the printer. You can configure these parameters from installation software, the printer control panel, the embedded Web server, or management software, such as HP Web Jetadmin or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh. NOTE For more information about using the embedded Web server, see Using the embedded Web server on page 505. For more information about supported networks and network configuration tools, see the HP Jetdirect Print Server Administrator’s Guide. The guide comes with printers in which an HP Jetdirect print server is installed. This section contains the following instructions for configuring network parameters from the printer control panel: ● Configuring TCP/IP parameters. ● Disabling unused network protocols. Configuring TCP/IP parameters You can use the printer control panel to configure these TCP/IP parameters: ● IP address (4 bytes) ● Subnet mask (4 bytes) ● Default gateway (4 bytes) Manually configuring TCP/IP parameters from the printer control panel Use manual configuration to set an IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway. Setting an IP address ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 7. Press to select the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 8. Press to highlight TCP/IP. 9. Press to select TCP/IP. 10. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS. 11. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS. Network configuration 89 12. Press to highlight MANUAL. 13. Press to highlight IP Address:. 14. Press to select IP Address:. NOTE The first of four sets of numbers is highlighted. If a number is not highlighted, a highlighted empty underscore displays. 15. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the IP address. 16. Press to move to the next set of numbers. 17. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct IP address is entered. 18. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. Setting the subnet mask 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 7. Press to select the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 8. Press to highlight the TCP/IP menu. 9. Press to select TCP/IP. 10. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS. 11. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS. 12. Press to highlight SUBNET MASK. 13. Press to select SUBNET MASK. NOTE The first of four sets of numbers is highlighted. 14. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring the subnet mask. 15. Press to move to the next set of numbers. 16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 until the correct subnet mask is entered. 17. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. 90 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW Setting the default gateway 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 7. Press to select the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 8. Press to highlight TCP/IP. 9. Press to select TCP/IP. 10. Press to highlight MANUAL SETTINGS. 11. Press to select MANUAL SETTINGS. 12. Press to highlight DEFAULT GATEWAY. 13. Press to select DEFAULT GATEWAY. NOTE The first set of the four sets of numbers shows the default settings. If there is not a number highlighted, a highlighted empty underscore displays. 14. Press or to increase or decrease the number for configuring DEFAULT GATEWAY. 15. Press to move to the next set of numbers. 16. Repeat steps 15 and 16 until the correct subnet mask is entered. 17. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. Disabling network protocols (optional) (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) By factory default, all supported network protocols are enabled. Disabling unused protocols has the following benefits: ● Decreases printer-generated network traffic. ● Prevents unauthorized users from printing to the printer. ● Provides only pertinent information on the configuration page. ● Allows the printer control panel to display protocol-specific error and warning messages. NOTE TCP/IP configuration cannot be disabled on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer. ENWW Network configuration 91 Disabling IPX/SPX NOTE Do not disable this protocol if Windows 95/98, Me, 2000, and XP users will be printing to the printer using direct-mode IPX/SPX. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 7. Press to select the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 8. Press to highlight IPX/SPX. 9. Press to select IPX/SPX. 10. Press to highlight Enable. 11. Press to select Enable. 12. Press to highlight ON or OFF. 13. Press to select ON or OFF. 14. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. Disabling DLC/LLC 92 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 7. Press to select the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 8. Press to highlight DLC/LLC. 9. Press to select DLC/LLC. 10. Press to highlight Enable. 11. Press to select Enable. 12. Press to highlight ON or OFF. Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 13. Press to select ON or OFF. 14. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. Disabling AppleTalk 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight the EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU menu. 7. Press to select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU. 8. Press to highlight APPLETALK. 9. Press to select APPLETALK. 10. Press to highlight Enable. 11. Press to select Enable. 12. Press to highlight ON or OFF. 13. Press to select ON or OFF. 14. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. ENWW Network configuration 93 Setting network security on the printer This printer features control panel locking, which allows network administrators to prevent users from changing certain printer control panel settings. When a menu is locked, unauthorized users trying to change settings at the printer control panel will see the following message: Access Denied MENUS LOCKED Administrators can use HP Web Jetadmin software, the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh, or an ASCII escape sequence to perform this procedure. For instructions to lock the printer control panel by using either the HP Web Jetadmin software or the HP LaserJet Utility for Macintosh, see the online Help. Locking the control panel Network administrators can prevent users from changing printer control panel settings by establishing a password and locking the printer control panel. Administrators can choose from multiple levels of security and can lock certain control panel menus, allowing users to change the rest of the menus, or lock all of the menus (including the Stop button). Levels of security Lock setting Control panel items locked Off Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN) Low I/O submenu System setup submenu Resets submenu Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN) Medium Configure Device menu (including all submenus) Diagnostics menu Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN) High Information menu Paper Handling menu Configure Device menu (including all submenus) Diagnostics menu Service menu (locked with a factory-set PIN) Stop button Using an ASCII PJL escape sequence to set network security If you decide to use the ASCII escape sequence, you must use an MS-DOS or Windows ASCII editor to create the commands. The commands must also be sent to the printer by using a DOS-COPY command or an ASCII file download utility. The PJL Technical Reference Manual is located on CDROM (part number 5961-0976). Order a copy of this manual from the HP Web site: http://www.hp.com. 94 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW NOTE In the following examples, EC represents the escape character. For more information about using escape characters, see the PJL Technical Reference Manual. ● To lock or unlock the printer control panel if a password has not been set, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer: EC%-12345x@PJL JOB @PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK=NONE (or MINIMUM, MODERATE, or MAXIMUM) @PJL EOJ EC%-12345x ● To set the password, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer: EC%-12345x@PJL JOB @PJL DEFAULT PASSWORD=[numeric password (0 to 65535)] @PJL EOJ EC%-12345x ● To lock or unlock the control panel if the password has been set, send the following ASCII sequence to the printer: EC%-12345x@PJL JOB PASSWORD=(numeric password) @PJL DEFAULT CPLOCK=NONE (or MINIMUM, MODERATE, or MAXIMUM) @PJL EOJ EC%-12345x ENWW Setting network security on the printer 95 96 Chapter 3 Installation and configuration ENWW 4 Maintenance This chapter provides information about the following topics: ENWW ● Cleaning the printer and accessories ● Performing preventive maintenance ● Managing the print cartridge ● Approximate replacement intervals for supplies ● ETB life ● Changing print cartridges ● Replacing supplies ● Printer memory and fonts ● Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts ● Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) ● Setting the real-time clock 97 Cleaning the printer and accessories Clean the outside surfaces with a water-dampened cloth. Observe the warning and caution below. WARNING! Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power cords to avoid shock hazard. Be careful when cleaning around the fuser area. It might be hot. CAUTION To avoid permanent damage to the print cartridge, do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer. If toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. Component Cleaning Method Outside covers Use an HP Toner Cleaning Cloth (part number 5090-3379) or a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or ammoniabased cleaners. Inside general With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any dust, spilled toner, and paper particles from the paper path area, the registration roller, and the print cartridge cavity. ETB attaching roller Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol. Paper pickup rollers Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol. Color registration detection unit Clean with lint-free paper. If dirt cannot be removed, dampen the paper with alcohol. Cleaning spilled toner Defective print cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam has occurred, some toner might remain on the rollers and guides inside the printer. The pages that print immediately after the jam can pick up this toner. Use a vacuum that is designed for picking up fine particles. See Vacuum specifications on page 98. CAUTION When cleaning the printer, do not touch the ETB with the damp cloth or with your fingers. Vacuum specifications Do not vacuum the printer or any spilled toner using a conventional vacuum. Toner particles used in this product might be too fine for effective vacuuming and could result in damage to conventional vacuums. A vacuum specifically designed for cleaning toner can be used if it is capable of filtering fine particles (5 microns in diameter). 98 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Performing preventive maintenance The printer requires periodic maintenance to maintain optimum performance. A control panel message alerts you when it is time to purchase the preventive maintenance kits. NOTE The printer maintenance kit is a consumable item and is not covered under the original printer warranty or under most extended warranties. ENWW Performing preventive maintenance 99 Managing the print cartridge This section provides information about HP print cartridges, their life expectancies, how to store them, and how to identify genuine HP supplies. Information on non-HP print cartridges is also included. HP print cartridges When you use a genuine HP print cartridge, you can obtain several types of information, such as the following: ● Amount of toner remaining ● Estimated number of pages remaining ● Number of pages printed Non-HP print cartridges Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP print cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their quality. Service or repair that is required as a result of using a non-HP print cartridge will not be covered under the printer warranty. When you use a non-HP print cartridge, certain features, such as remaining toner volume data may not be available. Using genuine HP supplies ensures the availability of all HP printing features. Print cartridge authentication The printer will let you know if a print cartridge is not a genuine HP print cartridge when you insert it into the printer. If you believe that you purchased a genuine HP supply, go to www.hp.com/go/ anticounterfeit. Print cartridge storage Do not remove the print cartridge from its package until you are ready to use it. Always store the print cartridge in the proper environment. The storage temperature should be between -20° to 40°C (-4° to 104°F). The relative humidity should be between 10% and 90%. CAUTION To prevent damage to the print cartridge, do not expose it to light for more than a few minutes. Print cartridge life expectancy The life of the print cartridge depends on the amount of toner that print jobs require and the length of life for the components inside the cartridge. When printing text at approximately 5% coverage (typical for a business letter), the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series print cartridge lasts an average of 10,000 pages (color) and 11,000 pages (mono). The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series print cartridges, both black and color, last 7,500 pages. The page-yield specification that HP provides is a general guideline. Actual yield can vary according to usage conditions. At any time, you can verify life expectancy by checking the supply level, as described below. 100 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Checking the supply level You can check the supply (toner) level by using the control panel, the embedded Web server, or HP Web Jetadmin. Using the control panel 1. Press Menu to enter the Menu. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight SUPPLIES STATUS. 5. Press to select SUPPLIES STATUS. Using the embedded Web server 1. In your browser, enter the IP address for the printer home page. This takes you to the printer status page. 2. On the left side of the screen, click Supplies Status. This takes you to the supplies status page, which provides print cartridge information. Using HP Web Jetadmin In HP Web Jetadmin, select the printer. The device status page shows print cartridge information. ENWW Managing the print cartridge 101 Approximate replacement intervals for supplies The following table lists the estimated replacement intervals for supplies and the control panel messages that prompt when to replace each item. Usage conditions and print patterns can cause results to vary. Item Printer message Page count Approximate time period2 Black cartridges REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE HP Color LaserJet 4700: 11,000 pages1 HP Color LaserJet 4700: 3.6 months HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 7,500 pages1 HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 4 months HP Color LaserJet 4700: 10,000 pages1 HP Color LaserJet 4700: 3.3 months HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 7,500 pages1 HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 4 months HP Color LaserJet 4700: 120,000 pages HP Color LaserJet 4700: 40 months HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 100,000 pages HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 50 months HP Color LaserJet 4700: 150,000 pages3 HP Color LaserJet 4700: 50 months HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 125,000 pages3 HP Color LaserJet CP4005: 62 months Color cartridges ETB Fuser REPLACE [COLOR] CARTRIDGE REPLACE TRANSFER KIT REPLACE FUSER KIT Approximate average A4-/letter-size page count based on 5% coverage of individual colors. Approximate life is based on 3,000 pages per month for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 models and 2,000 pages per month for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 models. 3 Approximate life is estimated at 150,000 pages when printing in 4-page intermittent mode for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 models and 125,000 pages for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 models. You can use the embedded Web server to order supplies. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server on page 505. 1 2 102 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW ETB life Depending on the printer workload, the customer will need to replace the ETB two or three times during the life of the printer. To help plan supplies purchases, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers calculates an estimated remaining number of pages that can be printed with the ETB. The percentage remaining displays on the Supplies Status page under Transfer Kit: HP Part Number: HP Q7504A for the printers (for exchange part numbers, see chapter 8). You can view the Supplies Status page by printing it from the printer control panel. If the printer is connected to the network, you can also view the page in your Web browser or through the HP Web Jetadmin software. The number of pages an ETB can print is a function of the number of pages that have been printed on the belt. The ETB will come to the end of life when the actual number of pages fed reaches 120,000 pages, for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series, and 100,000 for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series, regardless of intermittent/continuous printing or paper size. ENWW ETB life 103 Changing print cartridges When a print cartridge approaches the end of its useful life, the control panel displays a message recommending that you order a replacement. The printer can continue to print using the current print cartridge until the control panel displays a message instructing you to replace the cartridge. The printer uses four colors and has a different print cartridge for each color: black (K), magenta (M), cyan (C), and yellow (Y). Replace a print cartridge when the printer control panel displays a REPLACE [COLOR] CARTRIDGE message. The control panel display will also indicate the color that should be replaced (if a genuine HP cartridge is currently installed). Replacing a print cartridge CAUTION If toner gets on clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash the clothes in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric. NOTE For information about recycling used print cartridges, visit the HP LaserJet Supplies Web site at http://www.hp.com/go/recycle. To replace the print cartridge 1. Lift the top cover of the printer. CAUTION The fuser might be hot. 104 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 2. Pull down the front cover and ETB. CAUTION Do not place any item on the ETB while it is open. If the ETB unit is punctured, print quality problems could result. ENWW 3. Remove the used print cartridge from the printer. 4. Remove the new print cartridge from the bag. Place the used print cartridge in the bag for recycling. Changing print cartridges 105 5. Align the print cartridge with the tracks inside the printer and insert the cartridge until it is completely seated. NOTE The print cartridge tape seal is removed automatically when the print cartridge is installed in the printer. NOTE If a cartridge is in the wrong slot, the control panel will display the message INCORRECT [COLOR] CARTRIDGE. 6. Close the front cover and then close the top cover. After a short while, the control panel should display Ready. 7. Installation is complete. Place the used print cartridge in the box in which the new cartridge arrived. See the enclosed recycling guide for recycling instructions. 8. If you are using a non-HP print cartridge, check the control panel for further instructions. For additional help, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. 106 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Replacing supplies When you use genuine HP supplies, the printer automatically notifies you when supplies are nearly depleted. The notification to order supplies allows ample time to order new supplies before they need to be replaced. Locating supplies Supplies are identified by their labeling and their blue plastic handles. The following figure illustrates the location of each supply item. Figure 4-1 Supply item locations 1 Fuser 2 Print cartridges 3 ETB Supply replacement guidelines To facilitate the replacement of supplies, keep the following guidelines in mind when setting up the printer. ● Allow sufficient space above and in the front of the printer for removing supplies. ● The printer should be located on a flat, sturdy surface. For instructions on installing supplies, see the installation guides provided with each supply item or see more information at http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljCP4005. When you connect, select Solve a Problem. CAUTION Hewlett-Packard recommends the use of genuine HP products in this printer. Use of non-HP products may cause problems requiring service that is not covered by the HewlettPackard extended warranty or service agreements. ENWW Replacing supplies 107 Making room around the printer for replacing supplies The following illustration shows the clearance necessary in front of, above, and to the side of the printer for replacing supplies. 3 1 2 Figure 4-2 Supplies replacement clearance diagram 1 530 mm (20.9 inches) in width 2 940 mm (37 inches) in depth 3 804 mm (31.7 inches) in height Replacing the stapler cartridge (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series) The stapler cartridge contains 5,000 staples. Replace the entire cartridge when it is empty. Replace the stapler cartridge if the printer control panel display prompts you with a STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES message (at this point, the stapler cartridge has 20 to 50 staples left) or a REPLACE STAPLER CARTRIDGE message. If the stapler runs out of staples and the stapler/stacker is configured to CONTINUE, jobs continue to print to the stapler/stacker, but they are not stapled. If the stapler/stacker is configured to stop, printing stops until a new stapler cartridge is loaded. NOTE HP recommends that you replace the stapler cartridge as soon as the REPLACE STAPLER CARTRIDGE message is displayed. Although some usable staples remain in the cartridge, they could fall into the stapler mechanism and cause product failure. 108 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Loading a new stapler cartridge 1. On the left side of the stapler/stacker, open the stapler cartridge cover by gently pulling it. NOTE For information on ordering a new stapler cartridge (part number C8091A), see Supplies and accessories on page 563. 2. ENWW Grasp the stapler cartridge handle and pull up gently. Replacing supplies 109 3. Twist the stapler cartridge gently in a counter-clockwise direction and pull it out. 4. Insert the new stapler cartridge and push it down until it snaps into place. NOTE To obtain a new stapler cartridge, order part number C8091A. 110 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 5. Close the stapler cartridge door. Replacing the ETB Replace the ETB when a REPLACE TRANSFER KIT message displays on the control panel. 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Open the top and front cover. 3. Lower the ETB by pulling the green handle at the top of the unit downward. 4. Press the small blue latches located on either side of the bottom of the ETB and lift the unit out of the printer. 5. Install the new ETB. 6. Close the front and top covers. 7. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. Replacing the fuser Replace the fuser when a REPLACE IMAGE FUSING UNIT KIT message displays on the control panel. ENWW 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Open the top cover. 3. Grasp the purple handles on the fuser. 4. Remove the old fuser from the printer. 5. Install the new fuser. Replacing supplies 111 6. Close the top cover. 7. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. 112 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Printer memory and fonts The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer has two 200-pin DDR SDRAM slots. The HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printer has one 200-pin DDR SDRAM slot. One slot is available for adding memory to the printer. DDR SDRAM memory is available in 128 MB, 256 MB, and 512 MB modules. NOTE Memory specification: HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers use 200-pin small outline dual inline memory modules (SODIMM) that support 128 or 256 MB of RAM. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series printer also has three flash memory card slots for printer firmware, fonts, and other solutions. ● The first flash memory card is reserved for printer firmware. NOTE Use the first flash memory card slot for firmware only. The slot is marked "Firmware Slot". ● The two additional flash memory card slots enable the user to add fonts and third-party solutions, such as signatures and personalities. The slots are marked "Slot 2" and "Slot 3”. For more information about types of solutions available, go to http://www.hp.com/go/gsc. NOTE Flash memory cards adhere to Compact Flash specifications and size. CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you install a camera-type flash memory card, the control panel displays a message asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be lost. You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print complex graphics or PostScript documents, or use many downloaded fonts. Additional memory also allows the printer to print multiple, collated copies at the maximum speed. NOTE Single inline memory modules (SIMMs) / dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) used on previous HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with this printer. NOTE To order SODIMMs, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. Before ordering additional memory, see how much memory is currently installed by printing a configuration page. Printing a configuration page ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION. 5. Press to print the configuration page. Printer memory and fonts 113 Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts You can install more memory for the printer, and on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 models you can also install a font card to allow the printer to print characters for languages such as Chinese or the Cyrillic alphabet. CAUTION Static electricity can damage DIMMs. When handling DIMMs, either wear an antistatic wrist strap, or frequently touch the surface of the DIMM antistatic package and then touch bare metal on the printer. Installing a hard drive (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series) 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. 114 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW ENWW 3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer. 4. Locate an open EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They can be discarded. Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts 115 5. Firmly insert the hard drive into the EIO slot. 6. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the hard drive. 7. Connect the cables and power cord, and turn the printer on. 116 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW Installing DDR memory DIMMs ENWW 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. 3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer. Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts 117 4. Grasp the black tabs situated near the top and bottom of the formatter board. 5. Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the printer. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface. NOTE For the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+, pivot up the bracket to access the second memory slot. 118 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW ENWW 6. To replace a DDR DIMM that is currently installed, spread the latches apart on each side of the DIMM slot, lift the DDR DIMM up at an angle, and pull it out. 7. Remove the new DIMM from the antistatic package. Locate the alignment notch on the bottom edge of the DIMM. 8. Holding the DIMM by the edges, align the notch on the DIMM with the bar in the DIMM slot at an angle and firmly press the DIMM into the slot until it is fully seated. When installed correctly, the metal contacts are not visible. Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts 119 9. Push down on the DIMM until both latches engage the DIMM. NOTE If you have difficulty inserting the DIMM, make sure the notch on the bottom of the DIMM is aligned with the bar in the slot. If the DIMM still does not go in, make sure you are using the correct type of DIMM. 10. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into the printer. 120 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 11. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on. 12. If you installed a memory DIMM, go to Enabling memory on page 125. Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) CAUTION Do not insert a flash memory card that is designed for use with a digital camera into the printer. The printer does not support photo printing directly from a flash memory card. If you install a camera-type flash memory card, the control panel displays a message asking if you want to reformat the flash memory card. If you choose to reformat the card, all data on the card will be lost. 1. ENWW Turn the printer off. Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts 121 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. 3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer. 122 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 4. Grasp the black tabs situated near the top and bottom of the formatter board. 5. Gently pull on the black tabs to pull the formatter board from the printer. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface. NOTE For the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+, pivot up the bracket to access the second memory slot. ENWW Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts 123 6. Align the groove on the side of the flash memory card with the notches in the connector and push it in the slot until it is fully seated. CAUTION Do not insert the flash memory card at an angle. NOTE The first flash memory slot marked "Firmware Slot" is reserved for firmware only. Slots 2 and 3 should be used for all other solutions. 7. Align the formatter board in the tracks at the top and bottom of the slot, and then slide the board back into the printer. 124 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 8. Reconnect the power cable and interface cables, and turn the printer on. Enabling memory If you installed a memory DIMM, set the printer driver to recognize the newly added memory. To enable memory for Windows 98 and Me 1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers. 2. Right-click the printer and select Properties. 3. On the Configure tab, click More. 4. In the Total Memory field, type or select the total amount of memory that is now installed. 5. Click OK. To enable memory for Windows 2000 and XP ENWW 1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, and click Printers or Printers and Faxes. 2. Right-click the printer and select Properties. 3. On the Device Settings tab, click Printer Memory (in the Installable Options section). 4. Select the total amount of memory that is now installed. 5. Click OK. Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts 125 Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) You can install an HP Jetdirect print server in an open EIO slot. To install an HP Jetdirect print server card 1. Turn the printer off. NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn, and 4700ph+ have an HP Jetdirect embedded print server already installed. 2. Disconnect all power and interface cables. 126 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW ENWW 3. Locate the formatter board in the rear of the printer. 4. Locate an open EIO slot. Loosen and remove the two retaining screws holding the cover for the EIO slot, and then remove the cover. You will not need these screws and the cover again. They can be discarded. Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) 127 5. Firmly insert the HP Jetdirect print server card into the EIO slot. 6. Insert and tighten the retaining screws that came with the print server card. 7. Reconnect the network cable and power cable, and turn the printer on. 128 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 8. Print a configuration page (see Configuration page on page 507). In addition to a printer configuration page, an HP Jetdirect configuration page that contains network configuration and status information should also print. If the printer does not print, uninstall and reinstall the print server card to ensure that it is completely seated in the slot. 9. ENWW Perform one of these steps: ● Choose the correct port. See the computer or operating system documentation for instructions. ● Run the printer installation software again, choosing the network installation this time. Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) 129 Setting the real-time clock Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is attached to stored print jobs, so you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs. You can also set the printer to automatically warm up and prepare for use at a set time each day. Setting the date and time When setting the date and time you can set the date format, date, time format, and time. To set the date format 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Date/Time. 7. Press to select Date/Time. 8. Press to highlight Date Format. 9. Press to select Date Format. 10. Press to highlight the appropriate format. 11. Press to select the appropriate format. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time submenu. 12. Press Menu to exit the MENUS. To set the date 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Date/Time. 7. Press to select Date/Time. 8. Press to highlight DATE. 9. Press to select DATE. 10. Press or to select the correct month. 130 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW NOTE The order of modifying the month, date of the month, and year depends upon the date-format setting. 11. Press . 12. Press or to select the correct day of the month. or to select the correct year. 13. Press . 14. Press 15. Press . The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time submenu. 16. Press Menu to exit the MENUS. To set the time format 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Date/Time. 7. Press to select Date/Time. 8. Press to highlight Time Format. 9. Press to select Time Format. 10. Press to highlight the appropriate format. 11. Press to select the appropriate format. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time submenu. 12. Press Menu to exit the MENUS. To set the time ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Date/Time. 7. Press to select Date/Time. 8. Press to highlight TIME. Setting the real-time clock 131 9. Press to select TIME. or 10. Press to select the correct hour. NOTE The order of modifying the hour, minute, and AM/PM setting depends upon the time-format setting. 11. Press . 12. Press or to select the correct minute. or to select AM or PM. 13. Press . 14. Press 15. Press . The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the Date/Time submenu. 16. Press Menu to exit the MENUS. Setting the wake time Use the wake time feature to wake the printer at a set time each day. If a wake time is set, use an extended sleep delay period. See Setting the sleep delay on page 133. To set the wake time 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight WAKE TIME. 7. Press to select WAKE TIME. 8. Press to highlight the day of the week for which you want to set the wake time. 9. Press to select the day of the week for which you want to set the wake time. 10. Press to highlight custom. 11. Press to select custom. 12. Press or to select the desired hour. NOTE The order of setting the month, date of the month, and year depends upon the date-format setting. 13. Press . 14. Press or to select the desired minute. 15. Press . 132 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 16. Press or to select AM or PM. 17. Press . 18. If you want to wake the printer at the same time each day, on the APPLY TO ALL DAYS screen, press to highlight YES. -orIf you want to set the time for individual days, press for each day. to highlight NO, and repeat the procedure 19. Press . The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the WAKE TIME submenu. 20. Press Menu to exit the MENUS. Setting the sleep delay Use the sleep delay feature to set the period of time that the printer must be idle before it enters the sleep mode. NOTE If the sleep delay feature is turned off in the RESETS menu, the printer never enters the sleep mode. Selecting a sleep delay value automatically turns the sleep feature on. The default value for the sleep delay setting is 30 MINUTES. To set the sleep delay 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Sleep Delay. 7. Press to select Sleep Delay. 8. Press to highlight the sleep delay setting that you want. 9. Press to select the highlighted sleep setting. The settings are saved and the control panel returns to the SYSTEM SETUP submenu. 10. Press Menu to exit the MENUS. ENWW Setting the real-time clock 133 134 Chapter 4 Maintenance ENWW 5 Theory of operation This chapter provides information about the following topics: ENWW ● Basic operation ● Internal components ● Formatter system ● Engine control system ● Laser/scanner system ● Image formation system ● Pickup/feed system ● 500-sheet paper feeder ● Stapler/stacker (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) 135 Basic operation The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer functions are divided into four systems: ● Engine control system ● Laser/scanner system ● Image formation system ● Pickup/feed system The engine control system controls the laser/scanner system, the image formation system, and the pickup/feed system. The engine control system performs the printing operation after receiving a print command from the external device through the formatter. The engine control system also receives status information from each system and sends necessary information back to the formatter. This chapter describes each of these four systems thoroughly. Figure 5-1 Basic system operation Operation sequence A microcomputer in the engine control system controls the operation sequence for the printer. The basic operation sequence (see Table 5-1 Basic operation sequence on page 137) describes the main operational periods from the point when the printer is turned on until a print operation is completed and each motor stops rotating. NOTE In the following table, “ETB” stands for “electrostatic transfer/transport belt.” 136 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-1 Basic operation sequence Period Purpose Remark WAIT (wait period) From the time the power switch is turned on until the ETB cleaning is completed. To clear a potential on the drum surface and to clean the ETB. During this period, the printer checks the toner level and detects whether the cartridges are present. The printer also executes the pulse width modulation adjustment, color registration adjustment, and image density calibration control as required. STBY (standby period) From the end of the WAIT or LSTR period or last rotation until the formatter inputs a print command or until the power is turned off. To keep the printer ready to print. When the formatter sends a sleep command, the printer enters sleep mode. INTR (initial rotation period) From immediately after the formatter inputs a print command until the TOP signal is sent to the formatter. To stabilize the photosensitive drum sensitivity in preparation for a print operation. PRINT (print period) From the end of the INTR period until the leading edge detection sensor detects paper and then turns off the transfer positive bias. To form an image on the photosensitive drum according to the video signal input from the formatter and to transfer the toner image to the paper. After the power is turned on, the cartridge is cleaned every 35 pages and the ETB is cleaned every 100 pages. LSTR (last rotation period) From the end of the PRINT period until the drum motor stops. To deliver the paper out of the printer and to clean the ETB. The last rotation period lasts until the instant the formatter sends a print command. Then the initial rotation period starts again. Power on sequence The power on sequence initializes the printer and checks for possible malfunctions or paper jams. Figure 5-2 Power on sequence on page 138 shows the printer status from power on to standby mode. ENWW Basic operation 137 Figure 5-2 Power on sequence 138 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Internal components The following figure depicts the internal components of the printer. Figure 5-3 Internal components ENWW 1 Delivery rollers 2 Fuser sleeve unit 3 Fuser pressure roller 4 Fuser 5 Control panel 6 ETB 7 Photosensitive drum 8 Transfer roller Internal components 139 9 Attraction roller 10 Registration shutter 11 Registration roller 12 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) pickup roller 13 Paper separation pad 14 Media sensor 15 Paper tray paper separation roller 16 Paper tray feed roller 17 Paper tray pickup roller 18 EP cartridge 19 Paper tray 20 Laser/scanner 140 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Formatter system The formatter PCB is responsible for the following actions: ● Receiving and processing print data from the various printer interfaces ● Monitoring control panel inputs and relaying printer status information (through the control panel and the bidirectional I/O) ● Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the print engine ● Storing font information ● Communicating with the host computer through the bidirectional interface ● Controlling the Sleep mode The formatter monitors the printer continuously through the video interface. When the printer is ready to print, the formatter sends a signal to the DC controller, which turns the laser on or off based on the signal. Figure 5-4 Formatter system on page 141 shows the formatter system. Figure 5-4 Formatter system Sleep mode This feature conserves power after the printer has been idle for an adjustable length of time. Set the time length in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, under SYSTEM SETUP. When the printer is in Sleep mode, the control panel backlight is turned off, but the printer retains all printer settings, downloadable fonts, and macros. The default setting is 30 MINUTES. You can turn Sleep mode off in the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, under RESETS. ENWW Formatter system 141 The printer exits Sleep mode and enters the warmup cycle when any of the following occurs: ● A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at the parallel port, EIO card, or USB 2.0 connector. ● A control panel button is pressed. ● The top cover is opened. ● Tray 2 is opened. ● The engine test button is pressed. NOTE Printer error messages override the Sleep mode on message. The printer enters sleep mode at the appropriate time, but the error message continues to display. Image Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) The formatter contains circuitry for Image Resolution Enhancement technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its way to the DC controller PCB to produce “smoothed” line edges. The REt can be turned on or off from the control panel or from some software programs. The default setting is medium. NOTE The REt settings that are sent from software programs or printer drivers override the control panel settings. Input/Output This section explains the printer input/output (I/O) capabilities. Parallel interface (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) The formatter receives incoming data through its bidirectional interface (IEEE-1284). The I/O provides high-speed and two-way communication between the printer and the host, allowing the user to change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host computer. The user can configure the HIGH SPEED item on the control panel menu. (This item is found by navigating to the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, in the I/O menu, and PARALLEL INPUT.) The default setting, YES, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to NO, the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible with older computers. The user can also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item. The default setting, On, allows for two-way parallel communications. The Off mode disables the advanced functionality. The I/O is compatible with the bidirectional parallel interface standard. USB 2.0 connector The HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer supports a USB 2.0 connector on the back of the printer. You must use an A-to-B type USB cable. ACC accessory port (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) This printer also includes a third-party accessory (ACC) port that uses USB host protocol. 142 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Flash (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) Optional flash is available in various sizes of compact flash cards for storing forms, fonts, and signatures. See Table 8-2 Supplies and accessories on page 563 for specific part numbers. Hard drive accessory (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) The optional hard drive accessory can be mounted in one of the EIO slots on the rear of the formatter. The optional EIO-based hard drive is used for creating multiple original prints (mopies) and storing forms, fonts, and signatures. CPU The HP LaserJet 4700 series formatter incorporates a 533 MHz RISC processor. Printer memory If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory, a clearable warning message will appear on the control panel. Some printer messages are affected by the auto-continue and clearable warning settings from the CONFIGURE DEVICE menu, under SYSTEM SETUP. If Clearable Warning = Job is set on the control panel, warning messages display on the control panel until the end of the job from which they were generated. If Clearable Warning = On is set, warning messages display on the control panel until is pressed. If an error occurs that prevents printing and Autocontinue = Off is set, the message displays until is pressed. Read-only memory Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the read-only memory (ROM) stores dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts). Random-access memory The random-access memory (RAM) contains the page, I/O buffers, and the font storage area. It stores printing and font information received from the host system, and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print-image data before the data is sent to the print engine. Memory capacity can be increased by adding DIMMs to the formatter. Note that adding memory (DIMMs) might also increase the print speed for complex graphics. DIMM slots The DIMM slots can be used to add memory. Flash memory To upgrade printer firmware, upload a new firmware image to the printer. Nonvolatile memory The printer uses nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) to store I/O and information about the print environment configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained when the printer is turned off or disconnected. ENWW Formatter system 143 PJL overview Printer job language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in addition to the standard printer command language (PCL). With standard cabling, PJL allows the printer to perform the following functions: ● Two-way communication with the host computer through a bidirectional parallel connection. The printer can tell the host about such things as the control panel settings, and the control panel settings can be changed from the host. ● Dynamic I/O switching allows the printer to be configured with a host on each I/O. The printer can receive data from more than one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur even when the printer is offline. ● Context-sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically recognize the personality (PS or PCL) of each job and configure itself to serve that personality. ● Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the next. For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are formatted for landscape printing. PML The printer management language (PML) allows remote configuration and status readback through the I/O ports. Control panel The formatter sends and receives printer status and command data to and from a control panel board. 144 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Engine control system The engine control system is the brain of the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer. It controls all the other systems according to commands from the formatter. The engine control system consists of the following: ● DC controller PCB ● High-voltage PCB ● Low-voltage power supply unit ● Formatter Each of these components is described in this chapter. Figure 5-5 Engine control system NOTE In this manual, the abbreviation "PCB" stands for "printed circuit board." Components described as a PCB can consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. DC controller PCB The DC controller controls the print operation sequence for the printer. The sequence of events is as follows: 1. Power is turned on. 2. The low-voltage power supply unit supplies DC power to the DC controller. 3. The CPU in the DC controller starts to control printer operations. 4. The printer enters the standby period. 5. Based on the print command and the image data input from the formatter, the CPU sends a signal to drive the laser diode, the motors, and the solenoids. NOTE See the general circuit diagram for detailed information about the printer circuitry. ENWW Engine control system 145 Figure 5-6 DC controller PCB 146 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Block operation The blocks that make up the DC controller PCB include: ● CPU. The CPU is a single-chip microcomputer with built-in ROM and RAM. It controls the printer engine sequence, ASIC, fuser, pickup motor and lifter motor, solenoids, sensors, and switches. ● ASIC. Interfaces with the IC, memory, and external devices. ● Motor driver ASIC. Controls each motor in response to commands from the CPU ● Reset IC. Monitors voltage and resets the CPU and ASIC when the power is turned on. ● EEPROM. Stores backup data. Motors, fans, and environment sensor The printer has ten motors, four fans, and one environment sensor. Seven of the motors are DC motors; the other three are stepping motors. Figure 5-7 Motors and fans on page 148 shows the locations of the motors and fans. Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor on page 148 explains the function of each component. Two of the stepping motors and six of the seven DC motors are used for paper feeding and image formation. The remaining stepping motor is the developing disengaging motor. The remaining two DC motors are fan motors. Since the printer transfers an image in four colors in line onto the media, small changes in the rotational speed of the motor are likely to cause color misalignment. The DC motors used for image formation are precisely controlled to account for rotational speed fluctuation. ENWW Engine control system 147 Figure 5-7 Motors and fans Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor Callout Name Function Type Failure detection 1 ETB motor (M7) Drives the ETB DC motor Yes 2 Developing disengaging motor (M8) Separates the photosensitive drums and the developing cylinders Stepping motor No 148 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Table 5-2 Function of motors, fans, and environment sensor (continued) Callout Name Function Type Failure detection 3 Black cartridge motor (M4) Drives the photosensitive drum DC motor Yes 4 Magenta cartridge motor (M3) 5 Cyan cartridge motor (M2) 6 Yellow cartridge motor (M1) 7 Pickup motor (M9) Drives the pickup roller and feed roller Stepping motor No 8 Lifter motor (M10) Moves up lifter DC motor No 9 Fuser pressure release motor (M6) Drives the fuser pressure release mechanism Stepping motor No 10 Fuser motor (M5) Drives the pressure DC motor roller and delivery roller Yes 11 Power supply fan (Fan4) Exhausts heat around the pickup motor and low-voltage power supply DC motor Yes 12 Duplexer fan Exhausts heat around the duplexer DC motor Yes 13 Upper exhaust fan (Fan1) Exhausts heat around the ETB, drum motors, and formatter DC motor Yes 14 Delivery fan (Fan3) Exhausts heat around fuser and delivery unit DC motor Yes 15 Cartridge fan (Fan2) Exhausts heat around DC motor the fuser and cartridges Yes 16 Environment sensor Detects the temperature and humidity levels inside the printer Yes N/A Failure detection The DC controller can detect three motor and five fan failures as described below. Drum motor failure detection The DC controller determines the drum motor failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when it encounters the following conditions. ENWW Engine control system 149 NOTE The drum motor failure detection operates in the same manner for each color separately. ● Drum motor start-up abnormality. The interval of the drum motor speed detection signal does not reach the specified interval after 1.5 seconds of the drum motor drive start. ● Drum motor rotation abnormality. The interval of the drum motor speed detection signal stays at an irregular interval for two seconds and longer after it reaches the specified interval. Fuser motor failure detection The DC controller determines the fuser motor failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when it encounters the following conditions. ● Fuser motor start-up abnormality. The interval of the fuser motor speed detection signal does not reach the specified interval after 1.5 seconds of the fuser motor drive start. ● Fuser motor rotation abnormality. The interval of the fuser motor speed detection signal stays at an irregular interval for two seconds and longer after it reaches the specified interval. ETB motor failure detection The DC controller determines the ETB motor failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when it encounters the following conditions. ● ETB motor start-up abnormality. The interval of the ETB motor speed detection signal does not reach the specified interval after 1.5 seconds of the ETB motor drive start. ● ETB motor rotation abnormality. The interval of the ETB motor speed detection signal stays at an irregular interval for two seconds and longer after it reaches the specified interval. Upper exhaust fan failure detection The DC controller detects an upper exhaust fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the upper exhaust fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously. Cartridge fan failure detection The DC controller detects a cartridge fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the cartridge fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously. Delivery fan failure detection The DC controller detects a temporary locked status when the delivery fan lock detection signal is input for 0.5 seconds continuously after 0.1 seconds of delivery fan drive start. The DC controller starts the drive delivery fan for four seconds at the time of temporary locked status determination. If the delivery fan lock detection signal is input for four seconds, it determines the delivery fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status. Power supply fan failure detection The DC controller detects a power supply fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the power supply fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously. 150 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Duplexer fan failure detection The DC controller detects a duplexer fan failure and notifies the formatter of an error status when the duplexer fan lock detection signal is input for ten seconds continuously. Low-voltage power supply The low voltage power supply unit generates DC power and controls the fuser. The low voltage power supply unit consists of the following circuits: ● Fuser control circuit. Controls the fuser heater temperature in the fuser. ● Low-voltage power supply circuit. Generates the DC power required in the printer. Figure 5-8 Low-voltage power supply circuits on page 151 shows each circuit of the low voltage power supply unit. Figure 5-8 Low-voltage power supply circuits Fuser control circuit This printer uses a ceramic heating method to heat the fuser. Figure 5-9 Fuser power supply circuit on page 152 shows the configuration of the fuser power supply. ENWW Engine control system 151 Figure 5-9 Fuser power supply circuit The fuser power supply circuit has three main components: ● Fuser heater. A ceramic heater heats the fuser sleeve. The heater has one piece of U-shaped heating element on the surface. ● Thermistors. Two thermistors are in the fuser sleeve: one in the center, and the other at the end. Each thermistor monitors the temperature in the fuser sleeve. ● ● Main thermistor. The main thermistor controls print temperature and between-sheets temperature. It contacts the inside surface of the fuser sleeve at the center and detects the fuser sleeve temperature. ● Sub thermistor. The sub thermistor detects the one-sided temperature rise of the fuser heater, the initial rotation temperature control, and the start-up temperature control. It contacts the one side of the fuser heater and detects the fuser heater temperature. Thermoswitch. The thermoswitch prevents the fuser heater temperature from rising abnormally high. It is located above the center of the fuser sleeve. If the fuser heater temperature rises abnormally high, the contact is broken to cut off the power supply to the heater. 152 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW These temperature controls are performed by the fuser control circuit and the fuser heater safety circuit according to the commands from the CPU in the DC controller. Table 5-3 Fuser temperatures Media Temperature Engine speed Any Auto Auto Plain Auto 190°C (374°F) Auto Preprinted ~ 195°C (383°F) Full Letterhead ~ 195°C (383°F) Full Overhead transparencies ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/3 Prepunched ~ 195°C (383°F) Full Labels ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/2 Bond ~ 195°C (383°F) Full Recycled ~ 195°C (383°F) Full Color ~ 195°C (383°F) Full Light ~ 175°C (347°F) Full Intermediate ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/2 Heavy ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/2 Extra heavy ~ 170°C (338°F) 1/2 Cardstock ~ 170°C (338°F) 1/2 Rough ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/2 Glossy ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/2 Heavy glossy ~ 165°C (329°F) 1/3 Extra heavy glossy ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/3 Tough paper ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/3 Envelopes ~ 180°C (356°F) 1/2 Low-voltage power supply circuit The low-voltage power supply circuit converts AC power from the wall receptacle into DC power to cover the DC loads. ENWW Engine control system 153 Figure 5-10 Low-voltage power supply circuit The AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit by turning on the power switch (SW101). The AC power is then converted into +24V, +5V and +3.3V, to serve the DC power load requirements. Protective functions Two fuses, FU101 and FU102, protect against overcurrent and overvoltage to prevent failures in the power supply circuit. If there is a supply error, such as a short-circuit or overvoltage, the low-voltage system automatically cuts off the output voltage. The fuses blow and cut off the AC power, once AC overcurrent flows into the AC line. If DC voltage is not being supplied from the low-voltage power supply circuit, turn off the power switch (SW101). Do not turn the power on again until the root cause is found. If the cause is not at the load side, the protective function may still work. NOTE If the low-voltage power supply is shut down for protection, turn the power off (by switching off or unplugging the printer) and leave the printer off for approximately three minutes. Then turn the printer on. 154 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Safety For safety, the +24V is divided into two: +24VA and +24VB (+24VB1 and +24VB2). The +24VA is supplied from the DC controller, whereas +24VB stops when the door switch (SW1) is cut off. The high-voltage power supply PCB and motors are supplied with the +24VB. They stop when the front cover is opened. This is to protect users and service technicians from injury. The +24VB also functions as the DOOR OPEN DETECTION signal (DOPEN). The CPU determines that the door is open when the +24VB supply stops. Sleep mode Sleep mode reduces power consumption during period of inactivity. When the DC controller receives a sleep command from the formatter, the controller stops the supply of +24V and +5V power by operating the power-save circuit. At the same time, it sends a POWER SAVE MODE signal (PSAVE) to the low-voltage power supply circuit. The low-voltage power supply circuit implements PSAVE upon receiving the /PSAVE signal. The printer returns to the WAIT period once it receives a command from the formatter ending Sleep mode. Power supply recognition The low-voltage power supply tells the DC Controller whether the printer is 110V or 220V, and the DC Controller adjusts temperature control for the fuser accordingly. When the printer is a 110V unit, the DC Controller adjusts for a 100V fuser. Similarly, when the printer is a 220V unit, the DC Controller adjusts for a 220V fuser. Heater temperature control The heater temperature control detects the surface temperature of the fuser sleeve and controls the current flowing to the induction heating coil. The heater temperature control circuit is shown in Figure 5-11 Heater temperature control circuit on page 156. ENWW Engine control system 155 Figure 5-11 Heater temperature control circuit The fuser heater temperature is monitored by two thermistors: the main thermistor (TH1) and the sub thermistor (TH2). The main thermistor controls the print temperature and the between-sheets temperature. The sub thermistor detects the one-sided temperature rise of the fuser heater, and controls the initial rotation temperature and the start-up temperature. The CPU (IC1101) on the DC controller monitors the voltage of the fuser heater temperature signals. The CPU sends the fuser heater drive signal (FSRD1) according to the voltage level. The fuser heater control circuit controls the fuser temperature so the heater remains at the target temperature. The fuser temperature control is divided into the following four sequences. NOTE During standby, the fuser temperature is maintained at about 76.7°C (170°F) to accommodate a first-print time of less than 15 seconds. Initial rotation temperature control This control melts the grease inside the fuser sleeve and lubricates the sleeve when the power is turned on to prevent sleeve damage. If the sub thermistor detects the temperature of below 50°C (122°F) at power-on, the CPU turns on the fuser heater for a prescribed time period before it drives the fuser motor. Start-up temperature control This control detects the start-up power provided to the fuser heater according to the temperature detected by the sub thermistor. If the heater is energized within 30 seconds after the previous print completion, the heater control starts at this temperature point. 156 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Print temperature control This control maintains the temperature of the fuser sleeve at its targeted temperature during the printing operation. The CPU gradually raises the targeted temperature in one printing process. This prevents the fuser temperature from falling while the media goes through the fuser roller. The targeted temperature also varies according to the number of prints when continuous printing. The targeted temperature varies depending on the media types. Between-sheets temperature control This control maintains the temperature of the fuser heater below its normally targeted temperature during continuous printing. This prevents the excessive temperature rise of the fuser pressure roller while uncovering the paper portion of between-sheets with low-speed mode. The targeted temperature varies according to the between-sheets intervals and the media types. Temperature protective function This function detects an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser and interrupts power supply to the fuser heater. The following three protective components prevent an abnormal temperature rise of the fuser heater. ● CPU ● Fuser heater safety circuit ● Thermoswitch Protective function by the CPU The CPU always monitors the output voltage of the main and sub thermistors (FSRTH1, FSRTH2). If the voltage of the FSRTH1 is approximately 0.9V and lower (equivalent to 230°C (446°F) and higher), or the voltage of the FSRTH2 is approximately 0.46V and higher (equivalent to 285°C (545° F) and higher), the CPU detects a fuser failure and the performs the following sequence: 1. The CPU sets the fuser heater drive signal (FSRD1) to inactive and turns the heater off. 2. The CPU sets the relay drive signal (FSRLD) to stop through the ASIC. 3. The fuser heater safety circuit sets the main thermistor relay drive signal (RLD-) to inactive. 4. The fuser heater safety circuit sets the sub thermistor relay drive signal (RLD+) to inactive. 5. The relay drive circuit releases the relays (RL101 and RL102) to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater. Protective function by the fuser heater safety circuit The fuser heater safety circuit always monitors the output voltage of the main and sub thermistors (FSRTH1, FSRTH2). If the voltage of the FSRTH1 is approximately 0.8V and lower (equivalent to 240°C (464°F) and higher), or the voltage of the FSRTH2 is approximately 0.41V and higher ENWW Engine control system 157 (equivalent to 293°C (559°F) and higher), the circuit detects a fuser failure and performs the following sequence: 1. The fuser heater safety circuit makes the main thermistor relay drive signal (RLD-) inactive. 2. The fuser heater safety circuit makes the sub thermistor relay drive signal (RLD+) inactive. 3. The relay drive circuit releases the relays (RL101 and RL102) to interrupt power supply to the fuser heater. Protective function by the thermoswitch When the temperature of the fuser heater rises abnormally high and the detected temperature of the thermoswitch (TP) exceeds approximately 250°C (482°F), the thermoswitch is disconnected and the power supply to the fuser heater is immediately cut off. NOTE The actual temperature of the fuser heater is about 30°C (86°F) higher than the thermoswitch, as the thermoswitch is not contact with the fuser heater. Temperature failure detection The CPU determines the fuser failure, stops the printer engine, and notifies the formatter of an fuser failure when it encounters the following conditions: Start-up failure (warmup failure) The CPU determines a start-up failure: ● If the detected temperature of the main thermistor does not reach 185°C (365°F) within 30 seconds of heater energization during the wait period. ● If the heater does not enter the Ready mode within 30 seconds of heater energization during the initial rotation period. Abnormal low temperature of main thermistor (no conduction) The CPU presumes the main thermistor has no conduction: ● If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 40°C (104°F) or lower for four seconds continuously, from heater energization until the heater is turned off during the wait period. ● If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 70°C (158°F) or lower for four seconds continuously, from initial rotation start until the media reaches the fuser during the initial rotation period. ● If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 130°C (266°F) or lower for 0.5 seconds continuously, from when the media reaches the fuser until the heater is turned off during the print period. Abnormal high temperature of main thermistor The CPU presumes an abnormal high temperature of the main thermistor if the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 230°C (446°F) and higher for 0.1 seconds continuously. 158 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Abnormal low temperature of sub thermistor (no conduction) The CPU presumes the sub thermistor has no conduction: ● If the detected temperature of the sub thermistor is kept 60°C (140°F) or lower for four seconds continuously, from heater energization until the heater is turned off during the wait period. ● If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 90°C (194°F) or lower for 2.5 seconds continuously, from initial rotation start until the media reaches the fuser during the initial rotation period. ● If the detected temperature of the main thermistor is kept 120°C (248°F) or lower for 0.5 seconds continuously, from when the media reaches the fuser until the heater is turned off during the print period. ● If the detected temperature of sub thermistor is kept 50°C (122°F) or lower for 0.5 seconds continuously during the standby period. Abnormal high temperature of sub thermistor The CPU determines the abnormal high temperature of sub thermistor if the detected temperature of the sub thermistor is kept 285°C (545°F) and higher for 0.1 seconds continuously. Drive circuit abnormality The CPU determines the drive circuit abnormality if the ZERO CROSSING signal (ZEROX) is not detected for the specified time period. High-voltage power supply The high-voltage power supply PCB produces the voltage biases that are applied to the primary charging roller, developing cylinder, developing blade, attraction roller, and transfer roller. There are two types of biases: DC positive bias and DC negative bias. The high-voltage power supply PCB is controlled by the DC controller. ENWW Engine control system 159 Figure 5-12 High-voltage power supply block diagram Generation of biases Generation of primary charging bias: The primary charging bias is the DC negative bias that is generated to apply negative potential to the photosensitive drum in preparation for image formation. This bias is generated for each color (Y, C, M, K) in the primary charging high-voltage power supply circuit. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the primary charging bias (PRI1, PRI2, PRI3, PRI4) to the primary charging rollers in each cartridge at the specified timing. The value of the primary charging bias varies in response to commands from the DC controller. Generation of developing bias: The developing bias is the DC negative bias that is generated to adhere toner to an electrostatic latent image formed on the photosensitive drum. This bias is generated for each color. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the developing biases (DEV1, DEV2, DEV3, DEV4) to the developing cylinders in each cartridge at the specified timing. The value of the developing bias varies in response to commands from the DC controller. 160 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The developing voltage (bias) causes the toner to adhere to the electrostatic image that the laser/ scanner assembly created on the photosensitive drum. Two types of developing biases are used: the developing DC negative bias and the developing AC bias. The high-voltage circuit on the power supply generates both biases. These biases are superimposed on one another and then applied to the primary charging roller, which transfers the biases to the drum. The biased developing cylinder picks up toner particles and deposits them onto the electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum. The image is now visible on the drum. Generation of developing blade bias: The developing blade bias (BL) is the DC negative bias that is generated to charge the toner. This bias is generated for each color in the developing blade highvoltage power supply circuit in the high-voltage power supply PCB. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the developing blade biases (BL1, BL2, BL3, BL4) to the developing blade in each cartridge at specified timing. The value of the developing blade bias varies in response to the command from the DC controller. Generation of attraction bias: The attraction bias is generated to attract paper to the ETB and to transfer toner onto the paper efficiently. Both DC positive and DC negative bias are generated when attracting paper and cleaning the ETB. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the attraction biases (ATTS) to the attraction roller in the ETB unit at the specified timing. The value of the attraction bias varies in response to the command from the DC controller. The DC controller changes the value of the attraction bias and regulates it in constant current control in response to the ATTRACTION CURRENT VALUE RETURN signal (HVATTS) sent from the high-voltage power supply PCB. The following are the printing sequences. ● Attraction charging bias: This bias charges the paper positively or negatively and makes the negatively charged toner transfer easily. ● Between-sheets bias: This bias prevents the residual toner on the ETB from adhering to the attraction roller in the between-sheets during continuous printing. ● Cleaning bias: This bias prevents the residual toner on the ETB from adhering to the attraction roller during ETB cleaning. Generation of transfer bias: The transfer bias is generated to transfer toner onto the paper. Both DC positive and DC negative bias are generated in the transfer high-voltage power supply circuit in the high-voltage power supply PCB. The DC positive bias is generated when transferring toner, and the DC negative bias is generated when cleaning the ETB. The high-voltage power supply PCB applies the transfer biases (TR1, TR2, TR3, TR4) to the transfer roller in the ETB unit according to the print sequences. The value of the transfer bias varies in response to the command from the DC controller. The DC controller changes the value of the transfer bias and regulates it in constant current control in response to the TRANSFER CURRENT VALUE RETURN signals (HVTR1S, HVTR4S) and the HVATTS signal sent from the high-voltage power supply PCB. The following are the printing sequences. ENWW ● Print bias: This bias transfers toner on the photosensitive drum surface onto the paper during printing. The transfer roller is applied with the DC positive bias. ● Between-sheets bias: This bias prevents the residual toner on the ETB from adhering to the attraction roller in the between-sheets during continuous printing. ● Cleaning bias: This bias cleans the ETB by returning any toner remaining on the ETB surface to the photosensitive drum. The transfer rollers in the yellow and magenta cartridges (first and third colors) are applied with DC negative bias. The rollers in cyan and black cartridges (second and fourth colors) are applied with DC positive bias. Engine control system 161 Video interface control The video interface allows communication between the formatter and the DC controller. The formatter always monitors the status of the printer by using the video interface. It sends the VIDEO signals to the DC controller through the video interface when the printer is ready to print. The DC controller turns the laser on or off based on the signals it receives. Figure 5-13 Video interface control The VIDEO INTERFACE signal is exchanged during printing operations, as described below. 1. When the printer engine is ready to print, the DC controller notifies the formatter using the STATUS COMMAND signal (SC). 2. The formatter sends a print command as a SC signal to the DC controller when the printer engine and the data for one page are ready. 3. The DC controller drives the scanner motor and sends the HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signals to the formatter after receiving the print command. 4. The printer engine starts a pickup operation. When the paper arrives at the top of page sensor (SR12), the DC controller sends the VERTICAL SYNCHRONOUS signal (/TOP) to the formatter. 5. The formatter sends VIDEO signals in synchronization with the HORIZONTAL SYNCHRONOUS signals to the DC controller upon a reception of the /TOP signal. 6. The DC controller controls each color’s laser driver circuit and turns the laser on and off according to the VIDEO signals. This forms an electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drums of each color. 7. The latent images on the photosensitive drums are developed by toner and transferred onto paper in this order: Y (yellow), C (cyan), M (magenta), and K (black). 8. The toner is fused to the paper in the fuser and the paper is delivered to the delivery tray. Printing continues if the DC controller receives another print command from the formatter during the printing operation. 162 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Laser/scanner system The laser/scanner system forms the latent electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum according to video signals sent from the formatter. The main components of each laser/scanner assembly are the laser driver, scanner motor, mirrors, and focusing lenses. Each color has its own laser/scanner assembly unit, which is controlled by the DC controller. Figure 5-14 Laser/scanner assembly The laser/scanner system uses two laser diodes in one scanning operation to write two lines simultaneously for high-speed laser scanning. The process is summarized below: ENWW 1. After receiving the print command from the formatter, the DC controller activates the scanner motor to rotate the six-faced scanner mirror. 2. When the scanner motor starts to rotate, the DC controller allows the laser to emit light and maintains the scanner motor rotation at a constant speed. 3. When the scanner motor reaches its specified speed, the formatter sends video signals to the laser driver PCB through the DC controller. The laser driver emits two laser diodes according to these signals. 4. The laser beams pass through the collimator lens and the cylindrical lens, and enter the sixfaced mirror that is rotating at a constant speed. Laser/scanner system 163 5. The laser beams are reflected by the six-faced mirror, pass through the focusing lens and the reflecting mirror that is in front of six-faced mirror, and focus the photosensitive drum. 6. While the six-faced mirror rotates at a constant speed, the laser beams on the photosensitive drum scan on the drum. 7. As the photosensitive drum rotates and the laser beams scan on the photosensitive drum, both at a constant speed, a latent image is formed on the drum. Laser control The laser control circuit allows the laser driver IC to turn the laser diodes LD1 and LD2 on and off according to the image data signals sent by the DC controller. The DC controller sends video signals (VDODAT11, /VDODAT11, VDODAT12, and /VDODAT12) and laser control signals (LDCTRL10, LDCTRL11, and LDCTRL12) to the logic circuit on the laser driver IC. The laser driver IC controls the laser according to the combination of the laser control signals. Figure 5-15 Laser control circuit block diagram on page 164 illustrates the laser control system. Figure 5-15 Laser control circuit block diagram 164 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The laser control circuit manages the following control and detection functions: ● Laser emission control. Allows the laser diodes to turn on and off according to the video signals sent by the formatter. ● Automatic power control (APC). Allows the laser diodes to emit light at a constant intensity. ● Horizontal synchronous control. Aligns the starting position in the horizontal direction. ● Image masking control. Regulates laser beam emission in non-image area except during the unblanking interval. ● Failure detection. Detects failures in the laser diodes. Scanner control The scanner motor control rotates the scanner motor to strike the laser beam at the correct position on the photosensitive drum. The DC controller divides the oscillation frequency of the oscillator (X1201) and generates the reference clock signal. It compares the intervals between the reference clock signal and the BD input signal (/BD1I) with the frequency comparator, and monitors the rotational count of the scanner motor. The DC controller controls rotational speed by sending an acceleration signal (/SCNACC1) or deceleration signal (/SCNDEC1) to the scanner motor driver based on the detected rotational speed. Figure 5-16 Scanner motor circuit diagram on page 165 illustrates the scanner motor control system. Figure 5-16 Scanner motor circuit diagram ENWW Laser/scanner system 165 The scanner motor control circuit manages the following control and detection functions: ● Speed control. Maintains the rotational speed of the scanner motor at a constant speed. ● Phase control. Prevents color misregistration by eliminating rotational variations in each color's scanner motor and adjusts the phase of the scanner motor. ● Failure detection. Monitors the frequency comparator in the ASIC and determines whether the scanner motor is rotating at its specified rotational count. 166 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Image formation system The image formation system is the central hub of the printer. It also forms the toner image on the media. The image formation system consists of four cartridges, the ETB, and the fuser, which are controlled by the DC controller. Figure 5-17 Image formation system on page 168 shows the image formation system. ENWW Image formation system 167 Figure 5-17 Image formation system 168 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Image formation process The image formation process consists of nine steps divided among five functional blocks: 1. Electrostatic latent image formation block. Forms an electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum. Step 1: Pre-exposure Step 2: Primary charging Step 3: Laser beam exposure 2. Development block. Makes the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum surface visible by applying toner. Step 4: Development 3. Transfer block. Transfers toner image on the photosensitive drum onto the media. Step 5: Attraction Step 6: Transfer NOTE Toner is transferred onto a sheet of media in the order of yellow (Y), cyan (C), magenta (M), and black (K) in one printing operation. Step 7: Separation 4. Fusing block. Fuses the toner image on the media. Step 8: Fusing 5. Cleaning block. Cleans the residual toner on the photosensitive drum. Step 9: Drum cleaning ENWW Image formation system 169 Figure 5-18 Image formation process 170 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Electrostatic latent image formation block The image formation process begins in the electrostatic latent image formation block. This block consists of three steps that results in forming an electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum: ● Pre-exposure ● Primary charging ● Laser beam exposure When the last step in this block is complete, areas of the drum surface that have not been exposed to the laser beam retain a negative charge. The areas that have been exposed to the laser are neutralized. This neutralized image is called an electrostatic latent image because it is invisible to the eye. Figure 5-19 Electrostatic latent image formation block Step 1: Pre-exposure To prepare for primary charging, light from the pre-exposure LED strikes the photosensitive drum surface. This eliminates any residual charge on the drum surface to avoid density unevenness. Figure 5-20 Pre-exposure ENWW Image formation system 171 Step 2: Primary charging To prepare for latent image formation, the surface of the photosensitive drum is charged with a uniform negative potential. The charging method of this printer is to charge directly to the photosensitive drum surface from the primary charging roller, which is interlocked with the drum. The primary charging roller is made of a conductive rubber. To charge the drum surface negatively, the DC bias is applied to the primary charging roller. Step 3: Laser beam exposure In this step, the latent image is formed on the photosensitive drum by the laser beam. As the laser beam scans on the negatively charged photosensitive drum, the potential on the exposed area is neutralized and the negative potential is removed from the drum surface. This area forms an electrostatic latent image. Figure 5-21 Laser beam exposure Development block The second part of the image formation process is the development block, where toner is transferred onto the electrostatic latent image on the surface of the photosensitive drum to create a visible image. This printer uses a contact development method that keeps the developing cylinder in contact with the drum, pushing the toner against the drum surface for development. The toner is nonmagnetic and consists of resins. Step 4: Development In this step, the toner adheres to the electrostatic latent image on the photosensitive drum surface. The toner (developing material) has an insulating property and is charged with a negative potential by the friction force with the rotating developing cylinder and the developing blade surface. This negatively charged toner contacts with the photosensitive drum, after the potential is adjusted to be uniform. As the area of the drum surface where the laser beam exposed has higher potential than the developing cylinder, the toner charged with almost the same potential with the developing cylinder adheres to this area. This phenomenon is called contact development and it visualizes the electrostatic latent image on the drum surface. 172 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Transfer block The third part of the image formation process is the transfer block, in which the toner image is transferred from the photosensitive drum to the media. This block consists of three steps: ● Attraction ● Transfer ● Separation Step 5: Attraction To feed the media vertically, it is necessary to push the media against the ETB. The picked up media is fed as it is pushed against the ETB by the attraction roller. The positive DC bias is applied to the attraction roller, which charges the media positively to make the negatively charged toner easier to transfer onto the media during the transfer operation. Figure 5-22 Attaching the media to the ETB Step 6: Transfer A positive bias is applied to the transfer charging roller, which is directly opposite the photosensitive drum. As the ETB passes the transfer charging roller, it picks up a positive charge. The negatively charged toner on the photosensitive drum is transferred to the positively charged print media. Figure 5-23 Toner transfer on page 174 illustrates this step. This process is repeated for each color as the ETB carries the media from the bottom cartridge to the top (C, Y, M, K). In full-color printing, as four colors of toner are piled up on the media, the holding force of the toner weakens as the transfer process progresses. To counteract this effect, the DC controller increases the positive DC bias that is applied to the transfer charging roller for each successive color. ENWW Image formation system 173 Figure 5-23 Toner transfer Step 7: Separation The elasticity of media separates the media from the photosensitive drum and the ETB. Figure 5-24 Separation Fusing block The fourth part of the image formation process is the fusing block, in which the toner image is fused to the media, making a permanent image that cannot be smeared. This block consists of one step: fusing. Step 8: Fusing This printer uses the ceramic heater with lower heat capacity to fuse the toner to the media. This method warms up quickly and does not require the power supply during standby period, resulting in shortened wait time and reduced power consumption. 174 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-25 Fusing Cleaning block The fifth and final part of the image formation process is the cleaning block, in which the photosensitive drums are cleaned, preparing them for the next print. In the transfer block, not all of the toner is transferred from the photosensitive drum onto the media, but some remains on the drum surface. This remaining toner is called residual toner or waste toner. The cleaning block cleans the photosensitive drum surface to keep a clear image in the next print. Step 9: Drum cleaning The cleaning blade scrapes off the leftover toner on the drum surface. The residual (waste) toner is collected in the waste toner container by the waste toner feed plate. Print cartridges The printer has four different print cartridges, one for each color. However, they share the same structure, shown in Figure 5-26 Print cartridge on page 176. ENWW Image formation system 175 Figure 5-26 Print cartridge The following are the physical components inside the print cartridge: ● Photosensitive drum ● Primary charging roller ● Developing cylinder ● Toner charging roller ● Stirrers ● Waste-toner transfer plate The photosensitive drum rotation drives the primary charging roller. All other components are driven by the drum motor. The developing disengaging motor drives the developing disengaging block, which causes the developing cylinder to engage with or disengage from the photosensitive drum. The DC controller uses an LED and a photo diode to monitor the level of toner inside the cartridge. It stores this information on a memory tag that is built into each cartridge. 176 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Memory tag The memory tag is nonvolatile memory that is built into the print cartridge. It stores information about the amount of toner in the cartridge and estimates the remaining life. Figure 5-27 Memory tag on page 177 illustrates how the memory tag operates. Figure 5-27 Memory tag The DC controller reads information from the memory tag whenever the printer is turned on, whenever the top cover is closed, and whenever it receives a read command from the formatter. The DC controller writes information to the memory tag at specified times during a print operation, whenever it receives a write command from the formatter, and after print completion. If the DC controller is unable to either read to or write from the memory tag four times in a row, the DC controller alerts the formatter of a memory tag abnormality. Cartridge presence detection The printer detects the presence of print cartridges when the power is turned on or the door is closed. There are two procedures to the cartridge presence detection: ● Memory tag detection ● Photosensitive drum detection Memory tag detection The DC controller reads the data in the memory tag and determines the cartridge presence. If the reading fails, the DC controller goes to the next procedure, photosensitive drum detection. Photosensitive drum detection The DC controller measures the torque of the photosensitive drum. The DC controller stops the drum motor after driving it for the prescribed period of time. If the motor stops rotating within the specified period after the stoppage command is sent, the DC controller detects the cartridge presence based on the large load torque. If it takes more than the prescribed period of time for the motor to stop, the DC controller detects the cartridge absence based on the small load torque. When the DC controller detects the cartridge absence, it stops the printer engine and notifies the formatter. Figure 5-28 Photosensitive drum detection on page 178 illustrates the drum detection procedure. ENWW Image formation system 177 Figure 5-28 Photosensitive drum detection Developing cylinder disengaging control The developing cylinder is engaged or disengaged when the DC controller drives the developing alienation motor. When the developing motor rotates clockwise by a command from the DC controller during power on, printing operation stopped, cleaning cartridges, and monochrome print, the developing alienation cam rotates. Accordingly, the rear bottom of the cartridge is raised and the developing cylinder is disengaged from the photosensitive drum with a principle of leverage. The developing alienation sensor (SR11) detects the position of the developing alienation block. NOTE Only the developing cylinders in the color cartridges (C, Y, M) are disengaged in monochrome print, and all of the developing cylinders in any other case. If the cam stays at its home position for the prescribed period of time or longer during the developing cylinder disengagement operation, or it does not return to the home position within the prescribed period of time after alienation is completed, the DC controller detects a developing alienation motor abnormality. The DC controller stops the printer engine and notifies the formatter of the developing alienation motor abnormality. ETB (electrostatic transfer/transport belt) The ETB feeds the media through the printer and helps transfer toner onto the media. Figure 5-29 ETB on page 179 illustrates the ETB. NOTE The ETB contains a fusable link that is opened when a new ETB is first installed in the printer. This resets the page count of the ETB to zero. 178 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-29 ETB The following are the components of the ETB: ● ETB belt ● ETB feed roller ● ETB engaged roller ● Attraction roller ● Transfer roller The ETB motor drives the ETB feed roller, causing the belt to rotate. All other rollers are driven by the belt rotation. ENWW Image formation system 179 During the printing operation, the picked up media is conveyed in between the ETB and the photosensitive drum. Simultaneously the toner image is transferred onto the media. The ETB is also used for the color misregistration and image stabilization control. The pattern image for the color misregistration or image density determination is transferred onto the ETB. The ETB also controls the following: ● Transfer roller (Y, C, M) engagement/disengagement detection ● Transfer roller alienation ● ETB cleaning Transfer roller (Y, C, M) engagement/disengagement detection When the power is turned on, the DC controller applies biases to the transfers roller for yellow and black, and detects the value of current flown through the ETB according to the current return signals. The DC controller obtains information on the transfer roller (Y, M, C) engagement and disengagement. Accordingly, the DC controller executes the transfer roller engage or disengage control depending on the situation and engages the transfer rollers (Y, M, C). Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control This control disengages the transfer rollers (Y, M, C) from the photosensitive drums so that only black toner is transferred onto the ETB during monochrome printing. The ETB motor (M7) performs this control by driving the ETB alienation solenoid (SL3) while the motor is rotating according to a command from the DC controller. The following is the operational sequence of the transfer roller engagement/disengagement control. 1. The transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam inside the ETB holds up the transfer roller holder that contains the Y, M, and C transfer rollers. This brings the ETB into contact with the photosensitive drums. 2. When a monochrome print starts, the DC controller turns on the ETB alienation solenoid (SL3) to rotate the transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam. 3. The rotation of the transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam pushes the Y, M, and C transfer rollers down, disengaging the ETB from the photosensitive drums. When allowing the ETB to engage back with the photosensitive drums, the DC controller turns on the ETB alienation solenoid (SL3) again. The transfer roller engaging/disengaging cam rotates and pushes the transfer roller holder. Accordingly, the transfer rollers push the ETB into contact with the photosensitive drums. 180 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-30 Transfer roller engagement/disengagement control NOTE The Y, M, and C photosensitive drums opposite the transfer rollers stop rotating when the rollers are disengaged. Calibration and cleaning The printer automatically calibrates and cleans itself at various times to maintain the best print quality. You can also force the printer to calibrate by selecting QUICK CALIBRATE NOW or FULL CALIBRATE NOW from the PRINT QUALITY menu. For information about calibrating the printer, see Quick Calibrate Now on page 539 or Full Calibrate Now on page 539 for more information. While the printer is calibrating or cleaning, it pauses printing. For most calibrations and cleaning, the printer does not interrupt a print job, but waits for the job to complete before calibrating or cleaning. Table 5-4 Calibration timing and duration on page 182 shows when the printer calibrates, the duration of the calibration, and the type of calibration that occurs. Table 5-5 Cleaning timing and duration on page 182 shows when the printer cleans and the duration of the cleaning. The sections that follow discuss calibration and cleaning in more detail. ENWW Image formation system 181 Table 5-4 Calibration timing and duration Calibration occurrence Duration Type of calibration When you turn the printer on. 75 seconds for calibration, but because of other initialization activities, the printer takes a total of 2 minutes to be ready for printing DHALF When you install one or more print cartridges that have not previously been installed in the printer. 150 seconds (2 minutes, 30 seconds) DHALF, color-plane registration (CPR) After 80 pages have been printed following installation of new cartridge. 1 minute DHALF When 1,000 pages have printed since the last calibration. The printer will finish printing the current job before calibrating. 75 seconds DHALF, CPR When you request calibration from the control panel (QUICK CALIBRATE NOW and FULL CALIBRATE NOW). 55 seconds (4 minutes) DHALF, CPR, drum phase1 drum phase calibration and CPR is done only during a full calibration. 1 Table 5-5 Cleaning timing and duration Cleaning occurrence Duration Type of cleaning When the printer continuously prints (with no idle period or spin down) for 51 pages. either 5 seconds or 21 seconds primary and toner charging rollers At intervals of 90 and 140 pages. The printer will finish printing the current job before cleaning. 16 seconds (5 seconds is the most common) ETB ETB cleaning During this step, all toner particles that remain on the ETB are returned to the photosensitive drums in each print cartridge. Figure 5-31 ETB cleaning on page 183 illustrates this step. This control is performed by the DC controller under the following conditions: ● The power is turned on ● During operation of the color misregistration corrective control ● During operation of the image stabilization control ● The door is closed ● After completion in every prescribed number of printings ● During pickup operation specified by universal size 182 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-31 ETB cleaning The DC controller applies negative bias to the photosensitive drum and both negative and positive biases to each of the four color transfer rollers. This brings a potential difference between the photosensitive drum and the ETB, so that both positive and negative charged residual toner on the ETB is returned to the photosensitive drum at once. The developing cylinder is disengaged from the photosensitive drum during the cleaning operation to prevent toner in the toner container from transferring onto the ETB. Color misregistration corrective control This control corrects a color misregistration caused by the variation inherent in the laser/scanner unit and each cartridge. The color misregistration corrective control corrects the horizontal scanning magnification, the horizontal scanning start position, and the vertical scanning start position. ENWW Image formation system 183 The DC controller controls the color misregistration unit under the following conditions: ● At power on or door close after cartridge replacement ● After job completion in every specified number of printings ● At a command from the formatter The following is the operational sequence of the color misregistration corrective control: 1. The DC controller forms two pattern images for color misregistration detection with four colors on the ETB when the color misregistration corrective control starts. The two pattern images are the same pattern, one formed on the left side and the other on the right side. 2. The DC controller measures the position of each pattern image and calculates the misregistration amount of each color by controlling the color misregistration unit. 3. The calculated misregistration information of each color is sent to the formatter. 4. The formatter controls each color’s video signals according to this information and optimizes the main-scanning start position, the main-scanning scale, and the sub-scanning start position. The color misregistration in sub-scanning direction is corrected at printer engine side by the DC controller controlling the speed of the scanner motor. NOTE Horizontal magnification is the size of the image in the horizontal direction. Every color has its own photosensitive drum in each cartridge in this printer. The positions of each drum differ and the laser beam lengths vary because of the variations among the cartridges, so the horizontal scanning area depends on the color. This causes a color misregistration at the edge of image. Color misregistration detection In this printer, the positions of each color’s misregistration pattern images formed on the ETB are detected to measure the misregistration amount. The DC controller controls the color misregistration unit during the foregoing color misregistration corrective control. The color misregistration unit is placed under the ETB and consists of two detection sensors, each one having a light emitter (LED) and a light receiver (PD). The following is the operational sequence of the color misregistration detection. 1. The DC controller allows the LED to emit light by sending the LED DRIVE signal when the color misregistration detection starts. 2. The ETB reflects the light from the LED and the PD in the color misregistration sensor receives the light. This reflected light intensity differs depending on whether the light is reflected from the area of toner. 3. The light receiver converts the received light intensity into voltage and sends it in the form of the color misregistration signal to the DC controller. 4. The DC controller detects the positions of the pattern images according to the timing of the color misregistration signal. Figure 5-32 Color misregistration detection on page 185 illustrates this process. 184 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-32 Color misregistration detection The DC controller notifies the formatter of each error when the following errors are found during the color misregistration detection. The initial value is reset to the new color misregistration correction value whenever an error occurs. ● Color misregistration sensor abnormality warning: The light receiver does not receive light at all. ● Color misregistration measurement out of range warning: The measurement value is out of specified range. Image stabilization control This controls the variation of the image density caused by an environmental change or deterioration of the photosensitive drum, toner, etc. There are three types of image stabilization control. These controls operate when necessary. ENWW ● Environmental change control. The environment condition sensor controls the bias according to the environment conditions. ● Turn on print control is barely noticeable. ● Image halftone control (D-half). The color misregistration sensor (PS12) calibrates the halftone data in the formatter. Image formation system 185 Figure 5-33 Image stabilization control Environmental change control This control calibrates each bias to obtain the best image possible according to environmental changes. The environment sensor detects the temperature and the humidity. The sensor sends this information to the DC controller in the form of the temperature detection signal (TEMSNS) and the humidity detection signal (HUMSNS). The DC controller monitors the environmental conditions of the printer based on these two signals. 186 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller controls the following biases to prevent image defects when it detects an environmental change: ● Developing bias ● Primary transfer bias ● Secondary transfer bias If the environment sensor detects a temperature of below -30ºC (22ºF) or over 80ºC (176ºF), the DC controller determines this is an "environment sensor abnormality" and sends an error message to the formatter. Conditions leading up to DHALF This control stabilizes image density by calibrating the values of the developing bias whenever one of the following events occurs: ● The detected temperature of the sub thermistor is below 50ºC (122ºF) when the printer is turned on. ● The door is closed after a print cartridge or ETB is replaced. ● At every 1,000 pages after the replacement of a cartridge. ● The specified value of environmental conditions has changed since the last image density corrective control. ● Whenever any yellow, cyan, or magenta cartridge reaches its end of life. Image halftone calibration control (DHALF) This control measures halftone density output from the formatter and returns the measurements to the formatter so it can perform halftone calibration. Image density calibration must always be performed before image halftone calibration. Image halftone calibration control consists of three steps: 1. The DC controller forms density patterns on the photosensitive drum in each color using the optimum developing bias determined during image density calibration. 2. These density patterns are transferred to the ETB, and the color-registration detection unit measures the image density of these patterns. Image data is returned to the formatter. 3. The formatter uses the image data to perform a halftone calibration to obtain an ideal halftone image. Image density detection Each of the image stabilization controls uses the color registration unit at the top of the ETB to measure image density. The image density detection is performed by the DC controller, which controls the color misregistration unit during the DHALF control. The color misregistration unit is placed under the ETB and consists of two detection sensors, each having one light emitter (LED) and one light receiver (PD). Figure 5-34 Image density detection on page 188 illustrates this process. ENWW Image formation system 187 The following is the operational sequence of the image density control: 1. The DC controller allows the LED to emit light by sending the LED drive signal. The image density detection control starts. 2. The density pattern images on the ETB reflect the light from the LED and the PD in the sensor receives the light. This reflected light intensity differs depending on the toner density. 3. The light receiver converts the received light intensity into voltage and sends it as a toner density signal to the DC controller. 4. The DC controller converts the toner density signal (analog) into a density value (digital) and stores it. The DC controller notifies the formatter of each error when the following errors are found during the image density detection. When it fails to detect image density, it zeros the density data and notifies the formatter. ● Image density sensor abnormality warning: detected ETB surface density is improper. ● Failed image density detection warning: detected density is improper. Figure 5-34 Image density detection 188 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup/feed system The pickup/feed system consists of various feed rollers that pick up and feed media. This printer has two pickup sources: the paper tray and the multipurpose tray, and one delivery source: the facedown tray. The multipurpose paper sensor (SR4) detects the media presence in the multipurpose tray, and the paper tray paper sensor (SR9) detects the media presence in the paper tray. The paper stack surface sensor (SR10) in the paper tray monitors the pickup position of the media stack surface. When the SR10 detects that the pickup position lowers to a certain volume, the DC controller lifts the lifting plate up to maintain the media stack surface at a specified height. Figure 5-35 Pickup/feed system (1 of 2) on page 190 illustrates this system. The media size in the paper tray and presence of the paper tray installed to the printer are detected by the paper tray paper size detection switch (CSIZE SW). The paper tray paper size detection switch consists of three switches. The DC controller controls nine motors: pickup motor, ETB motor, four drum motors, fuser motor, fuser pressure release motor, and lifter motor, and two solenoids: paper tray pickup solenoid and multipurpose pickup solenoid, for the pickup operation of this printer. There are four photo interrupters: top of page sensor, fuser paper sensor, paper loop sensor 1, and paper loop sensor 2, on the paper transport path to detect the arrival and passage of the media. If the media does not reach or pass these sensors within the specified period of time, the microcomputer (CPU) on the DC controller determines the paper jam and notifies the formatter. Figure 5-35 Pickup/feed system (1 of 2) on page 190 and Figure 5-36 Pickup/feed system (2 of 2) on page 192 illustrates this system. ENWW Pickup/feed system 189 Figure 5-35 Pickup/feed system (1 of 2) 190 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The pickup/feed system consists of the following motors and solenoids: ENWW ● M1: Yellow (Y) drum motor ● M2: Cyan (C) drum motor ● M3: Magenta (M) drum motor ● M4: Black (K) drum motor ● M5: Fuser motor ● M6: Fuser pressure release motor ● M7: ETB motor ● M9: Pickup motor ● M10: Lifter motor ● SL1: Multipurpose pickup solenoid ● SL2: Paper tray pickup solenoid Pickup/feed system 191 Figure 5-36 Pickup/feed system (2 of 2) 192 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The pickup/feed system consists of the following sensors and switches: ● SR1: Fuser paper sensor ● SR2: Delivery tray paper full sensor ● SR3: Fuser pressure release sensor ● SR4: Multipurpose tray paper sensor ● SR9: Paper tray paper sensor ● SR10: Paper stack surface sensor ● SR12: Top of page sensor ● SR13: Paper loop sensor 1 ● SR14: Paper loop sensor 2 ● Media sensor ● SW1: Paper tray paper size detection switch ● SW2: Paper tray paper size detection switch ● SW3: Paper tray paper size detection switch Figure 5-37 Pickup/feed unit on page 194 illustrates the pickup/feed system, which can be divided into three units: ENWW ● Pickup/feed unit. From the point the media is picked from the until it reaches the fuser. ● Fuser/delivery unit. From the fuser to the output bin. ● Duplex feed unit. From the output bin to the registration shutter at the bottom of the ETB. Pickup/feed system 193 Figure 5-37 Pickup/feed unit Pickup/feed unit The pickup/feed block is structured with two blocks. One is the pickup block, which picks up media from the paper tray or the multipurpose tray into the printer one by one. The other one is the feed block, which feeds the picked up media to the fuser. The following sequence of events occurs: 1. The DC controller rotates the pickup motor (M9), drum motors (M1, M2, M3, M4), ETB motor (M7), and fuser motor (M5) after receiving a print command from the formatter. 2. The feed roller and the registration roller rotate as the pickup motor starts to rotate. The paper tray separation roller also begins to rotate. However, the separation roller does not rotate. 3. Media is picked from the paper tray or multipurpose tray. The paper tray pickup solenoid (SL2) or multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (SL1) is turned on after a specified time after "scanner ready". This rotates the paper tray pickup roller and paper tray feed roller, or the multipurpose tray pickup roller, to pick up media in the paper tray. 4. The multiple-fed media is removed by the paper tray paper separation roller (paper separation pad for the multipurpose tray) and a single sheet is fed to the registration roller. 5. The registration shutter corrects the skew of the media. Then the media is fed at its prescribed speed. The formatter specifies the feeding speed by the feeding speed control depending on the media type. 6. Toner is transferred to the media on the ETB, and the media is fed to the fuser/delivery block. Paper tray detection and paper tray media size detection The printer can sense whether a paper tray is installed correctly, and it can sense the size of the media in the paper tray. Paper-size detection switches at the back of the paper tray send this 194 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW information to the DC controller. The DC controller determines which size is loaded by reading various switches. See Table 5-6 Paper tray media size detection on page 195. Table 5-6 Paper tray media size detection Paper size Paper-size detection switch SW1 SW2 SW3 A4 on off off B5 on on off A5 off on off Letter on off on Legal off on on Executive off off on Custom on on on No paper tray off off off Although the paper tray determines the media size by reading the switches, the user can select a different size from what is loaded, creating an error in media-size detection. The paper leading-edge sensor detects when the leading edge and the trailing edge of a sheet pass it. By measuring the time between the passing of the leading edge and trailing edge, the sensor can determine the actual size of the sheet. If this measured size differs from the size specified by the formatter or the switch combination, the DC controller determines a mismatch. The sheet is ejected from the printer, and the printer stops. Paper tray pickup operation This printer uses the pickup arm method for high-speed media pickup. The pickup arm presses the pickup roller down on the media stack to feed the media one by one. The pickup roller is attached to the pickup arm and it is normally held at the original position by the pickup arm. When the pickup solenoid (SL2) is turned on, the pickup cam rotates and lowers the pickup roller onto the media. The following is the operational sequence of the paper tray pickup mechanism. 1. When the DC controller turns the paper tray pickup solenoid (SL2) on during the paper tray pickup operation, the driving force of the pickup motor (M9) causes the paper tray pickup roller and the pickup cam to rotate. 2. As the pickup cam rotates, the pickup arm goes down and the rotating paper tray pickup roller touches the media surface. The media in the paper tray is fed into the printer one sheet at a time. 3. The pickup cam rotation allows the pickup arm to go up and the paper tray pickup roller disengages from the media surface. 4. The paper tray pickup roller stops rotating. Figure 5-38 Paper tray pickup on page 196 illustrates this process. ENWW Pickup/feed system 195 Figure 5-38 Paper tray pickup Media lift-up operation This operation maintains the position of the media stack surface at a specified height for a stable pickup operation. The DC controller rotates the lifter motor (M10) and raises the lifting plate on which the media stack is loaded. The DC controller monitors the paper tray paper sensor (SR9) and the media stack surface sensor (SR10) when the printer is turned on, the paper tray is installed, and during the printing operation. The media lift-up operation is divided into two procedures: ● Initial lift-up ● Lift-up during printing Initial lift-up The initial lift-up begins when the paper tray is installed in the printer and the lifting plate remains in the bottom. The DC controller continues driving the M10 until the SR10 detects media. The SR10 lifts the stack surface up to the pickup position under the following conditions: ● The SR9 and SR10 detect no media when the power is turned on. ● The SR10 detects no media when the paper tray is installed. The DC controller stops this operation when the SR10 detects media before the SR9 detects media. Lift-up during printing The lift-up during printing starts when the stack level reaches a specified level according to the pickup operation. The DC controller drives the M10 when the SR10 detects no media during the 196 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW printing operation. The SR10 then lifts the stack surface up to the pickup position. Figure 5-39 Media lift-up on page 197 illustrates this process. NOTE The paper lift-up operation is also available for the optional paper feeders. The initial lift-up for Tray 2 and the optional paper feeders does not occur at the same time because of the DC power supply limit. The operation starts from the bottom paper feeder and moves upwards. Figure 5-39 Media lift-up Multiple-feed prevention This printer uses the paper separation roller method to prevent the multiple-feed of media. The paper tray paper separation roller rotates in the same direction as the paper tray feed roller. The paper separation roller is imparted with a rotational force, transmitted through the torque limiter. If multiplefeed occurs, the second paper is pushed back to the paper tray and only one sheet is fed into the printer. Normally, the paper tray paper separation roller is imparted with a rotational force in the same direction to the paper tray feed roller. However, since the paper separation roller touches the feed ENWW Pickup/feed system 197 roller, driving torque from the feed roller brings the torque limiter functions. The torque limiter shuts the rotational force from the separation roller. The paper separation roller follows the rotational direction of the feed roller, in the opposite direction. When the paper is not multiple-fed, the driving force from the feed roller transmits through the single paper and allows the paper separation roller to rotate in the opposite direction. During a multi-feed, the rotational force of the paper tray feed roller transmitted to the paper tray paper separation roller becomes weak because of the low friction between the sheets. The torque limiter does not function and the paper separation roller rotates in the direction of the drive gear, causing the multiple-fed media to be separated and pushed back to the paper tray. Figure 5-40 Media lift-up on page 198 illustrates this process. Figure 5-40 Media lift-up 198 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Skew correction The skew correction mechanism compensates for the skew of feeding media. This printer uses the registration shutter method to avoid decreasing throughput. 1. When the media is fed to the registration roller, the leading edge of the media hits the registration shutter to compensate for the skew feeding. 2. The media is warped as the feed roller keeps pushing the media with the condition that the media hit the registration shutter. 3. The stiffness of the warped media lifts up the registration shutter and the media goes through the shutter. The skew-feed is corrected without decreasing throughput. Figure 5-41 Skew correction on page 199 illustrates this process. Figure 5-41 Skew correction ENWW Pickup/feed system 199 Media detection This printer detects the media types to select the optimum print mode automatically. The DC controller controls the media sensor during the printing operation for this detection. The media sensor contains a light emitter (LED) and a light receiver. The light from the emitter is reflected off the media surface or transmitted through the media. Each light is received at the light receiver. NOTE The light receiver can detect even a slight difference in the light intensity because the high density pixels are integrated in very small area. The DC controller turns the media sensor on when the picked up media passes through the registration roller. Then it detects the roughness of the media surface, transmitted light intensity, and thickness according to the patterns (luminance distribution within specified area) of the detected light by the receiver. Accordingly, the DC controller identifies the media type: either plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, gloss paper, gloss film, or overhead transparency, and notifies the formatter. Figure 5-42 Media detection on page 200 illustrates this process. Figure 5-42 Media detection The DC controller switches the media feeding speed according to the detected media type when the detected media type does not match the selected print mode. If the DC controller fails to communicate with the media sensor during the media detection, it detects a media sensor failure and outputs a media sensor abnormality warning to the formatter. 200 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Feed speed control The type of media in the paper path dictates the speed at which it is fed. The DC controller can change the feed speed according to type of media. Table 5-7 Paper size detection switch settings on page 201 shows the relationship between media type and feed speed. Table 5-7 Paper size detection switch settings Print mode Media type Feed speed Normal Plain paper Normal speed Normal gloss Plain paper 1/2 speed Rough Rough paper 1/2 speed Thin Plain paper Normal speed Thin rough Rough paper 1/2 speed Envelope Envelope 1/2 speed Label Label 1/2 speed Thick 1 Thick card/postcard 1/2 speed Thick 2 Thick paper 1/3 speed Gloss 1 Gloss paper 1/2 speed Gloss 2 and 3 Gloss paper 1/3 speed Overhead transparency OHT film 1/3 speed Gloss film Gloss film 1/3 speed Automatic Plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, gloss paper, gloss film, overhead transparency N/A The DC controller performs the following controls depending on the specified print mode. ENWW ● OHT mode. If plain paper, other than OHT is detected, the DC controller determines a media misprint. The DC controller lets the printing operation continue under the OHT mode only when it detects the OHT. The same applies to the following sheets in a continuous printing. When the DC controller outputs the wrong media, it notifies the formatter, cuts off the secondary transfer bias, delivers the media, and then stops the printer engine. ● Automatic mode. When automatic mode is selected, the printer starts the printing operation in the normal mode. If plain paper, thin paper, thick paper, gloss paper, gloss film, or OHT is detected, the DC controller switches the print mode to the appropriate mode and executes the printing operation. In continuous printing, the print mode will not change from the one selected for the first sheet. However, if the DC controller detects media different from the first page, it outputs a media misprint. ● All other print modes. If media other than OHT is detected, the DC controller continues the printing operation with the selected print mode. It outputs a media misprint only when it detects OHT. The same applies to the following sheets in the continuous printing. Pickup/feed system 201 Fusing and delivery block The fuser/delivery unit is structured with two blocks. One is the fuser block that fuses toner on the media. The other is the delivery block, which delivers the fused media to the face-down tray. The following is the operational sequence of the fuser/delivery unit. NOTE The fuser contains a fuseable link that is opened when a new fuser is first installed in the printer. This resets the page count of the fuser to zero. 1. The media with toner transferred on the ETB is fed to the fuser. 2. The paper warp is adjusted with the fuser motor speed control. The feeding speed differs between the ETB and the fuser, as different motors are used to drive them. This control keeps the media with specified warp to prevent image defects and media transport defects. 3. The fusing sleeve and the fusing pressure roller fuse the toner onto the media. The media is then delivered from the fuser. 4. The image fusing media sensor (SR1) detects the media delivered from the fuser, and then delivers the media to the face-down tray. NOTE If the face-down tray is full of media, the delivery tray media full sensor (SR2) detects that it is full. The DC controller determines the face-down tray media is full, notifies the formatter, delivers the media in the printing operation out of the printer, and stops the printer engine. If the stack of media on the face-down tray is removed, the SR2 detects the media absence and the printing operation resumes. Loop control The media is delivered from the ETB to the fusing pressure roller keeping with specified warp depending on the media type to prevent an image defect and media transport defect. The feeding speed of the fusing pressure roller and the ETB are not exactly the same. The following problems might occur when the media is fed into the fuser. ● If the rotational speed of the fusing pressure roller is slower than that of the ETB, the media warp increases and an image defect or media crease might occur. ● If the rotational speed of the fusing pressure roller is faster than that of the ETB, the media warp decreases and a color misregistration in the sub-scanning direction occurs as the fusing pressure roller pulls the media. To resolve these issues, two sensors are used depending on the media type specified by the formatter. The sensors bifurcate the warp amount for thick paper and thin paper. The DC controller monitors the paper loop sensor 1 (SR13) and the paper loop sensor 2 (SR14) to maintain the paper warp at specified amount by changing the rotational speed of the fusing pressure roller. Figure 5-43 Loop control on page 203 illustrates this process. 202 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-43 Loop control Fusing pressure release mechanism This mechanism automatically releases the fusing pressure to improve media removal and prevent fusing pressure roller deformation. The DC controller rotates the cam driven by the fuser pressure release motor (M6) at the prescribed timing. The lifting plate is pushed down and the fusing pressure roller is released. The fusing pressure is released under the following conditions: ● When a paper jam occurs ● When the power is turned off ● When sleep mode is ON/OFF Figure 5-44 Fusing pressure release on page 204 illustrates this process. ENWW Pickup/feed system 203 Figure 5-44 Fusing pressure release Jam detection The printer uses the following sensors to detect the presence of media and to check whether media is being fed correctly or has jammed: ● Top-of-page sensor (SR12) ● Fuser paper sensor (SR1) ● Delivery tray paper-full sensor (SR2) ● Reversing paper sensor (SR8001) The microprocessor on the DC controller checks for jams by timing the media as it moves past these sensors. If the media does not pass the sensor in a specific period of time, the transport process is stopped (the motors are turned off and the rollers no longer rotate) and a jam message displays on the control panel. 204 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Pickup delay jam If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the media is picked up, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a pickup jam has occurred. NOTE The printer attempts to pick up the media several times before determining that a pickup jam exists. The number of pickup attempts depends on the source (for example, four attempts occur if Tray 1 is the source). The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Pickup stationary jam If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) continues to detect the leading edge of the media after a specific period of time has elapsed, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a pickup stationary jam has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Delivery delay jam If the fuser paper sensor (SR1) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specific period of time after the top-of-page sensor detects the media, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a delivery delay jam has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Door open jam If the front cover is opened during printing, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a door open jam has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Residual paper jam If the fuser paper sensor (SR1) detects paper during the WAIT or INTR period, or if the top-of-page sensor or fuser paper sensor detect paper during the automatic delivery period, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a residual paper jam has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Reversing unit jam 1 If the paper reversing sensor (SR8001) does not detect the leading edge of the media within a specified period after the duplexing driver receives a reversing command from the printer, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a reversing unit jam 1 has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. ENWW Pickup/feed system 205 Reversing unit jam 2 If the paper reversing sensor (SR8001) continues to detect media for a specified period after it initially detects the media, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a reversing unit jam 2 has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Duplexing pickup unit jam 1 If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) fails to detect the leading edge of media within the specified period after the duplexing driver receives a duplexing pickup command from the printer, the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB determines that a duplexing pickup unit jam 1 has occurred. The transport process stops and a 13.XX.YY JAM message displays on the control panel. For more information about jam messages, see Control panel messages on page 359. Automatic delivery function Any residual paper within the printer is automatically delivered when the power is turned on or when printing starts. If the top-of-page sensor (SR12) detects paper during the WAIT period, the DC controller PCB determines that residual paper is present, notifies the formatter, and stops printing. The controller drives the motors and delivers the residual paper to the printer when it receives an automatic delivery command from the formatter. Duplex feed unit The duplexing unit is optionally installed on the top of the printer. It features paper reversing, skew feed correction, and leading side edge registration preparing for the other side printing. Figure 5-45 Duplex feed unit on page 206 illustrates the duplexing unit paper path. Figure 5-45 Duplex feed unit The duplexing driver PCB controls the duplexing unit. An 8-bit microcomputer in the duplexing driver PCB controls the sequences of the duplexing unit and the serial communication with the DC controller. 206 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW The DC controller sends a command to the duplexing driver PCB at the necessary time. The duplexing driver PCB drives each load, such as motors and solenoids, depending on these commands. The duplexing driver PCB relays the status information of the duplexing unit to the DC controller. The printer supplies +24VDC to the duplexing unit. The +3.3VDC is generated by +24V DC in the duplexing driver PCB, which works for the component devices such as sensors and ICs. Figure 5-46 Duplexing driver PCB signal flow on page 207 shows the signal flow in the duplexing driver PCB. Figure 5-46 Duplexing driver PCB signal flow Reversing/duplexing feed operation The media fed to the duplexing unit goes to the opposite direction and proceeds hitting along the right plate by the oblique roller. This corrects the paper skew and the media is fed into the printer. The operational sequence of the duplexing feed is described in Figure 5-47 Duplexing feed on page 208. ENWW Pickup/feed system 207 Figure 5-47 Duplexing feed 1. The media printed on one side passes through the fuser. 2. The DC controller sends the reversing command to the duplexing driver after the prescribed time from when the top of page sensor (SR12) detected the leading edge of paper. The prescribed time is when the media arrives at the fuser. 208 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 3. When the duplexing driver receives the reversing command, it turns on the duplexing solenoid (SL8001) to move the duplexing deflector. The duplexing driver also rotates the reversing motor (M8001) clockwise to feed the media to the duplexing unit. 4. The DC controller sends the duplexing pickup command to the duplexing driver after the prescribed time from when the fuser paper sensor (SR1) detected the trailing edge of paper. The prescribed time is when the media passes through the duplexing deflector. 5. The duplexing driver rotates the reversing motor (M8001) counter clockwise (CCW) to reverse the media and feed it to the duplexing feed unit when it receives the duplexing pickup command. 6. The media is fed while hitting its edge to the right guide by the oblique roller in the duplexing feed unit. Consequently, the paper skew is corrected and the starting position of the image in main-scanning is determined. Figure 5-48 Paper skew correction 7. The paper skew is again corrected by the registration shutter. Then the media is printed on the other side and fed to the face-down tray. This printer can operate the following three types of duplexing printings depending on the paper size and the print mode. The formatter specifies each duplexing print operation. However, it cannot specify the operation other than the printable size (LTR, legal, executive, A4, B5-JIS) and the print mode (normal, thick paper, thin paper, gloss paper, gloss film) for the duplexing print. 1. Single sheet mode. Duplexing of one sheet at a time (all paper sizes). 2. Dual sheet mode. Duplexing of two sheets moving at once (all paper sizes print except legal). 3. Alternating complex mode. Duplexing of three sheets moving at once (all paper sizes print except legal). Jam detection This printer has a paper reversing sensor (SR8001) that detects the presence of media and whether the paper feed is operating normally or not. The microcomputer (CPU) detects a paper jam by checking whether media is present at the sensor or not at the checking timing. The checking timing is stored in the memory of the CPU. ENWW Pickup/feed system 209 If the CPU detects a jam, it stops the duplexing print operation and notifies the printer of the jam. The following is the detection timing of each jam. A time at normal speed (1/1) is used for the specified period of time. Reversing unit jam 1 The CPU determines the reversing unit jam 1 when the reversing sensor (SR8001) does not detect the leading edge of media within the specified period of time (approximately 1.3 seconds) after the duplexing driver receives a switchback command. Reversing unit jam 2 The CPU determines the reversing unit jam 2 when the reversing sensor (SR8001) keeps detecting media after the specified period of time (approximately 2.19 seconds) after the SR8001 first detected the leading edge of the media. Duplexing pickup unit jam 1 (Duplexing unit stationary jam) The CPU determines the duplexing pickup unit jam 1 when the top of page sensor (SR12) does not detect the leading edge of media within the specified period of time (approximately 1.38 seconds) after the duplexing driver receives a duplexing pickup command from the printer. 210 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder The HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn comes standard with two additional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 3 and 4). The HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+ comes standard with four additional 500-sheet paper feeders (Trays 3, 4, 5, and 6). The paper feeder is an option for all other models. These additional trays operate in the same way as Tray 2. Figure 5-49 Additional 500-sheet paper feeder on page 211 shows the paper path with an additional 500-sheet paper feeder installed. Figure 5-49 Additional 500-sheet paper feeder The paper feeder is controlled by the paper feeder driver PCB. An 8-bit microcomputer is used in the paper feeder driver PCB, which controls the sequence of the paper feeder as well as the serial communication with the DC controller of the printer. The DC controller commands to the paper feeder driver PCB at necessary timing. The paper feeder driver PCB drives each load, such as motors and solenoids, depending on these commands. The paper feeder driver PCB responds the status information of the paper feeder driver to the DC controller. The printer supplies +24VDC to the paper feeder. The +3.3VDC is generated by +24VDC in the paper feeder PCB, which works for the component devices such as sensors and ICs. Figure 5-50 Paper feeder driver PCB on page 212 shows the signal flow in the paper feeder driver PCB. ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder 211 Figure 5-50 Paper feeder driver PCB Pickup and feed operations The following is the sequence of operations for the 500-sheet paper feeder. Figure 5-51 500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation on page 213 illustrates this sequence. 1. The DC controller receives a print command from the formatter and sends a pickup command to the paper feeder driver. 2. The paper feeder driver rotates the pickup motor (M8101) in the paper feeder, and the feed roller and the paper feeder separation roller start to rotate. 3. The DC controller sends the paper feeder pickup start command to the paper feeder driver PCB after the scanner is ready. 4. The paper feeder driver PCB turns on the paper feeder pickup solenoid (SL8101) to rotate the paper feeder pickup roller and the paper feeder feed roller. At the same time, the PCB lowers the paper feeder pickup roller. As the pickup roller lowers, it makes contact with the media surface and media in the paper tray is fed into the printer. 5. Separation pads eliminate extra sheets, and a single piece of media enters the feed path. 6. If the paper stack level goes down to the specified level according to the pickup operation, the paper lift-up operation is performed. NOTE Paper-size detection, multiple-feed prevention, and jam detection for the 500-sheet feeder function in the same manner as the rest of the printer. NOTE Paper lift-up operation for the 500-sheet feeder is the same as that of Tray 2, except that the paper feeder driver PCB controls this operation instead of the DC controller. 212 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Figure 5-51 500-sheet paper feeder pickup and feed operation ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder 213 Stapler/stacker (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) When the stapler/stacker is installed, it receives print media from the print engine and delivers it to the stapler or stacks it in the output bin. The stapler/stacker prints up to 750 sheets with job offset and staples up to 30 sheets. It comes standard on the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+. The stapler/stacker has the following components: ● Paper path ● Sensors ● Rollers ● Accumulator ● Jogger ● Stapler cartridge ● Output bin The stapler/stacker has three operating modes: staple mode, stacker mode, and offset mode. Staple mode When the print job specifications require stapling, the output rollers lift and the input roller starts rotating. The paper is fed into the accumulator and the pressing shoe lifts. The paddles rotate a full cycle to align the paper to the registration wall, and the jogger moves to align against the stapler wall. The pressing shoe then lowers to hold the job in place and the jogger opens to receive the next page. After all pages are received, the pressing shoe does not lower for the last time. The stapler activates and staples the job. The output rollers then lower and move the job to the output bin. The pressing shoe returns to its normal position and the paper path motors stop unless another staple job is waiting. Stacker mode When the print job requires no stapling, the pages of the document are gathered inside the unit. The delivery and output rollers begin to turn and the paper coming from the printer activates the entry sensor. The delivery rollers then guide the paper to the accumulator, which activates the paper sensor. The output rollers then lower and deposit the paper in the output bin. Offset mode When the print job specifications require offsetting, the job is fed to the accumulator. The jogger registers the job to the left, and the next page is fed above the jogger while it is registering the previous page. When all of the job is registered and there is another job, the first page of the next job is accepted before ejecting the previous job. The next pages of the second job will not be registered, as in the stacker mode, and then the next job is registered. This process repeats for each offset print job. 214 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW Messages The stapler/stacker displays several types of messages on the printer control panel. ● Operator assistance: bin full, staples low, staples out, too many pages to staple, different paper size in job, and door open ● Jams: initial paper jam, paper jam in entry sensor, and stapler jam ● Malfunction conditions: stapler, jogger, paddle, and output roller lifter ● Disconnection: device is disconnected See Control panel messages on page 359 for a listing of all messages. ENWW Stapler/stacker (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) 215 216 Chapter 5 Theory of operation ENWW 6 Removal and replacement This chapter contains information about the following topics: ENWW ● Removal and replacement strategy ● User-replaceable parts ● Covers and external components ● Main assemblies ● Motors and fans ● Sensors and switches ● PCBs ● 500-sheet paper feeder ● Stapler/stacker (4700 models) ● Duplexer 217 Removal and replacement strategy This chapter explains how to remove and replace major printer components. (HP does not support repairing individual subassemblies or troubleshooting to the component level.) This chapter includes illustrations of the printer and paper handling accessories. If an assembly or part is not listed in the parts list, it is not a field replaceable unit (FRU). Replacement is generally the reverse of removal. Occasionally, directions for difficult or critical replacement procedures are included. WARNING! The information in this section is intended for authorized service personnel only. Repair notices WARNING! Turn the printer off, wait five seconds, and then unplug the power cord before servicing the printer. Failure to completely disconnect the printer can result in severe injury. Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from the laser/scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible, can damage your eyes. Never operate the printer with any parts removed. The sheet-metal parts can have sharp edges. Be careful not to cut yourself when handling sheet-metal parts. Caution regarding electrostatic discharge (ESD) The printer contains parts that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Watch for the ESD reminder when removing printer parts. Protect the PCB parts with protective ESD pouches. Always use an ESD protected work station when servicing the printer or paper handling accessories. If an ESD work station is not available, ground yourself to discharge body static by touching the metal chassis of the printer or accessory. Required tools Before servicing the printer, gather the following tools: ● Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver (152-mm (6-inch) shaft) ● Small flat-blade screwdriver ● Small needle-nose pliers ● ESD strap ● Penlight (optional) All components in the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 Series printers use Phillips-head screws that require a #2 Phillips screwdriver. Make sure that you have a Phillips 218 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW screwdriver and not a pozidrive screwdriver. Figure 6-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison on page 219 shows the difference between a Phillips and a pozidrive screwdriver. The surfaces on a Phillips tip are more beveled. Figure 6-1 Phillips and pozidrive screwdriver comparison Types of screws Table 6-1 Types of screws on page 219 describes the screws used in the printer and provides guidelines to help determine where to use each type of screw. The screws vary in length depending on the thickness of the material being fastened. Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each one into its original location. Table 6-1 Types of screws Illustration Description Uses Screw, machine with washer To hold plastic to metal. M3x6 For example: printer covers part number XA9-1418-000CN Screw, self tapping To hold plastic to plastic. For example: printer cover to a plastic hinge Screw, truss head To hold sheet metal to sheet metal. M3x6 For example: formatter cage Retaining ring (e-type) To hold a shaft through a slot. For example: keep a gear on a shaft ENWW Removal and replacement strategy 219 Parts-removal tree Use the following diagram to determine the order in which parts must be removed. Figure 6-2 Parts-removal tree 220 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW User-replaceable parts The user replaces print cartridges, the fuser, and the ETB as they are depleted. Additional instructions on other user-replaceable parts are provided in this section. The printer tracks the amount of use on the customer-replaceable supplies by keeping a page count. Swapping supplies between printers might cause a misrepresentation of supply life values and is not recommended. Table 6-2 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items Supply item Printer message Black (K) print cartridge REPLACE BLACK CARTRIDGE Page counts Approximate replacement interval1 To install or order 4700: 11,000 pages 3.3 months CP4005: 7,500 pages 4 months Changing print cartridges on page 104. For part numbers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. Cyan (C) print cartridge REPLACE CYAN CARTRIDGE 4700: 10,000 pages2 3.3 months CP4005: 7,500 pages 4 months Changing print cartridges on page 104. For part numbers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. Magenta (M) print cartridge REPLACE MAGENTA CARTRIDGE 4700: 10,000 pages2 3.3 months CP4005: 7,500 pages 4 months Changing print cartridges on page 104. For part numbers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. Yellow (Y) print cartridge REPLACE YELLOW CARTRIDGE 4700: 10,000 pages2 3.3 months CP4005: 7,500 pages 4 months Changing print cartridges on page 104. For part numbers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. ETB Fuser REPLACE TRANSFER KIT 4700: 120,000 pages3 40 months CP4005: 100,000 pages 50 months REPLACE FUSER KIT 4700: 150,000 pages 3 Replacing the ETB on page 111. For part numbers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. 50 months Replacing the fuser on page 111. For part numbers, see Supplies and ENWW User-replaceable parts 221 Table 6-2 Approximate replacement intervals for supply items (continued) Supply item Printer message Page counts Approximate replacement interval1 To install or order accessories on page 563. Fuser REPLACE FUSER KIT CP4005: 125,000 pages 62 months Replacing the fuser on page 111. For part numbers, see Supplies and accessories on page 563. 1 2 3 Approximate life expectancies based on 3,000 pages per month for the 4700; based on 2,000 pages per month for the CP 4005. The approximate average A4/Letter-size page count is based on 5% coverage of individual colors. Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary. Page counts are only estimations; usage conditions and print patterns cause results to vary. CAUTION The Hewlett-Packard Company recommends the use of HP products in this printer. Use of non-HP products can cause problems that require service that is not covered by the Hewlett-Packard Company warranty or service agreements. Print cartridges and ETB It is recommended that you remove the print cartridges and ETB when servicing internal printer components. Place the print cartridges and ETB in a safe place while they are out of the printer. To avoid damaging the print cartridges, do not expose them to direct bright light. CAUTION Grasp the print cartridges by the blue handles to avoid accidentally touching the photosensitive drum inside each cartridge. CAUTION Do not place any items on the ETB. If the belt is punctured or otherwise damaged, print quality problems will result. Avoid touching the belt surface. Skin oils can cause print quality problems. For instructions about removing the print cartridges, see Changing print cartridges on page 104. For instructions about removing the ETB, see Replacing the ETB on page 111. Fuser For instructions about removing the fuser, see Replacing the fuser on page 111. Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad 1. Remove the paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. 222 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Slide the tabs inward (callout 1). Figure 6-3 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad (1 of 6) 3. Pull the cover down and remove it. Figure 6-4 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad (2 of 6) ENWW User-replaceable parts 223 4. Pull the tabs on the roller outward (callout 2) and remove the roller. Figure 6-5 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad (3 of 6) Reinstallation tip: Be sure that the fan is installed so that the label side faces the printer (callout 7). Align the cable as shown (callout 8). Ensure that the tabs on the roller (callout 3) are aligned and snap into place. Figure 6-6 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad (4 of 6) 224 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. To replace the separation pad, push down on the pad (callout 4) and then release the tab (callout 5) with a flat-blade screwdriver. Remove the separation pad. Figure 6-7 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad (5 of 6) 6. Install the new separation pad, ensuring that it snaps into place. 7. To reinstall the cover, make sure the tabs (callout 6) are aligned properly. Push upward to close the cover, and then slide the tabs (callout 7) outward to lock the cover. Figure 6-8 Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad (6 of 6) Tray 2-x separation roller 1. ENWW Remove Tray 2-x. User-replaceable parts 225 2. Flip the door open (callout 1) toward the back of the tray. While holding the door open, pinch the blue tab (callout 2) and remove the roller by sliding it to the left. Figure 6-9 Tray 2-x separation roller Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers 1. Remove Tray 2-x. 2. Look inside the paper tray cavity and locate the front roller (feed roller) at the top. Pinch the blue tabs on the left side of the roller (callout 1) and release the roller to the left. Figure 6-10 Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers (1 of 2) 226 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Locate the pickup roller behind the front feed roller. Pinch the white tab (callout 2) located on the inside of the white end cap. While pinching the tab, rotate the roller counterclockwise a quarter to a half turn and remove the roller by sliding it to the left. Figure 6-11 Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers (2 of 2) Formatter 1. Grasp the black tabs situated near the top and bottom of the formatter board. Figure 6-12 Formatter (1 of 2) ENWW User-replaceable parts 227 2. Move the black tabs toward each other and gently pull the formatter board from the printer. Place the formatter board on a clean, flat, grounded surface. Figure 6-13 Formatter (2 of 2) Compact flash For instructions about removing and installing the compact flash memory card, see Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121. HP Jetdirect print server card (4700 models) For instructions about removing and installing an HP Jetdirect print server card, see Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126. DDR memory DIMMs For instructions about removing and installing DDR memory DIMMs, see Installing DDR memory DIMMs on page 117. Hard drive (4700 models) For instructions about removing and installing a hard drive, see Installing a hard drive, memory, and fonts on page 114. Installing a new control panel label Some printer models are shipped without the control panel labels installed or you might prefer using a different label from the one that is installed. Labels are available for several languages. If you are setting up a printer for a language other than English, follow this procedure. 1. Remove the backing from the adhesive side of the label. 2. Position the new label over the top of the control panel. 228 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Press the label firmly down onto the control panel. Figure 6-14 Control panel label NOTE When applying the label, start at the center and press the label into place towards the edges of the control panel. 4. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 5. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 6. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 7. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 8. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 9. Press to highlight LANGUAGE. 10. Press to select LANGUAGE. 11. Press or 12. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate language. 13. Press Menu. ENWW User-replaceable parts 229 Covers and external components The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of covers and external components. NOTE For illustration purposes, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer with four optional trays and a stand is used in the following figures. Procedures are the same for the HP Color LaserJet CP4005, except where noted. Figure 6-15 Covers and external components 1 Face down tray assembly 2 Duplex cover 3 Control panel 4 On/off switch 5 Optional tray assemblies 230 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6 Paper trays (Tray 2 and optional trays) 7 Optional tray lock lever 8 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) 9 Front cover 10 Top cover Paper tray (Tray 2) 1. Pull Tray 2 partially out of the printer. Figure 6-16 Remove the paper tray 2. Slightly raise the front of Tray 2 and pull it completely out of the printer. Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) 1. ENWW Remove the paper tray (Tray 2) from the printer and set it aside. See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. Covers and external components 231 2. Open the multipurpose tray. Figure 6-17 Remove the multipurpose tray (1 of 7) 3. Pull outward on both the right and left sides of the tray guide (callout 1) to unhook the two bosses (callout 1). Figure 6-18 Remove the multipurpose tray (2 of 7) 232 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Slightly raise up the multipurpose tray and slide the tray (callout 2) back to the end of the tray guide (callout 3) until it snaps into place. Figure 6-19 Remove the multipurpose tray (3 of 7) 5. Slightly raise the multipurpose tray and push the left link arm (callout 4) outward to unhook the boss (callout 5). Figure 6-20 Remove the multipurpose tray (4 of 7) ENWW Covers and external components 233 6. Slightly raise up the multipurpose tray and push the tray (callout 6) back to the end of the tray guide (callout 7) until it snaps into place. Figure 6-21 Remove the multipurpose tray (5 of 7) 7. Slightly raise the multipurpose tray and push the right link arm (callout 8) outward to unhook the boss (callout 9). Figure 6-22 Remove the multipurpose tray (6 of 7) 234 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Press the right and left sides inward (callout 10) to release the multipurpose tray from the shaft (callout 11) and remove the multipurpose tray (callout 12). Figure 6-23 Remove the multipurpose tray (7 of 7) Front cover ENWW 1. Remove the paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. 2. Remove the multipurpose tray. See Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) on page 231. Covers and external components 235 3. Open the front upper cover (callout 1) and front lower cover (callout 2). Figure 6-24 Remove the front cover (1 of 6) 4. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver into the top right shaft holder on the inside of the arm and push outward. Figure 6-25 Remove the front cover (2 of 6) 236 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Twist up to open the right shaft holder. Figure 6-26 Remove the front cover (3 of 6) 6. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver into the top left shaft holder on the inside of the arm and push outward. Figure 6-27 Remove the front cover (4 of 6) ENWW Covers and external components 237 7. Twist up to open the left shaft holder. Figure 6-28 Remove the front cover (5 of 6) 8. Slightly lift up on the front cover and pull it towards you. Then take the front cover out. Figure 6-29 Remove the front cover (6 of 6) 238 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Duplex cover NOTE For the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n, remove the duplex cover. For the HP Color LaserJet 4700dn and HP Color LaserJet 4700dtn, remove the duplexer. See Duplexer on page 349. For the HP Color LaserJet 4700ph+, remove the duplexer and the stapler/stacker. See Duplexer on page 349 and Stapler/stacker (4700 models) on page 340. 1. To remove the duplex cover on the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet 4700n, use a flat-blade screwdriver to release the tabs in callouts 1, 2, and 3 in the order presented. 2. Pull up on the duplex cover and remove it. Figure 6-30 Remove the duplex cover Face down tray assembly 1. ENWW Remove the duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. Covers and external components 239 2. Lift up the two tabs. Figure 6-31 Remove the face down tray assembly (1 of 2) 3. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver to unhook the two tabs (callout 1). Lift the face down tray assembly straight up to remove. Figure 6-32 Remove the face down tray assembly (2 of 2) Top cover 1. Remove the duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. 2. Remove the face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. 240 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Remove the five screws (callout 1). Figure 6-33 Remove the top cover (1 of 7) 4. Open the front upper cover. Figure 6-34 Remove the top cover (2 of 7) ENWW Covers and external components 241 5. Unhook the tab (callout 2) by pressing a flat-blade screwdriver to the left of the tab and releasing the hinge (callout 3). Figure 6-35 Remove the top cover (3 of 7) NOTE The tab is located on the bottom of the back side of the hinge. You will need to reach all the way down and then push all the way to the left to release the tab. 242 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Unhook the two tabs (callout 4) on the right side of the printer. Figure 6-36 Remove the top cover (4 of 7) 7. Unhook the three tabs (callout 5) on the rear of the printer. Figure 6-37 Remove the top cover (5 of 7) ENWW Covers and external components 243 8. Unhook the two tabs (callout 6) on the left side of the printer. Figure 6-38 Remove the top cover (6 of 7) 9. Lift up to remove the front upper cover and the top cover together. Figure 6-39 Remove the top cover (7 of 7) 244 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Right cover 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove the following assemblies: 3. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. Unhook the connector (callout 1) by pressing the tab on the connector to release it. Figure 6-40 Remove the right cover (1 of 5) 4. Unhook the tab (callout 2) on the upper right side of the printer just behind the control panel. Figure 6-41 Remove the right cover (2 of 5) ENWW Covers and external components 245 5. Open the front cover and unhook the two tabs (callout 3) on the front of the printer. Figure 6-42 Remove the right cover (3 of 5) 6. Unhook the three tabs (callout 4) on the right rear side of the printer. You will need to pry the bottom tab. Figure 6-43 Remove the right cover (4 of 5) 7. Remove the right cover. Reinstallation tip CAUTION Do not pinch the control panel cable when reinstalling the right cover. 246 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Make sure all four tabs (callout 5) are inserted properly when reinstalling the right cover. Figure 6-44 Remove the right cover (5 of 5) Left cover ENWW 1. Open the front cover. 2. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. Covers and external components 247 3. Unhook the tab (callout 1). Figure 6-45 Remove the left cover (1 of 3) 4. Unhook the tab (callout 2). Figure 6-46 Remove the left cover (2 of 3) 248 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Unhook the three tabs (callout 3) and lift up and out to remove the left cover. Figure 6-47 Remove the left cover (3 of 3) Rear cover 1. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. Covers and external components 249 2. Lift up on the top of the rear cover and pull it toward you to remove it. Figure 6-48 Remove the rear cover Control panel 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. 250 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). Figure 6-49 Remove the control panel (1 of 3) ENWW Covers and external components 251 3. Remove the two screws (callout 2). Figure 6-50 Remove the control panel (2 of 3) 4. Remove the screw (callout 3) and then remove the control panel. Figure 6-51 Remove the control panel (3 of 3) 252 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Main assemblies The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of the main assemblies. ENWW Main assemblies 253 Figure 6-52 Main assemblies 1 Disengaging drive assembly 2 Main drive assembly 3 Pickup motor assembly 4 Lifter drive assembly 5 Delivery assembly 6 Fuser 7 ETB 8 Paper feed assembly 9 Fuser drive assembly 10 Laser/scanner assembly Disengaging drive assembly 1. 2. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. Remove the cable from the two cable guides (callout 1). 254 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Disconnect the connector (callout 2). 4. Remove the four screws (callout 3). Figure 6-53 Remove the disengaging drive assembly (1 of 2) 5. ENWW Tilt the disengaging drive assembly and the cable down together. Unhook the cable from the cable guide (callout 4). Main assemblies 255 6. Disconnect the connector (callout 5). Figure 6-54 Remove the disengaging drive assembly (2 of 2) Remove main drive assembly 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● ETB. See Replacing the ETB on page 111. ● All four print cartridges. See Changing print cartridges on page 104. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Disengaging drive assembly. See Disengaging drive assembly on page 254. ● Drum drive motors. See Drum drive motors (Y/C/M/K) on page 298. 256 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Grasp the middle of the cartridge upper guide unit (callout 2) while unhooking the two tabs (callout 1). Then slide the cartridge upper guide unit toward you to remove it from the printer. Figure 6-55 Remove the main drive assembly (1 of 14) ENWW Main assemblies 257 3. Grasp the middle of the cartridge lower guide unit (callout 4) while unhooking the two tabs (callout 3). Then slide the cartridge lower guide unit toward you to remove it from the printer. Figure 6-56 Remove the main drive assembly (2 of 14) CAUTION Be careful reassembling the upper and lower cartridge guides. They are similar to each other and if assembled incorrectly, the ETB will not position correctly. The cartridge upper guide unit (callout 5) has two projections (callout 6). The cartridge lower guide unit (callout 7) has one projection (callout 8). Figure 6-57 Remove the main drive assembly (3 of 14) 258 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Remove the four front gears (callout 9). Then remove the four back gears (callout 10). Figure 6-58 Remove the main drive assembly (4 of 14) 5. Remove the four bushings (callout 11). Figure 6-59 Remove the main drive assembly (5 of 14) 6. ENWW Unhook the cable (callout 12) from the cable guides (callout 13). Main assemblies 259 7. Remove the cable (callout 14) from the cable guide (callout 15). Figure 6-60 Remove the main drive assembly (6 of 14) 260 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Remove the five screws (callout 16) and then remove the main drive assembly. CAUTION Be careful to note the five screws that are called out and remove only those screws. Figure 6-61 Remove the main drive assembly (7 of 14) ENWW Main assemblies 261 9. Disconnect the eight connectors (callout 17 and also shown in Figure 6-63 Remove the main drive assembly (9 of 14) on page 262) and unroute the cable (callout 18) from the cable guide (callout 19). Do not remove the black plastic covers under any circumstance. Then remove the main drive assembly. Figure 6-62 Remove the main drive assembly (8 of 14) Figure 6-63 Remove the main drive assembly (9 of 14) WARNING! Make sure to review the following reinstallation tips before continuing with the main drive assembly reinstallation procedure. 262 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstall main drive assembly 1. Re-route cable in cable guide. NOTE When reconnecting the cable, start at the K (black) cartridge and route from there (callout 1). Figure 6-64 Reinstall the main drive assembly (1 of 16) ENWW Main assemblies 263 2. Re-connect the eight connectors. There are two connectors for each cartridge (callout 2). Begin with the black (K) connectors and then connect the magenta (M), Cyan (C), and Yellow (Y) connectors. CAUTION Be very careful not to dislodge sensors when reconnecting cables. Figure 6-65 Reinstall the main drive assembly (2 of 16) 3. Rotate the four white gears as shown below. NOTE IMPORTANT: The white gears should be rotated clockwise until they stop at 6 o’clock position, then rotated slightly counterclockwise about 2 mm until you feel resistance. If this is not done correctly, the cartridge couplings will not engage properly (won’t extend into the cartridge atrium to connect with the cartridges) and will require removal and reinstallation of the main drive assembly. Figure 6-66 Reinstall the main drive assembly (3 of 16) 264 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Align the four positioning dent marks (callout 3) of the developing clutch gears (callout 4) and the developing alienation gear (callout 5). Do this for all four gear pairs. Figure 6-67 Reinstall the main drive assembly (4 of 16) 5. On the printer chassis, align all four developing clutch gears (callout 6) with the corresponding arrows stamped on the sheet metal. Figure 6-68 Reinstall the main drive assembly (5 of 16) ENWW Main assemblies 265 6. Make sure that the cartridge interlock rod is in the up position (callout 7). The guide is located just above and to the right of the ETB guide. Figure 6-69 Reinstall the main drive assembly (6 of 16) 7. Mount the main drive assembly on the printer chassis NOTE IMPORTANT: Before reinstalling five screws, verify that the metal shafts / posts are perfectly in line and seated with screw holes on main drive assembly sheet metal. The ends of each shaft have a “shoulder” on them that should be flush with the main drive assembly sheet metal before screwing. Figure 6-70 Reinstall the main drive assembly (7 of 16) 266 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 8. Reinstall five screws (callout 10) being careful to keep shafts seated properly on sheet metal Figure 6-71 Reinstall the main drive assembly (8 of 16) 9. ENWW Reinstall disengaging drive assembly. Main assemblies 267 10. Verify the following before proceeding further: ● Make sure the positioning marks (callout 11) of the developing alienation gears are aligned with the arrow marks (callout 12) stamped into the printer sheet metal. To do this, peer through the holes in the main drive assembly at the developing disengaging gears. There is a little dimple toward the outer edge of the gear which needs to be aligned with the arrow stamped in the sheet metal. Do this for all four gears. Figure 6-72 Reinstall the main drive assembly (9 of 16) 268 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW ● Look inside the cartridge atrium and verify that all of the cartridge couplers are fully extended through from the main drive assembly into the cartridge atrium. If not all couplers are fully extended into the cartridge atrium, go back to step 3 of “reinstalling the main drive assembly” and try again. Figure 6-73 Reinstall the main drive assembly (10 of 16) ENWW Main assemblies 269 ● Cycle the cartridge interlock lever down and up to verify that all four cartridge couplers move in/out (engage / disengage) properly. If not all couplers move in/out of the cartridge atrium when cycling the interlock lever, the white gear shown in step 3 is not properly aligned with corresponding gear. Go back to step 3 of the Reinstalling the main drive assembly section and try again. NOTE The interlock lever is the black plastic piece to right of the right purple ETB guide, and looks like half a gear when flipped down and a lever when flipped up. Figure 6-74 Reinstall the main drive assembly (11 of 16) ● Verify that the alienation bar couplers are meshed with corresponding gears on the main drive assembly. 11. Reinstall the bushings (callout 15). Figure 6-75 Reinstall the main drive assembly (12 of 16) 270 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 12. Install the four back gears (callout 16). Then install the four front gears (callout 17). Figure 6-76 Reinstall the main drive assembly (13 of 16) ENWW Main assemblies 271 13. Reinstall the cartridge guides, beginning with the lower cartridge guide. The upper cartridge guide (callout 18) has two projections (callout 19) while the lower cartridge guide (callout 20) has only one projection (callout 21). CAUTION Be careful reassembling the upper and lower cartridge guides. They are similar to each other and if assembled incorrectly, the ETB will not position correctly. Figure 6-77 Reinstall the main drive assembly (14 of 16) NOTE To align a cartridge guide, insert the rear tabs of the guide into the sheet metal followed by the front tabs. When the gear shafts feed through both of the horizontal slots on the guide, slide the cartridge guide towards the rear of the printer until the two retaining tabs click into position. Figure 6-78 Reinstall the main drive assembly (15 of 16) 272 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 14. Reinstall drum drive motors. NOTE When reinstalling drum drive motors, be certain to reinstall each drum drive motor with the corresponding color before removing. An easy way to guarantee this is to mark each motor’s color with pen or marker on the sticker. Figure 6-79 Reinstall the main drive assembly (16 of 16) 15. Install remaining components. CAUTION Be sure to reinstall the disengaging drive assembly before putting the gears and the cartridge guides back together inside the printer. Pickup motor assembly 1. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Disengaging drive assembly. See Disengaging drive assembly on page 254. Main assemblies 273 2. ● Main drive assembly. (Drum drive motors also need to be removed.) See Remove main drive assembly on page 256. ● Paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. Remove the gear and spacer (callout 1) and the bushing (callout 2). Figure 6-80 Remove the pickup motor assembly (1 of 3) 3. Disconnect the cable from the connector (callout 3). 4. Release the cable from the cable guide (callout 4). Figure 6-81 Remove the pickup motor assembly (2 of 3) 274 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove the two screws (callout 5) and remove the paper pickup motor assembly. Figure 6-82 Remove the pickup motor assembly (3 of 3) Lifter drive assembly 1. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. Main assemblies 275 2. Unhook the spring (callout 1) and gently release it. Figure 6-83 Remove the lifter drive assembly (1 of 4) 3. Close the front cover and the multipurpose tray. 4. Remove the three self-tapping screws (callout 2) and the two machine screws (callout 3). CAUTION Be cautious of the Tray 2 paper presence flag when removing the screws. 5. Remove the right paper tray guide (callout 4). Figure 6-84 Remove the lifter drive assembly (2 of 4) 6. Slightly move the lifter drive assembly (callout 5) inward. Be cautious of the spring. 276 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7. Remove the connector (callout 6) and remove the lifter drive assembly. Figure 6-85 Remove the lifter drive assembly (3 of 4) Reinstallation tip When replacing the new assembly, place a piece of tape around the spring and the plastic retainer. This holds the spring in place when reconnecting. Make sure to put the lifter drive assembly back into place with the spring on before putting the cover back in place. Figure 6-86 Remove the lifter drive assembly (4 of 4) ENWW Main assemblies 277 Delivery assembly 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Delivery fan (Fan 3). See Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) on page 300. ● Fuser. See Replacing the fuser on page 111. ● Control panel. See Control panel on page 250. 2. Remove the three screws (callout 1). 3. Remove the fan duct (callout 2). Figure 6-87 Remove the delivery assembly (1 of 9) 4. Disconnect the connector (callout 3). 278 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove the cable (callout 4) from the cable guides (callout 5). Figure 6-88 Remove the delivery assembly (2 of 9) 6. Remove the black and white cable (callout 6) from the cable guides (callout 7). Figure 6-89 Remove the delivery assembly (3 of 9) ENWW Main assemblies 279 7. Remove the black and white cable (callout 8) from the cable guides (callout 9). Figure 6-90 Remove the delivery assembly (4 of 9) 8. Remove the cable (callout 10) from the cable guide (callout 11), and disconnect the five connectors (callout 12). Figure 6-91 Remove the delivery assembly (5 of 9) NOTE When reconnecting the three connectors that are tied together, make sure to connect the longest cable to the front connector and the shortest cable to the middle connector. 280 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 9. Disconnect the two connectors (callout 13) and remove the screw (callout 14). Figure 6-92 Remove the delivery assembly (6 of 9) 10. Remove the two screws (callout 15). Figure 6-93 Remove the delivery assembly (7 of 9) ENWW Main assemblies 281 11. Remove the two screws (callout 16). Figure 6-94 Remove the delivery assembly (8 of 9) 12. Remove the delivery assembly (callout 17) and the fuser drive assembly together. See Fuser drive assembly on page 286 to separate the two assemblies. Figure 6-95 Remove the delivery assembly (9 of 9) 282 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Paper feed assembly CAUTION Do not disassemble the paper feed assembly under any circumstance. There is a media sensor built into the unit that is precisely adjusted at the factory. Field adjustment is not permitted. Replace the paper feed assembly only as an entire unit. 1. Open the top and front covers and remove the ETB and cartridges. Figure 6-96 Remove the paper feed assembly (1 of 6) 2. Unhook the tab (callout 1) by pushing outward and remove the cable cover (callout 2). The cable cover is located on the inside left side of the printer. Figure 6-97 Remove the paper feed assembly (2 of 6) ENWW Main assemblies 283 3. Disconnect the three connectors (callout 3). Make sure to unhook the tabs prior to releasing the connectors. CAUTION When disconnecting the connectors, make sure not to dislodge the paper feed assembly in any way. Figure 6-98 Remove the paper feed assembly (3 of 6) 4. Remove the two screws (callout 4) and lift the paper feed assembly up and out of the printer. Figure 6-99 Remove the paper feed assembly (4 of 6) Reinstallation tip When reinstalling the paper feed assembly, make sure that the hooks are in the guides (callout 5). 284 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6-100 Remove the paper feed assembly (5 of 6) CAUTION Do not replace the paper feed assembly without resetting the value for the media sensor. This value is on the sticker located on the new paper feed assembly. An example is shown in callout 6. Figure 6-101 Remove the paper feed assembly (6 of 6) Use the following steps to reset the media sensor value from the control panel. ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight SERVICE. 3. Press to select SERVICE. 4. Enter the service code. 5. Press to highlight MEDIA SENSOR VALUE. Main assemblies 285 6. Press to select MEDIA SENSOR VALUE. 7. Enter the new media sensor value. 8. Press to select the new value entered. Fuser drive assembly 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Fuser. See Replacing the fuser on page 111. ● Delivery assembly. See Delivery assembly on page 278. 2. Remove the e-ring (callout 1). 3. Slide the bushing in the direction of the arrow (callout 2). 4. Remove the two screws (callout 3) and then remove the fuser drive assembly. Figure 6-102 Remove the fuser drive assembly 286 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Laser/scanner assembly CAUTION The laser/scanner components cannot be adjusted in the field. Do not disassemble them. 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray (Tray 2). See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● Delivery fan (Fan 3). See Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) on page 300. ● Cartridge fan (Fan 2). See Cartridge fan/shroud (Fan 2) on page 302. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Formatter. See Formatter on page 227. NOTE Make sure to take the printer off of all trays and place the printer on a level, sturdy surface before continuing. ENWW ● Low-voltage power supply PCB. See Low-voltage power supply PCB on page 319. ● DC controller PCB. See DC controller PCB on page 312. Main assemblies 287 2. Remove the two screws (callout 1) and then remove the metal plate (callout 2). Disconnect the cable from the two cable guides on the back of the metal plate. Figure 6-103 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (1 of 17) 3. Remove the two screws (callout 3) from the metal support bracket (callout 4), located on the middle left side of the top of the printer. Then remove the bracket. Figure 6-104 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (2 of 17) 288 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Insert the metal support bracket (callout 5) vertically underneath where the triangle mark on the center of the rear frame as shown (callout 6). Figure 6-105 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (3 of 17) NOTE Be sure to insert the metal support bracket at the bottom of the printer, otherwise the printer frame will be twisted, resulting in the loss of the flatness of the laser. Place the metal support bracket back to its original position after using. Figure 6-106 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (4 of 17) ENWW Main assemblies 289 5. Remove all cabling (callout 7) from the cable guides (callout 8). Figure 6-107 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (5 of 17) 6. Using needle-nose pliers, remove the four springs (callout 9). Figure 6-108 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (6 of 17) 290 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7. Remove the four screws (callout 10) and remove the rear plate. Figure 6-109 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (7 of 17) 8. Disconnect the cable from the cable guide (callout 11). Figure 6-110 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (8 of 17) NOTE When reconnecting, do not forget to reconnect the cable (as in callout 11) and route the laser/scanner cable through the rear plate. ENWW Main assemblies 291 9. Remove the two screws (callout 12). Figure 6-111 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (9 of 17) 10. Push the left laser scanner holder in toward the laser scanner. Figure 6-112 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (10 of 17) 292 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 11. Pull the left laser scanner holder down toward you and remove it. Figure 6-113 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (11 of 17) 12. Push the right laser scanner holder in toward the laser scanner. Figure 6-114 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (12 of 17) ENWW Main assemblies 293 13. Pull the right laser scanner holder down toward you and remove it. Figure 6-115 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (13 of 17) 14. Lift up slightly on the laser/scanner assembly to release it from the plastic strap (callout 13). Figure 6-116 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (14 of 17) 294 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 15. Lift up slightly and push the laser/scanner assembly to the left to remove. Figure 6-117 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (15 of 17) 16. Replace the defective laser/scanner. Figure 6-118 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (16 of 17) 17. Perform "Full Calibrate Now" through the control panel a minimum of three (3) times until CPR corners on Diagnostics page line up. Reinstallation tip Make sure to put all four springs back on the rear plate and route all of the cables through the rear plate. Make sure that all laser/scanners are seated properly upon reinstallation. Figure 6-119 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (17 of 17) on page 296 shows the inside of the printer just behind where the ENWW Main assemblies 295 cartridges would be. The scanner in callout 14 is seated properly. The scanner in callout 15 is not seated properly. Figure 6-119 Remove the laser/scanner assembly (17 of 17) 296 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Motors and fans The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of internal motors and fans. Figure 6-120 Motors and fans ENWW 1 ETB motor 2 Disengaging drive motor 3 Drum drive motors (Y/C/M/K) 4 Upper exhaust fan (Fan 1) 5 Cartridge fan (Fan 2) Motors and fans 297 6 Delivery fan (Fan 3) 7 Power supply fan (Fan 4) Disengaging drive motor 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). 3. Remove the two screws (callout 2), and remove the disengaging drive motor (callout 3). Figure 6-121 Remove the disengaging drive motor Drum drive motors (Y/C/M/K) 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. NOTE When removing the drum drive motors, always order the motors by color. 298 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW NOTE Always use the same screws for the motors. Do not exchange them with any other type of screw. 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1) of the motor to be removed: Yellow (callout 2), Cyan (callout 3), Magenta (callout 4), or Black (callout 5). 3. Each motor has four screws (callout 6). Remove the four screws of the motor to be replaced. Figure 6-122 Remove the drum drive motors Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) 1. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. Motors and fans 299 2. Remove the three screws (callout 1). Figure 6-123 Remove the power supply fan (1 of 2) 3. Disconnect the connector (callout 2) and remove the fan and shroud (callout 3). NOTE When replacing the fan only, release the three tabs on the shroud after disconnecting the connector as shown in callout 2. Figure 6-124 Remove the power supply fan (2 of 2) Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. 300 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). 3. Remove the cable (callout 3) from the cable guide (callout 2). 4. To remove the fan and shroud, remove the two screws (callout 6) and remove the fan and shroud. Figure 6-125 Remove the delivery fan (1 of 2) Reinstallation tip Be sure that the fan is installed so that the label side faces the printer (callout 7). Align the cable as shown (callout 8). ENWW Motors and fans 301 Figure 6-126 Remove the delivery fan (2 of 2) Cartridge fan/shroud (Fan 2) 1. 2. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). 302 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 3. Remove the cable (callout 3) from the cable guide (callout 2). Figure 6-127 Remove the cartridge fan (1 of 4) ENWW Motors and fans 303 4. Unhook the three tabs (callout 4) and remove the fan (callout 5). Figure 6-128 Remove the cartridge fan (2 of 4) NOTE Install the fan so that the label side (callout 6) faces the printer (callout 7). Figure 6-129 Remove the cartridge fan (3 of 4) 304 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. To remove both the fan and shroud, disconnect the connectors (callout 8) and remove the two screws (callout 9). Figure 6-130 Remove the cartridge fan (4 of 4) Upper exhaust fan (Fan 1) 1. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). 3. Remove the screw (callout 2). Motors and fans 305 4. Remove the shroud (callout 3) and the fan (callout 4) together. Figure 6-131 Remove the upper exhaust fan (1 of 3) 5. Remove the fan (callout 5) from the shroud (callout 6). Figure 6-132 Remove the upper exhaust fan (2 of 3) Reinstallation tip Install the fan so that the label side faces the printer (callout 7). Align the cable as shown (callout 8). 306 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6-133 Remove the upper exhaust fan (3 of 3) ENWW Motors and fans 307 Sensors and switches The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of sensors and switches. Figure 6-134 Location of sensors and switches 1 Power switch assembly 2 Environment sensor Environment sensor 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● High-voltage power supply PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. NOTE The environment sensor is located under the fan duct on the left side of the printer. You will be able to locate the sensor after the high-voltage power supply PCB is removed. 308 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). Figure 6-135 Remove the environment sensor 3. Push down on callout 2 with your finger while inserting a flat-blade screwdriver at the location of callout 3. 4. Lift out the environment sensor using the screwdriver. Power switch assembly 1. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. Sensors and switches 309 2. Remove the screw (callout 1). Figure 6-136 Remove the power switch assembly (1 of 3) 3. Unhook the cable from the cable guides (callout 2). Figure 6-137 Remove the power switch assembly (2 of 3) 310 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Lift up on the power switch assembly (callout 3) and rotate out. Remove the rod from the power switch assembly and remove the power switch assembly. Figure 6-138 Remove the power switch assembly (3 of 3) Reinstallation tip Make sure to re-route the cable and the metal rod through the guides, and hook the two tabs on the assembly back onto the printer. ENWW Sensors and switches 311 PCBs The following procedures explain the removal and replacement of PCBs. Figure 6-139 Location of PCBs 1 DC controller PCB 2 Low-voltage power supply PCB 3 Memory controller PCB 4 High-voltage power supply PCB 5 Toner sensor PCB DC controller PCB 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. 312 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● Cartridge fan (Fan 2). See Cartridge fan/shroud (Fan 2) on page 302. ● Delivery fan (Fan 3). See Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) on page 300. ● Formatter. See Formatter on page 227. 2. Release the cable and the cable holder (callout 1) with a flat-blade screwdriver. Insert the screwdriver at the top of the cable holder (callout 2). Release the cable holder from the formatter case. 3. Remove the cables from the cable guides (callout 3). 4. Remove the two screws (callout 4). Figure 6-140 Remove the DC controller PCB (1 of 6) ENWW PCBs 313 5. Remove the screw (callout 5) from the formatter case at the top of the printer and disconnect the connector for the fan (callout 6). Figure 6-141 Remove the DC controller PCB (2 of 6) 6. Remove the two screws on the bottom of the formatter case (callout 7). 7. Disconnect the connector (callout 8). 8. Remove the cable from the cable guide on the bottom of the formatter case (callout 9). Figure 6-142 Remove the DC controller PCB (3 of 6) 314 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 9. Remove the three screws (callout 10). Figure 6-143 Remove the DC controller PCB (4 of 6) 10. Remove the formatter case. 11. Lift up on the brown tab to release the flat cable from the connector (callout 11). Figure 6-144 Remove the DC controller PCB (5 of 6) 12. Disconnect all connectors from the DC controller PCB. ENWW PCBs 315 NOTE When reinstalling the flat cable, make sure the contacts are secure. 13. Remove the four screws (callout 12) and remove the DC controller PCB. NOTE The connector that goes into callout 13 does not have two open spaces on the connector. The connector that goes into callout 14 has two open spaces on the connector. Figure 6-145 Remove the DC controller PCB (6 of 6) Reinstallation tips Make sure to connect the flat cable before reinstalling the formatter case. Make sure that all connectors are reconnected to the DC controller PCB and seated properly. DC controller connections The following diagram shows the DC controller connections. 316 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Figure 6-146 DC controller connections Table 6-3 Description of connectors Connector Number of pins Component J1002 17 Laser/scanner Y J1003 17 Laser/scanner C J1004 17 Laser/scanner M J1005 17 Laser/scanner K J1024 12 Fusing motor (M5) Fuser pressure release motor (M6) J1026 10 Fuser paper sensor (SR1) Deliver tray full sensor (SR2) Fuser pressure release sensor (SR3) J1037 4 Not connected J1038 5 Not connected J1034 3 Power supply fan J1006 16 High-voltage power supply J1010 4 Environment sensor J1014 9 Toner level PCB Multipurpose tray paper sensor ENWW J1022 20 Drum home position sensor J1016 6 Paper tray paper sensor (SR9) PCBs 317 Table 6-3 Description of connectors (continued) Connector Number of pins Component Paper stack surface sensor (SR10) J1012 19 Color misregistration sensor Transmission LED Top of page sensor (SR12) J1013 10 Media sensor J1019 3 Developer disengaging sensor (SR11) J1015 17 Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (SL1) Paper tray pickup solenoid (SL2) Lifter motor (M10) Paper tray paper size detection switch Additional trays J1018 18 M and K drum motors (M3 and M4) J1017 20 Y and C drum motors (M1 and M2) J1020 8 Pickup motor (M9) Developing disengaging motor (M8) J1021 9 Memory controller PCB J1025 12 Paper loop sensors (SR13 and SR14) Fuser unit J1009 17 Low-voltage power supply PCB J1001 45 Formatter J1011 12 ETB unit ETB motor ETB separation solenoid (SL3) J1027 9 Control panel J1033 13 Cartridge fan Delivery fan Upper exhaust fan J1007 5 Door switch Low-voltage power supply PCB J1028 14 Jet link (stapler/stacker) J1030 6 Duplex unit 318 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Low-voltage power supply PCB 1. 2. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. Remove the rod arm from the rod guide (callout 1) and rest the rod arm in the guides to the left. Figure 6-147 Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (1 of 4) ENWW PCBs 319 3. Disconnect the connectors (callouts 2 and 3). Figure 6-148 Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (2 of 4) 4. Remove the two screws (callout 4) from the metal bracket (callout 5) and remove the metal bracket. Figure 6-149 Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (3 of 4) 320 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 5. Remove the two screws (callout 6) and slide the low-voltage power supply PCB (callout 7) toward you to remove. Figure 6-150 Remove the low-voltage power supply PCB (4 of 4) Memory controller PCB 1. 2. ENWW Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● Cartridge fan (Fan 2). See Cartridge fan/shroud (Fan 2) on page 302. ● Delivery fan (Fan 3). See Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) on page 300. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Formatter. See Formatter on page 227. ● DC controller PCB. See DC controller PCB on page 312. ● Low-voltage power supply PCB. See Low-voltage power supply PCB on page 319. ● Laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly on page 287. Disconnect the connectors (callout 1). PCBs 321 3. Remove the four PCB holding pins (callout 2) and remove the memory controller PCB. Figure 6-151 Remove the memory controller PCB E label memory contacts and cable 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● High-voltage power supply PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. ● Cartridge fan (Fan 2). See Cartridge fan/shroud (Fan 2) on page 302. ● Delivery fan (Fan 3). See Delivery fan/shroud (Fan 3) on page 300. ● Power supply fan (Fan 4). See Power supply fan/shroud (Fan 4) on page 299. ● Formatter. See Formatter on page 227. ● DC controller PCB. See DC controller PCB on page 312. ● Low-voltage power supply PCB. See Low-voltage power supply PCB on page 319. ● Laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly on page 287. 322 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). Figure 6-152 Remove the E label memory contacts/cable (1 of 3) 3. Remove the eight screws (callout 2). Figure 6-153 Remove the E label memory contacts/cable (2 of 3) ENWW PCBs 323 4. Lift up and out on the metal stay (callout 3). Figure 6-154 Remove the E label memory contacts/cable (3 of 3) 5. Remove the contact and cable from all four metal stays and cable guides. High-voltage power supply PCB 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). 3. Remove the four screws (callout 2). NOTE The upper left screw is a self-tapping screw and is different from the other three screws. Make sure to put this self-tapping screw back in the correct hole when reinstalling. 324 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 4. Unhook the four tabs (callout 3) and remove the high-voltage power supply PCB. Figure 6-155 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (1 of 2) Reinstallation tips Ensure that the black tabs on the side (callout 4) and the tabs in the center (callout 5) are also snapped into place. Figure 6-156 Remove the high-voltage power supply PCB (2 of 2) Make sure that all springs are seated correctly. ENWW PCBs 325 Toner level detection PCB 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● High-voltage power supply PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 2. Disconnect the connector (callout 1). 3. Remove the three screws (callout 2) and remove the toner level detection PCB (callout 3). Figure 6-157 Remove the toner level detection PCB High-voltage contacts 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Duplex cover or duplex unit. See Duplex cover on page 239 or Duplexer on page 349. ● Face down tray assembly. See Face down tray assembly on page 239. ● Top cover. See Top cover on page 240. 326 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. ● Right cover. See Right cover on page 245. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 247. ● Rear cover. See Rear cover on page 249. ● High-voltage power supply PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. ● Toner level detection PCB. See Toner level detection PCB on page 326. Remove the appropriate screw (callout 1) for the defective high-voltage contact. Figure 6-158 Remove the high-voltage contacts ENWW PCBs 327 500-sheet paper feeder Use the following procedures to remove and replace components on the 500-sheet paper feeder. Figure 6-159 500-sheet paper feeder rollers 1 Paper tray pickup roller 2 Paper tray feed roller 3 Feed rollers 4 Paper tray paper separation roller Figure 6-160 500-sheet paper feeder PCB and drive unit 328 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 1 Paper feeder PCB 2 Lifter drive unit 3 Paper pickup drive unit 500-sheet paper feeder right cover 1. Remove the two screws (callout 1). Figure 6-161 Remove the right cover (1 of 2) 2. Remove the right cover by sliding the cover toward the back. Figure 6-162 Remove the right cover (2 of 2) NOTE The internal components of the 500-sheet paper feeder are mounted on the right side of the paper feeder. 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover ENWW 1. Remove the right cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder right cover on page 329. 2. Remove the two screws (callout 1). 500-sheet paper feeder 329 3. Unhook the two tabs (callout 2) and remove the rear cover (callout 3) by lifting it up. Figure 6-163 Remove the rear cover 500-sheet paper feeder left cover 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Right cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder right cover on page 329. ● Rear cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover on page 329. 2. Remove the screw (callout 1). 3. Flip up the lock to remove the screw (callout 2). 4. Remove the lever (callout 3) by sliding it to the left. Then remove the left cover (callout 4) by pulling it to the left. Figure 6-164 Remove the left cover 330 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder front cover 1. 2. Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray. ● Right cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder right cover on page 329. ● Rear cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover on page 329. ● Left cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder left cover on page 330. Remove the tab on the right side (callout 1). Figure 6-165 Remove the front cover (1 of 3) ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder 331 3. Release the tab on the left side using a flat-blade screwdriver (callout 2). Figure 6-166 Remove the front cover (2 of 3) 4. Ensure that the tab on the left side is released (callout 3) and remove the front cover (callout 4) by lifting it up to clear the two locating pins. Figure 6-167 Remove the front cover (3 of 3) 332 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Reinstallation tip The three positioning pins of the front cover need to be aligned with the holes in the top frame. 500-sheet paper pickup drive assembly 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Paper tray. ● Right cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder right cover on page 329. ● Rear cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder rear cover on page 329. ● Left cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder left cover on page 330. ● Front cover. See 500-sheet paper feeder front cover on page 331. 2. Disconnect the two connectors (callout 1). 3. Release the cable (callout 2) from the cable guide (callout 3). Figure 6-168 Remove the drive assembly (1 of 9) ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder 333 4. Remove the screw (callout 4). Figure 6-169 Remove the drive assembly (2 of 9) 5. Remove the four screws from the front right side (callout 5) and remove the plate (callout 6). Figure 6-170 Remove the drive assembly (3 of 9) 334 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Remove the two screws from the rear of the tray (callout 7) and the screw (callout 8), and then remove the plate (callout 9). Figure 6-171 Remove the drive assembly (4 of 9) 7. Remove the two screws on the rear of the tray (callout 10) and remove the plate (callout 11). Figure 6-172 Remove the drive assembly (5 of 9) ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder 335 8. Remove the seven screws (callout 12). Figure 6-173 Remove the drive assembly (6 of 9) 9. Lift the upper plate (callout 13) and the left frame (callout 14) off of the right frame (callout 15). Figure 6-174 Remove the drive assembly (7 of 9) 336 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 10. Disconnect the two connectors (callout 16). Figure 6-175 Remove the drive assembly (8 of 9) 11. Remove the four self-tapping screws (callout 17) and remove the paper pickup drive assembly. Figure 6-176 Remove the drive assembly (9 of 9) Reinstallation tip Ensure that the lifter drive assembly is seated on the pivot pins before replacing the paper pickup drive assembly. 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly 1. ENWW Remove the paper tray. 500-sheet paper feeder 337 2. Remove the spring (callout 1). Figure 6-177 Remove the lifter drive assembly (1 of 4) NOTE Place the feeder on the right hand side so you can see the bottom and right side of the feeder. 3. Remove the four black screws (callout 2). 4. Remove the three screws (callout 3). 5. Remove the plastic cover (callout 4). Figure 6-178 Remove the lifter drive assembly (2 of 4) 338 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 6. Lift the drive unit assembly up (callout 5), disconnect the connector (callout 6), and remove the lifter drive assembly. Figure 6-179 Remove the lifter drive assembly (3 of 4) Reinstallation tip When replacing the new assembly, place a piece of tape around the spring. This holds the spring in place when reconnecting. Figure 6-180 Remove the lifter drive assembly (4 of 4) 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers The procedure for removing the 500-sheet paper feeder pickup rollers is essentially the same as for the Tray 2-x pickup rollers. See Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers on page 226. ENWW 500-sheet paper feeder 339 Stapler/stacker (4700 models) Use the following procedures to remove and replace components of the stapler/stacker. Remove the stapler/stacker from the printer 1. On the left side of the unit, lift the button up (callout 1). Figure 6-181 Remove the stapler/stacker from the printer (1 of 2) 2. Using two hands, lift the unit up (callout 2). Figure 6-182 Remove the stapler/stacker from the printer (2 of 2) 340 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Staple cartridge left cover 1. Grasp the door (callout 1) by the handle and pull down. 2. Release the latches (callout 2) by pulling outward (callout 3) and releasing them one at a time. Figure 6-183 Remove the staple cartridge left cover Output tray 1. Push in and lift up on the tabs (callout 1). Figure 6-184 Remove the output tray 2. ENWW Remove the output tray. Stapler/stacker (4700 models) 341 Left cover 1. Remove the screw (callout 1). Figure 6-185 Remove the left cover (1 of 2) 2. Remove the screw (callout 2) and remove the left cover. Figure 6-186 Remove the left cover (2 of 2) Top cover 1. Remove the following assemblies: ● Output tray. See Output tray on page 341. ● Left cover. See Left cover on page 342. 342 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Lift the top cover (callout 1). Figure 6-187 Remove the top cover (1 of 3) 3. Release the strap using a flat-blade screwdriver (callout 2). Figure 6-188 Remove the top cover (2 of 3) ENWW Stapler/stacker (4700 models) 343 4. Remove the screw (callout 3), and then lift up slightly and slide the top cover to the left to remove. Figure 6-189 Remove the top cover (3 of 3) Right cover 1. Remove the screw (callout 1). Figure 6-190 Remove the right cover (1 of 3) 344 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Remove the screw (callout 2) and release the tab (callout 3). Figure 6-191 Remove the right cover (2 of 3) 3. Disconnect the connector (callout 4) and lift off the right cover. Figure 6-192 Remove the right cover (3 of 3) ENWW Stapler/stacker (4700 models) 345 Staple cartridge 1. Grasp the door by the handle and pull down (callout 1). Figure 6-193 Remove the staple cartridge (1 of 2) 346 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 2. Pull up on the green handle to release the staple cartridge (callout 2) and lift it out. Figure 6-194 Remove the staple cartridge (2 of 2) Stapler/stacker PCB 1. Remove the right cover. See Right cover on page 344. 2. Remove the two screws (callout 1) and release the tabs (callout 2). Figure 6-195 Remove the stapler/stacker PCB 3. ENWW Disconnect the remaining connectors on the PCB and then lift out the PCB. Stapler/stacker (4700 models) 347 Stapler/stacker unit assembly 24v 2.5 amp 1. Remove the staple cartridge. 2. Remove the left cover. See Left cover on page 342. 3. Disconnect the two connectors (callout 1). 4. Remove the two screws (callout 2). Figure 6-196 Remove the stapler/stacker unit assembly 5. Remove the stapler/stacker unit assembly. 348 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW Duplexer CAUTION Before removing or replacing the duplexer, be sure to turn off the printer. Then remove or replace the duplexer before turning the printer back on. Use the following procedures to remove and replace components of the duplexer. Top duplexing assembly 1. Lift up on the cover of the duplexer and move the two tabs (callout 1) toward the rear of the printer. Figure 6-197 Remove the top duplexing assembly (1 of 2) 2. Lift up on the top duplexing assembly and disconnect the connector (callout 2). Then lift off the duplexer. Figure 6-198 Remove the top duplexing assembly (2 of 2) Duplex tray 1. ENWW Remove the duplexer. Duplexer 349 2. Slightly lift up and pull the duplex tray (callout 1) off of the duplexer. Figure 6-199 Remove the duplex tray 350 Chapter 6 Removal and replacement ENWW 7 Troubleshooting This chapter contains information about the following topics: ENWW ● Introduction ● Troubleshooting process ● Control panel messages ● Formatter lights ● Accessory lights (4700 models) ● Replacement parts configuration ● Paper path troubleshooting ● Paper transport troubleshooting ● Image formation troubleshooting ● Image defects ● Interface troubleshooting ● Changing printer control panel configuration settings ● Control panel troubleshooting ● Tools for troubleshooting ● Diagnostics ● Test pages ● Engine resets ● Service menu ● Diagrams 351 Introduction The information in this troubleshooting chapter is presented with the assumption that the reader has a basic understanding of the color laser-printing process. Do not perform any of these troubleshooting processes without fully understanding the function of each mechanism. This chapter contains the following sections: ● Troubleshooting process includes a pre-troubleshooting checklist and a troubleshooting flowchart. These tools contain information about common printer errors that can inhibit proper operation or create print quality problems. These tools also include recommendations for solving the cause of the error. ● Control panel messages explains each control panel-display message and suggests recommendations for clearing the cause of each message. When the printer message indicates a failure for which the root cause is not obvious, use the printer error troubleshooting section and the troubleshooting tools section in this chapter to solve the problem. ● Formatter lights provides information about the LEDs on the formatter. ● Accessory lights provides information about the LEDs on the stapler/stacker. ● Replacement parts configuration provides information about replacing the formatter, DC controller, and firmware compact flash. ● Paper path troubleshooting provides techniques to solve feed problems. Explanations are provided about print media checks, troubleshooting jams, and the differences between jams caused by media and those caused by the printer. ● Paper transport troubleshooting provides information on how to troubleshoot problems with media feeding incorrectly. ● Image formation troubleshooting suggests methods for solving print quality problems. ● Image defects provides information on image defects and how to identify the root cause of the problem. ● Interface troubleshooting provides techniques for isolating communication problems to the printer hardware, printer configuration, network configuration, or software program. ● Control panel troubleshooting provides procedures for printing a menu map from the printer control panel. It also describes the control panel menus, the items within each menu, and the possible values for the menu items. ● Troubleshooting tools help isolate the cause of printer failures. This section includes explanations of the printer configuration page and the event log. ● Diagnostics provides instructions about how to gain access to and use the diagnostic tools that are incorporated into the printer. ● Test pages provides information on how to print test pages to determine if the engine and the formatter are functioning properly. ● Engine resets provides information on how to perform engine resets. 352 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW ● Service menu provides procedures for opening the service menu and performing serviceoriented tasks. These tasks include counts for entering the serial number, service ID, ETB maintenance, fuser maintenance, color page, and total page, and clearing the event log. ● Diagrams provides graphical locations and tables for the printer's internal assemblies and sensors. Introduction 353 Troubleshooting process When the printer malfunctions or encounters an unexpected situation, the printer control panel alerts you to the situation. This section contains a pre-troubleshooting checklist to filter out many possible causes of the problem. A troubleshooting flowchart helps you diagnose the root cause of the problem. The remainder of this chapter provides steps for correcting problems. ● Use the pre-troubleshooting checklist to evaluate the source of the problem and to reduce the number of steps that are required to fix the problem. ● Use the troubleshooting flowchart to pinpoint the root cause of hardware malfunctions. The flowchart guides you to the appropriate section of this chapter that provides steps for correcting the malfunction. Before beginning any troubleshooting procedure, check the following conditions: ● Are supply items within their rated life? ● Does the configuration page reveal any configuration errors? NOTE The customer is responsible for checking supplies and for using supplies that are in good condition. Pre-troubleshooting checklist The list below describes basic questions to ask the customer to help quickly define the problem(s). Table 7-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist Environment Media Input trays 354 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ● Is the printer installed on a solid, level surface? ● Is the printer exposed to particle matter or dust? ● Is the power-supply voltage within ± 10 volts of the specified power source? ● Is the power supply plug inserted in the printer and directly to the wall outlet (not a power strip)? ● Is the operating environment within the specified parameters, as listed in chapter 1 of this manual? ● Is the printer exposed to ammonia gas, such as that produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials? ● Is the printer exposed to direct sunlight? ● Does the customer use only supported media? ● Is the media in good condition (contains no curls, folds, and so forth)? ● Is the media stored correctly and within environmental limits? ● Is the amount of media in the tray within specifications? ● Is the media placed in the tray correctly? ENWW Table 7-1 Pre-troubleshooting checklist (continued) ● Are the paper guides aligned with the media? ● Is the paper tray correctly installed in the printer? ● Is each print cartridge correctly installed? ● Are original HP print cartridges installed? ● Are the cartridges damaged? ● Are the ETB and fuser correctly installed? ● Is the ETB or fuser damaged? Covers ● Are the top cover and front cover closed? Condensation ● Does condensation occur following a temperature change (particularly in winter following cold storage)? If so, wipe the affected area dry or leave the printer on for 10 to 20 minutes. ● Was a print cartridge installed soon after being moved from a cold to a warm room? If so, allow the printer to sit at room temperature for one to two hours. ● Check for and remove any non-HP components (print cartridges, memory modules, and EIO cards) from the printer. ● If hardware or software configuration has not changed, or the problem is not associated with any specific software, contact the Customer Care Center (see chapter 1). ● Remove the printer from the network, and ensure that the failure is associated with the printer before beginning troubleshooting. ● For any print quality issues, calibrate the printer. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. Print cartridges ETB and fuser Miscellaneous Troubleshooting checklist If the printer is not responding correctly, complete the steps in the following checklist, in order. If the printer does not pass a step, follow the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions. If a step resolves the problem, you can stop without performing the other steps on the checklist. 1. Make sure one of the following messages display on the control panel: Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on. If no lights are on or the display does not say Ready, Paused, or Sleep mode on, see Power-on checks on page 357. 2. Check the cabling. 3. ENWW a. Check the cable connection between the printer and the computer or network port. Make sure that the connection is secure. b. Make sure that the cable itself is not faulty by using a different cable, if possible. c. Check the network connection. See Communications checks on page 457. Ensure that the print media that you are using meets specifications. See Media specifications on page 21. Troubleshooting process 355 4. 5. 6. 7. Print a configuration page (see Configuration page on page 507.) If the printer is connected to a network, an HP Jetdirect page also prints. a. If the pages do not print, check that at least one tray contains print media. b. If the page jams in the printer, see Jams on page 402. If the configuration page prints, check the following items. a. If the page prints correctly, then the printer hardware is working. The problem is with the computer that you are using, with the printer driver, or with the program. b. If the page does not print correctly, the problem is with the printer hardware. See Engine test page on page 537. Does the image quality meet the user's requirements? If yes, go to step 7. If no, check the following items: ● Print the print quality troubleshooting pages. See Print quality troubleshooting pages on page 436 in this chapter. ● Solve the print quality problems, and then go to step 7. At the computer, check to see if the print queue is stopped, paused, or set to print offline. Windows: Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers or Printers and Faxes. Doubleclick HP Color LaserJet 4700. -orMac OS X: Open Print Center (or Printer Setup Utility for Mac OS X v.10.2), and double-click the line for the HP Color LaserJet 4700. 8. Verify that you have installed the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer driver. Check the program to make sure that you are using an HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer driver. 9. Print a short document from a different program that has worked in the past. If this solution works, then the problem is with the program that you are using. If this solution does not work (the document does not print) complete these steps: a. Try printing the job from another computer that has the printer software installed. b. If you connected the printer to the network, connect the printer directly to a computer with a parallel cable. Redirect the printer to the correct port, or reinstall the software, selecting the new connection type that you are using. Troubleshooting flowchart This flowchart highlights the general processes that you can follow to quickly isolate and solve printer hardware problems. Each row depicts a major troubleshooting step. A “yes” answer to a question allows you to proceed to the next major step. A “no” answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to the appropriate section in this chapter, and follow the instructions there. After completing the instructions, proceed to the next major step in this troubleshooting flowchart. 356 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-2 Troubleshooting flowchart 1 Is the printer on and does a readable message display? Follow the power-on troubleshooting checks. See Power-on checks on page 357. Power on Yes 2 No Does the message Ready display on the control panel? control panel messages 3 Event log Yes Information pages After the errors have been corrected, go to step 3. If the event log does not print, see Engine test page on page 537. Does the event log print? If error messages display on the control panel when you try to print an event log, see Control panel messages on page 359. No Open the INFORMATION menu and print the configuration pages to verify that all of the accessories are installed. Are all of the accessories installed? Yes 5 If an error message displays, see Control panel messages on page 359. Open the DIAGNOSTICS menu and print an event log to see the history of errors with this printer. Yes 4 No After the control panel display is functional, go to step 2. No Does the print quality meet the customer's requirements? If paper jams inside the printer, see Jams on page 402. After successfully printing and evaluating the event log, go to step 4. If accessories that are installed are not listed on the configuration page, remove the accessory and reinstall it. For more information about optional output devices, see Accessory lights (4700 models) on page 397. After evaluating the configuration pages, go to step 5. Compare the images with the sample defects in the image defect tables. See Image defects on page 443. Image quality Yes 6 No After the print quality is acceptable, go to step 6. Can the customer print successfully from the host computer? Verify that all I/O cables are connected correctly and that a valid IP address is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. Yes. This is the end of the troubleshooting process. See Network configuration on page 89 and Setting an IP address on page 89. Interface No If error messages display on the control panel, see Control panel messages on page 359. When the customer can print from the host computer, this is the end of the troubleshooting process. Power-on checks The basic printer functions should start up as soon as the printer is plugged into an electrical outlet and the power switch is pushed to the on position. If the printer does not start, use the information in this section to isolate and solve the problem. Power-on troubleshooting overview Turn on the printer power. If the control panel display remains blank, random patterns display, or asterisks remain on the control panel display, perform power-on checks to locate the cause of the problem. During normal operation, the main cooling fan begins to spin briefly after the printer power is turned on. Place your hand over the holes in the rear cover, above the formatter. If the fan is operating, you ENWW Troubleshooting process 357 will feel air passing out of the printer. You can also lean close to the printer and hear the fan operating. When this fan is operational, the DC side of the power supply is functioning correctly. After the fan is operating, the main motor turns on (unless the top cover is open, a jam condition is sensed, or the paper-path sensors are damaged). You should be able to visually and audibly determine if the main motor is turned on. If the fan and main motor are operating correctly, the next troubleshooting step is to isolate print engine, formatter, and control panel problems. Perform an engine test (see Engine test page on page 537). If the formatter is damaged, it might interfere with the engine test. If the engine test page does not print, try removing the formatter and then performing the engine test again. If the engine test is then successful, the problem is almost certainly with the formatter, the control panel, or the cable that connects them. If the control panel is blank when you turn on the printer, check the following items. 1. Make sure that the printer is plugged directly into an active electrical outlet (not a power strip) that delivers the correct voltage. 2. Make sure that the power switch is in the on position. 3. Make sure that the fan runs briefly, which indicates that the power supply is operational. 4. Make sure that the control panel display wire harness is connected. See Control panel on page 250. 5. Make sure that the firmware flash memory card and the formatter are seated and operating correctly. See Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121. 6. Remove any HP Jetdirect or other EIO cards, and then try to turn the printer on again. NOTE If the control panel display is blank, but the main cooling fan runs briefly after the printer power is turned on, try printing an engine test page to determine whether the problem is with the control panel display, formatter, or other printer components. See Engine test page on page 537. 358 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel messages Control panel messages are divided into three types, depending on their severity. ● Status messages ● Warning messages ● Error messages Within the error message category, some messages are ranked as Critical error messages. This section explains the differences between the control panel message types. Warning messages Warning messages inform you of data and print errors. These messages typically alternate with the Ready or Status messages and remain displayed until the button is pressed. If CLEARABLE WARNINGS is set to JOB in the printer’s configuration menu, these messages are cleared by the next print job. Error messages Error messages communicate that some action must be performed, such as adding paper or clearing a paper jam. Some error messages are auto-continuable; if AUTO CONTINUE=ON the printer will continue normal operation after displaying an auto-continuable error message for 10 seconds. NOTE Any button pressed during the 10-second display of an auto-continuable error message will override the auto-continue feature and the function of the button pressed will take precedence. For example, pressing the Menu button will display the main menu. Critical error messages Critical error messages inform you of a device failure. Some of these messages can be cleared by turning the printer off and then on. These messages are not affected by the AUTO CONTINUE setting. If a critical error persists, service is required. The following table lists and describes control panel messages, in alphabetical order. Message listing Control panel message Description Recommended action Control Panel display is blank Possibly poor formatter, or Compact Flash Firmware card connection, or Control Panel display problem. 1. Reseat formatter 2. Reseat compact flash 3. Reseat memory DIMM(s) 4. Replace compact flash and firmware card 5. Replace memory DIMM ENWW Control panel messages 359 Control panel message Description Recommended action 6. Replace formatter 7. Check flat ribbon cable connector from DC controller to formatter 8. Check formatter power connectors for LVPS 9. Check Control Panel display connectors to DC controller 10. Replace Control Panel display 10.90.X REPLACE A color cartridge is out of toner and needs to be replaced. Replace the affected color cartridge. The print cartridge is not seated properly in the printer. 1. Make sure that the ETB is closed. 2. Remove and reinstall the affected print cartridge. 3. Make sure the cartridge guide for the affected print cartridge is installed correctly. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Exchange the cartridge for the indicated color with a cartridge in another slot to determine whether the error follows the cartridge or stays with the slot. If the error follows the cartridge, replace that cartridge. Otherwise, continue with step 3. 3. Make sure that the E label memory contacts are not dirty or damaged. 4. Make sure the cartridge guide for the affected print cartridge is installed correctly. 5. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 6. Reseat the connectors between the memory PCB (J9630) and the E label memory contacts, the memory PCB (J4001), and the DC controller PCB (J1021). 7. Check all cable connections to/from DC controller. [COLOR] CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press 10.XX.YY CARTRIDGES NOT ENGAGED 10.92.00 = black print cartridge 10.92.01 = cyan print cartridge 10.92.02 = magenta print cartridge 10.92.03 = yellow print cartridge 10.XX.YY SUPPLY MEMORY ERROR alternates with The printer cannot read or write to at least one print cartridge memory tag or at least one memory tag is missing. The following control panel messages correspond to the color of the print cartridge: For help press 10.00.00 = black print cartridge The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. 10.00.01 = cyan print cartridge 10.00.02 = magenta print cartridge 10.00.03 = yellow print cartridge 360 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message 11.X INTERNAL CLOCK ERROR To continue press Description This message is displayed when there is a problem with the real-time clock on the formatter board. Recommended action 8. Replace the E label memory contacts. See E label memory contacts and cable on page 322. 9. Replace the memory PCB. Replace the formatter assembly. XX=01 Dead clock battery XX=02 Dead real-time clock 13.XX.YY EXTERNAL OUTPUT There is a jam in the stapler/stacker. 1. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 2. Press and instructions. 3. For more information about clearing jams, see Clearing jams on page 415. 1. Remove the paper. 2. Run the paper path test to determine if one or more of the sensors are not working correctly. 3. Check the oblique rollers on the back side of the ETB to ensure they are not worn or dirty. 4. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 5. Replace the ETB. 6. Check all cable connections to/from DC controller. DEVICE PAPER JAM (4700 models) 13.XX.YY JAM IN There is a jam in the duplex path. DUPLEX PATH For help press 13.XX.YY JAM IN OUTPUT DEVICE Paper is jammed in an external paper handling device. The amber light on the stacker/stapler is blinking. alternates with 13.12.01 = early reached For help press 13.12.02 = entrance sensor not reached to step through the Check the duplexer or the stapler/stacker for jammed paper. For more information, see Clearing jams on page 415. 13.12.03 = entrance sensor not escaped 13.12.04 = entrance sensor remaining 13.12.05 = exit sensor not reached 13.12.06 = exit sensor not escaped 13.12.07 = exit sensor remaining 13.12.08 = top cover open 13.12.09 = stapler cover open ENWW Control panel messages 361 Control panel message Description Recommended action 13.XX.YY JAM IN There is a jam in the paper path. 1. PAPER PATH 13.12.00 = jam in paper path Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 13.20.00 = jam in paper path 2. For help press Press and instructions. 3. For more information, see Jams on page 402. 4. If paper is folding into an accordion shape, check whether the shutter on each print cartridge opens as you close the ETB and each cartridge is turning correctly. Replace defective print cartridges or drive motors. 5. Clean the attaching roller at the bottom of the ETB and make sure that the spring is holding it in place. 6. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 7. Replace the paper pickup PCB. 8. Check all cable connections to/from the DC Controller. 9. Replace the ETB if it is not moving paper correctly. Calibrate the printer. 13.21.00 = jam in paper path 13.XX.YY JAM IN to step through the A staple is jammed in the stapler. Check the stapler/stacker for jammed staples. Remove the defective staple in the cartridge. Paper is jammed in Tray 1. 1. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 2. to see step by step Press information. 3. For thorough troubleshooting, see Paper path troubleshooting on page 402 4. Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. 5. Clean or replace the separation pad. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. 6. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ STAPLER For help press 13.XX.YY JAM IN TRAY 1 For help press 362 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 13.XX.YY JAM IN A page is jammed in Tray 2 or in one or more of the optional trays. 7. Check all cable connections to/from DC controller. 8. Replace the paper pickup drive assembly. 9. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. 1. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 2. Press and instructions. 3. Clean the pickup roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it. See Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers on page 226. 4. Clean the feed roller. If it is worn or damaged, replace it. See Tray 2-x feed and pickup rollers on page 226. 5. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 6. Check all cable connection to/from DC controller. 7. Replace the tray X paper pickup drive assembly. 8. Replace the tray X lifter motor. 9. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. 1. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 2. and Press instructions. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place. If it is defective, replace it. 1. Remove the jammed paper. 2. Make sure the paper meets the media specifications for the duplexer. 3. Make sure the duplexer is seated correctly. TRAY X For help press 13.XX.YY JAM IN TOP There is a jam in the top cover area. COVER OR DUPLEX AREA For help press 13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER For help press ENWW Paper is jammed in the duplexer. Check the device for jammed paper. to step through the to step through the Control panel messages 363 Control panel message 13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE Description There is a jam in the front cover. FRONT COVER Recommended action 4. Make sure the sensor (SR8001) in the duplexer is operating correctly by performing a paper path test. 5. Replace the duplexer if it is not working correctly. See Duplexer on page 349. 6. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 7. Check all cable connection to/from DC controller. 1. Remove the jammed paper. 2. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 3. Press and instructions. 4. For more information, see Clearing jams on page 415. 1. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 2. Press and instructions. 3. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 4. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 5. Replace the fuser. 6. Check all cable connection to/from DC controller. 7. Check that the fuser paper sensor is in place. If it is defective, replace it. 8. Check all cable connection to/from DC controller. For help press 13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE There is a jam in the top cover area. TOP COVER For help press 13.XX.YY MULTIPLE JAMS IN DUPLEX PATH There are multiple jams in the duplex path. This includes the top cover area. to step through the to step through the See 13.XX.YY JAM INSIDE DUPLEXER and 13.XX.YY JAM IN DUPLEX PATH for recommended actions. For help press 364 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action 13.XX.YY MULTIPLE There are multiple jams in the paper path. This includes the top cover area. 1. Press for detailed information about clearing the jam. 2. Press and instructions. 3. For more information, see Clearing jams on page 415. 1. Press JAMS IN PAPER PATH For help press 20 Insufficient Memory The printer has received more data from the computer than fits in available memory. For help press to step through the to continue printing. NOTE A loss of data will occur. alternates with 2. Reduce the complexity of the print job to avoid this error in the future. 3. Adding memory to the printer may allow printing of more complex pages. 1. Press BUFFER OVERFLOW 2. Power cycle the printer. To continue press 3. Resend the print job. 4. If the error still occurs, replace the EIO card in slot X. See Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126. 1. Press BUFFER OVERFLOW 2. Power cycle the printer. alternates with 3. Resend the print job. To continue press 4. If the error still occurs, replace the EIO card in slot X. See Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126. 1. Press 20 Insufficient Memory To continue press 22 EIO X 22 EMBEDDED I/O 22 PARALLEL I/O The EIO card in card slot X has overflowed its I/O buffer during a busy state. The embedded Jetdirect print server has overflowed. The parallel buffer has overflowed during a busy state. BUFFER OVERFLOW To continue press ENWW to resume printing. 2. If the message persists, disconnect the parallel cable at both ends and reconnect. 3. Ensure that a high quality cable is being used. Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin connections or might not otherwise conform to IEEE-1284 specifications. 22 PARALLEL I/O BUFFER OVERFLOW to continue printing. NOTE A loss of data will occur. For help press alternates with to continue printing. Control panel messages 365 Control panel message 22 USB I/O Description The USB buffer has overflowed during a busy state. Recommended action 4. Replace the cable. 5. Leave the computer connected and try to connect to a different printer. If this still fails, replace the formatter. 1. Press BUFFER OVERFLOW to continue printing. NOTE occur. To continue press A loss of data will 2. If the message persists, disconnect the USB cable at both ends and reconnect. 3. Ensure that a high quality cable is being used. Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin connections. 4. Replace the cable. 5. Leave the computer connected and try to connect to a different printer. If this still fails, replace the formatter. 1. Press TRANSMISSION 2. Power cycle the printer. To continue press 3. Resend the print job. 4. If the error still occurs, replace the EIO card in slot X. See Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126. 1. Press TRANSMISSION 2. Power cycle the printer. alternates with 3. Resent the print job. To continue press 4. If the error still occurs, replace the EIO card in slot X or the formatter. See Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126 and Formatter on page 227. 1. Make sure the correct settings are set for the trays. 2. Run a paper path diagnostic test to determine if all sensors are working correctly. 3. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. 40 EIO X BAD 40 EMBEDDED I/O BAD 41.3 UNEXPECTED SIZE IN TRAY X A connection with the card in EIO slot X has been broken. A connection with the embedded Jetdirect print server has been broken. Media is loaded that is longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray. For help press to continue printing. to continue printing. alternates with LOAD TRAY X [TYPE] [SIZE] 366 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action The printer senses a different media type in the media path than configured in the tray. 1. Make sure the correct settings are set for the trays. 2. Run a paper path diagnostic test to determine if all sensors are working correctly. 3. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Press Stop to clear the print job from the printer memory. 3. Turn the printer off then on. 4. Try printing a job from a different software program. If the job prints, go back to the first program and try printing a different file. If the message displays only with a certain software program or print job, contact the software vendor for assistance. 5. If the message persists with different software programs and print jobs, disconnect all of the cables to the printer that connect it to the network or computer. 6. Turn the printer off. 7. Remove all memory DIMMs or thirdparty DIMMs from the printer. (Do not remove the firmware DIMM.) 8. Remove all EIO devices from the printer. 9. Turn the printer on. To use another tray press 41.5 UNEXPECTED TYPE IN TRAY X For help press alternates with LOAD TRAY X [TYPE] [SIZE] To use another tray press 49.XXXX PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on A critical firmware error has occurred that caused the processor on the formatter to abort operation. This type of error can be caused by invalid print commands, corrupt data, or invalid operations. In some cases, electrical noise in the cable can corrupt data during transmission to the printer. Other causes include poor-quality parallel cables, poor-connections, or home-grown programs. On rare occasions, the formatter is at fault, which is usually indicated by a 79 Service Error. 10. If the error no longer exists, install each DIMM and EIO device one at a time, making sure to turn the printer off and on again as you install each device. 11. Replace a DIMM or EIO device if you determine that it causes the error. ENWW Control panel messages 367 Control panel message Description Recommended action 12. Remember to reconnect all of the cables that connect the printer to the network or computer. 13. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 14. If the error persists, upgrade the firmware compact flash card. See Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121. 15. Replace the formatter and calibrate the printer. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. 50.X FUSER ERROR For help press A fuser error has occurred. The following are specific fuser errors: 1. Turn the printer off and allow it to cool down. 50.1: A low fuser temperature error has occurred in the main thermistor. 2. Reinstall the fuser, and check the connector (J5001) that connects the fuser and the printer. Replace the connector if it is damaged. 3. Replace the fuser. 4. Check all cable connections to/from the DC controller. 5. Replace the low-voltage power supply PCB. See Low-voltage power supply PCB on page 319. 50.2: A fuser warmup service error has occurred. 50.3: A high fuser temperature error has occurred in the main thermistor. 50.6: An open fuser error has occurred. 50.7: A fuser pressure release mechanism failure has occurred. 50.8: Low fuser sub-thermistor temperature 50.9: High fuser sub-thermistor temperature The error might be due to an inadequate power supply, inadequate line voltage, or a problem with the fuser. 51.1Y A laser error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR Y Description 2. For help press 0 - Black alternates with 1 - Cyan Reseat the connectors (J1002 - Y, J1003 - C, J1004 - M, J1005 - K) between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCB. 2 - Magenta 3. 51.1Y PRINTER ERROR 3 - Yellow Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 4. Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly on page 287. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/ scanner. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. To continue turn off then on 368 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action 51.2Y A laser beam error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR Y Description 2. For help press 0 - Black alternates with 1 - Cyan Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 51.2Y 2 - Magenta 3. PRINTER ERROR 3 - Yellow Reseat the connectors (J1002 - Y, J1003 - C, J1004 - M, J1005 - K) between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCB. 4. Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly on page 287. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/ scanner. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. To continue turn off then on 52.X PRINTER ERROR A printer error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. alternates with X Description 2. To continue 00 - Scanner error turn off then on 01 - Scanner startup error Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 3. Reseat the connectors between the laser/scanner and DC controller PCB. 4. Replace the defective laser/scanner assembly. See Laser/scanner assembly on page 287. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/ scanner. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. 02 - Scanner rotation error Y Description 0 - Black 1 - Cyan 2 - Magenta 3 - Yellow 53.XX.X CHECK RAM A memory error has occurred. DIMM SLOT X X DIMM Type 1 RAM Y Device Location If prompted to do so, press to continue. The printer should come to the Ready state, but will not make full use of all memory installed. Otherwise: 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Verify that all memory meets specifications and is correctly seated. ZZ Error Number 3. Turn the printer on. 00 Unsupported memory 4. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM card in the slot indicated. See Installing DDR memory DIMMs on page 117. 1 DIMM Slot 1 2 DIMM Slot 2 01 Unrecognized memory 02 Unsupported memory size 03 Failed RAM test 04 Exceeded maximum RAM size 05 Invalid DIMM speed ENWW Control panel messages 369 Control panel message Description Recommended action 54.XX Printing cannot continue. There is a sensor malfunction. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Check the connectors: J501 on the toner level PCB or J5201 on the environment sensor. 3. Check the connectors: J1014 (toner lever sensor) or J1010 (environment sensor) on the DC controller PCB. 4. Replace the environment sensor (see Environment sensor on page 308) or toner level detection PCB (see Toner level detection PCB on page 326). PRINTER ERROR Values of XX are: To continue turn off then on 01 - Temperature/humidity sensor (J1010 environment sensor) 15 - Yellow toner remaining sensor (J1014 toner level sensor) 16 - Magenta toner remaining sensor (J1014 toner level sensor) 17 - Cyan toner remaining sensor (J1014 toner level sensor) 18 - Black toner remaining sensor (J1014 toner level sensor) 55.X.X DC A printer command error has occurred. 01 – 02 errors CONTROLLER ERROR Values of XX are: Replace the DC controller. See DC controller PCB on page 312. For help press 01 - DC controller memory error alternates with 02 - DC controller memory error 55.X.X DC 03 - No engine response PRINTER ERROR 04 - Communication error To continue 05 - RFU error 03 – 04 errors 1. Reseat formatter 2. Check all connectors on the DC controller. 3. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/ support/cp4005. 4. Replace the DC controller PCB. See DC controller PCB on page 312. turn off then on 05 errors 1. Upgrade the DC controller PCB firmware. 2. Replace the DC controller PCB firmware. 56.XX A printer error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR XX Description 2. Remove all input and output devices and reinstall them. To continue 01 - Input device 3. turn off then on 02 - Output device Check all connectors to the input/ output devices that are installed. Replace any damaged connectors. 370 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action 57.0X A printer fan error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR XX Description 2. Reconnect the connector J1004 on the DC controller PCB. To continue 01 - Delivery fan 3. turn off then on 04 - Cartridge fan Immediately after starting the print operation, measure the voltage between the appropriate pins on the connector. If the voltage changes from 0 V to 24 V, replace the affected fan. 05 - Duplex fan 07 - Upper exhaust fan 0A - Power supply fan J1033 — Measure pins 1 and 3 for cartridge fan J1033 — Measure pins 4 and 6 for delivery fan J1033 — Measure pins 7 and 9 for upper exhaust fan J1034 — Measure pins 1 and 3 for power supply fan 58.0X A memory tag error was detected. 1. Turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR XX Description 2. For help press 03 – Memory controller PCB Check the connectors on the memory controller (J4001, J9630) and the DC controller PCB (J1021). alternates with 04 – Memory controller PCB power supply 3. Replace the memory PCB. 4. Replace the E label contacts. See E label memory contacts and cable on page 322. 58.0X PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 59.XY A printer motor error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR X Description 2. For help press 0 Motor error alternates with 1 Motor startup error Note: This message might also display if the transfer unit is missing or incorrectly installed. Ensure that the transfer unit is correctly installed. 59.XY 2 Motor rotation error PRINTER ERROR 3 Fuser motor startup error To continue 4 Fuser motor rotation error turn off then on 5 Image drum motor startup error 6 Image drum motor rotation error ETB motor error 1. Run the component test to verify that the ETB is working correctly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Clean the ETB unit intermediate connector J4613. 9 ETB motor startup error A ETB motor rotation error ENWW Control panel messages 371 Control panel message Description Recommended action B Developing disengaging motor startup error 3. Reconnect the connector J4613 between the ETB and the printer, and J1011 on the DC controller PCB. C Developing disengaging motor rotation error 4. Replace the ETB. Y Description Fuser motor error 0 - Black or N/A 1. Reconnect the connectors J4605 for the fuser motor and J1024 on the DC controller PCB. 2. Run the component test to verify that the fuser motor is working correctly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 3. Replace the fuser motor. 1 - Cyan 2 - Magenta 3 - Yellow Print cartridge motor error 1. Run the component test to verify that the print cartridge motor is working correctly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Reconnect the print cartridge connector on the DC controller PCB (J1018 for magenta and black, J1017 for cyan and yellow). On the motor itself, reconnect the connectors (J4603 for magenta, J4604 for black, J4601 for yellow, and J4602 for cyan). 3. Replace the drum drive assembly for the indicated print cartridge. Developing disengaging motor error 60.X PRINTER ERROR alternates with To continue A tray lifting error has occurred, where XX is the number of the tray. 1. Run the component test to verify that the print developing disengaging motor is working correctly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Reconnect the connectors J468 and J1020 between the developing disengaging motor and the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the developing disengaging motor. See Disengaging drive motor on page 298. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Install the tray and listen carefully. You should be able to hear the paper stack being lifted. You can also watch the paper level indicator on the front of the tray to see if it moves. turn off then on 372 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action 3. 62 NO SYSTEM No system was found. To continue Check the following connectors: ● Tray 2: J4618 on the lifter motor and J1015 on the DC controller ● Trays 3–6: J8120 on the lifter motor and J8102 on the paper feeder PCB 4. Replace the lifter motor assembly. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Reseat the firmware compact flash, making sure that it is in the first slot. 3. Replace the firmware compact flash (see Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121) and the formatter. turn off then on 65.X.X OUTPUT DEVICE CONDITION An external output device has a condition that needs attention before printing can resume. The amber light on the stapler/ stacker is blinking. Remove any jammed paper and open and then close the top cover. If necessary, reseat the output device. XX Description 10 - Jogger not detected, HP sensor off 11 - Jogger not detected, HP sensor on 12 - Eject lever not detected, HP sensor off 13 - Eject lever not detected, HP sensor on 14 - Paper hold lever not detected, HP sensor off 15 - Paper hold lever not detected, HP sensor on 16 - Paper hold lever over run 65.X.X OUTPUT DEVICE DISCONNECTED 66.XX.X OUTPUT Communication between the printer and the device has been broken. The device could be disconnected. Turn the printer off. Replace the stapler/ stacker on the printer, making sure it is properly installed. Turn the printer on. The stapler/stacker has failed. The amber light on the stapler/stacker is solid. 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Check the staple cartridge for the staples jammed exiting the cartridge, and reseat staples in the cartridge if necessary. 3. Check the stapling bed for jammed paper or staples. Verify that the stapler cartridge is intact. 4. Check that nothing is obstructing the movement of the stapler/stacker. DEVICE FAILURE XX Description 18 - Stapler could not detect the HP sensor 19 - Stapler could not advance the staples 20 - Safe switch detect unsafe 21 - Tray move-up time out 22 - Tray move-down time out ENWW Control panel messages 373 Control panel message Description Recommended action 23 - Tray detect upper limit 5. Check that the output tray is properly installed and output tray is in the downmost position. 6. Turn the printer on. A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing the button should clear the message. Printing can continue, but there may be unexpected behavior. 1. Press 2. For 68.0 errors, turn the printer off then on. X Description 3. If a 68.0 error persists, perform an NVRAM initialization. 4. For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive or flash card. 5. For 68.1 errors that persist, reinitialize the hard disk or flash card. A non-volatile storage device is full. Pressing the button should clear the message. Printing can continue, but there may be unexpected behavior. 1. Press 2. For a 68.0 error, turn the printer off then on. X Description 3. If a 68.0 error persists, perform an NVRAM initialization. 4. For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive or flash card. 5. For 68.1 errors that persist, reinitialize the hard disk or flash card. 1. Press 2. For a 68.0 error, turn the printer off then on. 3. If a 68.0 error persists, perform an NVRAM initialization. 4. For 68.1 errors, use the HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the disk drive or flash card. 5. For 68.1 errors that persist, reinitialize the hard disk or flash card. 1. Check if the duplexer connector (J2003) is connected to the duplexer. 2. Check the connector (J1030) on the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the duplexer. See Duplexer on page 349. 24 - Tray detect bottom limit 68.X PERMANENT STORAGE FULL For help press alternates with to continue. 0 for onboard NVRAM 68.X PERMANENT 1 for removable disk (flash or hard) STORAGE FULL To continue press 68.X PERMANENT STORAGE WRITE FAIL To continue press to continue. 0 for onboard NVRAM 1 for removable disk (flash or hard) 68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED For help press alternates with 68.X STORAGE ERROR SETTINGS CHANGED One or more printer settings saved in the non-volatile storage device is invalid and has been reset to its factory default. Pressing the button should clear the message. Printing can continue, but there may be unexpected behavior. 0 for onboard NVRAM 1 for removable disk (flash or hard) To continue press 69.X PRINTER ERROR A printer error has occurred. For help press X Description alternates with 0 - duplexer not functioning 69.X PRINTER ERROR 1 - duplexer not functioning to continue. To continue turn off then on 374 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action 79.XXXX A critical hardware error has occurred. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. If the problem persists, reseat the firmware compact flash. 3. Reseat the formatter. 4. Upgrade the firmware compact flash. 5. Replace the firmware compact flash. See Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121. 6. Replace the formatter. Calibrate the printer. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. If the problem persists, reseat the EIO card. 3. Replace the EIO card. See Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126. 1. To clear the message, press the FAILURE A device failure has occurred on the specified drive. Printing can continue for jobs that do not require the Flash DIMM. 2. Turn the printer off then on. To clear press [FS] Description 3. If the message persists, remove and reinstall the affected components. alternates with Rom disk 4. Ready Ram disk If the message still persists, replace the affected components. 1. To enable writing to the affected components, turn off write protection, using HP Web Jetadmin. 2. If the message persists, turn the printer off then on. PRINTER ERROR To continue turn off then on 8X.YYYY The I/O accessory card in slot X has encountered a critical error. EIO X ERROR X Description 1: error in slot 1 2: error in slot 2 [FS] DEVICE key. Card slot X Internal disk EIO X disk USB storage [FS] DEVICE The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it. WRITE PROTECTED [FS] Description To clear press Rom disk alternates with Ram disk Ready Card slot X Internal disk EIO X disk USB storage ENWW Control panel messages 375 Control panel message Description Recommended action [FS] FILE The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full. 1. Use HP Web Jetadmin software to delete files from the affected components and try again. 2. If the message persists, turn the printer off then on. SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press alternates with Ready [FS] Description Rom disk Ram disk Card slot X Internal disk EIO X disk USB storage [FS] NOT The device has not been initialized. [FS] NOT [FS] Description Rom disk You can use HP Web Jetadmin to initialize the device or use the disk initialization procedure. See Hard disk initialization (4700 models) on page 539. WARNING! All data on all disk devices will be lost when performing the disk initialization procedure. Ram disk Card slot X Internal disk EIO X disk USB storage ABCDEFGHIJ 0110000000 alternates with This message is displayed when a paper path sensor test or a paper path test is run. The alphabetical value indicates which sensor is being checked. No action necessary. An attempt has been made to modify a menu item while the control panel security mechanism is enabled by the printer administrator. The message will disappear shortly, and the printer will return to Ready state. Use PJL commands or HP Web Jetadmin to unlock the control panel. The duplexer is not connected properly and must be reinserted before printing can continue. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Reconnect the duplexer and verify that the connector is not damaged. 3. Replace the duplex unit. See Duplexer on page 349. To exit press. Stop Access Denied MENUS LOCKED BAD DUPLEXER CONNECTION alternates with For help press Calibrating... The printer is calibrating. No action necessary. Canceling... X The printer is in the process of canceling a job. The message will continue to be displayed while the job is stopped, the No action necessary. 376 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action paper path flushed, and any remaining incoming data on the active data channel is received and discarded. CARD SLOT X The flash card in slot X is not working correctly. NOT FUNCTIONAL 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Remove the card from the slot indicated and replace with a new card. See Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121. Checking paper path The engine is turning its rollers to check for possible paper jams. No action necessary. Checking printer The engine is doing an internal test. No action necessary. CHOSEN PERSONALITY PJL encountered a request for a personality that did not exist in the printer. The job is aborted and no pages will be printed. 1. Press 2. Press and instructions. 3. Reprint using the correct driver for the device. 4. Reprint using a printer driver for a different printer language, or add the requested language to the printer (if possible). To see a list of available personalities, print a configuration page. NOT AVAILABLE To continue press alternates with CHOSEN PERSONALITY NOT AVAILABLE For help press for detailed information. to step through the CLEANING DISK X% COMPLETE A storage device is being cleaned. Do not turn the printer off. When the process is complete, the printer will automatically restart. No action necessary. Cleaning... A cleaning page is being processed. No action necessary. Clearing event log This message is displayed while the event log is cleared. The printer will exit the MENUS once the event log has been cleared. No action necessary. Clearing paper path The printer jammed or detected misplaced paper when turned on. The printer is attempting to eject jammed pages automatically. No action necessary. CLOSE FRONT COVERS The top cover needs to be closed. 1. Close front covers. 2. Check the door open switches. 3. Replace the door open switches. 1. Close the top cover. 2. Check the door open switches. 3. Replace the door open switches. For help press Close top cover. CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN EXTERNAL ACCESSORY ENWW The top cover of the printer is open. The external device needs a firmware upgrade. The amber light on the stapler/ stacker is blinking. Upgrade the firmware. Control panel messages 377 Control panel message Description Recommended action Creating... CLEANING PAGE This message is displayed while a cleaning page is being generated. When the page is complete, the control panel display backs up one screen to the PRINT QUALITY menu. No action necessary. The printer received data and is waiting for a form feed. When the printer receives another file, the message should disappear. Press Date/Time Prompt for setting the printer date and time. Default format is [YYYY]/[MMM]/[DD] [HH][MM]. To change, press date prompts. DELETING PRIVATE JOBS The printer is deleting a private stored job. A PIN is required to delete a private job. No action necessary. Deleting... X The printer is currently deleting the stored job. No action necessary. DISK FILE The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to store something on the file system but was unsuccessful because the file system is full. If prompted to do so, press to continue. The printer should come to the Ready state, but will not make full use of all memory installed. DATA RECEIVED To print last page press Go When the page is printed, follow the instructions printed on the cleaning page to process the page. to continue printing. alternates with Ready To print last page press Go SYSTEM IS FULL To clear press and follow the time and Otherwise: alternates with 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Verify that all memory meets specifications and is correctly seated. 3. Turn the printer on. 4. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM card in the slot indicated. See Installing DDR memory DIMMs on page 117. 1. To enable writing to the disk, turn off write protection, using HP Web Jetadmin. To clear press 2. To clear the message, press the alternates with 3. If the message persists, turn the printer off and then on. 1. Check if the duplexer connector (J2003) is connected to the duplexer. 2. Check the connector (J1030) on the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the duplexer. See Duplexer on page 349. Ready DISK IS The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it. WRITE PROTECTED Ready (4700 models) DUPLEXER ERROR A duplexer error has occurred. key. REMOVE DUPLEXER alternates with Install duplexer (4700 models) with power off 378 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action EIO X DISK The EIO disk in slot X is not working correctly. 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated and replace with a new EIO disk drive. See Installing an HP Jetdirect print server card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 126. NOT FUNCTIONAL For help press (4700 models) EIO X disk The EIO disk device in slot X is initializing. No action necessary. The EIO disk device in slot X is spinning up its platter. No action necessary. Event Log Empty SHOW EVENT LOG was selected from the control panel, and the event log is empty. No action necessary. FLASH FILE The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory). 1. To clear the message, press the 2. If the message persists, turn the printer off then on. [FS] Description 3. If the message reappears, there may be a problem with the software application. initializing (4700 models) EIO X disk spinning up (4700 models) OPERATION FAILED To clear press alternates with Ready Rom disk key. Ram disk Card slot X Internal disk EIO X disk USB storage Genuine HP supplies installed A new HP cartridge has been installed. The printer returns to the Ready state after approximately 10 seconds. No action necessary. INCORRECT [COLOR] A cartridge is installed in the wrong slot and the cover is closed. 1. CARTRIDGE Open the top and front covers. CAUTION The ETB can be easily damaged. [COLOR] = Black, Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow alternates with For help press 2. Open the ETB. The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. 3. Remove the incorrect print cartridge. 4. Install the correct print cartridge. 5. Close ETB and then close the top and front covers. Incorrect PIN ENWW The wrong PIN was entered. After three incorrect PIN entries, the printer will return to Ready. Re-enter PIN correctly. Control panel messages 379 Control panel message Description Recommended action INCORRECT SUPPLIES At least one supply item is incorrectly positioned in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low. 1. Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu. 2. Press and to highlight the specific supply that has a problem. 3. Press 4. Press and instructions. For status press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. Initializing to view help for the supply. to step through the Displayed when the printer is turned on to show that permanent storage is being initialized. No action necessary. Initializing... This message is displayed when the printer is turned on, as soon as the individual tasks begin initialization. No action necessary. INSERT OR CLOSE Tray X must be inserted or closed before the current job can be printed. 1. Close the tray indicated. TRAY X 2. Check tray path for obstructions For help press 3. Check the paper size detection sensors for the indicated tray. 4. Replace the paper size detection sensors. 1. Install the indicated cartridge. 2. Make sure that the cartridge guides are installed correctly. 3. Make sure that the E label makes contact with the cartridges. 4. Replace the indicated cartridge. 5. Replace the E label contacts. See E label memory contacts and cable on page 322. 6. Replace the memory controller PCB. 1. Confirm that the fuser is installed in the printer and is fully seated. 2. Check the fuser connector (J5001). If it is broken or damaged, replace it. 3. Check the connector (J1025) on the DC controller PCB. 4. Replace the fuser. 1. Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu. 2. and to highlight the Press specific supply that has a problem. 3. Press permanent storage INSTALL [COLOR] The cartridge is not installed or is not installed correctly. CARTRIDGE alternates with For help press INSTALL FUSER The fuser is not installed or is not installed correctly. alternates with For help press INSTALL SUPPLIES For status press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. 380 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting At least one supply item is missing or is not correctly seated in the printer and another supply item is missing, incorrectly placed, out, or low. Insert the supply item or make sure the installed supply item is fully seated. to view help for the supply. ENWW Control panel message INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT INSUFFICIENT MEMORY TO LOAD FONTS/DATA Description The ETB is not installed or is not installed correctly. The device does not have enough memory to load the data, such as fonts or macros from the location specified. [Device] can be one of the following: Recommended action 4. Press and instructions. 5. See INSTALL FUSER, INSTALL TRANSFER UNIT, or INSTALL [COLOR] CARTRIDGE for more information. 1. Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu. 2. Press to highlight the transfer unit. 3. Press to view help. 4. and Press instructions. 5. If the error persists, verify that the ETB connectors on the ETB (J4613) and the DC controller PCB (J1021) are connected. Replace the connectors as necessary. 6. Replace the ETB. 1. To use the device without the data, press . 2. To solve the problem, add more memory to the device. DDR SDRAM Memory: 128 MB (Q2630A) or 256 MB (Q2631A). For help press alternates with INTERNAL = ROM directly on the formatter board [Device] CARD SLOT X = font card in slot X To continue press External source # to step through the to step through the INTERNAL DISK DIMMS USB device X EIO X DISK = removable hard disk installed in EIO slot X Internal disk initializing The internal disk device is initializing. No action necessary. INTERNAL DISK NOT FUNCTIONAL The internal disk is not working correctly. 1. Turn the printer off then on. 2. Make sure the disk is plugged in correctly. 3. Replace the internal disk. 4. Replace the formatter. Internal disk spinning up ENWW The internal disk is spinning up. This message generally displays for approximately 15 seconds when the printer emerges from sleep mode. Jobs can still print, but jobs that require disk access, such as stored jobs, must wait until the disk is initialized. No action necessary. Control panel messages 381 Control panel message Description Recommended action LOAD TRAY 1: This message displays when Tray 1 is selected but is not loaded, and no other paper trays are available for use. Load the correct paper in Tray 1 and press to continue. [TYPE] [SIZE] If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. For help press LOAD TRAY 1: [TYPE] [SIZE] Tray 1 is loaded and configured for a type and size other than the one specified in the job. 1. If the correct paper is loaded, press 2. Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper and load Tray 1 with the specified paper. 3. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. 4. Confirm that the media guides are in the correct position. 1. Load the correct paper in the tray. 2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. 3. Otherwise, select another tray. 1. If the correct paper is loaded, press 2. Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper and load Tray XX with the specified paper. 3. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. 4. Confirm that the media guides are in the correct position. 5. Check the paper size sensors. 6. Replace the paper size sensors. 7. Replace the paper tray. 1. If the correct paper is loaded, press 2. Otherwise, remove the incorrect paper and load Tray XX with the specified paper. 3. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. To continue press alternates with LOAD TRAY 1: [TYPE] [SIZE] . For help press LOAD TRAY 1: [TYPE] [SIZE] This message displays when Tray 1 is selected but is not loaded, and other paper trays are available for use. To use another tray press Alternates with LOAD TRAY 1: [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press LOAD TRAY X [TYPE] [SIZE] This message displays when Tray XX is selected but is not loaded, and no other paper trays are available for use. For help press LOAD TRAY X [TYPE] [SIZE] Tray XX is either empty or configured for a type and size other than specified in the job, and another paper tray is available. To use another tray press alternates with 382 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting . . ENWW Control panel message Description LOAD TRAY X Recommended action 4. Confirm that the media guides are in the correct position. 5. Check the paper size sensors. 6. Replace the paper size sensors. 7. Replace the paper tray. [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press Loading program X DO NOT POWER OFF MANUALLY FEED Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer’s file system and are loaded into RAM when the printer is turned on. The number XX specifies a sequence number indicating the current program being loaded. No action necessary. Do not turn the printer off. The job specifies manual feed, but Tray 1 is empty. Another tray is available. Add paper to Tray 1 or press another tray. A job was sent specifying MANUAL FEED and Tray 1 is empty. 1. Load Tray 1 with the correct paper and press to continue. No other tray is available. 2. If prompted, confirm the size and type paper loaded. The job specifies MANUAL FEED, but Tray 1 is already loaded and configured for a type or size other than that specified in the job. 1. Load the correct paper in Tray 1. 2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. 3. Otherwise, press tray. 1. Load Tray 1 with the correct paper. 2. If prompted, confirm the size and type of paper loaded. 3. Otherwise, press tray. to select [TYPE] [SIZE] alternates with To use another tray press MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] To continue press MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] To continue press alternates with to select another MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] A job was sent that specified MANUAL FEED and Tray 1 is empty. Another tray is available. To use another tray press to select another alternates with MANUALLY FEED [TYPE] [SIZE] For help press MANUALLY FEED OUTPUT STACK The even-numbered pages of a manual two- Follow the instructions on the Print on sided document have been printed and the Both Sides instruction dialog box at the printer is waiting for the output stack to be computer. alternates with ENWW Control panel messages 383 Control panel message Description Recommended action Then press inserted for the odd-numbered pages to be printed. or to print second sides MIXED PAPER SIZES IN Press for help at the printer. The job contains different paper sizes and cannot be stapled. The status light is solid green. Use a uniform paper size when sending jobs to the stapler. The printer is executing a component test and the component selected is a solenoid. No action necessary. The printer is executing a component test and the components selected are the solenoid and the motor. No action necessary. No job to cancel There are no stored jobs that can be cancelled. No action necessary. NO STORED JOBS No jobs stored on the EIO disk. This message is displayed when the user enters the RETRIEVE JOB menu and there are no jobs to retrieve. No action necessary. NON HP SUPPLY The printer has detected that a non-HP print cartridge is currently installed. If you believe you purchased an HP cartridge, please call the HP fraud hotline (1-877-219-3183, toll-free in North America). JOB TO STAPLE alternates with To continue without stapling press Moving solenoid To exit press. Stop Moving solenoid and motor To exit press. Stop supplies installed alternates with CAUTION Any printer repair required as a result of using nonHP cartridges is not covered under HP warranty. For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges, but the level of any refilled cartridge will not be shown. ORDER [COLOR] CARTRIDGE alternates with Ready The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. ORDER FUSER KIT LESS THAN X PAGES For help press 384 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting The identified print cartridge is nearing the end of its useful life. The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated. Estimated pages remaining is based upon the historical page coverage of this printer. 1. Press 2. Obtain the part number for the print cartridge indicated. 3. Order a print cartridge. Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced. to view help for the message. NOTE Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. The fuser is near the end of its life. The printer is ready and will continue for the estimated number of pages indicated. 1. Press 2. Obtain the part number for the fuser kit. Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced. 3. Order the fuser kit. to view help for the message. ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action alternates with NOTE Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. Ready ORDER SUPPLIES More than one supply item is low. 1. Press Menu to access the menus. alternates with Printing will continue until a supply needs to be replaced. 2. Press or to highlight INFORMATION, and then press . Ready 3. Press or to highlight SUPPLIES STATUS, and then press . 4. Press or to highlight a supply that needs to be ordered. 5. Press 6. Obtain a part number from help. 7. Order the supply. 8. Repeat the previous steps as necessary for each supply that needs to be ordered. 9. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. 1. Press 2. Obtain the transfer kit part number from help. 3. Order the transfer kit. For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. ORDER TRANSFER KIT The transfer unit is near end of life. Printing can continue. LESS THAN X PAGES to access help for the supply. to view help for the message. For help press alternates with NOTE Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. Ready Paused To return to Ready press STOP Performing The printer is paused, and there are no error messages pending at the display. The I/O continues receiving data until memory is full. Press the Stop key. The printer is performing a print/stop test. No action necessary. A firmware upgrade is in process. Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to Ready. The printer is performing a paper path test. No action necessary. PRINT/STOP TEST Performing upgrade Performing... PAPER PATH TEST ENWW Control panel messages 385 Control panel message Description Recommended action Please wait The printer is in the process of clearing data. No action necessary. PRINTING STOPPED This message is displayed when a Print/ Stop Test is run and time expires. Press This message displays while the printer CMYK samples page is being generated. No action necessary. The printer is generating the configuration page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the demo page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the diagnostics page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the engine test page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the event log page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the mass storage directory page. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating either the PCL or PS personality typeface list. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the printer menu map. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the print quality troubleshooting pages. The printer will return to the Ready state when the pages are printed. Follow the instructions on the printed pages. The printer is generating the registration page. The printer will return to the SET REGISTRATION menu when the page is completed. Follow the instructions on the printed pages. This message displays while the printer RGB samples page is being generated. No action necessary. The printer is generating the supplies status page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. The printer is generating the usage page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. No action necessary. to continue printing. To continue press Printing... CMYK SAMPLES Printing... CONFIGURATION Printing... DEMO PAGE Printing... DIAGNOSTICS PAGE Printing... ENGINE TEST Printing... Event Log Printing... FILE DIRECTORY Printing... FONT LIST Printing... MENU MAP Printing... PQ TROUBLESHOOTING Printing... REGISTRATION PAGE Printing... RGB SAMPLES Printing... SUPPLIES STATUS Printing... Usage Page 386 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action Processing duplex Paper temporarily comes into the output bin while printing a duplex job. Do not attempt to remove the pages until the job is complete. Do not grab paper as it temporarily comes into the output bin. The message will disappear when the job is finished. Processing... The printer is currently processing a job but is not yet picking pages. When paper motion begins, this message will be replaced by a message that indicates which tray the job is being printed from. No action necessary. Processing... The printer is currently processing or printing collated copies. The message indicates that copy X of Y total copies is currently being processed. No action necessary. The printer is actively processing a job from the designated tray. No action necessary. This message might be displayed during periods of heavy usage if the printer becomes overheated. If this occurs, the printer enters a mode in which it prints for one minute and pauses for one minute. This cycle continues until the operating temperature stabilizes. Press A device failure has occurred on the specified drive. If prompted to do so, press to continue. The printer should come to the Ready state, but will not make full use of all memory installed. job Do not grab paper until job completes copyof Processing... from tray X Processing... INTERMITTENT MODE For help press RAM DISK DEVICE FAILURE To clear press Otherwise: alternates with 1. Turn the printer off. 2. Verify that all memory meets specifications and is correctly seated. 3. Turn the printer on. 4. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM card in the slot indicated. See Installing DDR memory DIMMs on page 117. The printer received a PJL file system command that attempted to perform an illogical operation (for example, to download a file to a non-existent directory). 1. To clear the message, press the 2. If the message persists, turn the printer off then on. Printing may continue. 3. If the message reappears, there may be a problem with the software application. Ready RAM DISK FILE OPERATION FAILED To clear press alternates with Ready ENWW to see step by step information. key. Control panel messages 387 Control panel message Description Recommended action RAM DISK IS The file system device is protected and no new files can be written to it. 1. To enable writing to the RAM disk, turn off write protection, using HP Web Jetadmin software. To clear press 2. To clear the message, press the alternates with 3. If the message persists, turn the printer off then on. WRITE PROTECTED Ready Ready The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. Ready The printer is online and ready for data. No status or device attendance messages are pending at the display. No action necessary. The printer is in a special diagnostics mode. Press the Stop key to exit the special diagnostics mode. key. Diagnostics mode or To exit press. Stop No action is necessary. Ready The printer is online and ready. No action necessary. A firmware upgrade is in progress. Do not turn the printer off until the printer returns to Ready. The duplexer has been removed. 1. Check if the duplexer connector (J2003) is connected to the duplexer. 2. Check the connector (J1030) on the DC controller PCB. 3. Replace the duplexer. See Duplexer on page 349. IP Address: Receiving upgrade REINSERT DUPLEXER REMOVE ALL The printer is executing a component test and the component selected is Belt Only. Remove all print cartridges. The printer is executing a disable cartridge check or component test where the component selected is the cartridge motor. Remove one print cartridge. The identified print cartridge has reached the out threshold of life and the COLOR SUPPLY OUT setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT OUT. Printing cannot continue. 1. Order the appropriate print cartridge. 2. Open the front and top covers and then open the ETB. PRINT CARTRIDGES To exit press. Stop Remove at least one print cartridge. To exit press. Stop REPLACE [COLOR] CARTRIDGE alternates with CAUTION The ETB can be easily damaged. For help press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. 388 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 3. Remove the identified print cartridge. 4. Install a new print cartridge. ENWW Control panel message REPLACE [COLOR] CARTRIDGE alternates with Description The identified print cartridge has reached the low threshold of life and the COLOR SUPPLY OUT setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT OUT. Printing can continue. Recommended action 5. Close the ETB and the top and front covers. 6. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. 1. Order the appropriate print cartridge. 2. To continue, press 3. Open the front and top covers and then open the ETB. . To continue press CAUTION The ETB can be easily damaged. The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. REPLACE FUSER KIT For help press REPLACE FUSER KIT For help press alternates with REPLACE FUSER KIT To continue press ENWW The fuser kit has reached the end of its life. Replace the fuser kit. Printing can continue although print quality might be reduced. The fuser is nearing the end of its useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT OUT. Printing can continue. 4. Remove the identified print cartridge. 5. Install a new print cartridge. 6. Close the ETB and the top and front covers. 7. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. 1. Open the top cover. 2. Grasp the purple handles on the fuser unit. 3. Remove the old fuser unit from the printer. 4. Install a new fuser unit and secure with thumb screws. 5. Close the top cover. 6. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. 1. Order the fuser kit. 2. To continue printing, press 3. To replace the fuser kit, perform the following steps: . ● Open the top cover. ● Grasp the purple handles on the fuser unit. Control panel messages 389 Control panel message REPLACE STAPLER Description For status press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. REPLACE SUPPLIES Override in use alternates with REPLACE SUPPLIES To continue press The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. 390 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ● Remove the old fuser unit from the printer. ● Install the new fuser unit. ● Close the top cover. ● Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. ● The stapler cartridge contains fewer than 30 staples and should not be used. The stapler cartridge needs to be replaced. ● Replace the stapler cartridge. For more information, see Replacing the stapler cartridge (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series) on page 108. ● There is no stapler cartridge installed. ● Install a stapler cartridge. 1. Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu. 2. Press and to highlight the specific supply that has a problem. 3. Press 4. and Press instructions. 5. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. CARTRIDGE (4700 models) REPLACE SUPPLIES Recommended action Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful life. If the supplies affected are cartridges only, printing has stopped because the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT LOW. If the affected supplies are cartridges only, printing will not continue. The printer is set to continue printing even though a print cartridge has reached end of life. Press to view help for the supply. to step through the to see step by step information. CAUTION Using the Override mode may result in unsatisfactory print quality. HP recommends replacing the supply when the REPLACE SUPPLIES message is displayed. HP Supplies Premium Warranty coverage ends when a supply is used in Override mode. Multiple supplies are at the end of their useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT OUT. 1. Press to access the SUPPLIES STATUS menu. 2. Press and to highlight the specific supply that has a problem. 3. Press to view help for the supply. ENWW Control panel message REPLACE SUPPLIES Using black only alternates with Description Recommended action 4. Press and instructions. to step through the 5. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. This message is generated when a print cartridge (or print cartridges) has reached the out condition and the printer is set to AUTOCONTINUE BLACK. Press to see step by step information. The transfer unit is at end of life. Printing can continue but print quality might be reduced. 1. Open the top and front cover. 2. Lower the transfer unit by pulling the green handle at the top of the unit downward. 3. Depress the small blue latches located on either side of the bottom of the transfer unit and lift the unit out of the printer. 4. Install the new transfer unit. 5. Close the front and top covers. 6. Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. 1. Order the transfer kit. 2. To continue printing, press 3. To replace the transfer kit, perform the following steps: REPLACE TRANSFER KIT For help press REPLACE TRANSFER KIT For help press alternates with REPLACE TRANSFER KIT To continue press ENWW The transfer unit is nearing the end of its useful life and the REPLACE SUPPLIES setting in the SYSTEM SETUP menu is set to STOP AT OUT. . ● Open the top and front cover. ● Lower the transfer unit by pulling the green handle at the top of the unit downward. ● Depress the small blue latches located on either side of the bottom of the transfer unit and lift the unit out of the printer. ● Install the new transfer unit. ● Close the front and top covers. ● Supplies ordering information is also available from the embedded Web server. See Using the embedded Web server on page 505 for more information. Control panel messages 391 Control panel message Description Recommended action Request accepted The printer has accepted a request to print an internal page, but the current job must finish printing before the internal page will print. No action necessary. The firmware upgrade was not completed successfully. Attempt upgrade again. The printer is restoring external accessory settings in response to a user request. No action necessary. Restoring... The printer is restoring settings. This message is displayed during the execution of a restore action, such as RESTORE COLOR VALUES. No action necessary. Restoring... The printer is restoring factory settings after a cold reset. No action necessary. A component test is in progress; the component selected is the cartridge motor. Press Stop when ready to stop this test. The printer is executing a component test and the component selected is a motor. Press Stop when ready to stop this test. A storage device is being sanitized. Do not turn the printer off. When the process is complete, the printer will automatically restart. No action necessary. Setting saved A menu selection has been saved. No action necessary. SIZE MISMATCH 1. TRAY X=[SIZE] The tray is loaded with media longer or shorter in the feed direction than the size configured for the tray. Adjust the side and rear media guides against the paper, and verify that the media loaded meets size specified by Tray guides. For help press XX = 01 – 06 2. Check the paper size sensors. 3. Replace the paper size sensors. please wait Resend upgrade Restoring... [accessory #] factory settings Rotating [COLOR] motor To exit press. Stop Rotating motor To exit press. Stop SANITIZING DISK X% COMPLETE DO NOT POWER OFF alternates with Ready Sleep mode on The printer is in sleep mode. A button press, receipt of printable data, or an error condition will clear this message. No action necessary. STACKER COVER OPEN (4700 models) The jam access door is open. The unit cannot function. Close the jam access door. STAPLER DOOR OPEN (4700 models) The stapler cartridge door is open. The stapler/stacker cannot operate in this condition. The amber light on the stapler/ stacker is blinking. Close the stapler cartridge door. STAPLER LOW Fewer than 50 usable staples remain in the stapler cartridge. The status light is solid green. Order and install a new stapler cartridge. For information about replacing the stapler cartridge, see Replacing the stapler ON STAPLES (4700 models) 392 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Control panel message Description Recommended action cartridge (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series) on page 108. TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE (4700 models) TOP BIN The job contains more than the specified number of sheets for the media type being used, and cannot be stapled. When the maximum number of sheets for a specific media type is reached, the job is ejected and handled as a stacked job. To ensure that documents are properly stapled, ensure that the job does not exceed the specified number of sheets for the selected media. The stapler/stacker output bin is full. The Remove paper from the stapler/stacker amber light on the stapler/stacker is blinking. output bin. (4700 models) TOP DOOR OPEN (4700 models) Transfer unit can The jam access door is open. The stapler/ stacker cannot operate in this condition. The amber light on the stapler/stacker is blinking. Close the jam access door. The cartridge is either not installed or not correctly installed in the printer. 1. be easily damaged. Open the top and front covers. CAUTION The ETB can be easily damaged. alternates with For help press 2. Open the ETB. The supplies gauge will display the consumption levels of print cartridges. 3. Insert the print cartridge and make sure that it is fully seated. 4. Close the ETB and then close the top and front covers. 1. Refill the tray at a convenient time. [TYPE] [SIZE] 2. Check the paper stack sensor. alternates with 3. Replace the paper stack sensor. Ready 4. Check DC Controller connector. 1. Close the tray. 2. Check the paper size detection switches. 3. Replace the switches. 4. Verify there are no obstructions in tray path. TRAY X EMPTY TRAY X OPEN The specified tray is empty and the current job does not need this tray to print. The specified tray is open or not closed completely. For help press alternates with Ready TRAY X SIZE= [SIZE] The size selected from the menu has been saved. No action is necessary. Setting saved TYPE MISMATCH IN TRAY X For help press The media type loaded in the tray does not 1. match the media type configured for the tray. 2. XX = 01 – 06 Open and close tray x. If necessary, press after the tray is closed to change the paper type to match the paper loaded in the tray. alternates with Ready ENWW Control panel messages 393 Control panel message Description Recommended action Unable to mopy job The print job cannot be mopied because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem. Only one copy will be produced. Install additional memory in the printer or install a disk drive in the printer. A job cannot be stored because of a memory, disk, or configuration problem. Install additional memory in the printer, or install a disk drive into the printer. If a disk drive is installed, delete previously stored print jobs. This message displays when a connected USB accessory draws too much power. When this happens, the ACC port is disabled and printing stops. Press alternates with Processing... Unable to Store Job alternates with Processing... USB ACCESSORY ERROR to see step by step information. Remove the USB accessory. For help press USE TRAY X The printer is offering a selection of alternate media to use for the print job. 1. View tray configurations (type and and . size) using 2. Press 3. To return to the previous message, press Back. [TYPE] [SIZE] To change press to select a tray to use. / To use press Wait for printer RAM disk settings have been changed before the printer automatically restarts, or external device modes have changed or the printer is coming out of the diagnostics mode and will automatically restart. No action necessary. The printer is waiting for Tray 2 or an optional tray to lift. No action necessary. Warming up The printer is coming out of sleep mode. Printing will continue as soon as warmup is completed. No action necessary. X.X EMBEDDED This message is generated by a failure of the embedded Jetdirect print server. Turn the printer off then on. to reinitialize Waiting for tray X to lift JET DIRECT ERROR 394 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting If the message persists, see Network configuration on page 89. ENWW Formatter lights Two LEDs on the formatter indicate that the printer is functioning correctly. Figure 7-1 Formatter lights 1 Heartbeat LED 2 HP Jetdirect LEDs (if HP Jetdirect is installed) Embedded HP Jetdirect LEDs The embedded HP Jetdirect print server has two LEDs. The yellow LED indicates network activity, and the green LED indicates the link status. A blinking yellow LED indicates network traffic. If the green LED is off, a link has failed. For link failures, check all of the network cable connections. In addition, you can try to manually configure the link settings on the embedded print server by using the printer control panel menus. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU. 7. Press to select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU. 8. Press to highlight LINK SPEED. 9. Press to select LINK SPEED. 10. Select the appropriate link speed. ENWW Formatter lights 395 Heartbeat LED The heartbeat LED indicates that the formatter is functioning correctly. While the printer is initializing after you turn it on, the LED blinks rapidly, and then turns off. When the printer has finished the initialization sequence, the heartbeat LED pulses on and off. If the heartbeat LED is off, the formatter might have a problem. See LED diagnostics on page 520. 396 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Accessory lights (4700 models) The accessory lights and the control panel display indicate errors associated with the stapler/stacker. Interpreting stapler/stacker indicator light codes The following table lists errors that can occur in the stapler/stacker unit that are reported by the accessory light and on the printer control panel. Indicator Solid Blinking Off Green ● The accessory is ready and is functioning properly. N/A ● ● Fewer than 20 staples remain in the stapler cartridge. STAPLER LOW ON STAPLES displays on the printer control panel. Order and replace the staple cartridge. See Staple cartridge on page 346. ● The number of pages in the job exceeds the 30-page limit for stapling. TOO MANY PAGES IN JOB TO STAPLE displays on the printer control panel. For jobs larger NOTE The indicator light shows solid green during some continuable errors. ENWW The stapler/stacker is in sleep mode, the printer is turned off, or the stapler/stacker is not installed properly. Accessory lights (4700 models) 397 Indicator Solid Blinking Off ● N/A than 30 pages, staple the pages manually. Amber ● The job contains different paper sizes. The stapler cannot align the paper for stapling. If stapling is required, print the job on same-size paper, or staple the job manually. MIXED PAPER SIZES IN JOB TO STAPLE displays on the printer control panel. ● The accessory is experiencing a hardware malfunction. For more information, see Control panel messages on page 359. The device requires user intervention. The bin could be full, there could be a stapler jam, or the stapler cartridge could require replacement. For more information, see Control panel messages on page 359. If the message CORRUPT FIRMWARE IN EXTERNAL ACCESSORY displays, download the firmware again. 398 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ● There is a paper jam, or a sheet needs to be removed from the unit, even if the sheet is not jammed. For more information, see Jams in the stapler/stacker (4700 models) on page 423. ● The bin is full. Empty the bin before continuing. ● There are fewer than 30 staples remaining in the stapler cartridge. To avoid jams, these staples should not be used. Order and install a new stapler cartridge before continuing. ● The bin is in the up position. Lower the bin before continuing. ENWW Indicator ENWW Solid Blinking Off ● The jam access door is open. Close the door before continuing. ● The stapler unit is open. Close the unit before continuing. Accessory lights (4700 models) 399 Replacement parts configuration When the following parts are replaced, perform the procedures in this section. ● Formatter and DC controller ● Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer) ● DC controller (new or previously installed in another printer) ● Formatter and firmware compact flash NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printers store printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. Always print a configuration page before and after (wait five minutes after the printer power is turned on) installing the parts in the above list to verify that the printer configuration information is restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM. Formatter and DC controller WARNING! Do not replace the formatter and the DC controller at the same time. If the formatter and DC controller must both be replaced, install a replacement formatter first and make sure that you install the compact flash memory from the removed formatter on the replacement formatter before you turn the printer power on. If the formatter and DC controller need to be replaced, install a replacement formatter first. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printers store printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and DC controller. After replacing the formatter and installing the compact flash, turn the printer power on. When the Ready message displays on the control panel, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM. Turn the printer power off, and replace the DC controller. Turn the printer power on. When the Ready message displays on the control panel, wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM. After installing the replacement formatter and DC controller, perform a full calibration procedure three times. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. Formatter (new or previously installed in another printer) The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printers store printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and DC controller. After replacing the formatter and installing the compact flash, turn the printer power on. When the Ready message displays on the control panel, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM. After installing the replacement formatter, perform a full calibration procedure three times. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. 400 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW DC controller (new or previously installed in another printer) After replacing the DC controller, turn the printer power on. When the Ready message displays on the control panel, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM. After installing the replacement DC controller, perform a full calibration procedure three times. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. Formatter and firmware compact flash The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 printers store printer configuration information in the compact flash memory. The compact flash memory from the removed formatter must be installed on the replacement formatter, so that printer configuration information (for example, the duplexing option, page counts, and serial number) can be restored to the formatter and DC controller. After replacing the formatter and installing the old compact flash, turn the printer power on. When the Ready message displays on the control panel, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the compact flash memory to the NVRAM. If the compact flash also needs to be replaced, remove the new formatter and old compact flash and place the new compact flash into the new formatter. After replacing the formatter and installing the new compact flash, turn the printer power on. When the Ready message displays on the control panel, you must wait five minutes before using the printer so that the printer configuration information can be restored from the NVRAM to the compact flash memory. After installing the replacement formatter and/or compact flash, perform a full calibration procedure three times. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. ENWW Replacement parts configuration 401 Paper path troubleshooting Use the information in this section to troubleshoot errors in the printer paper path. Jams Jam error messages occur if media fails to arrive at or clear the paper path sensors in the allowed time. Dedicated paper sensors detect whether media is present in the sensor and whether media is feeding normally. When the DC controller detects a jam, it immediately stops the printing process and the appropriate jam message displays for the sensor that detects the jam. Sensors on page 546 shows the locations of all the sensors in the printer. Jam locations Jams occur in the areas shown in Figure 7-2 Jam locations on page 403. Jam messages correlate with these areas. For instructions about clearing jams, see the sections later in this chapter. 402 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-2 Jam locations ENWW 1 Top cover area 2 Duplex path 3 Paper path 4 Input path 5 Paper trays Paper path troubleshooting 403 Figure 7-3 Jam locations (sensors) SR1 Fusing paper sensor SR2 Delivery tray paper full sensor SR3 Fusing pressure release sensor SR4 Multipurpose tray paper sensor SR9 Paper tray paper sensor SR10 Paper stack surface sensor SR12 Top of page sensor SR13 Paper loop sensor 1 404 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW SR14 Paper loop sensor 2 SR8001 Paper reversing sensor SL8001 Duplexing solenoid Jam locations by error message Use Table 7-3 Error messages and associated jam locations on page 405 table to identify jam locations and to help pinpoint and clear specific paper jams. See Figure 7-2 Jam locations on page 403 for jam locations. Table 7-3 Error messages and associated jam locations Error message Jam location Action 13.01.00 JAM IN TRAY X 5; printer A 13.01.00 jam occurs when the paper is late in arriving at the paper leadingedge sensor (SR12) in the paper feed assembly. This event could be a no pick resulting in the absence of media in the paper path, or could be a sheet that was delayed and jammed somewhere in the feed area between the specified tray and the paper feed assembly. If the jam occurs during a multiplepage document, media might arrive in the fuser, but the jam is still a result of the media arriving late to the paper leading-edge sensor (SR12) from the specified tray. The printer will not boot up if a 13.01.00 jam occurs. 13.02.00 JAM IN TRAY X 4 or 5; printer A 13.02.00 jam occurs when the paper leading-edge sensor (SR12) has been triggered, but never clears. The media remains in the registration assembly. After opening and closing the front covers and ETB, the printer can boot up when a 13.02.00 error exists, if the sensor is stuck or media remains in the sensor. 13.09.00 JAM IN TOP COVER AREA 1; printer A 13.09.00 jam occurs when the media has successfully left the paper pick unit, cleared the paper leading-edge sensor (SR12), and arrived at the fuser, triggering the fuser paper sensor (SR1). If the fuser paper sensor (SR1) does not detect the end of the page by a specified time, this will cause a 13.09.00 error message. WARNING! The fuser is hot, wait 10 minutes for it to cool down. 13.0A.00 JAM IN TOP COVER AREA ENWW 1; printer A 13.0A.00 jam occurs when the printer is trying to deliver sheets to the Paper path troubleshooting 405 Table 7-3 Error messages and associated jam locations (continued) Error message Jam location Action output bin for a simplex job or, for a duplex turnaround, when the paper was late leaving or never left the fuser delivery sensor (SR1). The media might have been incorrectly loaded in the paper trays, something in the fuser might be obstructing the media, or the sensor could be stuck or broken. WARNING! The fuser is hot, wait 10 minutes for it to cool down. 13.12.00 JAM IN DUPLEX PATH 1, 2, 3; printer Reversing unit jam 1 (reversing delay jam): The CPU determines the reversing unit jam 1 when the reversing sensor (SR8001) does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period of time after the duplexing driver receives a switchback command from the printer. Reversing unit jam 2 (reversing stationary jam): The CPU determines the reversing unit jam 2 when the reversing sensor (SR8001) keep detecting paper after a specified period of time after the reversing sensor (SR8001) detected the leading edge of the paper. Duplexing pickup unit jam 1 (duplexing unit stationary jam): The CPU determines the duplexing pickup unit jam 1 when the top of page sensor (SR12) does not detect the leading edge of the paper within a specified period of time after the duplexing driver receives a duplexing pickup command from the printer. Jam recovery This printer automatically provides jam recovery, a feature that you can use to set whether the printer should attempt to automatically reprint jammed pages. Three options are: ● AUTO. The printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages. ● OFF. The printer will not attempt to reprint jammed pages. ● On. The printer will attempt to reprint jammed pages. NOTE During the recovery process, the printer might reprint several pages that were printed correctly before the jam occurred. Be sure to remove any duplicated pages. 406 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW To disable paper jam recovery 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY. 7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY. 8. Press to highlight OFF. 9. Press to select OFF. 10. Press the Menu button to return to the Ready state. To improve print speed and increase memory resources, you might want to disable paper jam recovery. If paper jam recovery is disabled, the pages involved in a jam will not be reprinted. Avoiding jams Table 7-4 Common causes of jams ENWW Cause Solution The print media does not meet HP-recommended media specifications. Use only media that meets HP specifications. A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing repeated jams. Verify that all print cartridges, the ETB, and the fuser are correctly installed. You are reloading media that has already passed through a printer or copier. Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied. An input tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove any excess media from the input tray. Press the media down in the input tray so that it fits below the tabs and within the media width guides. The printed pages are skewed. The input-tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it. If media heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb) is loaded into Tray 2 and optional trays, the media might skew. The print media is binding or sticking together. Remove the media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, or turn it over. Reload the media into the input tray. Do not fan the media. The print media is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. When duplexing, the print media is removed before the second side of the document is printed. Reset the printer and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. The print media is in poor condition. Replace the print media. Paper path troubleshooting 407 Table 7-4 Common causes of jams (continued) Cause Solution Print media is not picked up by the internal rollers from tray 2 or an optional tray. Remove the top sheet of media. If the media is heavier than 120 g/m2 (32 lb), it might not be picked from the tray. The print media has rough or jagged edges. Replace the media. The print media is perforated or embossed. This media does not separate easily. You might need to feed single sheets from Tray 1. One or more printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies. The print media was not stored correctly. Replace the print media. Media should be stored in its original packaging in a controlled environment. Solving repeated jams Situation Solution General repeated jam problems 1. Make sure that the media is loaded correctly in the trays and that all width guides are set correctly. 2. Make sure that the tray is set for the size of media that is installed and that the tray is not overloaded. 3. Try turning over the stack of media in the tray. If you are using prepunched or letterhead paper, try printing from tray 1. 4. Do not use media that has been printed on previously or torn, worn, or irregular media. See Media specifications on page 21. 5. Check the media specifications. (See Media specifications on page 21.) If media is outside of the recommended specifications, problems can occur. 6. The printer might be dirty. Clean the printer as described in Cleaning the printer and accessories on page 98. 7. Check that all damaged or jammed media is removed from the printer. Persistent jams If jams occur repeatedly, use the information in this section to diagnose the root cause of the problem. The tables in this section list possible causes and recommended solutions for jams in each area of the paper path. Items are listed in the order that you should use to investigate. In general, items at the beginning of the list are relatively minor repairs. Items at the end of the list are more complex repairs. Basic troubleshooting for jams Use the following basic troubleshooting process for jams: 1. Gather data. 2. Identify the cause of the problem. 3. Fix the problem. 408 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Data collection To troubleshoot jams, gather the following information: ● The exact jam error code that displays on the control panel ● The location of the leading edge of the media that is in the paper path ● Whether media is in the paper path when the jam occurs or in the input tray ● Whether the jam occurs at power-up or while media is moving ● Whether the media is damaged and, if it is, where the damage occurs on the paper and where in the paper path the sheet stops ● Whether the jam occurs when feeding from one particular tray ● Whether the jam occurs only when using duplex printing ● Whether a particular type of media is jamming or not jamming ● Whether any of the supplies are non-HP (non-HP supplies are known to cause jams) ● Whether the customer is storing the media correctly, overloading the trays, damaging the edge of the media during loading, or using media that has already been fed through the printer General paper path troubleshooting Use the following suggestions to isolate the cause of the problem. After you have identified the cause, use the tables in this section to find a recommended solution. NOTE Use the paper path test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu to print pages while troubleshooting. ENWW ● View or print the event log and determine if a particular jam error occurs more often than others. Try to identify a pattern. ● Use the event log to determine the frequency of a particular jam. If a jam occurs repeatedly at approximately the same page count, consider it a single jam that the customer tried to clear. ● Try printing from all available input trays to identify whether the problem is isolated to one tray. ● Print the job in both simplex and duplex modes to identify whether the problem occurs only in one mode or the other. ● Try printing on media from an unopened ream that has been stored correctly. If the jam does not occur with this media, then the customer's media might be causing the problem. ● If the jam occurs from when the printer is turned on, check the paper path for small, torn pieces of media. Also check for broken sensors or flags, and check for loose or defective connections. ● If the media is torn, folded, or wrinkled (typically along the leading edge), inspect the paper path for items that could be causing the damage. Paper path troubleshooting 409 ● If the user is using non-HP supplies, try replacing those supplies with genuine HP supplies to see if the problem goes away. ● If necessary, instruct the user about proper media storage, correct loading technique, and printer operation. Make sure the user knows not to grab paper in the output bin during duplex printing. Paper path checklist ❑ Verify that media is correctly loaded in the input trays and that all length and width guides are set correctly. ❑ Clean the printer. Toner and paper dust in the paper path can inhibit the free movement of media through the printer and can block the sensors. ❑ Use the paper path test in the DIAGNOSTICS menu to vary the input selections of the printer to determine if the problem is associated with a particular area of the printer. ❑ Worn rollers or separation pads can cause multifeeds. Check the condition of the pickup rollers and separation pads. Bent separation tabs (on the front corners of the input trays) can cause misfeeds and multifeeds. Replace the tray if necessary. ❑ Defective paper-tray switches can cause jams by communicating the wrong paper size to the formatter. ❑ Defective paper sensors along the paper path might falsely signal a jam. ❑ Scraps of media that remain in the paper path can cause intermittent jams. Always check that the paper path is clear when cleaning the printer and when clearing jams. Also, remove the fuser and carefully check it for debris from jams. Jams in Tray 1 The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in Tray 1. Table 7-5 Causes for jams in Tray 1 Cause Solution The pickup roller is dirty, worn, or damaged. Clean the pickup roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the pickup roller. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. The separation pad is defective. Clean the separation pad. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the separation pad. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. The multipurpose tray paper sensor (SR4) or the sensor lever is defective. Replace Tray 2. See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. The multipurpose tray pickup solenoid (SL1) is defective. 1. Run the component test to verify that the solenoid is working properly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Disconnect the connector J1015 for the multipurpose tray pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCB. 410 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-5 Causes for jams in Tray 1 (continued) Cause Solution 3. Measure the resistance between the cable-side connectors J1015-1 and J1015-2. 4. If the measured resistance is not approximately 160 ohms, replace Tray 2. See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. The pickup motor is defective. Replace the pickup motor assembly. See Pickup motor assembly on page 273. The paper tray pickup assembly is defective. Replace the multipurpose tray pickup assembly. See Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) on page 231. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or a cable connector may be loose. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check all connections to/from the DC Controller. Jams in Tray 2 The following table describes the cause of and solutions for jams in Tray 2 or optional trays. Table 7-6 Causes for jams in Tray 2 or optional trays Cause Solution The Tray 2 separation roller is worn or damaged. Clean the separation roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the separation roller. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. The Tray 2 pickup roller is worn or damaged. Clean the pickup roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the pickup roller. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. The Tray 2 feed roller is dirty, worn, or damaged. Clean the feed roller. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the feed roller. The Tray 2 lifter drive assembly is defective. Replace the Tray 2 lifter drive assembly. See 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly on page 337. The Tray 2 pickup solenoid is damaged. 1. Run the component test to verify that the solenoid is working correctly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Disconnect the connector for the Tray 2 pickup solenoid from the DC controller PCB. 3. Measure the resistance between the cable-side connectors J1015-3 and J1015-4. 4. If the measured resistance is not about 160 ohms, replace Tray 2. See Paper tray (Tray 2) on page 231. The Tray 2 pickup motor is defective. ENWW Replace the Tray 2 pickup motor assembly. See Pickup motor assembly on page 273. Paper path troubleshooting 411 Table 7-6 Causes for jams in Tray 2 or optional trays (continued) Cause Solution The paper feed assembly is defective. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or a cable connector may be loose. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check all cable connections to/from DC controller. Jams in the paper path The following table describes the cause of and solution for jams in the paper path. Table 7-7 Causes for jams in the paper path Cause Solution The registration roller and registration sub roller are dirty, worn, or damaged. Clean the registration roller or registration sub-roller if it is dirty. If it is still dirty after cleaning, or if it is worn or damaged, replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. (This applies to jams that occur in advance of the registration roller.) The media attaching roller is dirty or damaged. (This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion when it enters the ETB.) The cartridge shutter open/close mechanism is damaged. Check the media attaching roller to see if it is dirty or damaged. If it is dirty, clean it. If it is damaged, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. (This applies to jams in which media is crumpled into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt.) The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB. If a shutter does not open, replace that print cartridge. Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer. The drum drive motor assembly is damaged. 1. Run the component test to verify that all of the drum drive motors function properly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. If one does not function properly, replace it. See Drum drive motors (Y/ C/M/K) on page 298. 2. Inspect the main drive assembly. If it is damaged, replace the main drive assembly. See Remove main drive assembly on page 256. The top of page sensor (SR12) is defective. Run the paper path test to verify that the top of page sensor is functioning properly. See Paper path test on page 527. If it is not functioning correctly, replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or a cable connector may be loose. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check all connections to/from DC controller. Jams in the top cover The following table describes the causes of and solutions for jams in the top cover. 412 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-8 Causes for jams in the top cover Cause Solution The fuser paper sensor (SR1) or sensor lever is defective. 1. Make sure that the fuser paper sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place. 2. Run the component test to verify that all of the fuser paper sensor functions properly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 3. Replace the sensor if it is defective. The fuser sleeve or pressure roller does not rotate smoothly. If the fuser drive gears are worn or damaged, replace the fuser. The fuser inlet guide is dirty or is covered with toner. Clean the fuser inlet guide. The fuser sleeve or pressure roller is dirty, worn, or damaged. Clean the fuser sleeve or pressure roller. If it is damaged, replace the fuser. The fuser pressure release motor is defective. Run the component test to verify that the fuser pressure release motor is functioning properly. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. If it is not, replace it. The delivery tray paper full sensor (SR2) or sensor lever is defective. 1. Make sure that the delivery tray paper full sensor lever moves smoothly and is set in place. 2. Run the paper path test to verify that the delivery tray paper full sensor functions properly. See Paper path test on page 527. 3. Replace the sensor if it is defective. The fuser delivery roller is worn. Replace the fuser. The fuser delivery roller drive gears are worn or damaged. Replace the fuser. The face-down delivery roller is defective. Replace the fuser. The paper loop sensors (SR13 and SR14) or the sensor levers are defective. 1. Make sure that the paper loop sensor levers move smoothly and are set in place. 2. Run the paper path test to verify that the paper loop sensors function properly. See Paper path test on page 527. 3. Replace the fuser if the paper loop sensor are defective. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check all cable connections to/from DC controller. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or a cable connector may be loose. Jams in the duplex path The following table describes the causes of and solution for jams in the duplex path. Table 7-9 Causes for jams in the duplex path ENWW Cause Solution The oblique rollers are worn or damaged. Replace the oblique rollers. Paper path troubleshooting 413 Table 7-9 Causes for jams in the duplex path (continued) Cause Solution The oblique roller drive gears are worn or damaged. Replace the ETB unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB unit. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The duplex feed guide is damaged. Replace the ETB unit. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB unit. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The duplexer connector is unplugged or not seated properly. Make sure that the connector is plugged in and seated properly. The reversing sensor (SR8001) or the sensor lever in the duplexer is defective. 1. Run the paper path test to verify that the reversing sensor functions properly. See Paper path test on page 527. 2. If the reversing sensor is defective, replace the duplexer unit. See Duplexer on page 349. Common causes of paper jams The following table lists common causes of paper jams and suggested solutions for resolving them. Paper jams Cause and solution Cause Solution When the printer is first installed, the protective insert does not eject properly. See Jam in Tray 1 on page 415. Print media does not meet HP-recommended media specifications. Use only media that meets HP specifications. See Media specifications on page 21. A supply item is installed incorrectly, causing repeated jams. Verify that all print cartridges, the transfer unit, and the fuser are correctly installed. You are reloading paper that has already passed through a printer or copier. Do not use media that has been previously printed on or copied. An input tray is loaded incorrectly. Remove media from the input tray and replace the media within the tray. Adjust the media width guide to hold the media firmly in place without bending it. Print media is skewed. Input tray guides are not adjusted correctly. Adjust input tray guides so they hold media firmly in place without bending it. If media heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb) is loaded into Tray 2 and optional trays, the media might skew. Print media is binding or sticking together. Remove media, flex it, rotate it 180 degrees, or flip it over. Reload media into the input tray. Do not fan media. Print media is removed before it settles into the output bin. Reset the printer. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. When duplexing, the print media is removed before the second side of the document is printed. Reset the printer and print the document again. Wait until the page completely settles in the output bin before removing it. Print media is in poor condition. Replace the print media. Print media is not picked up by the internal rollers from Tray 2 or an optional tray. Remove the top sheet of media. If the media is heavier than 105 g/m2 (28 lb), it might not be picked from the tray. 414 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Cause and solution Cause Solution Print media has rough or jagged edges. Replace the media. Print media is perforated or embossed. This media does not separate easily. You might need to feed single sheets from Tray 1. Printer supply items have reached the end of their useful life. Check the printer control panel for messages prompting you to replace supplies, or print a supplies status page to verify the remaining life of the supplies. See Replacing supplies on page 107 for more information. Media was not stored correctly. Replace the print media. Media should be stored in the original packaging in a controlled environment. Clearing jams Each section below corresponds with a jam message that might display on the control panel. Use these procedures to clear the jam. Jam in Tray 1 1. Open Tray 1. 2. Remove loaded paper from Tray 1. 3. Reload paper in Tray 1 and check to make sure the media is loaded correctly. NOTE Do not load media above the fill tabs. ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 415 4. Confirm that the guides are in the correct position. 5. To continue printing, press , and then press . Jam in Tray 2 or optional trays 1. Pull out the tray indicated and place it on a flat surface. Make sure that the paper guides are in the correct position. 2. Remove any partially fed media. Grasp the media by both corners and pull down. NOTE Use Tray 1 to avoid jams with heavier paper. 3. Inspect the media path to ensure that it is clear. NOTE If the media tears, make sure that all media fragments are removed from the paper path before resuming printing. 416 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 4. For jams that occur in an optional tray, check the trays above for jams as well. For example, if the jam occurs in Tray 4, also open Tray 2 and Tray 3 and remove any jammed paper. 5. Check to make sure the media is loaded correctly. Insert the tray into the printer. Make sure all trays are completely closed. Jams in top cover area Jams in the top cover occur in of the areas indicated in the figures below. Use the procedures in this section to clear a jam in this area. ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 417 1 Jammed paper 2 Crumpled paper in the fuser Clearing a jam in the top cover area WARNING! Do not touch the fuser. It is hot and could cause burns! The fuser’s operating temperature is 195°C (383°F). Wait ten minutes to allow the fuser to cool before touching the fuser. 1. Open the top and front covers. 2. Grasp any visible media by both corners and pull to remove it. 418 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ENWW 3. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down. 4. Grasp the media by both corners and pull down. 5. Close the transfer unit. Paper path troubleshooting 419 6. Close the top and front covers. Clearing other jams 1. Using the handles, open the top and front covers. 2. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull down. 420 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 3. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull up. NOTE If no media is present at these locations, continue to the next step. ENWW 4. Grasp the green handle on the transfer unit and pull down. 5. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull down. Paper path troubleshooting 421 6. If media is present, grasp the media by both corners and pull up. 7. Close the transfer unit. 8. Close the top and front covers. 422 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Jams in the stapler/stacker (4700 models) NOTE After resolving any stapler/stacker jams, check that there are no jams in the printer itself. For more information, see Clearing jams on page 415. Clearing jams in the paper path 1. ENWW Remove any exposed jammed sheets. Paper path troubleshooting 423 2. Grasp the stapler/stacker unit by its handles and lift it off the body of the printer. CAUTION The stapler/stacker unit weighs 9 kg (19.8 lb). For greater safety, you might wish to remove the stapler/stacker while standing at the rear of the printer. 3. Set the stapler/stacker aside on a flat surface. 4. Remove any jammed sheets under the front cover of the duplexer. 424 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 5. Remove any jammed sheets from the rear of the duplexer. 6. Place the stapler/stacker unit onto the printer. NOTE The output bin must be pushed down into the lowest position for printing to continue. ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 425 Clearing jams inside the stapler/stacker 1. Open the top cover of the stapler/stacker unit by the handles. 2. If jammed paper can be seen, pull it from the stapler/stacker. Close the stapler/stacker cover. 426 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 3. If a jammed page is only partially visible and cannot easily be removed, grasp the stapler/ stacker unit by its handles and lift it off the body of the printer. CAUTION The stapler/stacker unit weighs 9 kg (19.8 lb). For greater safety, you might wish to remove the stapler/stacker from the rear of the printer. ENWW 4. Set the stapler/stacker aside on a flat surface. 5. Remove any visible paper from the stapler/stacker. Paper path troubleshooting 427 6. Place the stapler/stacker unit onto the printer. Jams at the output bin ▲ Remove any jammed paper at the output bin. 428 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE On all stapler/stacker jams, be sure that there is no jammed media in the duplexer path or inside the stapler/stacker or printer. See the other jam recovery procedures included in this section for assistance. Staple jams NOTE Clear staple jams when the message 13.XX.YY JAM IN STAPLER displays on the control panel. ENWW 1. On the left side of the stapler/stacker, open the stapler cartridge cover by gently pulling it. 2. Grasp the stapler cartridge handle and pull up gently. Paper path troubleshooting 429 3. Twist the stapler cartridge gently in a counter-clockwise direction and pull it out. 4. Lift the cover at the tip of the cartridge. 5. Remove the visible staple and close the cartridge cover. 430 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 6. Place the stapler cartridge in the stapler unit. Press it down until it snaps into place. 7. Close the stapler cartridge cover. NOTE The stapler needs to reload after clearing a staple jam, so the first few documents (up to five) might not be stapled. The stapler/stacker might make a noise as the stapler reloads staples. The noise will stop after a few documents are stapled. If a print job is sent and the stapler is jammed or out of staples, the job will still print as long as the path to the stacker bin is not blocked. ENWW Paper path troubleshooting 431 Paper transport troubleshooting If media is feeding incorrectly, use the information in this section to identify and resolve the problem. Multiple pages are fed The following table describes the causes of and solutions for multiple pages feeding. Table 7-10 Causes for multiple pages feeding Cause Solution The separation roller in the paper tray is dirty, worn, or damaged (Tray 2 or optional paper feeders). Clean the separation roller if it is dirty. Replace the separation roller if it is worn or damaged. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. The multipurpose tray separation pad is dirty, worn, or damaged. Clean the separation pad assembly if it is dirty. Replace the separation pad assembly if it is worn or damaged. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. The media edges are locked together. Flex the media, do not fan it. Too much media (particularly envelopes) is loaded in Tray 1. Remove some of the media from Tray 1. Media is wrinkled or folded To diagnose the cause of wrinkled or folded media, use the PRINT/STOP TEST in the DIAGNOSTICS menu. Adjust the stop time to stop the media before it enters the fuser. Open the ETB. If the media is wrinkled at this stage, use Table 7-12 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper path exit) on page 432 to diagnose the problem. If the media is not wrinkled at this stage, use Table 7-11 Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper path entrance) on page 432 to diagnose the problem. Table 7-11 Causes for wrinkled or folded media (part one: paper path entrance) Cause Solution The feed roller or registration roller is dirty or defective. Clean the feed roller or registration roller if they are dirty. If the feed roller or registration roller are defective, replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The paper path has foreign substances or dirt. Remove any foreign substances or dirt from the paper path. If the feed guide is damaged, replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The cartridge shutter open/close mechanism is damaged. The shutters in each print cartridge should open as you close the ETB. If a shutter does not open, replace that print cartridge. Also check for a damaged shutter mechanism in the printer. (This applies to jams in which paper is crumpled into an accordion fold somewhere on the ETB belt.) Table 7-12 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper path exit) Cause Solution The fuser inlet guide is dirty. Clean the fuser inlet guide. The fuser pressure roller is dirty or damaged. Clean the pressure roller. If the pressure roller is damaged, replace the fuser. 432 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-12 Causes for wrinkled or folded paper (part two: paper path exit) (continued) Cause Solution The fuser sleeve is dirty or damaged. Clean the fuser sleeve. If the fuser sleeve is damaged, replace the fuser. The fuser delivery roller is dirty. Clean the fuser delivery roller. Paper is skewed Table 7-13 Causes for skewed paper ENWW Cause Solution The paper dust or dirt has accumulated in the paper tray feed roller or registration roller. Clean the rollers. The paper tray feed roller and registration roller are worn irregularly. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The separation roller is worn or damaged (Tray 2 or optional trays). Replace the separation roller. See Tray 1 pickup roller and separation pad on page 222. Paper transport troubleshooting 433 Image formation troubleshooting The image formation system is the central hub of the printer. During image formation, an image of colored toner is formed and then fused onto the paper. The image formation system consists of the following physical components: ● Four laser/scanners ● Four print cartridges ● ETB ● Fuser Before beginning image formation troubleshooting, check that the media meets the specifications in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. Print quality troubleshooting tools Go to http://www.hp.com/go/printquality/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/go/printquality/ljcp4005 to identify and troubleshoot print quality issues for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printers as well as to show customers and service personnel how to troubleshoot print quality issues. The tool includes solutions for many print quality issues, using standard images to provide a common diagnostic environment. It is designed to provide intuitive, step-by-step directions for printing troubleshooting pages that are used to isolate print quality problems and provide possible solutions. You can also visit the Web site from http://www.hp.com by using the following procedure. Open the print-quality troubleshooting Web site 1. On the main http://www.hp.com page, click Support & Drivers. 2. Type CLJ4700 or CLJCP4005 in the open text field, to correspond to the model you are working on, and then click the forward arrows. 3. Click the product name in the list that appears. 4. Click print quality troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics in the box to the right of the screen. NOTE The customer can also go to http://www.hp.com/bizsupport to find the print quality troubleshooting tool under Hot Topics. These Web sites provide intuitive, step-by-step directions for producing print quality troubleshooting pages that can be used to isolate issues and provide possible print quality solutions. Print quality problems associated with media Some print quality problems arise from use of inappropriate media. ● Use media that meets HP specifications. ● The surface of the media is too smooth. See Media specifications on page 21. ● The printer driver is set incorrectly. Change the paper-type setting to match the type of media that is being used. 434 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW ● The media that you are using is too heavy for the printer, and the toner is not fusing to the media. ● Make sure that the media sensing configuration for the paper tray that is being printed from is set correctly. ● The transparencies that you are using are not designed for correct toner adhesion. Use only transparencies that are designed for HP Color LaserJet printers. ● The moisture content of the paper is uneven, too high, or too low. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper. ● Some areas of the paper reject toner. Use paper from a different source or from an unopened ream of paper. ● The letterhead that you are using is printed on rough paper. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. If this solves your problem, consult with the print supplier who produces your letterhead to verify that the paper used meets the specifications for this printer. ● The paper is excessively rough. Use a smoother, xerographic paper. ● Ensure that the correct print mode is set for the media type in the control panel. See Changing printer control panel configuration settings on page 460. Overhead transparency defects Overhead transparencies might display any of the image quality problems that any other type of media could display, as well as defects specific to transparencies. In addition, because transparencies are pliable while in the print path, they are subject to being marked by the mediahandling components. NOTE Allow transparencies to cool for at least 30 seconds before handling them. ENWW ● In the printer driver Paper tab, select Transparency as the media type. Also, make sure that the tray is correctly configured for transparencies. ● Check that the transparencies meet the specifications for this printer. See Transparencies on page 24. For more information, see the HP LaserJet Printer Family Print Media Guide. ● Handle transparencies by the edges. Skin oil on the surface of transparencies can cause spots and smudges. ● Small, random dark areas on the trailing edge of solid-fill pages can be caused by transparencies sticking together in the output bin. Try printing the job in smaller batches. ● The printed colors are unacceptable. Select different colors in the software program or printer driver. ● If you are using a reflective overhead projector, use a standard overhead projector instead. ● Make sure that the media sensing configuration for the paper tray that is being printed from is set correctly. ● Ensure that the correct print mode is set for the media type in the control panel. See Changing printer control panel configuration settings on page 460. Image formation troubleshooting 435 Print quality problems that are associated with the environment Print quality problems can occur if the printer is operating in excessively humid, dry, or dusty conditions. Verify that the printing environment is within specifications. See Environmental specifications on page 19. Print quality problems that are associated with jams Take the following actions to prevent problems that are associated with printer jams. ● To avoid problems after a jam, make sure that all media is cleared from the paper path. ● If the printer recently jammed, print two to three pages to clean the printer. ● If the media does not pass through the fuser, image defects might appear on subsequent documents. Print two to three pages to clean the printer. If the problem persists, see the next section to print a troubleshooting page. ● Make sure that the media sensing configuration for the paper tray that is being printed from is set correctly. ● Ensure that the correct print mode is set for the media type in the control panel. See Changing printer control panel configuration settings on page 460. Print quality troubleshooting pages Use the built-in print quality troubleshooting pages to help diagnose and solve print quality problems. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING. 5. Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING. The message Printing... PQ troubleshooting displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the print quality troubleshooting information. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the print quality troubleshooting information. The print quality troubleshooting information includes one page for each color (black, magenta, cyan, and yellow), one white page, and printer statistics related to print quality, instructions on interpreting the information, and procedures to solve print quality problems. If following the procedures recommended by the print quality troubleshooting pages do not improve print quality, go to http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700. Understanding color variations The printed output might not match the computer screen, and the colors printed on successive pages might not match. While color variations are inherent in this printing method, they can indicate changes in the printing environment, print media, or printer components. 436 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Common causes of color variation The following list outlines the major causes of color variations between computers, programs, and output devices. ● Halftone patterns that are produced on monitors and the types of patterns that are used in the print jobs are different and might cause variations in the printed output. ● The printed output differs from the image on the monitor because the monitor and the print media have different reference values of black and white. The monitor screen has charcoal gray for the black level, and the white on the monitor screen is actually blue. Black on the print media is limited only by the fill capability of the printer, and most good-quality paper has a very high white level. In addition, phosphor (used in color monitors) and toner have entirely different spectra characteristics and different color-rendering capabilities. Differences between output are common. Blues generally match better than reds. ● The color of the ambient light changes the perception of color. Fluorescent light lacks many colors that are present in incandescent light, and the color range of natural light is broader than any artificial light. When comparing color, choose a standard light source for reference and understand that the perceived color will change as the light changes. ● Long-term color variations occur as paper ages. Use high-quality paper and protect the paper from sunlight to help minimize discoloration. ● Environmental changes can cause color variation. The development process places a high potential across an air gap to attract toner to the imaging drum. Changes in relative humidity vary the point at which the toner travels to the imaging drum. ● All consumable components have a finite life span. As these components reach the end of their useful life, their ability to produce consistent print quality diminishes. ● Paper roughness can cause colors to look different. Use standard paper. Color selection process The user selects the color in the program, but the operating system might convert or modify some characteristics of the color before sending the information to the printer driver. The printer driver might also modify color characteristics depending upon the selected output mode. Any color characteristics that the printer driver or programs do not address are set to the printer default. The default color might not match the color the user selected. Matching colors PANTONE* color matching PANTONE* has multiple color-matching systems. PANTONE* Matching System is very popular and uses solid inks to generate a wide range of color hues and tints. See http://www.hp.com for details about how to use PANTONE* Matching System with this printer. Swatch book color matching The process for matching printer output to preprinted swatch books and standard color references is complex. In general, you can obtain a reasonably good match to a swatch book if the inks that are used to create the swatch book are cyan, magenta, yellow, and black. These are usually referred to as process color swatch books. ENWW Image formation troubleshooting 437 Some swatch books are created from spot colors. Spot colors are specially created colorants. Many of these spot colors are outside of the gamut of the printer. Most spot color swatch books have companion process swatch books that provide CMYK approximations to the spot color. Most process swatch books have a note about what process standards were used to print the swatch book. In most cases they will be SWOP, EURO, or DIC. To get optimal color matching to the process swatch book, select the corresponding ink emulation from the printer menu. If you cannot identify the process standard, use SWOP ink emulation. Using color HP ImageREt 3600 HP ImageREt 3600 print technology is a system that HP developed to deliver superior print quality and technological innovation. The HP ImageREt system incorporates technology that optimizes each element of the print system. Several categories of HP ImageREt have been developed that meet a variety of user needs. The system is comprised of key laser technologies for color printing, including image enhancements, smart supplies, and high-resolution imaging. The ImageREt core technologies are refined in higher level systems for more advanced system users, and additional technologies are integrated. The HP ImageREt 3600 is a complete HP proprietary printing solution, developed and implemented for the first time in the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. HP now offers superior image enhancements for general office and marketing documents. HP ImageREt 3600 performs well in different environmental conditions and with a variety of media, and the image mode is optimized for printing on HP High Gloss Laser Paper. Paper selection For the best color and image quality, select the appropriate media type from the printer menu or from the front panel. sRGB Standard red-green-blue (sRGB) is a world-wide color standard originally developed by HP and Microsoft as a common color language for monitors, input devices (scanners, digital cameras), and output devices (printers, plotters). It is the default color space used for HP products, Microsoft operating systems, the World Wide Web, and most office software that is sold today. sRGB is representative of the typical Windows computer monitor today and the convergence standard for high-definition television. NOTE Factors such as the type of monitor you use and the room's lighting can affect the appearance of colors on your screen. For more information, see Matching colors on page 437. The latest versions of Adobe® PhotoShop®, CorelDRAW®, Microsoft Office, and many other programs use sRGB to communicate color. Most importantly, as the default color space in Microsoft operating systems, sRGB has gained broad adoption as a means to exchange color information between programs and devices using a common definition that assures typical users will experience greatly improved color matching. sRGB improves your ability to match colors among the printer, the computer monitor and other input devices (scanner, digital camera) automatically, without the need to become a color expert. 438 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Adobe® RGB Printers and computer monitors use different methods of producing color, and so matching printer output color to a computer screen can be quite complex. Monitors display colors with light pixels using a Red, Green, and Blue (RGB) color process, but printers print colors using a Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black (CMYK) process. Adobe RGB (1998) color is a wide color space designed to make the most of CMYK color; it is a better choice for experienced users when color fidelity is of the utmost importance. To provide the best color output across office applications, monitors, and cameras, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series print driver defaults to sRGB color. For Adobe RGB (1998) color printing, click Print, Properties, and then select the Color tab. Select Adobe RGB (1998) color from the RGB Color drop-down list. CMYK+ CMYK+ color provides color output that is more consistent with original RGB color images, even after images have been rendered for analog offset press printing. It delivers consistent and intelligent conversion from analog offset press colors to the richer and more vibrant colors available with digital printers. Skin tones and grayscale remain unchanged, but colors appear more vivid without being saturated. Creative professionals are able to produce impressive portfolio prints and presentations from CMYK print files without clipped colors, using the full gamut of their printer, and without manual intervention. CMYK+ color can be thought of as the sRGB of the four color world. It provides great results for CMYK print files regardless of the intended output destination. CMYK+ color is the default color selection, and there is no direct action required by the user. To ensure that you are using CMYK+, simply select it from the Color tab in the postscript level 3 emulation print driver. Color options Color options enable optimal color output automatically for diverse types of documents. Color options use object tagging, which allows optimal color and halftone settings to be used for different objects (text, graphics, and photos) on a page. The printer driver determines which objects are used on a page and uses halftone and color settings that provide the best print quality for each object. Object tagging, combined with optimized default settings, produces great color out of the box. In the Windows environment, the Automatic and Manual color options are on the Color tab in the printer driver. Setting color options to Automatic will typically produce the best possible print quality for color documents. However, situations might occur when you want to print a color document in grayscale (black and white) or want to change one of the printer's color options. ● Using Windows, print in grayscale or change the color options by using settings on the Color tab in the printer driver. ● Using a Macintosh computer, print in grayscale or change the color options by using the Color Matching pop-up menu in the Print dialog box. Print in grayscale Selecting the Print in Grayscale option from the printer driver prints a document by using black toner. This option is useful for previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output, or for printing color documents that will be photocopied or faxed. ENWW Image formation troubleshooting 439 Automatic or manual color adjustment The Automatic color adjustment option optimizes the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge enhancements used for each element in a document. For more information, see your printer driver online Help. NOTE Automatic is the default setting and is recommended for printing all color documents. Use the Manual color adjustment option to adjust the neutral gray color treatment, halftones, and edge enhancements for text, graphics and photographs. To access the Manual color options, on the Color tab, select Manual, and then select Settings. Manual color options Use manual color adjustment to adjust the Color (or Color Map) and Halftone options individually for text, graphics, and photographs. NOTE Some programs convert text or graphics to raster images. In these cases, the Photographs settings also controls text and graphics. Halftone options Halftone options affect the resolution and clarity of your color output. You can select halftone settings for text, graphics, and photographs independently. The two halftone options are Smooth and Detail. ● The Smooth option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Choose this option when uniform and smooth area fills are top priority. ● The Detail option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or colors, or images that contain a pattern or a high level of detail. Choose this option when sharp edges and details are top priority. Neutral Grays The Neutral Grays setting determines the method used for creating gray colors used in text, graphics, and photographs. Two values are available for the Neutral Grays setting: ● Black Only generates neutral colors (grays and black) using only black toner. This guarantees neutral colors without a color cast. ● 4-Color generates neutral colors (grays and black) by combining all four toner colors. This method produces smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors, and it produces the darkest black. Edge Control The Edge Control setting determines how edges are rendered. Edge control has two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning increases edge sharpness. Trapping reduces the effect of incorrect color plane registration by overlapping the edges of adjacent objects slightly. 440 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Four levels of edge control are available: ● Maximum is the most aggressive trapping setting. Adaptive halftoning is on for this setting. ● Normal is the default trapping setting. Trapping is at a medium level and adaptive halftoning is on. ● Light sets trapping at a minimal level, and adaptive halftoning is on. ● Off turns off both trapping and adaptive halftoning. RGB Color Two values are available for the RGB Color setting: ● Default instructs the printer to interpret RGB color as sRGB. sRGB is the accepted standard of Microsoft and the World Wide Web Organization (www). ● Vivid instructs the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for the printing business graphics. ● Device instructs the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs properly with this selection, you must manage image color in the program or operating system. Adjusting color balance This printer features automatic color calibration to provide high-quality color output. In situations that require critical color control, you can manually adjust the density balance of the four toner colors. The available range for each color is from -5 to +5. The default value is 0. CAUTION This procedure should only be performed by your network administrator. Performing this procedure changes the color balance of the printer by altering halftones, and affects all print jobs. To adjust color density ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY. 5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY. 6. Press or 7. Press to select ADJUST COLOR. 8. Press or 9. Press to select the desired color area. to highlight ADJUST COLOR. to select the desired color area. 10. Press or to highlight the desired color. 11. Press to select the desired color. Image formation troubleshooting 441 12. Press or to highlight the correct density setting. 13. Press to select the density setting. 14. Press to set the density for the next color. 15. Repeat steps 10 through 13 for each color. 16. Press to select a different color area. Repeat steps 8 through 13 for each color area. 17. After setting the density for each color, press Menu. Web-downloadable color tables Through Web-downloadable color tables, the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 series printers let you emulate color printing for other HP Color LaserJet products. HP can also create custom color tables to meet the specific needs of businesses. The HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 series printers provide color consistency with other devices by allowing you to emulate color printing for past or future HP Color LaserJet products. HP can also work with businesses to customize the printer’s color output according to their specific needs. Through a process called Remote Firmware Update (RFU), the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 series printers support downloading and installing emulative or custom color tables directly to the printer firmware. To take advantage of this feature, obtain the color table from http://www.hp.com/support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/ljcp4005. Use the RFU feature to install it at your printer, and then access the table from the driver. To use an installed table, click Print, Properties, and then select the Color tab. Select the color table from the RGB Color drop-down list. 442 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Image defects If specific defects occur repeatedly, print a Print Quality Troubleshooting page and follow the instructions on the page. If you are unable to resolve the problem, use the information in this section to identify the root cause of the problem. Image defects fall into the categories that are listed in Table 7-14 Image defects on page 443. Possible causes and recommended solutions for each of these categories are listed in the tables that follow. In general, the items are listed in order from minor repairs to major repairs. Check the items in the order in which they are listed. Table 7-14 Image defects ENWW Image defect Description More information Light image A very light image is printed. See Light image on page 444. Light color One color is light in an image. See Light color on page 445. Dark image A very dark image is printed. See Dark image on page 445. Dark color One color is dark in an image. See Dark color on page 446. Completely blank No image is printed. See Completely blank image on page 446. All black/solid color An all black or solid colored image is printed. See All black or solid color on page 447. Dots in vertical lines Vertical lines of white dots appear in the image. See Dots in vertical lines on page 447. Dirt on back of paper The back (non-printed) side of the paper is dirty. See Dirt on the front or back of the paper on page 448. Dirt on front of paper The front (printed) sided of the paper is dirty. See Dirt on the front or back of the paper on page 448. Vertical lines Vertical lines are printed. See Vertical lines on page 448. White vertical lines White vertical lines appear in the image. See White vertical lines on page 449. Horizontal lines Horizontal lines are printed. See Horizontal lines on page 449. White horizontal lines White horizontal lines appear in the image. See White horizontal lines on page 450. Missing color One of the four toner colors is not printing. See Missing color on page 450. Blank spots The image has blank spots. See Blank spots on page 451. Poor fusing Toner is loose on the printed image. See Poor fusing on page 451. Distortion or blurring The image appears distorted, or colors seem out of alignment. See Distortion or blurring on page 452. Smearing The image is smeared or dirty. See Smearing on page 453. Misplaced image The image is placed incorrectly on the page. See Misplaced image on page 454. Image defects 443 Light image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light images. Table 7-15 Causes for light images Cause Solution The toner cartridge might be low. Replace the toner cartridge. The toner cartridge might not be seated properly. Make sure the toner cartridge is seated properly. The image density is not adjusted correctly. Increase the density for the affected color. A poor contact in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage PCB. Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged. The media roller is worn or damaged. Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The high-voltage PCB is defective or one of the connections is loose. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. 444 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Light color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for light color. Table 7-16 Causes for light color Cause Solution A poor contact exists in the transfer bias contacts between the ETB and the printer. Clean the contacts for the affected color. If the contacts are still dirty after cleaning or if they are damaged, replace the contacts or the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged. Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The photosensitive drum is worn. Replace the print cartridge for the affected color. The ETB alienation system is defective. 1. Run the component test to verify that the ETB alienation system is defective. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Replace the ETB. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The high-voltage PCB is defective or one of the connections is loose. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. Dark image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark images. Table 7-17 Causes for dark images ENWW Cause Solution The image density is not adjusted correctly. Decrease the density for the affected color. The color misregistration detection unit is dirty. Clean the lens on the color misregistration detection unit. Image defects 445 Table 7-17 Causes for dark images (continued) Cause Solution The color misregistration detection unit is defective. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1012) is disconnected or not seated properly. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1012) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. Dark color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dark color. Table 7-18 Causes for dark colors Cause Solution A poor contact exists in the drum ground, primary charging bias, and developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCB and the print cartridge. Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the affected cartridge. The high-voltage contacts are broken or damaged. Replace the high-voltage contacts for the affected color. The high-voltage PCB is defective. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. Completely blank image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for completely blank pages. Table 7-19 Causes for a completely blank image Cause Solution The high-voltage PCB is defective or one of the connections is loose. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. 446 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW All black or solid color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for all black or solid color. Table 7-20 Causes for an all black or solid colored image Cause Solution A poor contact exists in the drum ground, primary charging bias, and developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCB and the print cartridge. Clean the contacts on the cartridge for the affected color. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the affected cartridge. The primary charging roller is defective. Replace the print cartridge for the affected color. The high-voltage contacts are broken or damaged. Replace the high-voltage contacts for the affected color. The high-voltage PCB is defective. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. The laser/scanner unit is defective. 1. Run the component test to verify that the laser/scanner unit is defective. See Component test (special mode test) on page 532. 2. Replace the affected laser/scanner unit. See Laser/ scanner assembly on page 287. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. Dots in vertical lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dots in vertical lines. ENWW Image defects 447 Table 7-21 Causes for vertical lines of white dots Cause Solution The charge roller in the cartridge is damaged or contaminated. Replace the affected cartridge. The transfer charging roller is worn or damaged. If dots occur in all colors, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. Dirt on the front or back of the paper This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for dirt on the front or back of the paper. Table 7-22 Causes for dirt on the front or back of the paper Cause Solution One or more of the rollers are dirty. See Repetitive defects troubleshooting on page 454 for information about identifying the roller that might be dirty. Clean the indicated roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the appropriate roller, cartridge, or assembly. The pickup roller is dirty. Clean the roller. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning, replace the pickup roller assembly. A poor contact exists in the attaching bias contacts between the ETB and the high-voltage PCB. Clean the contacts. Replace them if they are still dirty or are damaged. The high-voltage PCB is defective or one of the connections is loose. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. Vertical lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for vertical lines. 448 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-23 Causes for vertical lines Cause Solution The photosensitive drum has grooves around the circumference. Replace the cartridge that indicates the color of the vertical lines. The fuser sleeve has grooves around the circumference. Replace the fuser. White vertical lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white vertical lines. Table 7-24 Causes for white vertical lines Cause Solution The developing cylinder has grooves around the circumference. Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear. The photosensitive drum has grooves around the circumference. Replace the print cartridge for the color in which the white lines appear. The laser is blocked by a foreign substance. Inspect the laser source and shutter for the affected color. Inspect the cartridge and remove any debris that might be blocking the laser from reaching the OPC. The cartridge has a foreign substance blocking the laser. Inspect the laser source and shutter for the affected color. Inspect the cartridge and remove any debris that might be blocking the laser from reaching the OPC. The lens in the laser/scanner unit is dirty. Replace the laser/scanner for the color in which the white lines appear. See Laser/scanner assembly on page 287. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The fuser sleeve has grooves around the circumference. Replace the fuser. Horizontal lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for horizontal lines. ENWW Image defects 449 Table 7-25 Causes for horizontal lines Cause Solution The photosensitive drum has scars that run from end to end. Replace the print cartridge for the affected color. The fuser sleeve has scars that run from end to end. Replace the fuser. White horizontal lines This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for white horizontal lines. Table 7-26 Causes for white horizontal lines Cause Solution The photosensitive drum has scars that run from end to end. Replace the print cartridge for the affected color. The ETB belt has horizontal scars. Replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. Missing color This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for missing color. Table 7-27 Causes for a missing color Cause Solution The primary charging roller is defective. Replace the print cartridge for the missing color. A poor contact exists in the developing bias contacts of the high-voltage PCB and the print cartridge. Clean the contacts. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they are damaged, replace the print cartridge or the highvoltage contacts. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See Highvoltage power supply PCB on page 324. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner for the missing color. See Laser/ scanner assembly on page 287. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The high-voltage PCB is defective or one of the connections is loose. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. 450 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Blank spots This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for blank spots. Table 7-28 Causes for blank spots Cause Solution The high-voltage PCB is defective or one of the connections is loose. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the high-voltage PCB. See High-voltage power supply PCB on page 324. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connector (J1006) on the DC controller PCB to make sure it is seated correctly. The DC controller may require a firmware upgrade or the connector to the high-voltage PCB (J1006) is disconnected or not seated properly. Poor fusing This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for poor fusing. Table 7-29 Causes for poor fusing ENWW Cause Solution The media is not within specifications. For example, media that is too thick causes poor fusing. Use media that meets specifications. See Media specifications on page 21. Image defects 451 Table 7-29 Causes for poor fusing (continued) Cause Solution The fuser pressure roller is dirty. 1. Clean the fuser pressure roller. 2. Replace the fuser pressure roller. The fuser is not within nip-width specifications. Replace the fuser. The fuser sleeve is scarred or damaged. Replace the fuser. The pressure roller is scarred or damaged. Replace the fuser. The thermistor has deteriorated. Replace the fuser. The fuser pressure release motor is defective or is not connecting. 1. Check the connections. 2. Replace the fuser pressure release motor. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connectors (J1024 and J1025) on the DC controller PCB to make sure they are seated correctly. The DC controller PCB may require a firmware upgrade or the connectors to the high-voltage PCB (J1024 and J1025) are disconnected or not seated properly. Distortion or blurring This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for distortion or blurring. 452 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-30 Causes for distortion or blurring Cause Solution The color-plane registration is out of specification. Calibrate the printer from the PRINT QUALITY menu. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The cartridge OPC drum is slipping. 1. Set the pre-rotation optimize mode to on. 2. Replace the cartridge. The ETB is defective. If the ETB belt does not rotate smoothly, replace the ETB. Calibrate the printer after replacing the ETB. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The ETB motor drive gear is worn or damaged. Replace the ETB. The drum motor drive gear is worn or damaged. Replace the drum motor for the affected color. See Remove main drive assembly on page 256. The color misregistration detection unit is defective. Replace the paper feed assembly. See Paper feed assembly on page 283. The laser/scanner unit is defective. Replace the laser/scanner for the affected color. See Laser/ scanner assembly on page 287. Calibrate the printer after replacing the laser/scanner. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The DC controller PCB may require a firmware upgrade or the connectors to the high-voltage PCB (J1002 Yellow, J1003 Cyan, J1004 Magenta, and J1005 Black) are disconnected or not seated properly. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connectors (J1002 Yellow, J1003 Cyan, J1004 Magenta, and J1005 Black) on the DC controller PCB to make sure they are seated correctly. Smearing This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for smearing. Table 7-31 Causes for smearing ENWW Cause Solution A poor contact exists in the printer ground and cartridge ground contacts. Clean each print-cartridge ground contact and the printer ground contact. If they are still dirty after cleaning, or if they Image defects 453 Table 7-31 Causes for smearing (continued) Cause Solution are damaged, replace the cartridge, or replace the printer ground contact. The fuser inlet guide is dirty or contains debris. Clean the fuser inlet guide. The cartridge shutters are not opening. Make sure the cartridge shutter bar is operating correctly. Misplaced image This table contains information about the causes of and solutions for misplaced images. Table 7-32 Causes for misplaced image Cause Solution The media is skewed. See Paper is skewed on page 433 to resolve the skew. The color-plane registration is out of specification. Calibrate the printer from the PRINT QUALITY menu. See Full Calibrate Now on page 539. The duplex feed roller is worn. Replace the duplexer. See Duplexer on page 349. The oblique rollers are worn (this issue applies to duplex printing only). Replace the ETB. The DC controller PCB may require a firmware upgrade or the connectors to the high-voltage PCB (J1002 Yellow, J1003 Cyan, J1004 Magenta, and J1005 Black) are disconnected or not seated properly. 1. Upgrade formatter and DC Controller firmware, which can be found in a single .rfu file from http://www.hp.com/ support/clj4700 or http://www.hp.com/support/cp4005. 2. Check the connectors (J1002 Yellow, J1003 Cyan, J1004 Magenta, and J1005 Black) on the DC controller PCB to make sure they are seated correctly. Repetitive defects troubleshooting Defects on printer rollers can cause image defects to appear at regular intervals on the page. Use Figure 7-4 Repetitive defects ruler on page 455 to measure the distance between defects that recur on a page. Use the repetitive defect spacing table to determine which roller is causing the defect. To resolve the problem, try cleaning the roller first. If the roller is still dirty after cleaning or if it is damaged, replace the indicated part. 454 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW CAUTION Do not use solvents or oils to clean rollers. Instead, rub the roller with lint-free paper. If dirt is difficult to remove, rub the roller with lint-free paper that has been dampened with rubbing alcohol. NOTE Defects on the paper tray or the multipurpose tray pickup roller cause defects only on the leading edge of the image. Repetitive defect ruler If defects repeat at regular intervals on the page, use this ruler to identify the cause of the defect. Place the top of the ruler at the first defect. The marking that is beside the next occurrence of the defect indicates which component needs to be replaced. Figure 7-4 Repetitive defects ruler Table 7-33 Repetitive defect spacing ENWW Interval Roller Distance Type of defect Replacement part 1 First occurrence of the defect (the distance from the top of the page to the defect might vary. 2 Black (K) developing cartridge roller cylinder 34.3 mm (1.35 inches) Defect on front of paper Print cartridge 3 Cartridge primary charging roller or ETB transfer roller 37.7 mm (1.48 inches) Repetitive spots Print cartridge Image defects 455 Table 7-33 Repetitive defect spacing (continued) Interval Roller Distance Type of defect Replacement part Defect on front of paper Print cartridge (if the defect occurs in only one color, the defective part is the print cartridge; if the defect occurs in all colors, the defective part is the ETB) 4 Color (CMY) developing roller cylinder. 38.5 mm (1.52 inches) 5 Toner feed roller 42.7 mm (1.68 inches) 6 Media attaching roller 75 mm (2.95 inches) Defect on front of paper ETB 7 Fuser sleeve 76.0 mm (2.99 inches) Poor fusing Fuser 8 Fuser pressure roller 81.0 mm (3.19 inches) Poor fusing Fuser 9 Photosensitive drum 94.2 mm (3.71 inches) Defect on front of paper Print cartridge Print cartridge (K) Table 7-34 Additional repetitive defects Roller Distance Type of defect Replacement part Paper tray feed roller 77 mm (3.71 inches) Defect on front of paper Feed roller Paper tray paper separation roller 77 mm (1.35 inches) Defect on back of paper Separation roller Registration roller 55 mm (1.48 inches) Defect on back of paper Paper feed assembly Registration sub roller 47 mm (1.68 inches) Defect on front of paper Paper feed assembly Fuser delivery roller 37 mm (2.95 inches) Defect on back of paper Delivery assembly Face-down delivery roller 25 mm (2.99 inches) Defect on back of paper Delivery assembly Paper tray pickup roller 77 mm (3.19 inches) Defect on front of paper Paper pickup roller Multipurpose tray pickup roller See the note above Figure 7-4 Repetitive defects ruler on page 455. Defect on back of paper Multipurpose tray pickup roller assembly To confirm that a print cartridge is the problem, insert a print cartridge from another HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer, if one is available, before ordering a new print cartridge. If the defect repeats at 94.0 mm (3.75 inch) intervals, try replacing the print cartridge before replacing the fuser. 456 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Interface troubleshooting Communications checks NOTE Communication problems are normally the customer's responsibility. Time spent attempting to resolve these problems might not be covered by the Hewlett-Packard Company warranty. Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in troubleshooting network problems. If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, proceed to Table 7-35 Communications check on page 457. Table 7-35 Communications check Check Action Is your computer configured to the parameters that are described in the configuration instructions? These parameters are required in order to communicate with the printer. Verify that the configuration of the computer's communications port matches these parameters. NOTE If these parameters are not set correctly, an error message might display on the control panel. AUTOEXEC.BAT standard configurations Parallel MS-DOS commands Ensure that the AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the following statements for parallel interface communications: MODE LPT1: ,,P For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above: MODE LPT1: ,,B NOTE This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If you are using LPT2 or LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the appropriate printer port. Printer Job Language (PJL) commands See the HP Printer Job Language Technical Reference Manual for a complete description of PJL commands. This manual is available with the HP PCL/PJL reference set on CD-ROM (part number 5021-0337). @PJL [Enter] This command enables the specified printer language. If the printer does not receive this command, it enables the default language. This ensures the correct operation for programs that do not support PJL. The following is the command syntax: @PJL [Enter] LANGUAGE = {PCL/PostScript} [ ] ENWW Interface troubleshooting 457 UEL This command (also referred to as the universal exit language command) terminates the current printer language and returns control to PJL. It performs the following actions: ● Prints all data that was received before this command. ● Performs a reset: E in PCL, D in PostScript. ● Turns control over to PJL. This command is also a valid HP-GL/2 terminator. The UEL command must be immediately followed by the "@PJL" command prefix. Characters or control codes other than @PJL (such as or ) enable the default language and process the print job in that language. All jobs must begin and end with the UEL command. In addition to starting PJL, the UEL command creates the same effect as the E command. However, the E command should always be included to ensure backward compatibility. @PJL COMMENT This command designates the current line as a comment, which is ignored. The following is the command syntax: @PJL COMMENT [ ] @PJL INFO CONFIG This command solicits a response to describe the installed options and allows the printer to configure the installed options automatically to meet the program requirements. @PJL INFO ID This command identifies the printer type to the host for reference when selecting printer drivers for automatic installation. The following is the command syntax: @PJL INFO ID @PJL INFO USTATUS This command queries the state of unsolicited JOB status. PAGE and TIMED status are not supported. The following is the command syntax: @PJL INFO USTATUS @PJL INFO PAGECOUNT This command returns the number of pages that have been printed by the engine. @PJL JOB This command informs the printer of the start of a PJL job and synchronizes the job-status information. The printer counts print jobs, including nested jobs, incrementing the job counter for the @PJL JOB command and decrementing it for @PJL EOJ. The printer accepts the NAME= parameter and returns the name string in the unsolicited JOB start status message (if the unsolicited job status is enabled). The printer transmits the unsolicited JOB 458 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW status message to every I/O channel that has enabled this function. The following is the message format: @PJL USTATUS JOB START [NAME= ] The printer resets the nested job counter whenever it switches the source to a different I/O channel. This prevents a corrupt job on one channel from disrupting the activities on another channel. @PJL EOJ This command identifies the end of a print job and is a hint for the I/O switching algorithm. The printer counts nested jobs and recognizes job boundaries when the counter decrements to zero. The printer ignores isolated EOJ commands. Each EOJ must be preceded by a JOB command. @PJL ECHO This printer supports the ECHO command, which transmits its parameters over the I/O channel to the host that issued the command. @PJL USTATUS JOB=ON/OFF This command enables or disables the JOB status for the I/O channel that delivers the command. @PJL USTATUSOFF This command disables the unsolicited JOB status for the I/O channel that delivered the command. For this printer, it duplicates the function of @PJL USTATUS JOB=OFF, AND @PJL USTATUS DEVICE=OFF. NOTE All commands that this printer's PJL command set does not support are returned with the message @PJL xxxx ? . ENWW Interface troubleshooting 459 Changing printer control panel configuration settings By using the printer control panel, you can make changes to general printer configuration default settings such as tray size and type, sleep mode, printer personality (language), and jam recovery. The printer control panel can also be accessed from a computer by using the Settings page of the embedded Web server. The computer shows the same information that the control panel shows. For more information, see Using the embedded Web server on page 505. CAUTION Configuration settings seldom need to be changed. Hewlett-Packard recommends that only the system administrator change configuration settings. Job storage limit (4700 models) This option sets the limit for the maximum number of jobs stored on the hard disk at the printer. The maximum number allowed is 100, and the default value is 32. Setting the job storage limit 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight JOB STORAGE LIMIT. 7. Press to select JOB STORAGE LIMIT. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the value. to change the value. 10. Press Menu. Job held timeout (4700 models) This option sets the period of time that the system keeps files in job storage before deleting them from the queue. The default setting for this option is OFF; the other available settings are 1 HOUR, 4 HOURS, 1 DAY, and 1 WEEK. Setting the job held timeout 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 460 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 6. Press to highlight JOB HELD TIMEOUT. 7. Press to select JOB HELD TIMEOUT. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the time period. to select the appropriate time period. 10. Press Menu. Show IP address This item determines whether the printer IP address is shown on the display with the Ready message. Options are AUTO and OFF. The default setting for this option is OFF. If more than one EIO card is installed, the IP address of the card installed in the first slot displays. Showing the IP address 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight SHOW ADDRESS. 7. Press to select SHOW ADDRESS. 8. Press or 9. Press to select the option. to select the desired option. 10. Press Menu. Color/black mix This item allows you to configure printer settings to optimize printer and cartridge performance for the printing environment. If the printer is primarily used for black printing (over two-thirds of the pages are black only), change the printer settings to MOSTLY BLACK PAGES. If the printer is primarily used for color printing, change the printer settings to MOSTLY COLOR PAGES. If the printer is used for a mix of black-only and color print jobs, it is recommended that you use the printer default of AUTO. To determine the percentage of color pages, print a configuration page. See Testing the printer operation on page 68 to learn how to print a configuration page. The configuration page shows the total number of pages printed and the number of color pages printed. To determine the percentage of color pages printed, divide the color page count by the total page count. Setting the color/black mix ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. Changing printer control panel configuration settings 461 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight COLOR/BLACK MIX. 7. Press to select COLOR/BLACK MIX. 8. Press or 9. Press to select the option. to select the desired option. 10. Press Menu. Tray behavior options Tray behavior allows seven user-defined options: ● USE REQUESTED TRAY. Selecting EXCLUSIVELY ensures that the printer will not automatically select another tray when you indicate that a specific tray should be used. Selecting FIRST allows the printer to pull from a second tray if the specified tray is empty or does not match the settings specified for the print job. EXCLUSIVELY is the default setting. ● MANUALLY FEED PROMPT. If you select ALWAYS (the default value), the system always displays a prompt before pulling from Tray 1 (multipurpose tray). If you select UNLESS LOADED, the system will only display the prompt if Tray 1 is empty. ● PS DEFER MEDIA. This setting affects how non-HP PostScript drivers will behave with the device. There is no need to change this setting if using the drivers supplied by HP. If set to ENABLED, non-HP PostScript drivers will use the HP tray selection method as the HP drivers do. If set to Disabled, some non-HP PostScript drivers will use the PostScript tray selection method instead of the HP method. ● SIZE/TYPE PROMPT. This option allows you to control whether or not the tray configuration message, and corresponding prompt to change type or size is shown when a tray transitions from opened to closed. Values for this option are Display and DO NOT DISPLAY. ● USE ANOTHER TRAY. This menu item allows you to enable or disable the prompt to select another tray. Values for this option are ENABLED and Disabled. ENABLED is the default. ● DUPLEX BLANK PAGES. This item allows you to determine how a job is to be duplexed. The available values are AUTO, which is the default value, and YES. If AUTO is selected, blank pages within the print job are not duplexed. If YES is selected, any blank pages within the job are duplexed. ● IMAGE ROTATION. This menu item is available only if an output accessory, such as the stapler/ stacker, is not installed. The printer applies a 180° rotation to all pages if this menu item is not available or if Standard is selected. This option lets you place paper in the input tray in the same orientation, regardless of the output accessory. Setting the printer to use the requested tray 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 462 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to select USE REQUESTED TRAY. 9. Press or 10. Press to select EXCLUSIVELY or FIRST. to set the behavior. 11. Press Menu. Setting manually feed prompt 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to highlight MANUALLY FEED PROMPT. 9. Press to select MANUALLY FEED PROMPT. 10. Press or 11. Press to set the behavior. to select ALWAYS or UNLESS LOADED. 12. Press Menu. Setting the printer default for PS defer media ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to highlight PS DEFER MEDIA. Changing printer control panel configuration settings 463 9. Press to select PS DEFER MEDIA. 10. Press to select ENABLED or Disabled. 11. Press to set the behavior. 12. Press Menu. Setting the printer to use size/type prompt 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to highlight SIZE/TYPE PROMPT. 9. Press or 10. Press to select DISPLAY or DO NOT DISPLAY. to set the behavior. 11. Press Menu. Setting the printer to use another tray 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to highlight USE ANOTHER TRAY. 9. Press or 10. Press to select ENABLED or Disabled. to set the behavior. 11. Press Menu. 464 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Setting the printer to duplex blank pages 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to highlight DUPLEX BLANK PAGES. 9. Press or 10. Press to select AUTO or YES. to set the behavior. 11. Press Menu. Setting the printer to rotate images 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight TRAY BEHAVIOR. 7. Press to select TRAY BEHAVIOR. 8. Press to highlight IMAGE ROTATION. 9. Press or 10. Press to select STANDARD or ALTERNATE. to set the behavior. 11. Press Menu. Sleep delay The adjustable sleep mode feature reduces power consumption when the printer has been inactive for an extended period. You can set the length of time before the printer enters sleep mode to 1 MINUTE, 15 MINUTES, 30 MINUTES, 45 MINUTES, 60 MINUTES, 90 MINUTES, 2 HOURS, or 4 HOURS. The default setting is 30 MINUTES. NOTE The printer display dims when the printer is in sleep mode. This mode does not affect printer warmup time. ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 465 Setting sleep delay 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight Sleep Delay. 7. Press to select Sleep Delay. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the time period. to select the appropriate time period. 10. Press Menu. CAUTION If paper is loaded in Trays 3 through 6 when the printer is in sleep mode, the new paper will not be sensed when the printer comes out of sleep mode. This could cause the wrong paper to be used for a print job. Be sure to wake the printer before loading paper in these trays. Disabling/enabling sleep mode 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight RESETS. 5. Press to select RESETS. 6. Press to highlight SLEEP MODE. 7. Press to select SLEEP MODE. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select ON or OFF. 10. Press Menu. Wake time The wake time feature allows you to instruct the printer to wake at a certain time on selected days, to eliminate waiting for the warmup and calibration periods. You must have SLEEP MODE on to set the wake time. To set or change the wake time, use the following steps: 466 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Setting the wake time 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight WAKE TIME. 7. Press to select WAKE TIME. 8. Press or 9. Press to accept the selection. to select the day of the week. 10. Press or 11. Press to accept the selection. 12. Press or 13. Press to accept the selection. 14. Press or 15. Press to accept the selection. 16. Press or 17. Press to accept the selection. 18. Press to enter APPLY TO ALL DAYS. 19. Press or 20. Press to accept the selection. 21. Press or 22. Press to accept each selection. to select custom or Off. to select the hour. to select the minutes. to select AM or PM. to select YES or NO. to select the days of the week to which WAKE TIME applies. 23. Press Menu. Display brightness The display brightness feature allows you to set the level of brightness for the control panel display. The allowable range of values is 1 through 10. The default for this feature is 5. To change or set the display brightness, use the following steps: Setting the display brightness ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. Changing printer control panel configuration settings 467 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS. 7. Press to select DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS. 8. Press or 9. Press to accept the selection. to highlight the desired value. 10. Press Menu. Personality This printer features automatic personality (printer language) switching. AUTO is the default value. ● AUTO configures the printer to automatically detect the type of print job and configure its personality to accommodate that job. ● PCL configures the printer to use Printer Control Language. ● PDF configures the printer to print PDF files. ● PS configures the printer to use PostScript emulation. Setting the personality 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight PERSONALITY. 7. Press to select PERSONALITY. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the personality. to select the appropriate personality (AUTO, PCL, PDF, or PS). 10. Press Menu. Clearable warnings You can determine the display time of control panel clearable warnings with this option by selecting ON or JOB. The default value is JOB. ● ON displays clearable warnings until you press . ● JOB displays clearable warnings until the end of the job in which it was generated. 468 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Setting the clearable warnings 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight CLEARABLE WARNINGS. 7. Press to select CLEARABLE WARNINGS. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate setting. 10. Press Menu. Auto continue You can determine printer behavior when the system generates an Auto Continuable error. ON is the default setting. ● ON displays an error message for ten seconds before automatically continuing to print. ● OFF pauses printing any time the printer displays an error message and until you press . Setting auto continue 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight AUTO CONTINUE. 7. Press to select AUTO CONTINUE. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate setting. 10. Press Menu. ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 469 Replace supplies The printer allows three options for handling the printer when a color cartridge is low and should be replaced. STOP AT LOW is the default value. ● STOP AT OUT pauses printing until the color supply is replaced. The control panel displays a warning that the supply is low and should be replaced. ● STOP AT LOW allows the printer to continue printing until the color supply is exhausted. The control panel displays a warning that the supply is out and should be replaced. ● OVERRIDE AT OUT allows printing to continue when a color supply is out, but displays a warning that override is in use and that the supply must be replaced. NOTE Using the Override mode compromises print quality. HP does not recommend use of the Override mode. Replace the print cartridge as soon as possible. Setting replace supplies response 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight REPLACE SUPPLIES. 7. Press to select REPLACE SUPPLIES. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate setting. 10. Press Menu. Order at This menu option allows you to set the point at which you are reminded to order new supplies. The point is measured in terms of percent remaining. The allowable range is 0-100. The default is 15. Setting order at response 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight ORDER AT. 470 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 7. Press to select ORDER AT. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate setting. 10. Press Menu. Color supply out There are two options for this menu item. The default is STOP. ● STOP causes the printer to stop printing until the empty color supply is replaced. ● AUTOCONTINUE BLACK allows the printer to continue printing using black toner only when a color supply is empty. A warning message displays on the control panel when the printer is in this mode. Printing in this mode is allowed only for a specific number of pages. After that, the printer will pause printing until you replace the empty color supply. Setting color supply out response 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight COLOR SUPPLY OUT. 7. Press to select COLOR SUPPLY OUT. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate setting. 10. Press Menu. Jam recovery This option allows you to configure the printer response to paper jams, including how it handles the pages involved. AUTO is the default value. ENWW ● AUTO — the printer automatically turns jam recovery on when sufficient memory is available. ● OFF — the printer will not reprint any page that was involved in a paper jam. Since no memory is used to store the most recent pages, performance may be optimal. ● ON — the printer reprints any page involved in a paper jam. Additional memory is allocated to store the last few pages printed, and this might reduce overall printer performance. Changing printer control panel configuration settings 471 Setting jam recovery response 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight JAM RECOVERY. 7. Press to select JAM RECOVERY. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate setting. 10. Press Menu. RAM disk This option allows you to specify how the RAM disk is configured. Options are AUTO and OFF. When set to AUTO, the printer determines the optimal RAM size based on the amount of available memory. The message displays only in printer models that do not have a hard disk installed. The default is AUTO. Changing RAM disk behavior You can change this behavior at any time by following these steps: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight RAM DISK. 7. Press to select RAM DISK. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select AUTO or OFF. 10. Press Menu. Language On some products, the option to set the default language displays when the printer is first initialized. Use the or arrow to scroll through the available options. When the desired language is highlighted, press the to set the default language. The default language is ENGLISH. You may also change the language at any time by following these steps: 472 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Selecting the language 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. 6. Press to highlight LANGUAGE. 7. Press to select LANGUAGE. 8. Press or 9. Press to set the selection. to select the appropriate language. 10. Press Menu. Selecting the language if the display is in a language you do not understand 1. Turn the printer power off. 2. Hold down the 3. Press again. 4. Press or 5. Press to save the desired language as the new default. key while turning the printer power on until all three lights stay on. to scroll through the available languages. Using the printer control panel in shared environments Because your printer is shared with other users, adhere to the following guidelines to ensure successful printer operation: ● Consult your system administrator before making changes to control panel settings. Changing control panel settings could affect other print jobs. ● Coordinate with other users before changing the default printer font or downloading soft fonts. Coordinating these operations conserves memory and avoids unexpected printer output. ● Be aware that switching printer personalities, such as Emulated PostScript or PCL, affects the printed output of other users. NOTE Your network operating system may automatically protect each user’s print job from the effects of other print jobs. Consult your system administrator for more information. ENWW Changing printer control panel configuration settings 473 Control panel troubleshooting When you press Menu to open the menus, the high-level menus display in the following order: ● RETRIEVE JOB (this menu displays only if a hard disk is installed) ● INFORMATION ● PAPER HANDLING ● CONFIGURE DEVICE ● DIAGNOSTICS ● SERVICE A menu map shows how individual items are configured within each of these menus. Figure 7-5 Model menu map on page 474 shows a sample of one page of the menu map. The menu map prints on six pages. The final page gives instructions about how to use the control panel buttons. Printing a menu map 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to select PRINT MENU MAP. Figure 7-5 Model menu map Information menu Use the information menu to access and print specific printer information. 474 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Explanation PRINT MENU MAP Generates a menu map that shows layout and current settings of the control menu items. The printer will return to the Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT CONFIGURATION Generates a page detailing the current configuration of the printer. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE Generates a page that shows the number of pages remaining for each supply in the printer. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. SUPPLIES STATUS This page does not print. It displays status only. PRINT USAGE PAGE Generates a page that contains information that could be used for cost accounting. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT DEMO Generates a demonstration page. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT RGB SAMPLES Generates a page that displays RGB colors. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT CMYK SAMPLES Generates a page that displays CMYK colors. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT FILE DIRECTORY Generates a directory page containing information for all installed mass storage devices. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT PCL FONT LIST Generates a typeface list of all PCL fonts available on the printer. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. PRINT PS FONT LIST Generates a typeface list of all PS fonts available on the printer. The printer will return to the online Ready state when the page is completed. ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 475 Paper handling menu When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the control panel, you can print by selecting the type and size of paper from the driver or software application. Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) are available from a software program, or from the printer driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Printer driver and software program settings override control panel settings. NOTE Items that have an asterisk (*) are the default values. Item Values Explanation TRAY 1 SIZE ANY SIZE* Allows you to set the media size for Tray 1. LETTER LEGAL EXECUTIVE STATEMENT 8.5X13 A4 A5 B5(JIS) EXECUTIVE(JIS) DPOSTCARD(JIS) 16K ENVELOPE #10 ENVELOPE MONARCH ENVELOPE C5 ENVELOPE DL ENVELOPE B5 CUSTOM ANY CUSTOM TRAY 1 TYPE ANY TYPE* Allows you to specify the type of media in Tray 1. PLAIN PREPRINTED LETTERHEAD TRANSPARENCY PREPUNCHED 476 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Values Explanation LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR LIGHT <75 G/M2 INTERMEDIATE90-104 HEAVY 105-120 G/M2 EXTRA HEAVY120-163 CARDSTOCK >163 G/M2 ROUGH 90-105 G/M2 GLOSSY 75-120 G/M2 HEAVY GLOSSY120-160 EXTRA HEAVY GLOSSY TOUGH PAPER ENVELOPE TRAY X SIZE LETTER* LEGAL Allows you to set the media size for Trays 2–6. Substitute the tray number for . EXECUTIVE 8.5X13 A4 A5 B5(JIS) EXECUTIVE(JIS) 16K CUSTOM ANY CUSTOM TRAY X TYPE ANY TYPE PLAIN* Allows you to specify the type of media in each tray (Trays 2–6). Substitute the tray number for . PREPRINTED LETTERHEAD TRANSPARENCY PREPUNCHED ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 477 Item Values Explanation LABELS BOND RECYCLED COLOR LIGHT <75 G/M2 INTERMEDIATE90-104 HEAVY 105-120 G/M2 ROUGH 90-105 G/M2 GLOSSY 75-120 G/M2 TOUGH PAPER Configure device menu This menu contains all of the administrative functions. NOTE Items that have an asterisk (*) are the default values. Printing submenu Some items in the Printing submenu are available in a software program, or in the printer driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Driver and program settings override control panel settings. To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight PRINTING. 5. Press to select PRINTING. Item Options COPIES 1 to 32,000 478 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Values Explanation Set the default number of copies by selecting any number from 1 to 32,000. Use the numeric keypad to select the number of copies. ENWW Item Options Values Explanation NOTE It is recommended that you set the number of copies in the printer driver or in the software program. (Printer driver settings and software program settings override control panel settings.) DEFAULT PAPER SIZE LETTER* Set the default image size for paper and envelopes. (The item name will change from [SIZE] to ENVELOPE as you scroll through the available sizes.) LEGAL EXECUTIVE STATEMENT 8.5X13 A4 A5 B5(JIS) EXECUTIVE(JIS) DPOSTCARD(JIS) 16K ENVELOPE #10 ENVELOPE MONARCH ENVELOPE C5 ENVELOPE DL ENVELOPE B5 CUSTOM DEFAULT CUSTOM PAPER SIZE UNIT OF MEASURE ″* MILLIMETERS ENWW X DIMENSION 76-216 mm (3-8.5 inches) Y DIMENSION 127-356 mm (5-14 inches) Allows you to set a custom paper size for any of the installed trays. Substitute the tray number for . Select the X and Y dimensions of the custom paper size. Control panel troubleshooting 479 Item Options DUPLEX Off Values Explanation SHORT EDGE* Set the value to On to print on both sides (duplex) or Off to print on one side (simplex) of a sheet of paper. On* DUPLEX BINDING LONG EDGE OVERRIDE A4/LETTER NO YES* MANUAL FEED Off* On COURIER FONT REGULAR* DUPLEX BINDING allows you to select LONG EDGE or SHORT EDGE. This item displays only if DUPLEX is set to On. This command is used to print on Letter-size media when an A4 job is sent but no A4-size media is loaded in the printer (or to print on A4-size media when a Letter job is sent, but no Letter-size media is loaded in the printer). Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather than automatically from a tray. When MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the printer goes offline when it receives a print job. It then displays MANUALLY FEED . Select the version of Courier font to use: DARK REGULAR: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet 4 series printers. DARK: The internal Courier font available on the HP LaserJet III series printers. Both fonts are not available at the same time. WIDE A4 NO* YES The Wide A4 setting changes the number of characters that can be printed on a single line of A4 paper. YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be printed on one line. PRINT PS ERRORS 480 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Off* Select On to print the PS error page when PS errors occur. ENWW Item Options Values Explanation On PRINT PDF ERRORS Off* On PCL ENWW Select On to print the PDF error page when PDF errors occur. For information about this option, see PCL submenu on page 482. Control panel troubleshooting 481 PCL submenu To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight PRINTING. 5. Press to select PRINTING. 6. Press to highlight PCL. 7. Press to select PCL. Item Values Explanation FORM LENGTH 5 to 128 Default=60 Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for default paper size. Enter the value by using the numeric keypad. PORTRAIT* Select the default page orientation. ORIENTATION LANDSCAPE FONT SOURCE NOTE It is recommended that you set the page orientation in the printer driver or in the software program. (Printer driver settings and software program settings override control panel settings.) Internal* Internal: Internal fonts. Card Slot X CARD SLOT 1, CARD SLOT 2, or CARD SLOT 3: Fonts stored in one of the three flash memory slots. FONT NUMBER 0 to 102 The printer assigns a number to each font and lists them on the PCL Font List (see Print the PCL font list page on page 515). The font number displays in the Font # column of the printout. FONT PITCH 0.44 to 99.99 Use the numeric keypad to enter a value. This item might not appear, depending on the font selected. Default=10.00 FONT POINT SIZE 4.00 to 999.75 Use the numeric keypad to enter a value. Default=12.00 SYMBOL SET Variety of available symbol sets Select any one of several available symbol sets at the printer control panel. A symbol set is a unique grouping of all the characters in a font. PC–8 or PC–850 is recommended for line-draw characters. APPEND CR TO LF NO* Select YES to append a carriage return to each line feed that is encountered in backward- 482 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item SUPPRESS BLANK PAGES Values Explanation YES compatible PCL jobs (pure text, no job control). Some environments, such as UNIX, indicate a new line by using only the line-feed control code. This option allows the user to append the required carriage return to each line feed. NO* When set to YES, form feeds are ignored if the page is blank. YES MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING Standard* The PCL5 MEDIA SOURCE MAPPING command selects an input tray by a number that maps to the available trays and feeders. CLASSIC Print quality submenu You can gain access to some of the items in this menu in either a software program, or in the printer driver (if the correct printer driver is installed). Printer driver settings and software program settings override control panel settings. To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY. 5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY. Item Options Values Explanation ADJUST COLOR HIGHLIGHTS CYAN DENSITY This item allows you to adjust the color from +5 to –5. MIDTONES MAGENTA DENSITY SHADOWS BLACK DENSITY RESTORE COLOR VALUES YELLOW DENSITY Density values can range from -5 to +5. The default is 0. RESTORE COLOR VALUES removes any color adjustments and returns the color to the original value. SET REGISTRATION PRINT TEST PAGE Source Tray 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 ADJUST TRAY N X1 SHIFT X2 SHIFT Y SHIFT ENWW Shift the margin alignment to center the image on the page from top to bottom, and left to right. You can also align the image on the front, with the image printed on the back. X1 SHIFT, X2 SHIFT, and Y SHIFT can vary from -20 to +20. The default is 0. Control panel troubleshooting 483 Item Options Values Explanation AUTO SENSE MODE TRAY 1 SENSING FULL SENSING* Allows you to set trays to automatically sense the type of paper that is loaded. EXPANDED SENSING TRANSPARENCY ONLY TRAY 2-N SENSING EXPANDED SENSING TRANSPARENCY ONLY* PRINT MODES PLAIN PREPRINTED Allows you to associate For all values, the following fuser modes can be selected: each media type with a specific print mode. AUTO SENSE MODE LETTERHEAD NORMAL MODE TRANSPARENCY X-RESISTIVE MODE PREPUNCHED LIGHT MODE LABELS INTRMEDIATE MODE BOND HEAVY MODE RECYCLED EXTRA HEAVY MODE COLOR CARDSTOCK MODE LIGHT <75 G/M2 GLOSSY MODE INTERMEDIATE90-104 HEAVY GLOSSY MODE HEAVY 105-120 G/M2 X-HVYGLOSSY MODE EXTRA HEAVY120-163 TRNSPARENCY MODE CARDSTOCK >163 G/M2 4MM TRNS MODE ROUGH 90-105 G/M2 HUMID TRNS MODE GLOSSY 75-120 G/M2 ROUGH MODE HEAVY GLOSSY120-160 LT ROUGH MODE 1 EXTRA HEAVY GLOSSY LT ROUGH MODE 2 TOUGH PAPER ENVELOPE MODE ENVELOPE LABEL MODE RESTORE MODES TOUGH PAPER MODE HUMID TOUGH MODE 484 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Options Values Explanation OPTIMIZE CACO3 PAPER Off* Set this mode when paper being used contains a high percentage of talc or Calcium Carbonate (CaCo3), and the printer operates in a lowtemperature and a lowhumidity environment. On BACKGROUND 1 Off* On BACKGROUND 2 Off* On REGISTRATION Off* On LONG PAPER Off* On PRE-ROTATION Off* On Use this mode if print jobs exhibit light, mottled toner throughout the background of the page. Use this mode if print jobs exhibit vertical streaks in the background. Use this mode when experiencing poor Color Plan Registration (CPR) with Glossy or Heavy Glossy Print Modes. This mode makes slight speed adjustments, which can improve CPR. Use this mode if excessive curl occurs when printing on legal size paper. This mode decreases the print speed to 14 ppm (pages per minute). This mode applies only to Normal Print Mode and for legal size paper. Use this mode if horizontal streaks or bands occur on the page, which may be caused by an Imaging Drum rotation cycle. This mode increases the number of initial cartridge Imaging Drum rotations prior to processing the print job, but also increases the First Page Out Time by approximately 20 seconds. NOTE Horizontal streaks or bands may be caused by other phenomena. PRE-ROTATION affects primarily toner cartridge imaging drumrelated horizontal streaks or bands. ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 485 Item Options Values Explanation OPTIMIZE RE-TRANSFER Off* Use this mode if green or cyan retransfer is seen on the page (appears very mottled or uneven in solid-fill areas). On FUSER TEMP NORMAL* REDUCED TRAY1 NORMAL* ALTERNATE Use this mode to prevent "hot offset." "Hot offset" is a fuser-related repetitive print defect which can occur when the fuser temperature is hot enough to pull some toner off the printed page and redeposit the toner on the next rotation of the fuser sleeve. Images and or text then appear like a "ghost" exactly 76mm from the original image. "FUSER TMP" Optimize mode reduces the temperature of the fuser to prevent this type of print defect from occurring. Use this mode if printing media from Tray 1 that is smaller than the image sent. For example, if printing on Executive media from Tray 1, but sending letter-sized jobs, resulting in portions of the letter-sized image being laid down on the ETB. This mode initiates a cleaning cycle after each job that prints using media pulled from Tray 1 to clean any remaining toner from the ETB. NOTE This mode creates additional wear for the cartridges. OPTIMIZE BELT CONTACT NORMAL* ALTERNATE 486 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Use this mode when experiencing poor print quality using heavier media (heavy glossy, cardstock, etc.) with print jobs in grayscale or black and white, where the printed page appears to be slipping on the ETB--showing either bunching together of text, image skew, or discontinuity between lines of text on the page. This mode prevents the printer from disengaging contact (thereby, ENWW Item Options Values Explanation maintaining contact) between the ETB and the color (C,M,Y) toner cartridges, resulting in decreased "slippage" of media on the ETB. NOTE Running the printer with BELT CONTACT set to ALTERNATE may decrease life of the color cartridges and should NOT be used when printing mostly monochrome pages. RESTORE OPTIMIZE QUICK CALIBRATE NOW N/A Performs partial printer calibration including DHALF calibration. FULL CALIBRATE NOW N/A Performs full printer calibration including DHALF and CPR calibration. COLOR RET Off The COLOR RET menu item allows you to turn on or turn off the printer REt (Resolution Enhancement Technology) setting. The default is ON. On* AUTO CLEANING Off* On CLEANING INTERVAL 1000 2000* This item only displays if AUTO CLEANING is set to On. 5000 10000 20000 AUTO CLEANING SIZE Letter* A4 ENWW This item only displays if AUTO CLEANING is set to On. CREATE CLEANING PAGE This item only displays when a duplexer is not installed. PROCESS CLEANING PAGE This item displays when the duplexer is installed or after the cleaning page has been executed. Control panel troubleshooting 487 System setup submenu Items in this menu affect the printer function. Configure the printer according to your printing needs. To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight SYSTEM SETUP. 5. Press to select SYSTEM SETUP. Item Options Date/Time DATE Values Explanation Sets the start date and time for the printer. Date Format TIME Time Format The DATE format is YEAR 2004–2087; MONTH JAN, FEB, MAR; DAY 1–31 The Date Format is YYYY/ MMM/DD*; MMM/DD/YYYY; DD/MMM/YYYY The TIME format is HOUR 1–12, MINUTE 0–59, AM, and PM The Time Format is 12 HR or 24 HR. This item defaults to 12 HR. JOB STORAGE LIMIT 1 to 500 Specifies the number of QuickCopy and Proof-andHold jobs that can be stored on the printer hard-disk accessory. Default=32 JOB HELD TIMEOUT Off* 1 HOUR 4 HOURS 1 DAY 1 WEEK SHOW ADDRESS AUTO Sets the amount of time that QuickCopy and proof-andhold jobs are kept before being automatically deleted from the queue. If you change the Job Held Timeout value, only jobs that are stored after this change are affected by the change. Any jobs that were stored before you changed the value will retain the original timeout setting. This item defines whether the IP address is shown on Off* 488 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Options Values Explanation the control panel display next to the Ready message. The default setting is Off. COLOR/BLACK MIX AUTO* MOSTLY COLOR PAGES MOSTLY BLACK PAGES This menu item establishes how the printer switches from color to monochrome (black and white) mode for maximum performance and print cartridge life. AUTO resets the printer to the factory default settings. The default is AUTO. Select MOSTLY COLOR PAGES if nearly all of your print jobs are color with high page coverage. Select MOSTLY BLACK PAGES if you print mostly monochrome jobs, or a combination of color and monochrome jobs. ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 489 Item Options Values Explanation TRAY BEHAVIOR USE REQUESTED TRAY EXCLUSIVELY* Specifies the behavior of the tray by indicating which tray the printer should print from. FIRST MANUALLY FEED PROMPT ALWAYS* UNLESS LOADED PS DEFER MEDIA ENABLED* Disabled SIZE/TYPE PROMPT Display* DO NOT DISPLAY USE ANOTHER TRAY ENABLED* Disabled DUPLEX BLANK PAGES AUTO* USE REQUESTED TRAY sets the tray that the printer should print from for specified jobs. MANUALLY FEED PROMPT determines whether or not the printer prompts the user when a job does not match a requested configured tray. PS DEFER MEDIA determines whether the paper handling model is based on PostScript rules or HP rules. YES IMAGE ROTATION Standard* ALTERNATE SIZE/TYPE PROMPT controls whether the tray configuration message and its prompts are shown whenever a tray is configured for a type or size other than the type or size that is loaded in the tray. USE ANOTHER TRAY determines whether the printer uses paper from another tray of the designated tray is empty. DUPLEX BLANK PAGES determines whether blank pages are duplexed. IMAGE ROTATION determines if images are rotated. The default is Standard. Sleep Delay 1 MINUTE 30 MINUTES Sets how long the printer remains idle before it enters sleep mode. Using sleep mode offers the following advantages: 45 MINUTES ● Minimizes the amount of power that the printer consumes when it is idle ● Reduces wear on electronic components in the printer 15 MINUTES 60 MINUTES* 90 MINUTES 2 HOURS 4 HOURS 490 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Options Values Explanation NOTE Sleep mode turns off the backlight on the display, but the display is still readable. The printer automatically exits sleep mode when you send a print job, open or close a paper tray, or press any button on the control panel. To enable or disable sleep mode, see Resets submenu on page 499. WAKE TIME List of days of the week Off* custom Sets the time that the printer automatically comes out of sleep mode. This feature can be set for a different time for each day of the week. Or, if you wish to apply the same settings to each day, select APPLY TO ALL DAYS. Each day displays the following values: Hour 1–12, Minute 0–59, AM, and PM. DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS 1–10 Set the brightness on the control panel. The default is 5. PERSONALITY AUTO* Select the default printer language (personality). Possible values are determined by which valid languages are installed in the printer. PCL PDF PS Normally you should not change the product language (the default is AUTO). If you change the setting to a specific product language, the printer does not automatically switch from one language to another unless specific software commands are sent to the printer. CLEARABLE WARNINGS Job* On Set the amount of time that a clearable warning displays on the printer control panel. Job: Warning messages appear on the control panel ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 491 Item Options Values Explanation until the end of the job from which they were generated. On: Warning messages appear on the control panel until they are cleared. AUTO CONTINUE Off This item determines how the printer reacts to errors. On* Off: If an error prevents printing, the message remains on the display, and the printer does not print until you select CONTINUE. On: If an error prevents printing, the message displays, and the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before returning online. REPLACE SUPPLIES STOP AT LOW STOP AT OUT* OVERRIDE AT OUT Sets printer behavior when a cartridge is low. The default is STOP AT OUT. This option allows the printer to continue printing until a color supply is exhausted. When the printer is set to STOP AT LOW, printing pauses until the color supply is replaced. OVERRIDE AT OUT allows printing to continue when a color supply is out, but displays a warning the supply is out and must be replaced. ORDER AT 0–100 Default=15 COLOR SUPPLY OUT STOP* Determines how the printer behaves when toner is out. AUTOCONTINUE BLACK STOP: The printer goes offline and waits until the cartridge is replaced. AUTOCONTINUE BLACK: The printer displays REPLACE CARTRIDGE until the cartridge is replaced. The printer continues to print. JAM RECOVERY AUTO* Determines how the printer functions when a jam occurs. Off On 492 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting AUTO: The printer automatically selects the best mode for jam recovery (usually On). This is the default setting. ENWW Item Options Values Explanation Off: The printer does not reprint pages following a jam. Printing performance might be increased with this setting. On: The printer automatically reprints pages after a jam is cleared. DISK FILE AUTO* Off LANGUAGE List of available languages Sets the language of the control panel. Stapler/stacker submenu (4700 models) Use the items in this menu to configure the stapling options. To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight Stapler/Stacker. 5. Press to select Stapler/Stacker. NOTE This menu appears only when the stapler/stacker is installed. Item Values Explanation Staples None* To enable stapling, select 1-EDGE. 1-EDGE Staples Out STOP CONTINUE* Offset NOTE Printer driver settings override control panel settings. Use this item to configure the printer to either stop or continue when the staple cartridge is empty. If you select CONTINUE, jobs are stacked in the output bin, but they are not stapled. ENABLED* Disabled ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 493 I/O submenu Items in the I/O (input/output) submenu affect the communication between the printer and the computer. To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. Item Options I/O TIMEOUT 5 to 300 Values Explanation Use this to select the I/O timeout period in seconds. I/O TIMEOUT refers to the time, measured in seconds, that the printer waits before ending a print job. Use this setting to adjust timeout for best performance. If data from other ports appear in the middle of your print job, increase the timeout value. Default = 15 PARALLEL INPUT HIGH SPEED NO YES* ADVANCED FUNCTIONS Off On* EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU 494 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting See Embedded Jetdirect submenu on page 495. HIGH SPEED accepts faster parallel communications used for connections with newer computers. ADVANCED FUNCTIONS turns the bidirectional parallel communication on or off. The default is set for a bidirectional parallel port (IEEE-1284). This setting allows the printer to send status readback messages to the computer. (Turning on the parallel advanced functions on might slow language switching.) EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU allows you to configure network settings. ENWW Embedded Jetdirect submenu To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight I/O. 5. Press to select I/O. 6. Press to highlight EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU. 7. Press to select EMBEDDED JETDIRECT MENU. Item Options Values Explanation TCP/IP Enable On* On: (default) Enable the TCP/ IP protocol. Off Off: Disable the TCP/IP protocol. Host Name CONFIG METHOD An alphanumeric string, up to 32 characters, that is used to identify the device. This name is listed on the Jetdirect configuration page. The default host name is NPIxxxxxx, where xxxxxx is the last six digits of the LAN hardware (MAC) address. BOOTP DHCP* AUTO IP MANUAL Select BOOTP (Bootstrap Protocol) for automatic configuration from a BootP server. Select DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) for automatic configuration from a DHCP server. Select AUTO IP for automatic link-local IP addressing. An address in the form 169.254.x.x will be automatically assigned. Use the MANUAL settings menu to configure TCP/IP parameters. DHCP RELEASE YES NO* ENWW If DHCP is used and a DHCP lease exists, selecting NO saves the current lease. Selecting YES releases the current DHCP lease and the leased IP address. Control panel troubleshooting 495 Item Options Values Explanation DHCP RENEW YES This menu appears if CONFIGURE METHOD was set to DHCP and a DHCP lease for the print server exists. NO* MANUAL SETTINGS IP Address: NO (default): The current DHCP lease is saved. ● YES: The current DHCP lease along with the leased IP address are released. (Available only if CONFIG METHOD is set to MANUAL) Configure parameters directly from the printer control panel: SUBNET MASK DEFAULT GATEWAY SYSLOG SERVER IDLE TIMEOUT ● 0–3600 IP Address: (n.n.n.n.) The unique IP address of the printer, where n is a value from 0 to 255. SUBNET MASK m.m.m.m.: The subnet mask for the printer, where m is a value from 0 to 255. DEFAULT GATEWAY n.n.n.n: The IP address of the gateway or router used for communications with other networks. SYSLOG SERVER n.n.n.n.: The IP address of the syslog server used to receive and log syslog messages. IDLE TIMEOUT: The time period, in seconds, after which an idle TCP print data connection is closed (default is 270 seconds, 0 disables the timeout). DEFAULT IP (parameters are AUTO IP and LEGACY) AUTO IP LEGACY 496 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting Specify the IP address to default to when the print server is unable to obtain an IP address from the network during a forced TCP/IP reconfiguration (for example, ENWW Item Options Values Explanation when manually configured to use BootP or DHCP). PROXY SERVER ● AUTO IP: A link-local IP address 169.254.x.x will be set. ● LEGACY: The address 192.0.0.192 will be set, consistent with older Jetdirect products. Specifies the proxy server to be used by embedded applications in your printer/ printer. A proxy server is typically used by network clients for Internet access. It caches Web pages, and provides a degree of Internet security, for those clients. To specify a proxy server, enter its IP address or fullyqualified domain name. The name can be up to 64 characters. For some networks, you may need to contact your Independent Service Provider (ISP) for the proxy server address. PROXY PORT IPX/SPX(4700 models) Enter the port number used by the proxy server for client support. The port number identifies the port reserved for proxy activity on your network, and can be a value from 0 to 65535. Enable On* On: Enable the IPX/SPX protocol. Off Off: Disable the IPX/SPX protocol. FRAME TYPE AUTO EN_8023 EN_II EN_8022 EN_SNAP APPLETALK(4700 models) Enable On* Select the frame-type setting for your network. AUTO: (default) Automatically sets and limits the frame type to the first one detected. EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, and EN_SNAP: Frame type selections for Ethernet networks. Enable or disable the AppleTalk protocol. Off ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 497 Item Options Values Explanation DLC/LLC Enable On* Enable or disable the DLC/ LLC protocol. Off SECURE WEB HTTPS REQUIRED SECURE WEB: Specify whether the embedded Web server accepts communications by using only secure HTTP (HTTPS) or by using both HTTP and HTTPS. HTTPS OPTIONAL* DIAGNOSTICS LOOPBACK TEST EXECUTE PING TEST DEST IP DIAGNOSTICS: Provides tests to help diagnose network hardware or TCP/IP network connection problems. PACKET SIZE Timeout Count PRINT RESULTS EXECUTE PING RESULTS PACKETS SENT PACKETS RECEIVED PERCENT LOST RTT MIN RTT MAX RTT AVERAGE PING IN PROGRESS Refresh RESET SECURITY YES NO* LINK SPEED AUTO 10T HALF 10T FULL 100TX HALF 100TX FULL 498 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting RESET SECURITY: Specifies whether the current security settings on the print server are saved or reset to factory defaults. The print server will automatically configure itself to match the network link speed and communication mode. If this process fails, either 100TX HALF or 10T HALF is set. 10T HALF: 10 Mbps, halfduplex operation. ENWW Item Options Values Explanation 10T FULL: 10 Mbps, fullduplex operation. 100TX HALF: 100 Mbps, halfduplex operation. 100TX FULL: 100 Mbps, fullduplex operation. Resets submenu To gain access to this menu: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight RESETS. 5. Press to select RESETS. NOTE Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or printer configuration settings when you select these items. Reset the printer only under the following circumstances: ● You want to restore the printer default settings. ● Communication between the printer and computer has been interrupted, and you are not able to resolve the problem by any other method. See Communications checks on page 457. ● You are having problems with a port. The items in the Resets submenu will clear all memory in the printer, while selecting Reset clears only the current job. ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 499 Item Values Explanation RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS No value to select This item restores all control panel settings to the original factory settings. SLEEP MODE Off Turns sleep mode on or off. Using sleep mode offers the following advantages: On* ● Minimizes the amount of power that the printer consumes when it is idle ● Reduces wear on electronic components in the printer The printer automatically exits sleep mode when you send a print job or press any button on the control panel. You can set how long the printer remains idle before it enters sleep mode. See the Sleep Delay information in the System setup submenu on page 488. Diagnostics menu The diagnostics menu allows you to run tests that can help you identify and solve problems with the printer. Item Options Values Explanation PRINT EVENT LOG Generates a localized list of the 50 most recent entries in the error log. For each entry, the printed event log shows the error number, page count, error code, and description or personality. SHOW EVENT LOG At the control panel, scroll through the contents of the event log, which lists the 50 most recent events. PQ TROUBLESHOOTING This item prints a series of 8 pages that include instructions, pages for each color, demo page, and configuration page. These pages can help isolate print quality problems. PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE Allows you to print a page that can assist in diagnosing printer problems. DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK Allows you to swap print cartridges into different slots help determine which print cartridge or slot is the source of a problem. 500 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Options Values PAPER PATH SENSORS PAPER PATH TEST Explanation Initiates a paper path sensor test. You can then enter the menus to print internal pages (including the paper path test), set menu items, and send jobs from the computer. The sensors are updated as paper passes each sensor, but no messages are generated this state. PRINT TEST PAGE Generates a test page that is useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer. Specifies which paper paths are tested. See Paper path test on page 527 Source ALL TRAYS TRAY 1 Specifies to print a test page from a specific tray or from all trays. TRAY 2* TRAY 3 TRAY 4 TRAY 5 TRAY 6 DUPLEX Off* On COPIES 1* 10 50 Specifies if the duplexer is included when the test is performed. Specifies how many sheets of paper from the specified source are sent when the test is performed. 100 500 ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 501 Item Options Values Explanation FINISHING PAPER PATH TEST(4700 models) FINISHING OPTIONS 1-EDGE* See Finishing paper path test on page 528 for more information. MEDIA SIZE MEDIA TYPE PLAIN PREPRINTED LETTERHEAD PREPUNCHED BOND RECYCLED COLOR CARDSTOCK >163 G/M2 ROUGH 90-105 G/M2 HEAVY 105-120 G/M2 LIGHT <75 G/M2 GLOSSY 75-120 G/M2 2-30 (2) DUPLEX OFF* On PRINT TEST PAGE MANUAL SENSOR TEST Tests the paper path sensors and switches for correct operation. During this test, the printer is offline. On the control panel display, each sensor is represented by a string of alphabetic letters followed by a corresponding status for each sensor. See Manual sensor test (special mode test) on page 528 for more information. MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2 Performs tests to determine whether the paper path sensors are operating correctly. See Manual sensor test (special mode test) on page 528for more information. 502 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Item Options COMPONENT TEST TRANSFER MOTORS Values Explanation This menu item is used by a service technician to exercise individual parts of the printer to isolate the source of any problems. BELT ONLY CARTRIDGE MOTORS BLACK LASER SCANNER See Component test (special mode test) on page 532 for instructions on conducting tests using this menu. CYAN LASER SCANNER MAGENTA LASER SCANNER YELLOW LASER SCANNER FUSER MOTOR FUSER PRESSURE RELEASE MOTOR ALIENATION MOTOR ETB CONTACT / ALIENATION TRAY 1 PICKUP SOLENOID TRAY N PICKUP SOLENOID N = 2–6 TRAY N PICKUP MOTOR N = 2–6 DUPLEXER PICKUP MOTOR REPEAT ONCE CONTINUOUS PRINT/STOP TEST STOP TIME 0 to 60000 This menu item is used by a service technician to isolate the potential source of printquality problems with the printer. The time is expressed in milliseconds. COLOR BAND TEST PRINT TEST PAGE 1–30 PRINT TEST PAGE option generates a test page that is useful for testing the color band features of the printer. COPIES The COPIES option allows you to select the number of test pages to be printed. Default = 1. Service menu See Service menu on page 541 for more information. ENWW Control panel troubleshooting 503 Item Options SERVICE CLEAR EVENT LOG Values TOTAL MONO PAGES 0–9999999 TOTAL COLOR PAGES 0–9999999 Explanation REFURBISH PAGE COUNT 0–9999999 SERIAL NUMBER SERVICE ID COLD RESET PAPER LETTER* A4 MEDIA SENSOR VALUE 504 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting 0–511 ENWW Tools for troubleshooting Using the embedded Web server When the printer is directly connected to a computer, the embedded Web server is supported for Windows 98 and later. When the printer is connected to the network, the embedded Web server is automatically available. You can access the embedded Web server from Windows 98 and later, or through the Apple Safari browser. The embedded Web server allows you to view printer and network status and to manage printing functions from your computer instead of from the printer control panel. Below are examples of what you can do using the embedded Web server: ● View printer control status information. ● Set the type of paper loaded in each tray. ● Determine the remaining life on all supplies and order new ones. ● View and change tray configurations. ● View and change the printer control panel menu configuration. ● View and print internal pages. ● Receive notification of printer and supplies events. ● View and change network configuration. To use the embedded Web server, you must have Microsoft Internet Explorer 6.0 or later, or Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later. The embedded Web server works when the printer is connected to an IP-based network. The embedded Web server does not support IPX-based printer connections. You do not have to have Internet access to open and use the embedded Web server. For more information about the HP embedded Web server, see the HP Embedded Web Server User Guide. You can find this guide on the CD-ROM included with the printer. Accessing the embedded Web server In a supported Web browser on your computer, type the IP address for the printer. (To find the IP address, print a configuration page. For more information about printing a configuration page, see Testing the printer operation on page 68.) NOTE Once you open the URL, you can bookmark it so that you can return to it quickly in the future. ENWW 1. The embedded Web server has three tabs that contain settings and information about the printer: the Information tab, the Settings tab, and the Networking tab. Click the tab that you want to view. 2. See the following sections for more information about each tab. Tools for troubleshooting 505 Information tab The Information pages group consists of the following pages. ● Device Status. This page displays the printer status and shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. The page also shows the type and size of print media set for each tray. To change the default settings, click Change Settings. ● Configuration page. This page shows the information found on the printer configuration page. ● Supplies Status. This page shows the life remaining of HP supplies, with 0% representing that a supply is empty. This page also provides supplies part numbers. To order new supplies, click Order Supplies in the Other Links area on the left side of the window. To visit any Web site, you must have Internet access. ● Event log. This page shows a list of all printer events and errors. ● Usage page. This page shows a summary of the number of pages the printer has printed, grouped by size and type. ● Device Information. This page also shows the printer network name, address, and model information. To change these entries, click Device Information on the Settings tab. ● Control panel. This page shows an image of the text currently displaying on the printer’s control panel display. Settings tab This tab allows you to configure the printer from your computer. The Settings tab can be password protected. If this printer is networked, always consult with the printer administrator before changing settings on this tab. The Settings tab contains the following pages. ● Configure Device. Configure all printer settings from this page. This page contains the traditional menus found on printers using a control panel display. These menus include Information, Paper Handling, and Configure Device. ● Alerts. Network only. Set up to receive e-mail alerts for various printer and supplies events. Alerts may also be sent to a URL. ● E-mail. Network only. Used in conjunction with the Alerts page to set up incoming and outgoing e-mail, as well as to set e-mail alerts. ● Security. Set a password that must be entered to gain access to the Settings and Networking tabs. Enable and disable certain features of the embedded Web server. ● Other Links. Add or customize a link to another Web site. This link is displayed in the Other Links area on all embedded Web server pages. These permanent links always display in the Other Links area: HP Instant Support™, Order Supplies, and Product Support. ● Device Information. Name the printer and assign an asset number to it. Enter the name and email address for the primary contact who will receive information about the printer. ● Language. Determine the language in which to display the embedded Web server information. ● Time Services. Configure the printer’s time settings. 506 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Setting the real-time clock Use the real-time clock feature to set the date and time settings. The date and time information is attached to stored print jobs, so that you can identify the most recent versions of stored print jobs. When setting the clock, you can set the date format, date, time format, and time. Networking tab This tab allows the network administrator to control network-related settings for the printer when it is connected to an IP-based network. This tab will not display if the printer is directly connected to a computer, or if the printer is connected to a network using anything other than an HP Jetdirect print server. Click Help on the Networking tab pages for more information on network settings. Other links This section contains links that connect you to the Internet to order supplies or obtain product support. You must have Internet access to use any of these links. If you use a dial-up connection and did not connect when you first opened the embedded Web server, you must connect before you can visit these Web sites. Connecting might require that you close the embedded Web server and reopen it. ● HP Instant Support™. Connects you to the HP Web site to help you find solutions. This service analyzes your printer error log and configuration information to provide diagnostic and support information specific to your printer. ● Order Supplies. Click this link to connect to the HP Web site and order genuine HP supplies, such as print cartridges and paper. ● Product Support. Connects to the support site for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 printer. Then, you can search for help regarding general topics. Configuration pages Depending on the model, up to three pages print when you select PRINT CONFIGURATION. In addition to the main configuration page, an embedded Jetdirect configuration page prints as well as a page for the stapler/stacker. Configuration page Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer languages. ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION. 5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION. Tools for troubleshooting 507 The message Printing... CONFIGURATION displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the configuration page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the configuration page. NOTE If the printer is configured with EIO cards (for example, an HP Jetdirect Print Server) or an optional hard-disk drive, an additional configuration page will print that provides information about those devices. Figure 7-6 Model configuration page 1 Printer information 2 Installed personalities and options 3 Color density 4 Calibration information 5 Memory 6 Event log 7 Security 8 Paper trays and options 508 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW HP embedded Jetdirect page The second configuration page is the HP embedded Jetdirect page, which contains the following information: Figure 7-7 Model HP embedded Jetdirect page 1 HP Jetdirect Configuration indicates the printer status, model number, hardware firmware version, port select, port configuration, auto negotiation, manufacturing identification, and manufactured date. 2 Security Settings information 3 Network Statistics indicates the total packets received, unicast packets received, bad packets received, framing errors received, total packets transmitted, unsendable packets, transmit collisions, and transmit late collisions. 4 TCP/IP information, including the IP address 5 IPX/SPX information 6 Novell/NetWare information 7 AppleTalk information 8 DLC/LLC information Always make sure the status line under the HP Jetdirect configuration lines indicates "I/O Card Ready". ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 509 Paper handling configuration page (4700 models) The paper handling configuration page contains the following information on any installed paper handing device: ● Model number ● Firmware datecode ● Bins and trays Figure 7-8 Model paper handling configuration page 1 Paper handling information 510 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Finding important information on the configuration pages Certain information, such as the firmware date codes, the IP address, and the e-mail gateways, is especially helpful while servicing the printer. This information is on the various configuration pages. Table 7-36 Important information on the configuration pages on page 511 describes where to look for this information. Table 7-36 Important information on the configuration pages Type of information Specific information Configuration page Firmware date codes DC controller Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” When you use the remote firmware upgrade procedure, all of these firmware components are upgraded. Firmware datecode Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Stapler/stacker firmware datecode Look on the paper handling configuration page, under “Product Name.” Embedded Jetdirect firmware version Look on the embedded Jetdirect page, under “HP Jetdirect Configuration.” Accessories and internal storage Internal disk (4700ph+ model only) All optional devices that are installed on the printer should be listed on the main configuration page. Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and capacity. Embedded HP Jetdirect Look on the main configuration page, under “Installed Personalities and Options.” Shows model and ID. Total RAM Look on the main configuration page, under “Memory.” Duplex unit Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Additional 500-sheet feeders and optional output devices Additional 500-sheet feeders and optional output devices Look on the main configuration page, under “Paper Trays and Options.” Engine cycles and event logs Engine cycles Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Pages since last maintenance (print engine maintenance count) Pages since last maintenance (print engine maintenance count) Look on the main configuration page, under “Device Information.” Event-log information Event-log information Look on the main configuration page, under “Event log.” In addition, separate pages print for the optional paper handling devices and the fax accessory. These pages list more-detailed information for those devices. Total page counts and maintenance kit counts are important for ongoing printer maintenance. The configuration page lists only the three most recent errors. To see a list of the 50 most recent errors, print an event log from the DIAGNOSTICS menu. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 511 Print the supplies status page The supplies status page illustrates the remaining life for the following printer supplies: ● Print cartridges (all colors) ● ETB ● Fuser To print the supplies status page: 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE. 5. Press to select PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE. The message Printing... SUPPLIES STATUS displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the supplies status page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the supplies status page. NOTE If you are using non-HP supplies, the supplies status page will not show the remaining life for the supplies. Figure 7-9 Supplies status page 1 Black Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining, total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used. 512 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 2 Cyan Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining, total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used. 3 Magenta Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining, total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used. 4 Yellow Cartridge indicates the part number, amount of toner remaining in the print cartridge, estimated pages remaining, total number of pages and jobs processed, print cartridge serial number, and date installed and last used. 5 Image Transfer Kit indicates the part number and status. 6 Image Fuser Kit indicates the part number and status. 7 Ordering Information provides information on ordering new HP printer supplies. 8 Return & Recycling provides information on recycling HP printer supplies. Print the usage page The usage page lists a page count for each size of media that has passed through the printer. This page count includes the number of pages that were printed on one side, the number that were printed on two sides (duplexed), and totals of the two printing methods for each media size. It also lists the average percentage of page coverage for each color. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT USAGE PAGE. 5. Press to select PRINT USAGE PAGE. The message Printing... USAGE PAGE displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the usage page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the usage page. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 513 Figure 7-10 Usage page 1 Device Information indicates the device name and serial number. 2 Usage Totals (equivalent) indicates types of pages that have been scanned; the number of single-sided and duplexed pages that have been scanned; copy and send job counts; and pages scanned by scanner mode. ● Units: equivalent number of letter or A4 pages ● Total is calculated by multiplying the mono units and units from simplex, multiplying the mono units and units from duplex, and adding the results together. The same process is used for color. These totals are added to the totals of the other page sizes to provide the total printer usage. 3 Print Modes and Paper Path Usage (actual) shows the number of pages that have been printed with each printer mode and the number of pages that have been printed from each input tray and to each output bin. 4 Historical Printer Coverage indicates the average percentage of toner used on all pages that have been printed. Print the demo page The printer can produce a print quality demonstration page. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT DEMO. 5. Press to select PRINT DEMO. The message Printing... DEMO PAGE displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the demo page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the demo page. 514 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Print the file directory page The file directory page contains information for all installed mass storage devices. This option does not display if no mass storage devices are installed. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT FILE DIRECTORY. 5. Press to select PRINT FILE DIRECTORY. The message Printing... FILE DIRECTORY displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the file directory page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the file directory page. Figure 7-11 File directory page Print the PCL font list page The PCL font list page lists the PCL fonts that are available on the printer. ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. Tools for troubleshooting 515 4. Press to highlight PRINT PCL FONT LIST. 5. Press to select PRINT PCL FONT LIST. The message Printing... FONT LIST displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the font list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the font list page. Figure 7-12 PCL font list page Print the PS font list page The PS font list page list the PS fonts (emulated PostScript) that are available on the printer. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT PS FONT LIST. 5. Press to select PRINT PS FONT LIST. The message Printing... FONT LIST displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the font list page. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the font list page. 516 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-13 PS font list page Print the RGB samples page Use the PRINT RGB SAMPLES page to print RGB color samples to match the color values in your application. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT RGB SAMPLES. 5. Press to select PRINT RGB SAMPLES. The message Printing... RGB SAMPLES displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the sample pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the pages. ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 517 Figure 7-14 RGB samples page Print the CMYK samples page Use the PRINT CMYK SAMPLES page to print CMYK color samples to match the color values in your application. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT CMYK SAMPLES. 5. Press to select PRINT CMYK SAMPLES. The message Printing... CMYK SAMPLES displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the sample pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the pages. 518 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-15 CMYK samples page ENWW Tools for troubleshooting 519 Diagnostics LED, engine, and individual diagnostics can identify and troubleshoot printer problems. LED diagnostics Use the following procedure to help identify the cause of high-level printer problems. These problems are indicated by abnormalities in the printer's power-on sequence. The LED that the procedure refers to is on the formatter. This is a “heartbeat” LED that blinks on and off when the formatter is operating correctly. Use Figure 7-16 Formatter LED on page 520 to locate the formatter LED. The heartbeat LED will perform the following sequences: 1. The LED blinks with four fast bursts at power on. 2. The LED blinks at a fast, steady rate during memory testing (one blink per 8 MB). 3. The LED stays off for about eight seconds, while the boot code is decompressing, before the display turns on. 4. The LED blinks at a steady rate of two blinks per second for the remainder of the printer operation. 5. If these sequences are not performed, check the following: 6. ● Reseat the firmware compact flash. ● Reseat the memory. ● Replace the firmware compact flash. See Installing a flash memory card (HP Color LaserJet 4700 Series only) on page 121. ● Replace the memory. ● Replace the formatter. If the control panel display does not illuminate, perform an engine test to check the engine. You must have paper loaded in Tray 2 for the engine test. Figure 7-16 Formatter LED 520 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Engine diagnostics This section provides an overview of the engine diagnostics that are available in the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 series printers. These printer contains extensive internal diagnostics that help in troubleshooting print quality, paper paths, noise, component, and timing issues. Diagnostics mode Some of the diagnostic tests automatically put the printer into a special diagnostics mode. During the special diagnostics mode the printer can perform actions that would normally cause the printer to enter an error state. Always follow the control panel directions in the DIAGNOSTICS menu to exit the special diagnostics mode correctly and return the printer to a normal state. Diagnostics that put the engine into the special diagnostics mode Four diagnostic tests put the engine into a special state: ● Disable cartridge check ● Paper path sensors ● Manual sensor test ● Manual sensor test 2 ● Component test While the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, the following message should appear: Ready Diagnostics mode To exit press STOP When the printer is in the special diagnostics mode, these five tests display in the menu and are available to be run. To gain access into other diagnostic tests or to leave the special state, press Stop, and then select EXIT. The printer will reset itself, and then return to the normal state. NOTE You need to have a good understanding of how the printer operates in order to use the engine diagnostics successfully. Diagnostic tests Different tests can be used to isolate different types of issues. For component or noise isolation, you can run the diagnostic test after removing the covers. Removing the covers provides a better view of the areas that are being tested. To operate the printer with the covers removed, the door switch levers (SW1, callout 1) must be depressed (this is the door-closed position) and you must depress the fuser interlock (callout 2). WARNING! Be careful when performing printer diagnostics to avoid risk of injury. Only trained service personnel should open and run the diagnostics with the covers removed. Never touch any of the power supplies when the printer is turned on. ENWW Diagnostics 521 2 1 Figure 7-17 Door switch and fuser interlock NOTE Any time a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. When the covers are installed, the door switch and fuser interlock are automatically operated. When the covers are removed, you must perform these steps manually. Individual diagnostic tests The following sections explain in more detail how to operate the various diagnostics correctly. Print the event log page The event log lists the printer events, including jams, service errors, and other printer conditions. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to select PRINT EVENT LOG. The message Printing... EVENT LOG displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the event log. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the event log. 522 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-18 Model event log page 1 Printer information 2 Event number 3 Date and time 4 Engine cycles 5 Event log code 6 Description of personality View the event log on the control panel display The show event log lists the last 50 printer events on the control panel display. (The most recent event is listed first). ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight SHOW EVENT LOG. 5. Press to select SHOW EVENT LOG. Diagnostics 523 Print the PQ troubleshooting pages The PQ troubleshooting pages are a series of print quality assessment pages that you can use to troubleshoot print quality problems. Follow the instructions on page one of the PQ troubleshooting pages to solve print quality problems. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight PQ TROUBLESHOOTING. 5. Press to select PQ TROUBLESHOOTING. The message Printing... PQ troubleshooting displays on the control panel until the printer finishes printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. The printer returns to the Ready state after printing the PQ troubleshooting pages. Figure 7-19 Model PQ troubleshooting page (1 of 2) 524 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-20 Model PQ troubleshooting page (2 of 2) Diagnostics page The diagnostics page can be used to evaluate multiple different printer problems, including color plane registration, EP parameters, and print quality. ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE. 5. Press to select PRINT DIAGNOSTICS PAGE. Diagnostics 525 Figure 7-21 Model diagnostics page 1 Calibration information 2 Parameters 3 Color density 4 CPR (color plane registration) 5 Primary colors 6 Secondary colors 7 Horizontal banding 8 Identify ETB streaks (vertical streaks) 9 Temperature values (22M) 10 Humidity values (22N) Disable cartridge check (special mode test) Use this diagnostic test to print internal pages or send an external job to the printer when one or more print cartridges are removed or exchanged. Because the cartridges are not keyed, the diagnostic test can be run when one to four cartridges have been removed or moved to another location (exchanged). Consumable supply errors are ignored while the printer is in this mode. When the printer is in this mode, you can navigate the menus and print internal pages or send an external print job to the printer. This diagnostic test can be used to isolate print quality problems that are related to individual cartridges and to isolate individual cartridge problems, such as noise. 526 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE Do not remove or exchange cartridges before you start the disable cartridge check diagnostic. After starting the test, you can remove or exchange cartridges. NOTE Any time a cartridge is installed or removed while the covers are removed, the door interlock must be cycled to simulate opening and closing the top cover in order for the engine to recognize the change. When the covers are installed, the door switch and fuser interlock are automatically operated. When the covers are removed, you must perform these steps manually. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK. 5. Press to select DISABLE CARTRIDGE CHECK. To exit this diagnostic test, press Stop and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS. Paper path sensors (special mode test) NOTE To view the function of each sensor and how to toggle them manually, see Manual sensor test (special mode test) on page 528. This test displays the status of each paper path sensor (sensors A–J) and allows viewing of sensor status while printing internal pages. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight PAPER PATH SENSORS. 5. Press to select PAPER PATH SENSORS. 6. You can now navigate the menu and print internal pages to verify the toggling of each paper path sensor. Paper path test This diagnostic test generates one or more test pages that you can use to isolate the cause of jams. To isolate a problem, you can specify which input tray to use, specify whether to use the duplex path, and specify the number of copies to print. Multiple copies can be printed to help isolate intermittent problems. The following options become available after you start the diagnostic feature: ENWW ● PRINT TEST PAGE. Run the paper path test from the default settings: Tray 2, no duplex, and one copy. To specify other settings, scroll down the menu and select the setting, and then scroll back up and select PRINT TEST PAGE to start the test. ● Source. Select Tray 1, Tray 2, or the optional trays. Diagnostics 527 ● DUPLEX. Enable or disable 2-sided printing. ● COPIES. Set the numbers of copies to be printed; the choices are 1,10, 50, 100, or 500. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight PAPER PATH TEST. 5. Press to select PAPER PATH TEST. 6. Select the paper path test options for the test you want to run. NOTE Sensors I and J are the media and media type misprint sensors and can only be tested by running different types of media through the printer as outlined in Table 7-37 Media type value codes on page 528. Table 7-37 Media type value codes Media type Value code Normal or Plain 1 LBP Transparency 3 Glossy 4 Gloss film 5 Heavy 7 Light 8 Extra heavy glossy A Finishing paper path test This test generates test pages that are useful for testing the paper handling features of the printer. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight FINISHING PAPER PATH TEST. 5. Press to select FINISHING PAPER PATH TEST. Manual sensor test (special mode test) Use this diagnostic test to manually test the printer sensors and switches. Each sensor is represented by a letter and number on the control panel display. See Table 7-39 Sensor test letter codes on page 530 for a definition of the sensor letter codes. A 1 below the letter indicates that paper is present. For the paper size sensor, the range of values is from 0 to 7. Figure 7-22 Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement on page 529 indicates the switch state and paper size that are associated 528 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW with each of these values (the Tray 3, 4, 5, or 6 paper size switches for the single 500-sheet feeder are similar to the Tray 2 switch). NOTE Sensors I and J cannot be tested manually. For these sensors, see Paper path sensors (special mode test) on page 527. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST. 5. Press to select MANUAL SENSOR TEST. To exit this diagnostic, press the Stop key, and then select EXIT DIAGNOSTICS. Menus cannot be opened during this test, so serves the same function as the Stop button. Figure 7-22 Tray 2 paper size switch arrangement Table 7-38 Tray 2 paper size codes Size code Switch state Paper size SW1 SW2 SW3 0 On On On Custom 1 Off On On Legal 2 On Off On Letter 3 Off Off On Executive 4 On On Off B5 (JIS) 5 Off On Off A5 6 On Off Off A4 7 Off Off Off tray not installed To toggle a sensor, find and move the sensor flags in the following locations. Table 7-39 Sensor test letter codes on page 530 describes how to find the following sensors. ● ENWW A. Remove Tray 2. The flag is located in the center paper inlet path of the paper feed assembly, directly in front of the right-side white roller. The flag is recessed above the registration shutter in the paper feed assembly. To trip the sensor manually, insert a piece of paper into the paper feed assembly inlet. Diagnostics 529 WARNING! The fuser might be hot; wait 10 minutes for it to cool down. ● B, C. Open the ETB and wait for the fuser to cool down. The fuser inlet flag is located at the front center of the fuser. Reach the flag from above the black print cartridge. These sensors function as paper path sensors and loop back sensors. Sensor C will trip before sensor B. ● D. The fuser delivery flag is located at the upper center of the fuser, behind the fuser Caution label. It is wrapped in a clear roller. ● E. The flag and sensor are located under the top cover on the top rear of the duplexer. To verify the operation, open the top cover of the duplexer. ● F. The output bin full sensor is located on the upper, rear edge of the fuser. ● G. The developing alienation sensor is located on the right side of the printer and is a part of the disengaging drive assembly. It can be tripped by rotating the white disengaging gear. ● H. The fuser pressure release sensor is located at the upper left rear of the delivery assembly. It can be accessed by removing the fuser and blocking the fuser manually. ● I. Cannot be tested manually. ● J. Cannot be tested manually. ● K. The door switch is located on the right, front of the printer frame (underneath the right cover). ● L. Remove Tray 2. The Tray 1 (multipurpose tray) paper-presence sensor flag is the black lever on the front left of the paper tray cavity. ● M. Remove Tray 2. The Tray 2 paper presence sensor flag is the black lever in the middle center of the paper tray cavity. ● N. Remove Tray 2. The Tray 2 paper stack surface sensor flag is the black flat plastic assembly to which the paper pickup roller attaches. ● O. Remove Tray 2. The paper size sensor switches are located on the right, rear side of the paper cavity. NOTE Procedures on how to find the sensors P through a in Table 7-40 Sensor test letter codes P through a on page 531 will be the same as the Tray 2 procedures for M, N, and O above (and also for Trays 3–6, if installed). Table 7-39 Sensor test letter codes Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number Idle value (doors closed, paper in Trays 1 and 2) A Top of page SR12 0 B Fuser inlet sensor 1 SR13 1 C Fuser inlet sensor 2 SR14 1 D Fuser delivery sensor SR1 0 E Duplexer switchback sensor SR8001 0 F Output bin full sensor SR2 0 530 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-39 Sensor test letter codes (continued) Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number Idle value (doors closed, paper in Trays 1 and 2) G Developing alienation sensor SR1 0 H Fuser pressure release sensor SR3 1 I Media sensor N/A N/A J Media type misprint N/A N/A K Door sensor SW 0 L Tray 1 paper sensor SR4 0 M Tray 2 paper sensor SR9 1 N Tray 2 paper stack surface sensor (SR10) N/A 1 O Tray 2 paper size sensor C size switch 2 Manual sensor test 2 (special mode test) Use this test to test paper path sensors and the door-open switch manually. The following illustrations and tables show the locations of these sensors. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2. 5. Press to select MANUAL SENSOR TEST 2. 6. Open and close paper trays or move sensor flags to see the sensor status change on the control panel display. Table 7-40 Sensor test letter codes P through a Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number Idle value (doors closed, paper in Trays 1 and 2) ENWW P Tray 3 paper sensor N/A 0 Q Tray 3 paper stack surface sensor N/A 1 R Tray 3 paper size sensor N/A 2 S Tray 4 paper sensor N/A 0 T Tray 4 paper stack surface sensor N/A 1 U Tray 4 paper size sensor N/A 2 Diagnostics 531 Table 7-40 Sensor test letter codes P through a (continued) Letter Sensor Sensor/switch number Idle value (doors closed, paper in Trays 1 and 2) V Tray 5 paper sensor N/A 0 W Tray 5 paper stack surface sensor N/A 1 X Tray 5 paper size sensor N/A 2 Y Tray 6 paper sensor N/A 0 Z Tray 6 paper stack surface sensor N/A 1 a Tray 6 paper size sensor N/A 2 Figure 7-23 Location of sensors Component test (special mode test) Use the component test to exercise individual parts independently to isolate problems. Each component test can be performed once or repeatedly. If CONTINUOUS is selected from the drop-down menu as the repeat option, the test will cycle the component on and off. This process continues for 2 minutes, and then the test terminates. 532 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW NOTE The door interlock switch must be defeated to run any of the component tests. If covers are removed, the door switch must be manually cycled during some tests in order for the engine to recognize a change. The ETB assembly can be open, closed, or removed while some of these tests are executing. Print cartridges can be installed or removed during certain tests. The control panel display prompts for removal of some or all cartridges during certain tests in order to rotate and isolate certain components, as well as to protect the cartridges and ETB. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight DIAGNOSTICS. 3. Press to select DIAGNOSTICS. 4. Press to highlight COMPONENT TEST. 5. Press to select COMPONENT TEST. 6. Select the component test options when prompted by the printer. Menus cannot be opened during component tests, so serves the same function as the Stop button. The following component tests can be performed: ENWW ● Transfer motors. This test turns the components that are involved in the image transfer process: the cartridge motors, the ETB motor and belt, and the print cartridges (if the ETB is closed). You can remove or install print cartridges during this test. ● Belt only. This test turns only the ETB motor and belt. The control panel display prompts you to remove the cartridges because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also. Rotating the photosensitive drums could damage the belt or photosensitive drums. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order for the test run. ● Cartridge motors. This test rotates only the print-cartridge drive motors. The control panel display prompts you to remove at least one cartridge because the ETB belt contacts the photosensitive drums and cannot turn without them rotating also. The engine rotates the cartridge motor(s) for only the cartridges that are removed. To rotate all motors sequentially, remove all of the cartridges; to isolate one motor, remove only that cartridge. If covers are removed, you must manually activate the door switch after removing the cartridges in order to perform the test. Always start this test with all of the cartridges installed, and activate the door switch so that the printer recognizes the configuration. Then you can proceed with the test, by removing one or more cartridges. ● Black, Cyan, Magenta, Yellow laser/scanners. Use the following four tests to rotate each scanner motor individually. ● Fuser motor. Use this test to rotate the fuser motor and drive gears. ● Fuser pressure release motor. Use this test to rotate the fuser pressure release motor. ● Alienation motor (also called the developing disengaging motor). This test moves the developing disengaging motor, clutches and gears, and plates through their positions. ● ETB contact/alienation. This test activates the ETB motors and solenoid. ● Tray 1 pickup solenoid. This test activates and releases the Tray 1 pickup solenoid. Diagnostics 533 ● Tray 2 pickup motor. This test activates and moves the Tray 2 pickup motor and gear train. ● Tray 2 pickup solenoid. This test activates and releases the Tray 2 pickup solenoid. ● Trays 3–x pickup motors and solenoids. These tests run the same way as the Tray 2 pickup motor and solenoid test. NOTE You must have the paper tray partially installed or manually lift the pickup roller assembly/lifter plate. ● Duplexer pickup motor. This test activates and moves the duplexer pickup motor. Figure 7-24 Location of solenoids Table 7-41 Solenoids Name Function SL1 Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL2 Paper tray pickup solenoid SL3 ETB contact/alienation solenoid 534 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Print/Stop test Use this diagnostic test to isolate the cause of problems such as image formation defects and jams within the engine. During this test you can stop the paper anywhere along the printer-paper path. The test can be programmed to stop printing internal pages or an external print job when the paper reaches a certain position. The test can also be programmed to stop from 0 to 60,000 mS. If the timer is set to a value that is greater than the job-print time, you can recover the printer in one of two ways. ● After the print job is completed press Stop to return to the DIAGNOSTICS menu before the timer times out. ● After the timer times out, press Stop. Activate the door switch to restart the engine and return it to a normal state. When the timer trips, the control panel display shows the message PRINTING STOPPED To continue press . Pressing Menu will print the previously selected job. If you do not want the previous job to print, press Stop first, and then press Menu. NOTE Do not attempt to perform a Print/Stop test while the printer is calibrating, because you be required to power-cycle the printer. If a jam message displays on the control panel during testing, activate the door switch. Colorband test This test can be used for troubleshooting print quality issues. Information menu From the INFORMATION menu, the following pages can be printed. PRINT MENU MAP. Use this item to print the control panel menu map, which shows the layout and current settings of the control panel menu items. Print Configuration Page. Use this item to help troubleshoot printer problems or to verify installation of optional accessories (such as memory DIMMs and DDRs), trays, and printer languages. PRINT SUPPLIES STATUS PAGE. Use this item to print a page that shows the remaining life of the supplies. SUPPLIES STATUS. Use this item to view a page that shows the supplies status in a searchable list on the control panel display. PRINT USAGE PAGE. Use this item to print a page that shows a count of all media sizes that have passed through the printer and lists whether they were simplex, duplex, monochrome, or color; and reports page count. PRINT DEMO. Use this item to print a demonstration page. PRINT RGB SAMPLES. Use this item to print color samples for different RGB values. PRINT CMYK SAMPLES. Use this item to print color samples for different CMYK values. PRINT FILE DIRECTORY. Use this item to print a page that shows the name and directory of files that are stored in the printer on an optional hard disk. PRINT PCL FONT LIST. Use this item to print a page that shows the available PCL fonts. ENWW Diagnostics 535 PRINT PS FONT LIST. Use this item to print a page that shows the available PS (emulated PostScript) fonts. Configure device menu/printing menu PRINT PS ERRORS. Use this item to print PS error pages. PRINT PDF ERRORS. Use this item to print PDF error pages. Configure device menu/print quality menu ADJUST COLOR. Use this item to modify halftone settings for each color. SET REGISTRATION. Use this item to align simplex and duplex images. PRINT MODES. Use this item to associate each media type with a specific print mode. OPTIMIZE. Use this item to optimize certain parameters for all jobs rather than optimizing by media type. QUICK CALIBRATE NOW. Use this item to partially calibrate the printer for optimum print quality. FULL CALIBRATE NOW. Use this item to fully calibrate the printer for optimum print quality. COLOR RET. Use this item to turn on or turn off a color printer Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) setting. Configure device menu/resets menu RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS. Use this item to clear the page buffer, remove all perishable personality data, reset the printing environment, and return all default settings to factory defaults. SLEEP MODE. Use this item to reset Sleep mode to the factory default 30-minute setting. 536 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Test pages Printing test pages helps you determine whether the printer engine and the formatter are functioning. Engine test page To verify that the printer engine is functioning, print an engine test page. Use a small pointed object to depress the test page switch located on the rear of the printer, as shown in Figure 7-25 Test page switch on page 537. The test page should have a series of horizontal lines. The test page can use only Tray 2 as the paper source, so make sure that paper is loaded in Tray 2. Figure 7-25 Test page switch Formatter test page To verify that the formatter is functioning, print a configuration page as follows: ENWW 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight INFORMATION. 3. Press to select INFORMATION. 4. Press to highlight PRINT CONFIGURATION. 5. Press to select PRINT CONFIGURATION. Test pages 537 Engine resets Use the following procedures when you perform engine resets. Cold reset A cold reset unlocks menus that have been locked and resets control panel variables. However, it does not clear the values in the SERVICE menu (such as the serial number and page counts). To perform a cold reset WARNING! Performing a cold reset erases all of the EIO card information. 1. Turn the printer on. 2. As the printer performs its power-on sequence, press and hold control panel are lit. 3. When SELECT LANGUAGE displays on the control panel, press displays on the control panel. 4. Press . The printer performs a cold reset and then continues its power-on sequence. until all three lights on the until COLD RESET NVRAM initialization CAUTION Initializing NVRAM resets the serial number, the event log, the page counts, the calibration settings, and the EIO card. Use the SERVICE menu to restore the serial number and page counts. You also need to reconfigure any computers that print to this printer to recognize the printer. Initialize NVRAM only when absolutely necessary. In most situations, use a cold reset to reset printer variables but still retain the needed values in the SERVICE menu. Before initializing NVRAM, print a configuration page and a supplies status page to gather the following information: ● Total page count and color page count ● Serial number To initialize NVRAM 1. Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display. 2. When the display shows the memory count, press and hold panel are lit. 3. Press 4. Press Menu. The message SKIP DISK LOAD displays on the control panel. 5. Press 6. Press . The printer initializes NVRAM and then continues its power-on sequence. until all three lights on the control . until NVRAM INIT is highlighted. 538 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Hard disk initialization (4700 models) A hard disk initialization will erase and reformat the printer's hard disk. Perform hard disk initialization only if an error code displays on the control panel indicating a disk error. Always try initializing the hard disk before replacing it. To initialize the hard disk 1. Turn the printer on. 2. As the printer performs its power-on sequence, press and hold the Menu button until all three lights on the control panel are lit. 3. Press . The message INITIALIZE DISK displays on the control panel. 4. Press . The printer initializes the hard disk and continues its power-on sequence. Calibration bypass During certain diagnostic procedures, you can bypass the automatic calibration. To bypass calibration 1. Turn the printer on and watch the control panel display. 2. When the display shows the memory count, press and hold panel are lit. 3. Press 4. Press . The message SKIP DISK LOAD displays on the control panel. 5. Press 6. Press . The printer skips calibration and then continues its power-on sequence. until all three lights on the control . until CANCEL CALIBRATION is highlighted. Quick Calibrate Now Quick Calibrate Now is used for color tone calibration (DHALF) and takes about 55 seconds. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY. 5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY. 6. Press to highlight QUICK CALIBRATE NOW. 7. Press to select QUICK CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate. Full Calibrate Now Use the following procedure to calibrate the printer whenever you replace the DC controller, the ETB, the drum drive motors, the drum drive gears, or a laser/scanner. Full Calibrate Now includes the ENWW Engine resets 539 Quick Calibrate routines and adds Drum Phase Calibration and Color Plane Registration. Full Calibrate lasts for about four minutes. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight CONFIGURE DEVICE. 3. Press to select CONFIGURE DEVICE. 4. Press to highlight PRINT QUALITY. 5. Press to select PRINT QUALITY. 6. Press to highlight FULL CALIBRATE NOW. 7. Press to select FULL CALIBRATE NOW. Wait for the printer to calibrate. 540 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Service menu The following sections describe the SERVICE menu. Using the Service menu The SERVICE menu is PIN protected for added security. Only authorized service people have access to the Service menu. When you select SERVICE from the list of menus, you are prompted to enter your 8-digit PIN number. The PIN for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 is 09470005. 1. Press Menu to enter the MENUS. 2. Press to highlight SERVICE. 3. Press to select SERVICE. 4. Press or 5. Press to save the digit. The control panel display replaces the digit with an asterisk. Press at any time to move to the previous digit. 6. until the first digit of the PIN displays. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all eight digits are typed. Clear event log Use this item to clear the printer internal event log. Mono cycle count/Color cycle count The page count that is stored in NVRAM and printed on the configuration page represents the number of pages that the formatter has formatted (not including engine-test prints). If you install a new formatter when repairing a printer, use this menu item to reset the page count to the previous value. In this way, the page count reflects the number of pages that the engine has printed rather than restarting the count for the new formatter. The page count is in two categories: total mono pages and total color pages. Serial number If you replace the formatter, use this item to reset the serial number of the printer. Service ID Use this item to show the date that the printer was first used on the control panel. This eliminating the need for users to keep paper receipts for proof of warranty. Restoring the Service ID If you replace the formatter, the date is lost. Use this menu item to reset the date to the original date that the printer was first used. The date format is YYDDD. Use the following formula to calculate the dates: ENWW 1. To calculate YY, subtract 1990 from the calendar year. For instance, if the printer was first used in 2002, calculate YY as follows: 2002 - 1990 = 12. YY = 12. 2. Subtract 1 from 10 (October is the tenth month of the year): 10 - 1 = 9. Service menu 541 Multiply 9 by 30: 9 x 30 = 270. -orAdd 17 to 270: 270 + 17 = 287. Thus, DDD = 287. Converting the Service ID to an actual date You can use the printer Service ID number to determine whether the printer is still under warranty. Use the following formula to convert the Service ID into the installation date as follows: 1. Add 1990 to YY to get the actual year that the printer was installed. 2. Divide DDD by 30. If there is a remainder, add 1 to the result. This is the month. 3. The remainder from the calculation in step 2 is the date. Using the Service ID 12287 as an example, the date conversion is as follows: 1. 12 + 1990 = 2002, so the year is 2002. 2. 287 divided by 30 = 9 with a remainder of 17. Since there is a remainder, add 1 to 9 to get 10, which represents October. 3. The remainder in step 2 is 17, so that is the date. 4. The complete date is 17-October-2002. NOTE A 6-day grace period is built into the date system. Cold reset paper When you perform a cold reset, the paper size that is stored in NVRAM is reset to the default factory setting. If you replace a formatter board in a country/region that uses A4 as the standard paper size, use this menu to reset the default paper size to A4. LETTER and A4 are the only available values. 542 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Diagrams Main parts ENWW Diagrams 543 Figure 7-26 Location of main parts 1 Disengaging drive assembly 2 Main drive assembly 3 Pickup motor assembly 4 Lifter drive assembly 5 Delivery assembly 6 Fuser 7 ETB 8 Paper feed assembly 9 Fuser drive assembly 10 Laser/scanner assembly 544 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Switches Figure 7-27 Location of switches Table 7-42 Switches ENWW Name Function SW1 Paper tray paper-size detection switch SW2 Paper tray paper-size detection switch SW3 Paper tray paper-size detection switch SW4 Door switch SW5 On/off switch SW Test print switch Diagrams 545 Sensors Figure 7-28 Location of sensors Table 7-43 Sensors Name Function SR1 Fuser delivery SR2 Output bin full SR3 Fuser pressure release SR4 Tray 1 paper SR9 Tray 2 paper SR10 Tray 2 paper stack surface SR11 Developing alienation SR12 Top of page SR13 Fuser inlet 1 SR14 Fuser inlet 2 SR8001 Duplexer switch back 546 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-43 Sensors (continued) Name Function SW Door C size switch Tray 2 paper size Solenoids Figure 7-29 Location of solenoids Table 7-44 Solenoids ENWW Name Function SL1 Multipurpose tray pickup solenoid SL2 Paper tray pickup solenoid SL3 ETB alienation solenoid Diagrams 547 Motors and fans Figure 7-30 Location of motors and fans Table 7-45 Motors and fans Name Function 1 Yellow drum motor 2 Cyan drum motor 3 Magenta drum motor 4 Black drum motor 548 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Table 7-45 Motors and fans (continued) Name Function 5 Paper pickup motor 6 ETB motor 7 Developing disengaging motor 8 Fuser motor 9 Fuser pressure release motor 10 Lifter motor Fan 1 Upper exhaust fan Fan 2 Cartridge fan Fan 3 Delivery fan Fan 4 Power supply fan PCBs Figure 7-31 PCB locations ENWW 1 DC controller PCB 2 Memory controller PCB 3 Toner sensor PCB 4 High-voltage power supply PCB Diagrams 549 5 Low-voltage power supply PCB 6 Formatter PCB DC controller PCB Figure 7-32 Location of DC controller PCB components 550 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Connectors Figure 7-33 Location of connectors (1 of 7) ENWW Diagrams 551 Figure 7-34 Location of connectors (2 of 7) 552 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-35 Location of connectors (3 of 7) ENWW Diagrams 553 Figure 7-36 Location of connectors (4 of 7) 554 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-37 Location of connectors (5 of 7) Figure 7-38 Location of connectors (6 of 7) ENWW Diagrams 555 Figure 7-39 Location of connectors (7 of 7) 556 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW General timing chart Figure 7-40 General timing chart ENWW Diagrams 557 General circuit diagrams Figure 7-41 General circuit diagram 558 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW Figure 7-42 General circuit diagram (duplex) ENWW Diagrams 559 Figure 7-43 General circuit diagram (500-sheet feeder) 560 Chapter 7 Troubleshooting ENWW 8 Parts and diagrams This chapter contains information about the following topics: ENWW ● Introduction ● Ordering parts and supplies ● User-replaceable parts ● Assembly locations ● External covers and panels ● Internal components ● Accessories ● Alphabetical parts list ● Numerical parts list 561 Introduction The figures in this chapter show the major subassemblies in the printer and their component parts. A parts list table follows each exploded assembly diagram. Each table lists the item number, the associated part number, and the description of each part. NOTE In this manual, the abbreviation "PCB" stands for "printed circuit board." Components described as a PCB may consist of a single circuit board or a circuit board plus other parts, such as cables and sensors. 562 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Ordering parts and supplies Parts that wear The parts on the product that need replacement at regular intervals are listed in Approximate replacement intervals for supplies on page 102. Parts are available directly from HP at the following Web site: http://www.hp.com/buy/parts. Parts Order replacement parts from the following Web site: http://www.hp.com/go/HPparts. Customer support Product documentation and software support can be found at the Web sites listed in Table 8-1 Technical support Web sites and related documentation on page 563. Table 8-1 Technical support Web sites and related documentation HP Connect Online Go to http://www.connect-online.hp.com (for HP partners) HP Customer Care Call Centers Go to http://www.hp.com/support Information about contacting HP call centers in specific countries/regions. HP Online Technical Support Go to http://www.hp.com/support (for HP partners) Software drivers, support documentation, and answers to frequently asked questions HP Technical Training (North America) Classes and schedules Go to http://www.compaq.com/training NOTE Select your country/region in the "select a country or region" field at the top, right corner of the page. HP Parts Go to http://www.partsurfer.hp.com (parts ordering) Parts information Go to http://www.hp.com/go/HPparts (parts reference guide) Supplies and accessories Use the following table to order supplies and accessories for the product. Table 8-2 Supplies and accessories Product number Part number Description J7934-61001 4700 models:HP Jetdirect 620n connectivity card Accessories J7934A Q7501A ENWW Printer cabinet/stand Ordering parts and supplies 563 Table 8-2 Supplies and accessories (continued) Product number Part number Description Q7003A Q7003-67008 4700 models: Stapler/stacker Q7499A Q7499-67901 Optional 500-sheet paper feeder and tray assembly Cables C2946A 4700 models: IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable, 3 meters (approximately 10 feet) long, with 25-pin male/micro 36-pin male (c-type) connector 92215S Macintosh DIN-8 printer cable C6518A 2-meter USB cable C6520A 3-meter USB cable Media C2934A HP Color LaserJet Transparencies (letter) 50 sheets C2936A HP Color LaserJet Transparencies (A4) 50 sheets C4179A HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper (letter) 200 sheets C4179B HP LaserJet Soft Gloss paper (A4) 200 sheets Q1298A HP LaserJet Tough paper (letter) Q1298B HP LaserJet Tough paper (A4) HPU1132 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper (letter) CHP410 HP Premium Choice LaserJet paper (A4) HPJ1124 HP LaserJet paper (letter) CHP310 HP LaserJet paper (A4) Memory J6073A J6073-69011 4700 models: EIO internal hard drive Q7495-67902 4700 models: Hard drive inside drive assembly Q2630A Q7721-67951 128 MB memory DDR Q2631A Q7722-67951 256 MB memory DDR Q7723-67951 512 MB memory DDR Q7725-67901 4700 models: Firmware Compact flash Q7725-67942 CP4005 models: Firmware Compact flash Q7491-00013 English label Q7491-00015 French label Q7491-00016 German label Q7491-00017 Italian label Q7491-00018 Spanish label Control panel labels 564 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-2 Supplies and accessories (continued) Product number Part number Description Q7491-00019 Danish label Q7491-00020 Dutch label Q7491-00021 Finnish label Q7491-00022 Norwegian label Q7491-00014 Portuguese label Q7491-00023 Swedish label Q7491-00024 Czech label Q7491-00025 Hungarian label Q7491-00026 Polish label Q7491-00027 Russian label Q7491-00028 Turkish label Q7491-00029 Arabic label Q7491-00030 Greek label Q7491-00031 Hebrew label Q7491-00032 Japanese label Q7491-00033 Korean label Q7491-00036 Thai label Q7491-00034 Simplified Chinese label Q7491-00035 Traditional Chinese label 5963-7863 HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specifications Guide 5021-0330 PCL/PJL Technical Reference Package CB503-90929 HP Color LaserJet 4700/CP4005 series printer service manual (English) Q5950A Q5950-67901 4700 models: Black print cartridge Q5951A Q5951-67901 4700 models: Cyan print cartridge Q5952A Q5952-67901 4700 models: Yellow print cartridge Q5953A Q5953-67901 4700 models: Magenta print cartridge CB400A CB400-67901 CP4005 models: Black print cartridge CB401A CB401-67901 CP4005 models: Cyan print cartridge CB402A CB402-67901 CP4005 models: Yellow print cartridge CB403A CB403-67901 CP4005 models: Magenta print cartridge Q7504A RM1-3161-080CN ETB kit Reference materials Supplies ENWW Ordering parts and supplies 565 Table 8-2 Supplies and accessories (continued) Product number Part number Description Q7502A RM1-3131-060CN Image fuser kit (110 volt) Q7503A RM1-3146-060CN Image fuser kit (220 volt) C8091A C8085-60541 4700 models: Staple cartridge Q7491-67903 3 roller kit (pickup roller, separation roller, feed roller) NOTE The only difference between the print cartridges listed above is that the Europe-only print cartridges have different languages on the instruction sheet inside the box. Common fasteners Table 8-3 Common fasteners Illustration Description Size Part number Uses Screw, machine with washer M3x6 XA9-1418-000CN To hold plastic to metal, (example: the skins) Screw, self tapping M3x6 To hold plastic to plastic Screw, truss head M3x6 Sheet metal to sheet metal, (example: formatter case) Retaining Ring (e-type) 566 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams To hold gears into place ENWW User-replaceable parts The following table lists user-replaceable parts for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer. Table 8-4 User-replaceable parts ENWW Description Part number Formatter assembly base (exchange) 4700 models: Q7491-67908 Formatter assembly base (new) 4700 models: Q7491-67901 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (new) 4700 models: Q7492-67902 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (exchange) 4700 models: Q7492-69002 Formatter 4700ph+ (new) 4700 models: Q7495-67903 Formatter 4700ph+ (exchange) 4700 models: Q7495-69002 Formatter CP4005n (new) CP4005 models: CB503-67901 Formatter CP4005n (exchange) CP4005 models: CB503-69001 Firmware compact flash 4700 models: Q7725-67901 Firmware compact flash CP4005 models: Q7725–67942 Hard drive inside drive assembly 4700 models: Q7495-67902 EIO disk drive 4700 models: J6073-69011 HP Jetdirect card 4700 models: J7934-61001 128 MB DDR memory Q7721-67951 256 MB DDR memory Q7722-67951 512 MB memory Q7723-67951 Print cartridge (black) 4700 models: Q5950-67901 Print cartridge (magenta) 4700 models: Q5953-67901 Print cartridge (yellow) 4700 models: Q5952-67901 Print cartridge (cyan) 4700 models: Q5951-67901 Black print cartridge CP4005 models: CB400-67901 Cyan print cartridge CP4005 models:CB401-67901 Yellow print cartridge CP4005 models:CB402-67901 Magenta print cartridge CP4005 models:CB403-67901 English label Q7491-00013 French label Q7491-00015 German label Q7491-00016 Italian label Q7491-00017 Spanish label Q7491-00018 Danish label Q7491-00019 User-replaceable parts 567 Table 8-4 User-replaceable parts (continued) Description Part number Dutch label Q7491-00020 Finnish label Q7491-00021 Norwegian label Q7491-00022 Portuguese label Q7491-00014 Swedish label Q7491-00023 Czech label Q7491-00024 Hungarian label Q7491-00025 Polish label Q7491-00026 Russian label Q7491-00027 Turkish label Q7491-00028 Arabic label Q7491-00029 Greek label Q7491-00030 Hebrew label Q7491-00031 Japanese label Q7491-00032 Korean label Q7491-00033 Thai label Q7491-00036 Simplified Chinese label Q7491-00034 Traditional Chinese label Q7491-00035 Fuser unit 100 V RM1-3131-060CN Fuser unit 200 V RM1-3146-060CN Duplexing tray RC1-5043-020CN Paper feeder/Tray assembly Q7499-67901 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN Paper feed roller assembly (quantity 2) RM1-0037-020CN Roller kit (3) Q7491-67903 Paper tray Tray 2 RM1-1693-000CN Optional paper tray RM1-1764-020CN ETB assembly RM1-3161-080CN Limiter, torque RC1-3293-000CN Stapler/stacker assembly 4700 models: Q7003-67008 Staple cartridge 4700 models: C8085-60541 Staple cartridge cover, left 4700 models: Q7003-67005 Stapler output tray 4700 models: Q7003-67006 568 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW User-replaceable parts 569 Assembly locations The following illustrations and parts tables list the field replaceable units (FRU) for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printers. At the end of this chapter are alphabetical and numerical master parts lists. Major components Figure 8-1 HP Color LaserJet 4700 series printer major components Reference number Description Part number 1 Disengaging drive assembly RM1-1717-000CN 2 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN 3 Pickup motor assembly RM1-1666-000CN 570 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Reference number Description Part number 4 Delivery assembly 220 V RM1-1737-030CN 4 Delivery assembly 110 V RM1-1730-000CN 5 Fuser assembly 110 V RM1-3131-060CN 5 Fuser assembly 220 V RM1-3146-060CN 6 ETB assembly RM1-3161-080CN 7 Paper tray (Tray 2) RM1-1693-000CN Assembly locations 571 External covers and panels Figure 8-2 External covers and panels (1 of 2) 572 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-5 External covers and panels (1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Rear cover assembly RM1-1747-000CN 1 3 Left cover assembly RM1-1739-000CN 1 6 Front top cover assembly RM1-1745-000CN 1 7 Face-down tray assembly RM1-1746-000CN 1 8 Duplex cover RC1-4856-000CN 1 9 Duplex cover RC1-4863-000CN 1 10 Right top cover RC1-4855-020CN 1 11 Control panel assembly RM1-1617-000CN 1 12 Top cover RC1-4854-030CN 1 13 Air filter RC1-4433-000CN 1 External covers and panels 573 Figure 8-3 External covers and panels (2 of 2) 574 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-6 External covers and panels (2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 2 Right cover assembly RM1-1738-020CN 1 4 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) assembly RM1-1740-020CN 1 5 Front lower cover assembly RM1-1742-000CN 1 External covers and panels 575 Internal components Figure 8-4 Internal components (1 of 6) 576 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-7 Internal components (1 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Laser/scanner assembly RM1-1591-030CN 4 2 Connector guide assembly RM1-1675-000CN 1 3 Attraction contact assembly RM1-1676-000CN 1 4 H.V. terminal mount assembly RM1-1677-000CN 4 5 Environment/humidity sensor unit WP2-5187-000CN 1 6 Left ETB cap RC1-4386-000CN 1 7 Tension spring RC1-4423-000CN 1 8 Pressure plate RC1-4397-000CN 1 9 Screw M3x6 XA9-1418-000CN 2 10 Compression spring RC1-4396-000CN 4 11 Tension spring RC1-4393-000CN 4 12 Gear, 70T RC1-4392-000CN 1 13 High-voltage terminal block RC1-4394-000CN 4 14 Cartridge pressure, left lever RC1-4387-000CN 4 15 Cartridge interlock, left plate RC1-4385-000CN 1 16 Tension spring RC1-4395-000CN 4 Internal components 577 Figure 8-5 Internal components (2 of 6) 578 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-8 Internal components (2 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Upper exhaust fan/cartridge fan RK2-0623-000CN 2 2 Delivery fan RM1-1757-000CN 1 3 Power supply fan RK2-0622-000CN 1 4 Fan cable assembly RM1-1646-000CN 1 5 Misregistration sensor cable assembly RM1-1629-000CN 1 Internal components 579 Figure 8-6 Internal components (3 of 6) 580 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-9 Internal components (3 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Power switch assembly RM1-1671-000CN 1 2 Drum motor assembly RM1-1659-000CN 4 3 DC stepping motor RK2-0618-000CN 1 4 Tension spring RC1-4357-000CN 4 5 Cartridge interlock, right plate RC1-4354-000CN 1 6 Cartridge pressure, right lever RC1-4353-000CN 3 7 Interlock switch WC4-5242-000CN 2 8 Bushing RC1-4325-000CN 4 9 Gear, 18T RC1-4324-000CN 1 10 Right ETB cap RC1-4352-000CN 1 11 Tension spring RC1-4423-000CN 1 12 Gear, 70T RC1-4356-000CN 1 13 Drum motor cable assembly RM1-1628-000CN 1 14 Door switch cable assembly RM1-1643-000CN 1 15 Main drive assembly RM1-1716-000CN 1 16 Cartridge pressure, top right lever RL1-0639-000CN 1 17 Pressure plate, right RC1-4360-000CN 1 Internal components 581 Figure 8-7 Internal components (4 of 6) 582 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-10 Internal components (4 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Memory contact cable RM1-1653-000CN 1 2 Right ETB lever assembly RM1-1662-000CN 1 3 Left ETB lever assembly RM1-1663-000CN 1 4 Cartridge guide assembly, right upper RM1-1668-000CN 1 5 Cartridge guide assembly, right lower RM1-1669-000CN 1 6 Gear, 30T RC1-4309-000CN 4 7 Gear, 29T RC1-4310-000CN 4 8 Development estrangement coupling RC1-4382-000CN 4 9 Compression spring RC1-4383-000CN 4 10 Control panel cable RM1-1640-000CN 1 11 Paper feed assembly RM1-1756-000CN 1 12 Control panel assembly RM1-1617-000CN 1 Internal components 583 Figure 8-8 Internal components (5 of 6) 584 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-11 Internal components (5 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 M.P. link, right arm RC1-4439-000CN 1 2 M.P. link, left arm RC1-4441-000CN 1 3 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN 1 4 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 5 Pickup cable assembly RM1-1633-000CN 1 6 Paper sensor cable assembly RM1-1641-000CN 1 7 Paper detection assembly RM1-1692-000CN 1 8 Drawer connector VS1-7258-007CN 1 9 Photo interrupter WG8-5696-000CN 1 10 Torsion spring RC1-4440-000CN 2 11 Size detect lever RC1-0503-000CN 3 12 Lifter drive assembly tension spring RC1-0198-000CN 3 Internal components 585 Figure 8-9 Internal components (6 of 6) 586 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-12 Internal components (6 of 6) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Delivery assembly 110 V RM1-1730-030CN 1 1 Delivery assembly 220 V RM1-1737-030CN 1 2 Fuser 110 V RM1-3131-060CN 1 2 Fuser 220 V RM1-3146-060CN 1 Internal components 587 Figure 8-10 Pickup motor assembly 588 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-13 Pickup motor assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Pickup motor assembly RM1-1666-000CN 1 Internal components 589 Figure 8-11 Disengaging drive assembly 590 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-14 Disengaging drive assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Disengaging drive assembly RM1-1717-000CN 1 2 Developing disengaging sensor cable RM1-1644-000CN 1 Internal components 591 Figure 8-12 Lifter drive assembly 592 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-15 Lifter drive assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN 1 Internal components 593 Figure 8-13 Paper tray (1 of 2) 594 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-16 Paper tray (1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper tray (Tray 2) RM1-1693-020CN 1 Internal components 595 Figure 8-14 Paper tray (2 of 2) 596 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-17 Paper tray (2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper tray (Tray 2) RM1-1693-020CN 1 2 Torque limiter RC1-3293-000CN 1 3 Paper pickup plate assembly RF5-3749-000CN 1 4 Multipurpose separation pad assembly RF5-3750-020CN 1 5 Pickup roller, Tray 1 RL1-0019-000CN 1 6 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 Internal components 597 Figure 8-15 ETB assembly 598 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-18 ETB assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 ETB assembly RM1-3161-080CN 1 2 ETB motor RK2-0616-000CN 1 Internal components 599 Figure 8-16 Delivery assembly 600 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-19 Delivery assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Delivery assembly 110 V RM1-1730-030CN 1 1 Delivery assembly 220 V RM1-1737-030CN 1 2 Bin full sensor flag RL1-0612-000CN 1 Internal components 601 Figure 8-17 Fuser drive assembly 602 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-20 Fuser drive assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fuser drive assembly RM1-1729-000CN 1 Internal components 603 Figure 8-18 Fuser assembly (1 of 2) 604 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-21 Fuser assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fuser 110 V RM1-3131-060CN 1 1 Fuser 220 V RM1-3146-060CN 1 Internal components 605 Figure 8-19 Fuser assembly (2 of 2) 606 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-22 Fuser assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Fuser 110 V RM1-3131-060CN 1 1 Fuser 220 V RM1-3146-060CN 1 Internal components 607 Figure 8-20 Printer PCBs 608 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-23 Printer PCBs ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 DC controller PCB RM1-1607-060CN 1 2 Memory PCB RM1-1618-000CN 1 3 Toner sensor PCB RM1-1609-000CN 1 4 High-voltage power PCB RM1-1608-000CN 1 5 Formatter power cable assembly RM1-1642-000CN 1 6 Formatter to DC Controller flat ribbon cable RK2-1171-000CN 1 7 Low-voltage PCB 110 V RK2-0627-000CN 1 7 Low-voltage PCB 220 V RK2-0628-000CN 1 8 Compact flash, 4700 models Q7725-67926 1 8 Compact flash, CP4005 models Q7725-67942 1 9 Formatter base, 4700 models (new) Q7491-67904 1 9 Formatter base, 4700 models (exchange) Q7491-69002 1 9 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (new) Q7492-67902 1 9 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (exchange) Q7492-69002 1 9 Formatter 4700ph+ (new) Q7495-67903 1 9 Formatter 4700ph+ (exchange) Q7495-69002 1 9 Formatter CP4005n, CP4005dn (new) CB503-67901 1 9 Formatter CP4005n, CP4005dn (exchange) CB503-69001 1 Internal components 609 Accessories The following diagrams and tables show the accessories and accessory parts for the HP Color LaserJet 4700 and HP Color LaserJet CP4005 series printers. 610 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW ENWW Accessories 611 Figure 8-21 Duplexer 612 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-24 Duplexer ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Duplexing tray RC1-5043-020CN 1 2 Top duplexing assembly RM1-1784-090CN 1 3 Duplexing feed assembly on ETB RM1-1785-000CN 1 Accessories 613 5 Figure 8-22 500-sheet paper feeder assembly 614 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-25 500-sheet paper feeder assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper feeder tray/assembly Q7499-67901 1 2 Paper tray RM1-1764-020CN 1 3 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN 1 4 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-1760-020CN 1 5 Paper feeder driver PCB RM1-2365-020CN 1 Accessories 615 Figure 8-23 500-sheet paper feeder internal components 616 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-26 500-sheet paper feeder internal components ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN 1 2 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 Accessories 617 Figure 8-24 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly 618 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-27 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN 1 Accessories 619 Figure 8-25 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray 620 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-28 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper tray RM1-1764-020CN 1 2 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 1 3 Torque limiter RC1-3293-000CN 1 Accessories 621 Figure 8-26 500-sheet paper feeder paper pickup drive assembly 622 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-29 500-sheet paper feeder paper pickup drive assembly ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-1760-020CN 1 Accessories 623 Figure 8-27 Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) 624 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-30 Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 1 Stapler/stacker Q7003-67908 1 2 Top cover PF4138K066NI 1 3 Output tray PF4138P231NI 1 4 Stapler cartridge cover, left PF4138P309NI 1 5 Staple cartridge C8085-60541 1 Accessories 625 Figure 8-28 Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) 626 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-31 Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) ENWW Ref Description Part number Qty 6 Roller lift strap PF4138P563NI 1 7 PCB board PF4138K203NI 1 8 Stapler unit assembly, 24V 2.5 Amp PF4138K064NI 1 Accessories 627 Alphabetical parts list Table 8-32 Alphabetical parts list Description Part number Table and page Air filter RC1-4433-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Attraction contact assembly RM1-1676-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Bin full sensor flag RL1-0612-000CN Delivery assembly on page 601 Bushing RC1-4325-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Cartridge guide assembly, right lower RM1-1669-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Cartridge guide assembly, right upper RM1-1668-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Cartridge interlock, left plate RC1-4385-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Cartridge interlock, right plate RC1-4354-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Cartridge pressure, left lever RC1-4387-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Cartridge pressure, right lever RC1-4353-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Cartridge pressure, top right lever RL1-0639-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Compact flash, 4700 models Q7725-67926 Printer PCBs on page 609 Compact flash, CP4005 models Q7725-67942 Printer PCBs on page 609 Compression spring RC1-4396-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Compression spring RC1-4383-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Connector guide assembly RM1-1675-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Control panel assembly RM1-1617-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Control panel assembly RM1-1617-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Control panel cable RM1-1640-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 DC controller PCB RM1-1607-060CN Printer PCBs on page 609 DC stepping motor RK2-0618-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Delivery assembly 110 V RM1-1730-030CN Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 628 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-32 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Delivery assembly 110 V RM1-1730-030CN Delivery assembly on page 601 Delivery assembly 220 V RM1-1737-030CN Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 Delivery assembly 220 V RM1-1737-030CN Delivery assembly on page 601 Delivery fan RM1-1757-000CN Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 Developing disengaging sensor cable RM1-1644-000CN Disengaging drive assembly on page 591 Development estrangement coupling RC1-4382-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Disengaging drive assembly RM1-1717-000CN Disengaging drive assembly on page 591 Door switch cable assembly RM1-1643-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Drawer connector VS1-7258-007CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Drum motor assembly RM1-1659-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Drum motor cable assembly RM1-1628-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Duplex cover RC1-4856-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Duplex cover RC1-4863-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Duplexing feed assembly on ETB RM1-1785-000CN Duplexer on page 613 Duplexing tray RC1-5043-020CN Duplexer on page 613 Environment/humidity sensor unit WP2-5187-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 ETB assembly RM1-3161-080CN ETB assembly on page 599 ETB motor RK2-0616-000CN ETB assembly on page 599 Face-down tray assembly RM1-1746-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Fan cable assembly RM1-1646-000CN Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (exchange) Q7492-69002 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (new) Q7492-67902 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter 4700ph+ (exchange) Q7495-69002 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter 4700ph+ (new) Q7495-67903 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter base, 4700 models (exchange) Q7491-69002 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter base, 4700 models (new) Q7491-67904 Printer PCBs on page 609 Alphabetical parts list 629 Table 8-32 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Formatter CP4005n, CP4005dn (exchange) CB503-69001 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter CP4005n, CP4005dn (new) CB503-67901 Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter power cable assembly RM1-1642-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 Formatter to DC Controller flat ribbon cable RK2-1171-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 Front lower cover assembly RM1-1742-000CN External covers and panels (2 of 2) on page 575 Front top cover assembly RM1-1745-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Fuser 110 V RM1-3131-060CN Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 Fuser 110 V RM1-3131-060CN Fuser assembly on page 605 Fuser 110 V RM1-3131-060CN Fuser assembly on page 607 Fuser 220 V RM1-3146-060CN Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 Fuser 220 V RM1-3146-060CN Fuser assembly on page 605 Fuser 220 V RM1-3146-060CN Fuser assembly on page 607 Fuser drive assembly RM1-1729-000CN Fuser drive assembly on page 603 Gear, 18T RC1-4324-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Gear, 29T RC1-4310-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Gear, 30T RC1-4309-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Gear, 70T RC1-4392-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Gear, 70T RC1-4356-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 H.V. terminal mount assembly RM1-1677-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 High-voltage power PCB RM1-1608-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 High-voltage terminal block RC1-4394-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Interlock switch WC4-5242-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Laser/scanner assembly RM1-1591-030CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Left cover assembly RM1-1739-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Left ETB cap RC1-4386-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 630 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-32 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Left ETB lever assembly RM1-1663-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN Lifter drive assembly on page 593 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 Lifter drive assembly RM1-1750-000CN 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly on page 619 Lifter drive assembly tension spring RC1-0198-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Low-voltage PCB 110 V RK2-0627-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 Low-voltage PCB 220 V RK2-0628-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 M.P. link, left arm RC1-4441-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 M.P. link, right arm RC1-4439-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Main drive assembly RM1-1716-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Memory contact cable RM1-1653-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Memory PCB RM1-1618-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 Misregistration sensor cable assembly RM1-1629-000CN Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 Multipurpose separation pad assembly RF5-3750-020CN Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) assembly RM1-1740-020CN External covers and panels (2 of 2) on page 575 Output tray PF4138P231NI Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 Paper detection assembly RM1-1692-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Paper feed assembly RM1-1756-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder internal components on page 617 Paper feed roller assembly RM1-0037-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray on page 621 Paper feeder driver PCB RM1-2365-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 Alphabetical parts list 631 Table 8-32 Alphabetical parts list (continued) Description Part number Table and page Paper feeder tray/assembly Q7499-67901 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-1760-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 Paper pickup drive assembly RM1-1760-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder paper pickup drive assembly on page 623 Paper pickup plate assembly RF5-3749-000CN Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Paper pickup roller assembly RM1-0036-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder internal components on page 617 Paper sensor cable assembly RM1-1641-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Paper tray RM1-1764-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 Paper tray RM1-1764-020CN 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray on page 621 Paper tray (Tray 2) RM1-1693-020CN Paper tray (1 of 2) on page 595 Paper tray (Tray 2) RM1-1693-020CN Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 PCB board PF4138K203NI Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) on page 627 Photo interrupter WG8-5696-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Pickup cable assembly RM1-1633-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Pickup motor assembly RM1-1666-000CN Pickup motor assembly on page 589 Pickup roller, Tray 1 RL1-0019-000CN Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 Power supply fan RK2-0622-000CN Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 Power switch assembly RM1-1671-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Pressure plate RC1-4397-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Pressure plate, right RC1-4360-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Rear cover assembly RM1-1747-000CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Right cover assembly RM1-1738-020CN External covers and panels (2 of 2) on page 575 Right ETB cap RC1-4352-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 632 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-32 Alphabetical parts list (continued) ENWW Description Part number Table and page Right ETB lever assembly RM1-1662-000CN Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 Right top cover RC1-4855-020CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Roller lift strap PF4138P563NI Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) on page 627 Screw M3x6 XA9-1418-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Size detect lever RC1-0503-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Staple cartridge C8085-60541 Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 Stapler cartridge cover, left PF4138P309NI Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 Stapler unit assembly, 24V 2.5 Amp PF4138K064NI Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) on page 627 Stapler/stacker Q7003-67908 Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 Tension spring RC1-4423-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Tension spring RC1-4393-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Tension spring RC1-4395-000CN Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Tension spring RC1-4357-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Tension spring RC1-4423-000CN Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Toner sensor PCB RM1-1609-000CN Printer PCBs on page 609 Top cover RC1-4854-030CN External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 Top cover PF4138K066NI Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 Top duplexing assembly RM1-1784-090CN Duplexer on page 613 Torque limiter RC1-3293-000CN Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 Torque limiter RC1-3293-000CN 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray on page 621 Torsion spring RC1-4440-000CN Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 Upper exhaust fan/cartridge fan RK2-0623-000CN Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 Alphabetical parts list 633 Numerical parts list Table 8-33 Numerical parts list Part number Description Table and page C8085-60541 Staple cartridge Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 CB503-67901 Formatter CP4005n, CP4005dn (new) Printer PCBs on page 609 CB503-69001 Formatter CP4005n, CP4005dn (exchange) Printer PCBs on page 609 PF4138K064NI Stapler unit assembly, 24V 2.5 Amp Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) on page 627 PF4138K066NI Top cover Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 PF4138K203NI PCB board Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) on page 627 PF4138P231NI Output tray Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 PF4138P309NI Stapler cartridge cover, left Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 PF4138P563NI Roller lift strap Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (2 of 2) on page 627 Q7003-67908 Stapler/stacker Stapler/stacker, 4700 models (1 of 2) on page 625 Q7491-67904 Formatter base, 4700 models (new) Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7491-69002 Formatter base, 4700 models (exchange) Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7492-67902 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (new) Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7492-69002 Formatter 4700n, 4700dn, 4700dtn (exchange) Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7495-67903 Formatter 4700ph+ (new) Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7495-69002 Formatter 4700ph+ (exchange) Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7499-67901 Paper feeder tray/assembly 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 Q7725-67926 Compact flash, 4700 models Printer PCBs on page 609 Q7725-67942 Compact flash, CP4005 models Printer PCBs on page 609 RC1-0198-000CN Lifter drive assembly tension spring Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RC1-0503-000CN Size detect lever Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RC1-3293-000CN Torque limiter Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 RC1-3293-000CN Torque limiter 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray on page 621 RC1-4309-000CN Gear, 30T Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 634 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-33 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RC1-4310-000CN Gear, 29T Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RC1-4324-000CN Gear, 18T Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4325-000CN Bushing Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4352-000CN Right ETB cap Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4353-000CN Cartridge pressure, right lever Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4354-000CN Cartridge interlock, right plate Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4356-000CN Gear, 70T Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4357-000CN Tension spring Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4360-000CN Pressure plate, right Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RC1-4382-000CN Development estrangement coupling Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RC1-4383-000CN Compression spring Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RC1-4385-000CN Cartridge interlock, left plate Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4386-000CN Left ETB cap Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4387-000CN Cartridge pressure, left lever Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4392-000CN Gear, 70T Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4393-000CN Tension spring Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4394-000CN High-voltage terminal block Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4395-000CN Tension spring Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4396-000CN Compression spring Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4397-000CN Pressure plate Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4423-000CN Tension spring Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RC1-4423-000CN Tension spring Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 Numerical parts list 635 Table 8-33 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RC1-4433-000CN Air filter External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RC1-4439-000CN M.P. link, right arm Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RC1-4440-000CN Torsion spring Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RC1-4441-000CN M.P. link, left arm Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RC1-4854-030CN Top cover External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RC1-4855-020CN Right top cover External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RC1-4856-000CN Duplex cover External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RC1-4863-000CN Duplex cover External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RC1-5043-020CN Duplexing tray Duplexer on page 613 RF5-3749-000CN Paper pickup plate assembly Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 RF5-3750-020CN Multipurpose separation pad assembly Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 RK2-0616-000CN ETB motor ETB assembly on page 599 RK2-0618-000CN DC stepping motor Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RK2-0622-000CN Power supply fan Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 RK2-0623-000CN Upper exhaust fan/cartridge fan Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 RK2-0627-000CN Low-voltage PCB 110 V Printer PCBs on page 609 RK2-0628-000CN Low-voltage PCB 220 V Printer PCBs on page 609 RK2-1171-000CN Formatter to DC Controller flat ribbon cable Printer PCBs on page 609 RL1-0019-000CN Pickup roller, Tray 1 Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 RL1-0612-000CN Bin full sensor flag Delivery assembly on page 601 RL1-0639-000CN Cartridge pressure, top right lever Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup roller assembly Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RM1-0036-020CN Paper pickup roller assembly 500-sheet paper feeder internal components on page 617 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 636 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-33 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly 500-sheet paper feeder internal components on page 617 RM1-0037-020CN Paper feed roller assembly 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray on page 621 RM1-1591-030CN Laser/scanner assembly Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RM1-1607-060CN DC controller PCB Printer PCBs on page 609 RM1-1608-000CN High-voltage power PCB Printer PCBs on page 609 RM1-1609-000CN Toner sensor PCB Printer PCBs on page 609 RM1-1617-000CN Control panel assembly External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RM1-1617-000CN Control panel assembly Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1618-000CN Memory PCB Printer PCBs on page 609 RM1-1628-000CN Drum motor cable assembly Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RM1-1629-000CN Misregistration sensor cable assembly Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 RM1-1633-000CN Pickup cable assembly Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RM1-1640-000CN Control panel cable Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1641-000CN Paper sensor cable assembly Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RM1-1642-000CN Formatter power cable assembly Printer PCBs on page 609 RM1-1643-000CN Door switch cable assembly Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RM1-1644-000CN Developing disengaging sensor cable Disengaging drive assembly on page 591 RM1-1646-000CN Fan cable assembly Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 RM1-1653-000CN Memory contact cable Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1659-000CN Drum motor assembly Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RM1-1662-000CN Right ETB lever assembly Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1663-000CN Left ETB lever assembly Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1666-000CN Pickup motor assembly Pickup motor assembly on page 589 Numerical parts list 637 Table 8-33 Numerical parts list (continued) Part number Description Table and page RM1-1668-000CN Cartridge guide assembly, right upper Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1669-000CN Cartridge guide assembly, right lower Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1671-000CN Power switch assembly Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RM1-1675-000CN Connector guide assembly Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RM1-1676-000CN Attraction contact assembly Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RM1-1677-000CN H.V. terminal mount assembly Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 RM1-1692-000CN Paper detection assembly Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 RM1-1693-020CN Paper tray (Tray 2) Paper tray (1 of 2) on page 595 RM1-1693-020CN Paper tray (Tray 2) Paper tray (2 of 2) on page 597 RM1-1716-000CN Main drive assembly Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 RM1-1717-000CN Disengaging drive assembly Disengaging drive assembly on page 591 RM1-1729-000CN Fuser drive assembly Fuser drive assembly on page 603 RM1-1730-030CN Delivery assembly 110 V Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 RM1-1730-030CN Delivery assembly 110 V Delivery assembly on page 601 RM1-1737-030CN Delivery assembly 220 V Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 RM1-1737-030CN Delivery assembly 220 V Delivery assembly on page 601 RM1-1738-020CN Right cover assembly External covers and panels (2 of 2) on page 575 RM1-1739-000CN Left cover assembly External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RM1-1740-020CN Multipurpose tray (Tray 1) assembly External covers and panels (2 of 2) on page 575 RM1-1742-000CN Front lower cover assembly External covers and panels (2 of 2) on page 575 RM1-1745-000CN Front top cover assembly External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RM1-1746-000CN Face-down tray assembly External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 RM1-1747-000CN Rear cover assembly External covers and panels (1 of 2) on page 573 638 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Table 8-33 Numerical parts list (continued) ENWW Part number Description Table and page RM1-1750-000CN Lifter drive assembly Lifter drive assembly on page 593 RM1-1750-000CN Lifter drive assembly 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 RM1-1750-000CN Lifter drive assembly 500-sheet paper feeder lifter drive assembly on page 619 RM1-1756-000CN Paper feed assembly Internal components (4 of 6) on page 583 RM1-1757-000CN Delivery fan Internal components (2 of 6) on page 579 RM1-1760-020CN Paper pickup drive assembly 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 RM1-1760-020CN Paper pickup drive assembly 500-sheet paper feeder paper pickup drive assembly on page 623 RM1-1764-020CN Paper tray 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 RM1-1764-020CN Paper tray 500-sheet paper feeder paper tray on page 621 RM1-1784-090CN Top duplexing assembly Duplexer on page 613 RM1-1785-000CN Duplexing feed assembly on ETB Duplexer on page 613 RM1-2365-020CN Paper feeder driver PCB 500-sheet paper feeder assembly on page 615 RM1-3131-060CN Fuser 110 V Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 RM1-3131-060CN Fuser 110 V Fuser assembly on page 605 RM1-3131-060CN Fuser 110 V Fuser assembly on page 607 RM1-3146-060CN Fuser 220 V Internal components (6 of 6) on page 587 RM1-3146-060CN Fuser 220 V Fuser assembly on page 605 RM1-3146-060CN Fuser 220 V Fuser assembly on page 607 RM1-3161-080CN ETB assembly ETB assembly on page 599 VS1-7258-007CN Drawer connector Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 WC4-5242-000CN Interlock switch Internal components (3 of 6) on page 581 WG8-5696-000CN Photo interrupter Internal components (5 of 6) on page 585 WP2-5187-000CN Environment/humidity sensor unit Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 XA9-1418-000CN Screw M3x6 Internal components (1 of 6) on page 577 Numerical parts list 639 640 Chapter 8 Parts and diagrams ENWW Index Symbols/Numerics 3 roller kit part numbers 565 4MB flash memory DIMM 142 500-sheet paper feeder assembly, part numbers 610 circuit diagram 560 drive assembly, removing 333 front cover, removing 331 left cover, removing 330 lifter drive assembly, removing 337 part numbers 563, 610 pickup rollers, removing 339 pickup/feed operations 135, 189, 211 rear cover, removing 329 removing 328 right cover, removing 329 500-sheet tray duplex printing 34 533 MHz RISC processor 142 A ACC accessory port 71 accessories cleaning 98 hard drive 9 part numbers 563 accommodating supplies 107 adaptive halftoning 440 adhesive labels. See labels alerts e-mail 506 anticounterfeit Web site 100 ASIC 145 ATTS 159 Australian EMC statement 46 auto continue 469, 491 auto sense mode 484 ENWW AUTOEXEC.BAT file 457 automatic color settings 440 automatic delivery function 206 automatic mode 201 auxiliary connection configuration 71 available services 53 B basic operation 135, 136 batteries included 38 belt test 533 bias 159 bidirectional interfaces 137, 142 bin delivery unit operations 202 blank images, troubleshooting 446 blank spots, troubleshooting 451 block part numbers 576 block operations 145 Bluetooth 73 blurring, troubleshooting 452 bypassing calibration 539 C cables part numbers 563 calibration 181, 539 Canadian DOC regulations 44 cartridge fan removing 302 cartridge guide assembly part numbers 576 cartridge presence detection operations 177 cartridge, print changing 103 cleaning 136 diagnostics 526, 533 life expectancy 100 non-HP 100 operations 175 ordering 51, 562 part numbers 565 removing during service 222 status page, printing 512 storing 20, 100 supply level, checking 101 cartridges recycling 36 cartridges, print warranty 42 circuit fuser control 151 power supply 151 circuit diagram 558 cleaning color registration detection unit 98 ETB attaching roller 98 inside printer 98 outside covers 98 paper pickup rollers 98 printer and accessories 97 cleaning operations block 175 clearable warning messages 143 setting display time 468 settings 491 clearing jams 418, 420, 423 clock setting 130, 507 CMYK sample page, printing 518 CMYK+ color 439 cold reset 538 color automatic settings 440 balance, adjusting 441 Index 641 CMYK+ 439 dark, troubleshooting 446 Edge Control setting 440 Halftone setting 440 HP ImageREt 438 light, troubleshooting 445 manual settings 440 matching 437 misalignment 147 misregistration correction 183 misregistration detection 184 missing 450 Neutral Grays setting 440 options 439 Print in Grayscale 439 RGB 439 RGB setting 441 sample pages, printing 517 solid, troubleshooting 447 sRGB 438 variation, troubleshooting 436 color misregistration correction 183 color options configuring 461 color print cartridge part numbers 565, 567 color supply out reporting 471 color tables Web-downloadable 442 color/black mix 461 commands 457 common fasteners 566 communications, troubleshooting 457 compact flash configuration 401 removing 228 components diagnostics 532 part numbers 576 computer C-connector 70 connect 57, 70 configuration compact flash 401 DC controller 400, 401 formatter 400 replacement parts 400 642 Index configuration page information 511 printing 57, 68, 97, 113, 507 viewing with embedded Web server 506 Configure device menu 478 connecting computer 57 power 57 power cord 57, 66 connectors locating 551 part numbers 576 consumables. See supplies control panel cold reset 538 Configure device menu 478 configuring 460 diagnostics menu 500 embedded Jetdirect submenu 495 I/O submenu 494 information menu 474 installing 57 label 57 label part numbers 564 locking menus 57, 94 menu map, printing 474 messages 359 messages, settings 491 Paper handling menu 476 PCL submenu 482 print cartridge supply level, checking 101 Print quality submenu 483 printer personalities 468 Printing submenu 478 removing 250 Resets submenu 499 Service menu 541 service menu 503 stapler/stacker submenu 493 System setup submenu 488 troubleshooting 474 using in shared environments 473 control panel assembly part numbers 572 control panel display options 467 control panel label install 67 installing 228 part numbers 567 removing 228 control panel messages 359 counterfeit supplies 100 counts, page 513, 538, 541 covers cleaning 98 duplex, removing 239 face down, removing 239 front, removing 235 left, removing 247 part numbers 572 rear, removing 249 removing 230 right, removing 245 top, jams 412 top, removing 240 CPU 142 customer support call centers 563 D damage by media 29 dark print, troubleshooting 445 date, setting 130 DC bias 159 DC controller connections 316 door open jam 205 duplex jam 206 operations 145 PCB, locating 549, 550 PCB, part numbers 609 PCB, removing 312 DC motors 147 DDR memory installing, replacing 97 part numbers 564 replacing 114 default settings, restoring 499 defect image 202 media transport 202 delay, sleep 133 delivery assembly part numbers 570 removing 278 ENWW delivery delay jam jam detection 205 delivery fan removing 300 delivery source face-down 189 delivery unit operations 202 demo page, printing 514 density control 187 density operations 185 detection signal fan failures 149 detection switch 192 developing bias 159 developing cylinder operations 178 developing disengaging motor 147 development block operations 172 DHALF control 187 diagnostics calibration bypass 539 cartridge check 526 colorband 535 component 532 engine 521, 537 finishing paper path 528 formatter 537 LED 520 manual sensor test 528 page 525 paper path 527 print quality 436 Print/Stop 535 Diagnostics menu 500 DIMMs installing 97, 117 installing, replacing 97 operations 143 part numbers 564, 609 PCB, locating 549 removing 228 replacing 114 safe handling 97, 114 dirty pages, troubleshooting 448 disabling/enabling sleep mode 69 disengaging drive assembly part numbers 570 removing 254 disengaging drive motor removing 298 ENWW disk file directory, printing 515 initialization 539 display brightness setting 467 disposal, end-of-life 38 DLC/LLC settings 495 documentation 55, 565 door open jam jam detection 205 DOS commands 457 dots, troubleshooting 447 download manual 55 drive features 142 drive circuit abnormality 155 driver autoconfiguration 74 configuration 75 driver updates Macintosh OS-X 54 subscription 54 drivers accessing 82, 84 downloading 51 Help 82 selecting 82 drum cleaning operations 175 detection 177 image formation operations 171 motors 190, 548 sensors 546 drum drive motors removing 298 duplex cover removing 239 duplex printing 34 duplex printing accessory media types supported 25 duplex tray removing 349 duplexer feed unit operations 206 jams, causes of 413 part numbers 610 removing 349 duplexer accessories part numbers 610 duplexer fan 147 duplexing driver 206 duplexing feed 206 duplexing pickup unit jam jam detection 206 E E label memory contacts removing 322 e-mail alerts 506 Edge Control settings 440 EEPROM 145 EIO slot 142 electrostatic discharge 218 electrostatic-image formation block 171 embedded Jetdirect submenu 495 embedded Web server description 79 features 79 ordering supplies 51 print cartridge supply level, checking 101 using 505 enabling memory Windows 97, 125 end-of-life disposal 38 engine control system 135, 136, 145 engine diagnostics 521 engine test 141 engine test page 537 envelope feeder media types supported 25 settings 476 envelopes caution 32 margins 23 specifications 22 storing 23 environment sensor operations 147, 186 removing 308 environmental features 8 Environmental Product Stewardship Program 36 environmental specifications 16 Index 643 error messages auto continue 469 clearable 143 jams 405 printing event log 500 settings 491 error status motor failures 149 ESD (electrostatic discharge) 218 ETB cleaning 136, 182 different circumstances 97 motor 147, 190 part numbers 565, 567 removing during service 222 replacement intervals 97, 103 replacing 111 ETB assembly cleaning operations 175 diagnostics 533 operations 178 part numbers 570 ETB lever assembly part numbers 576 European Union, waste disposal 38 event log viewing 506 exhaust fan 147 external components removing 230 F face down tray assembly removing 239 factory default settings, restoring 499 failure detection 149 fans locating 548 operations 147 removing 297 FAQ (frequently asked questions) Web site 563 feed roller part numbers 565 feed speed control 201 feeding operations 135, 189 file directory, printing 515 644 Index Finnish laser statement 46 firmware upgrade 143 flash optional 142 part numbers 564 flash memory card installing 97, 114, 121 font lists, printing 515 fonts printer 97 formatter LED 520 lights 395 operations 135, 137 part numbers 565, 609 PCB, locating 549 removing 227 system 135, 141 test page 537 front cover removing 235 Full Calibrate Now 539 fuser assembly, part numbers 570 control switch 151 heater safety circuit 151 motor 147, 190 operations 202 part numbers 567 power supply operations 151 power supply, part numbers 585, 609, 631, 638 replacing 99, 111 temperatures 151 fuser drive assembly removing 286 fuser heaters 151, 155 fuser kit part numbers 565 fuser pressure release motor 147, 190, 203 fusing media sensor 202 fusing operations 174 fusing pressure roller 202 fusing sleeve 202 fusing, troubleshooting 451 G gear part numbers 576 generation of bias 159 gray settings Neutral Grays 440 Print in Grayscale 439 guidelines supply replacement 107 H halftone control 187 settings 440 hard disk initialization 539 hard drive features 142 file directory, printing 515 installing 114 part numbers 564 removing 228 heartbeat LED 396 heater temperature control 155 Heavy paper Tray 1 33 Help, printer-driver 82 high-voltage contacts removing 326 high-voltage power supply PCB, locating 549 PCB, part numbers 609 PCB, removing 324 host USB 70 HP Color LaserJet 4700 service manual 55 support CD-ROM 55 unpacking 59 HP customer care Americas 51 Europe 51 HP ImageREt 438 HP Jetdirect administrator's guide 55 UNIX 79 HP Jetdirect print server configuration page 509 configuring 506 install 97, 126 lights 395 part numbers 563 removing 228 settings 495 ENWW HP OpenVMS drivers 81 HP Technical Training 563 HP Web Jetadmin print cartridge supply level, checking 101 humidity environment sensor operations 147, 186 environmental specifications HVATTS 159 16 I I/O configuration network configuration 57, 89 I/O operations 142 I/O ports remote configuration 144 I/O storage NVRAM 143 I/O submenu 494 IBM OS/2 drivers 81 identification 15 IEEE 802.11b standard 73 IEEE-1284 142 image formation operations 135, 167, 171 system 136 troubleshooting 434 image quality, troubleshooting after jams 436 blank images 446 blank spots 451 blurring 452 color 436, 441, 445, 446, 447, 450 dark print 445 defects 443 diagnostics pages 436 dirty pages 448 dots 447 fusing, poor 451 light print 444 lines 448 media 434 misplaced images 454 repetitive defects 455 smearing 453 image resolution operations 142 image stabilization control 185 ENWW ImageREt (image resolution enhancement technology) default setting 142 imaging drum. See drum information menu 474 information pages configuration page 57, 68 initializing hard disk 539 NVRAM 538 input trays configuring 462 input/output operations 142 installation caution 16 connecting power cord 57, 66 print cartridge 57 printing system software 76 site requirements 16 unpacking printer 57, 59 installing control panel label 57 DDR memory 97, 114 DIMMs 97, 114, 117 flash memory card 97, 114, 121 fonts 97, 114 hard drive 97, 114 memory 97, 114 print cartridge 57 printing system software 75 installing software Windows 98 77 Windows Me 77 interface operations 142 internal clock 507 internal components diagnostics 532 part numbers 576 INTR period 136 IP address displaying 461 IPX/SPX settings 495 J jam recovery setting 471 jams 500-sheet paper feeder 412 causes of 407 cleaning spilled toner 98 clearing 415 common causes 414 detection operations 204 duplex path 413 error messages 405 finishing paper path test 528 frequent, troubleshooting 408 locations 402 paper path 412 paper path test 527 print quality, troubleshooting 436 recovery settings 406, 492 repeated, troubleshooting 408 stapler/stacker 423 stapler/stacker duplex path 423 staples 429 top cover 412 top cover area 418 Tray 1 410 Tray 2 411 Japanese VCCI statement 44 Jetdirect print server configuration page 509 configuring 506 lights 395 part numbers 563 settings 495 job held timeout 460 job storage limit 460 settings 488 K Korean EMI statement 44 L label control panel 57, 564 labels specifications 24 languages changing 472 control panel 564 control panel labels 564 embedded Web server 506 PJL 144, 457 printer 491 selecting 472 Index 645 laser beam exposure operations 172 laser safety statements 44 laser/scanner assembly laser control 164 operations 135, 163 part numbers 576 removing 287 scanner control 165 laser/scanner system 136 LED, formatter 520 left cover removing 247 lever part numbers 576 lifter drive assembly part numbers 570, 610 removing 275 lifter motor 147, 194 light print, troubleshooting 444 lights formatter 395 lines, troubleshooting 448 link speed, network 495 Linux drivers 81 loading stapler cartridge 107 loading media into optional trays 57, 64 Tray 2 57, 64 locating supplies 107 locking control panel menus 57, 94 log, event 500, 522 loop control 202 low-voltage power supply PCB, locating 549 PCB, part numbers 609 PCB, removing 319 LSTR period 136 luminance distribution 200 M Macintosh drivers, accessing 84 software, uninstall 88 software, USB 87 646 Index main assemblies locating 543 removing 253 main drive assembly part numbers 576 removing 256 maintenance preventive 97 maintenance kit using 99 major components 570 managing print cartridge 100 Manual color settings 440 manuals service 565 technical reference 565 margins, envelopes 23 matching colors 436, 437 material restrictions 38 Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 39 media default size 542 detection 200, 201 loading optional trays 57, 64 loading Tray 2 57, 64 maximum size 8 misprint 201 part numbers 563, 564 pickup/feed operations 135, 189 print speed 201 sensing 484 sensor 204 settings 478 size-detection operations 194 skewed, troubleshooting 433 specifications 21 speed control 201 storing 21 tray settings 476 troubleshooting print quality 434 type 8 types supported 25 warp 202 weight 8 weight equivalence table 34 wrinkled, troubleshooting 432 media jams. See jams memory enabling 97, 114, 125 NVRAM initialization 538 operations 143 part numbers 609, 610 PCBs, locating 549 printer 97 tag, print cartridges 177 memory contact cable part numbers 576 memory controller PCB removing 321 memory tag detection 177 menus, control panel Configure device 478 diagnostics 500, 503 embedded Jetdirect 495 general 57 I/O 494 information 474 locking 57, 94 map, printing 474 Paper handling 476 PCL 482 Print quality 483 Printing 478 Resets 499 Service 541 stapler/stacker 493 System setup 488 unlocking menus 538 mercury-free product 38 messages clearable 143 control panel 359, 500 critical 359 error 359 jams 405 printing event log 500 settings 491 warning 359 microprocessor 205 misplaced images, troubleshooting 454 model number locating 15 mopies 142 ENWW motor failures rotation 149 start-up 149 motors diagnostics 533 locating 548 operations 147 pickup/feed system 190, 192 removing 297 multiple original prints (mopies) 142 multiple-feed prevention 197 troubleshooting 432 multipurpose paper sensor 189 multipurpose pickup solenoid 190 multipurpose tray part numbers 572 N network configuration 57, 89 networking 72 networks administrative tools 80 cards, part numbers 563 communications, troubleshooting 457 configuring 89 configuring with embedded Web server 507 default gateway 91 disabling AppleTalk 93 disabling DLC/LLC 92 disabling IPX/SPX 92 disabling protocols 91 HP embedded Jetdirect configuration page 509 IP address 89 security 57, 94 settings 495 software 78 subnet mask 90 TCP/IP parameters 89 Neutral Grays settings 440 non-HP print cartridge 100 nonvolatile memory initialization 538 operations 143 number of copies 478 ENWW NVRAM initialization 538 operations 143 O oblique roller 206 offset mode 214 online Web registration 80 operating environment specifications 16 operations basic system 135, 136 calibration 181 color misregistration detection 184 CPU 142 DC controller PCB 145 density control 185 duplexer 206 engine control system 135, 145 environment sensor 186 ETB (electrostatic transfer/ transport belt) 178 fans 147 formatter 135, 137 fuser power supply 151 fuser/delivery unit 202 heater temperature control 155 image formation system 135, 167, 171 image stabilization control 185 input/output 142 jam detection 204 laser/scanner system 135, 163 memory 143 motors 147 parallel interface 142 pickup/feed system 135, 189 PJL 144 print cartridges 175 Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 142 sequence of 136 sleep mode 141 optional trays loading media 64 order at setting 470 supplies low 470 ordering documentation 55 parts and supplies 562 software 55 OS/2 drivers 81 output bin delivery unit operations 202 output quality, troubleshooting after jams 436 blank images 446 blank spots 451 blurring 452 color 436, 441, 445, 446, 447, 450 dark print 445 defects 443 diagnostic pages 436 dirty pages 448 dots 447 fusing, poor 451 light print 444 lines 448 media 434 misplaced images 454 repetitive defects 455 smearing 453 output tray part numbers 610 P page counts 513, 538, 541 PANTONE color matching 437 paper default size 542 feeding 147 part numbers 564 pickup/feed operations 135, 189 settings 478 size-detection operations 194 skewed, troubleshooting 433 specifications 21 speed control 201 storing 21 tray settings 476 troubleshooting, print quality 434 types supported 25 weight equivalence table 34 wrinkled, troubleshooting 432 Index 647 paper feed assembly part numbers 576, 610 removing 283 paper feed roller assembly part numbers 610 paper feeder driver PCB 211 paper feeder pickup solenoid 211 paper handling configuration 510 features 8 information page 510 Paper handling menu 476 paper jams. See jams paper path jams, causes of 412 testing 500 troubleshooting checklist 410 paper pickup drive assembly part numbers 570, 610 paper pickup roller assembly part numbers 610 paper pickup rollers, removing 500-sheet paper feeder 339 paper reversing sensor 205 paper sensor 192 paper stack surface sensor 189 paper transport troubleshooting 432 paper tray part numbers 570, 610 pickup 195 paper tray paper sensor 189 paper tray pickup solenoid 190 paper type heavy and extra heavy 33 intermediate 33 tough 33 paper warp 202 parallel configuration 70 parallel connection DOS commands 457 operations 142 parallel connection cables part numbers 563 parallel interface default setting 142 part numbers 500-sheet paper feeder 610 accessories 563 accessory 51 648 Index CD-ROM 55 control panel label 564 covers 572 documentation 55 documentation manuals 565 duplexer 610 internal components 576 manual 55 media 564 PCBs 609 power supplies 585, 631, 638 printer 55 reference material 565 retaining rings 566 screws 566 service manuals 565 stapler/stacker 610 supplies 565 technical reference manuals 565 user guide 55 user-replaceable parts 567 parts replacing 217 service approach 50 parts-removal, tree 220 passwords network 506 PCBs part numbers 609, 610 removing 312 PCL drivers selecting 82 PCL font lists, printing 515 PCL submenu 482 perform printer maintenance message 99 personality PJL 144, 457 settings 468, 491 phone support 563 photo interrupter 189 photographic drum. See drum physical specifications 16 pickup arm method 194 pickup cam 194 pickup delay jam jam detection 205 pickup motor 147, 190 pickup motor assembly part numbers 570 removing 273 pickup roller part numbers 565 pickup rollers, removing 500-sheet paper feeder 339 pickup solenoid 194 pickup stationary jam jam detection 205 pickup/feed operations 135, 189, 212 pickup/feed system 136 PJL 144, 457 plate part numbers 576 PML 144 ports commands 457 power conservation 141 requirements 18 troubleshooting 355, 357 power cord connecting 57, 66 power on mode 137 operations 136 sequence 137 power supplies fuser 151 part numbers 609 PCB, locating 549 power supply detection 151 error 151 low voltage 151 power supply circuit low voltage 153 power supply fan removing 299 power supply unit 145 power switch assembly removing 309 power-rating label 15 PQ troubleshooting pages 524 pre-exposure operations 171 pre-troubleshooting checklist 354 preconfiguration 74 pressure release sensor 192 ENWW preventative maintenance kit using 99 preventive maintenance 97 primary charging operations 172 print cartridge changing 97, 103, 104 diagnostics 526, 533 HP 100 installing 57 life expectancy 100 managing 97, 100 non-HP 100 ordering 51, 562 part numbers 565, 567 removing during service 222 replacing 97, 103, 104 status page, printing 512 storing 20, 100 supply level, checking 101 print cartridges recycling 36 warranty 42 print command 136 print environment configuration NVRAM 143 Print in Grayscale 439 print media colored paper 32 envelopes 32 glossy paper 31 heavy paper 33 labels 32 letterhead 33 media to avoid 29 preprinted forms 33 recycled paper 34 Tough paper 33 transparencies 31 print operation 136 PRINT period 136 Print quality submenu 483 print quality, troubleshooting after jams 436 blank images 446 blank spots 451 blurring 452 color 436, 441, 445, 446, 447, 450 dark print 445 defects 443 ENWW diagnostic pages 436 dirty pages 448 dots 447 fusing, poor 451 light print 444 lines 448 media 434 misplaced images 454 repetitive defects 455 smearing 453 print server card install 97, 126 print servers configuring 506 print speed complex graphics 143 printer accessories 9 assemblies 11 cleaning 97, 98 configurations 2 connectivity 10 drivers 57, 81, 84 drivers, Macintosh 57 features 6 fonts 8, 97 functions 135 interfaces 137 memory 97, 113 operation, testing 68 performance 6 personalities 7 supplies 10 printer components locating 11 printer configurations 460 printer drive part numbers 610 printer languages management 144 PJL 144, 457 printer maintenance kit using 99 printer operations DC controller 145 printer personalities 468 printer pickup source paper tray 189 printer repair field replaceable units 50 mechanical 50 printer circuit assembles 50 printer software CD-ROM 74 printer stand part numbers 610 printing configuration page 97 configuring page 97, 126 special media 31 wireless 73 Printing submenu 478 printing system software CD-ROM 75 direct connection 75 networks 76 processor 533 MHz RISC 142 protective functions 155 protocol settings 495 PS drivers selecting 82 PS font lists, printing 516 Q quality, troubleshooting after jams 436 blank images 446 blank spots 451 blurring 452 color 436, 441, 445, 446, 447, 450 dark print 445 defects 443 diagnostic pages 436 dirty pages 448 dots 447 fusing, poor 451 light print 444 lines 448 media 434 misplaced images 454 repetitive defects 455 smearing 453 Quick Calibrate Now 539 R RAM information storage 143 Index 649 RAM disk setting behavior 472 rear cover removing 249 recovery, jam 406 recycled paper 34 recycling HP printing supplies returns and environmental program 37 reference materials 565 registration shutter 190, 192, 199, 206 registration, color 184 regulatory label 15 regulatory statements Australian EMC 46 environmental product stewardship program 36 Finnish laser statement 46 removing parts strategy 218 removing software Windows operating system 78 repair approach 50 repetitive defects, troubleshooting 455 replace color supplies reporting 470 replacement intervals supplies 97, 102 replacement parts configuration 400 replacing black cartridge 102 cartridge 103 color cartridge 102 ETB 102 fuser 102, 111 maintenance kits 99 parts 217 print cartridge 97, 103 stapler cartridge 107 supplies 97, 107 reset, cold 538 Resets submenu 499 residual paper jam jam detection 205 Resolution Enhancement technology (REt) 142 650 Index restoring default settings 499 retaining rings 566 reversing motor 206 reversing sensor 206 reversing unit jam jam detection 205, 206 RGB color settings 441 RGB sample page, printing 517 right cover removing 245 roller kit part numbers 567 roller lift strap part numbers 610 rollers 500-sheet paper feeder, removing 339 image formation operations 171 locating 543 pickup/feed system operations 135, 189 repetitive defects, troubleshooting 455 ROM information storage 143 S safety statements 44 scanner tests 500 screwdrivers, required 218 screws part numbers 576 types of 219 secondary transfer bias 201 security page 506 security panel network 57 security, network 94 sensor test 500 sensors environment 147 environment, operations 186 finishing paper path test 528 image stabilization control 185 jam detection 204 locating 546 manual test 528 paper path test 527 part numbers 576 pickup/feed system 190, 192 removing 308 separation pad 500-sheet paper feeder 211 removing 222 separation roller part numbers 565 sequence of operations 136 serial number locating 15 servers configuring 506 service approach 50 Service ID 541 service manuals part numbers 610 Service menu 541 Servicemenu 503 setting clock 130 date 130 date and time 130 date format 130 network security 57 real time clock 97 sleep delay 69, 130, 133 time 130 time format 130 wake time 130, 132 settings embedded Web server 506 locking menus 57, 94 restoring defaults 499 setup printer sharing 77 show address 461 site requirements 15, 16 size detection, media 194 size, media default settings 479 tray settings 476 skew correction mechanism 199 specifications 20 troubleshooting 433 skew feed 206 sleep delay changing settings 57, 69, 465 disabling 69, 466 ENWW enabling 69, 466 time 57, 69, 465 sleep mode operations 141 sleep settings delay 133 wake time 132 smearing, troubleshooting 453 software applications 80 downloading 51 HP Web Jetadmin 72 installer 80 installing 75 Macintosh 57, 86 Macintosh, uninstall 88 networks 76, 78 solutions 73 uninstaller 78 uninstalling 78 USB 87 utilities 79 Windows 77 solenoids diagnostics 534 locating 547 space requirements 16, 17 special media printing 31 specifications acoustic 19 dimensions 18 electrical 18 envelopes 22 humidity 19 labels 24 paper 21 site requirements 16 skew 20 supply storage 20 temperature 19 transparencies 24 speed feed control 201 spring part numbers 576 sRGB color 438 stacker mode 214 standard IEEE 802.11b 73 ENWW standby mode 137 standby temperature 155 staple cartridge left cover, removing 341 part numbers 565, 610 removing 346 staple mode 214 stapler jams 429 stapler cartridge loading 107 replacing 107, 108 stapler cartridge cover part numbers 610 stapler unit assembly part numbers 610 stapler/stacker indicator lights 397 jams 423 left cover, removing 342 media types supported 25 output tray, removing 341 part numbers 610 PCB, removing 347 removing 340 right cover, removing 344 top cover, removing 342 unit assembly, removing 348 stapler/stacker submenu 493 start up failure 155 static precautions 218 status e-mail alerts 506 status page, printing 512 STBY period 136 stepping motor 147 storage, job settings 488 storing envelopes 23 paper 21 print cartridge 100 supplies 20 sub thermistor 155, 187 subnet mask 90 supplies accommodating 107 guidelines 107 locating 107 non-HP 100 ordering 51, 562 part numbers 565 print cartridge, checking level 101 recycling 36 replacement guidelines 107 replacement intervals 97, 102 replacing 97, 107 status 506 status page 506 status page, printing 512 storing 20 supplies low ordering reminder 470 support Macintosh computers 54 Novell server 76 swatch book color matching 437 switches removing 308 switching context sensitive 144 dynamic I/O 144 System setup submenu 488 T Taiwan EMI statement 45 TCP/IP configuring 89 manual configuration 89 settings 495 technical reference manuals 565 technical support 563 telephone support 563 temperature control operations 155 environment sensor operations 147, 186 environmental specifications 16 fuser operations 151 heater control 155 protection functions 155 temperature failures detection 155 temperature fluctuations response 155 thermistors 155 testing printer operation graphic description 68 Index 651 tests calibration bypass 539 cartridge 526 colorband 535 component 532 engine 521, 537 finishing paper path 528 formatter 537 LED 520 manual sensor test 528 paper path 527 print quality 436 Print/Stop 535 printer 68 thermistor 151, 155 thermoswitch 151 third party accessory port 142 time, setting 130 timing chart 557 toner cleaning spilled 98 loose, troubleshooting 451 part numbers 609 toner cartridge. See print cartridges toner level detection PCB locating 549 removing 326 tools, required 218 top cover jams, causes of 412 part numbers 610 removing 240 top-of-page sensor 206 training 563 transfer block operations 173 transparencies part numbers 564 specifications 24 troubleshooting 435 trapping 440 Tray 1 envelopes 32 jams, causes of 410 loading paper 34 media types supported 25 removing 231 selection settings 490 sensors 546 settings 476 solenoids, locating 534, 547 652 Index Tray 1 pickup roller removing 222 Tray 2 duplex printing 34 jams, causes of 411 loading media 64 loading paper 34 paper size-detection operations 194 removing 231 sensor test 530, 531 sensors 546 solenoids, locating 534, 547 switches 545 Tray 2-x feed rollers removing 226 Tray 2-x pickup rollers removing 226 Tray 2-x separation roller removing 225 Tray 3. See 500-sheet paper feeder Tray 4. See 500-sheet paper feeder Tray 5. See 500-sheet paper feeder Tray 6. See 500-sheet paper feeder tray behavior 462 trays media types supported 25 selection settings 490 settings 476, 477 troubleshooting about 352 blank images 446 blank spots 451 blurring 452 checklist 354, 355 color 436, 441, 445, 446, 447, 450 communications 457 control panel 474 customer support 563 dark print 445 diagnostics 520 dirty pages 448 dots 447 flowchart 356 fusing 451 image formation 434 jams 402 jams, frequent 408 light print 444, 454 lines 448 media 434 multi-feeds 432 paper path 409 paper transport 432 power 357 print quality 434, 436 process 354 repetitive defects 455 service approach 50 skewed pages 433 smearing 453 tools 434 transparencies 435 wrinkled paper 432 U UEL (universal exit language) 458 UNIX 79 UNIX drivers 81 unlocking control panel menus 538 unpacking printer items in box 58 Update Now 74 upper exhaust fan removing 305 usage page, printing 513 USB 2.0 connector 142 configuration 70 USB cable A-to-B type 142 part numbers 563 user guide embedded Web server 79 user interface 6 user-replaceable parts 221, 567 V vacuuming toner 98 video interface control 162 voltage regulatory information 15 voltage biases 159 voltage fluctuations response 155 ENWW W WAIT period 136, 151, 205 wake time changing 466 setting 466 warmup cycle 141 warning messages clearable 143 warranty print cartridge 42 printer 40 washing toner off clothing 98 Web site anticounterfeit 100 customer support 563 drivers, downloading 51 failed installation 76 frequently asked questions (FAQ) 563 manual 55 ordering supplies 51, 562 paper specifications 21 printer installer for UNIX 79 supplies 563 technical support 563 Web sites Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) 39 weight equivalence table, paper 34 Windows drivers, accessing 82 enabling memory 97, 114 software, installing 77 wireless printing 802.11b standard 73 Bluetooth 73 wrinkled pages, troubleshooting 432 ENWW Index 653 © 2006 Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. www.hp.com *CB503-90929* *CB503-90929* CB503-90929 www.s-manuals.com
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : No Page Mode : UseOutlines XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.0-c316 44.253921, Sun Oct 01 2006 17:14:39 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 6.0.1 (Windows) Creator Tool : XSL Formatter V2.5 MR6-2 Modify Date : 2013:04:14 11:51:43+03:00 Create Date : 2006:10:06 18:27:42-06:00 Metadata Date : 2013:04:14 11:51:43+03:00 Document ID : uuid:b032b6b6-2208-4eb8-8089-cabdf624773b Instance ID : uuid:021b58d0-6f0c-4d15-ab6c-ab1e4883fe92 Format : application/pdf Creator : Title : HP Color LaserJet 4700, CP4005 Series - Service Manual. www.s-manuals.com. Subject : HP Color LaserJet 4700, CP4005 Series - Service Manual. www.s-manuals.com. Has XFA : No Page Count : 674 Page Layout : SinglePage Keywords : HP Color LaserJet 4700, CP4005 Series - Service Manual. www.s-manuals.com.EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools